GERMAN 


■8«iit 


BERNHARDT 


fi£M ;  I 

Jj  J.  HENRY  SENGER.  [{ 


Professor  J.   Henry  Senger 


A   COURSE 


IN 


German  Composition,  Conyeesation 

AND 

Gkammae  Review 

FOR   U«E   IN   SCHOOLS   AND   COLLEGES 


WILHELM   BERNHARDT,  Ph.D. 

if 

R  OF  German  in  th 
Washikgton  City 


Boston,  U.S.A. 
PUBLISHED   BY   GINN   &   COMPANY 

1898 


COPYKIGHT,  1898,  BY 
WILHELM  BERNHARDT 


AUi  BIGHTS  BESERYED 


IN  MEMORIAM 


TO 

2)r.  Xambcrt  Sauveur 

THE  DISTINGUISHED  PEDAGOGUE  AND  PRESIDENT  OF  THE  SCHOOL  OF 

LANGUAGES,  WITH  WHOM,  FOK  SIXTEEN  SUMMEKS,  THE  AUTHOR 

HAS  BEEN  ASSOCIATED  IN  THE  TEACHING  OF  LANGUAGES 

AT  BURLINGTON,  VT.,  OSWEGO,  N.Y.,  ROCKFORD,  ILL., 

AND  AMHERST,  MASS., 

THIS  BOOK  IS   INSCRIBED 

AS  AN  EXPRESSION  OF  THE  AUTHOR'S  HIGH  ESTEEM. 


922691 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Arciiive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/courseingermancoOObernrich 


INTRODUCTION. 


Ever  since,  in  1882,  German  was  added  as  a  course  of 
study  to  the  high  school  curriculum  of  this  city,  the  so- 
called  Natural  Method  has  been  and  is  still  used,  with 
(since  1885)  Bernhardt-Boisen's  „2)eutfc^e§  ©prad)=  unb 
Sefebud^"  as  text-book.  In  that  book  only  the  essential 
and  most  puzzling  features  of  German  grammar  are  intro- 
duced, and  that,  too,  without  being  arranged  according  to 
the  traditional  principles  of  scientific  grammar,  but  with 
sole  reference  to  the  immediate  needs  of  the  average 
beginner.  They  consist  in  inferences  or  conclusions 
arrived  at  by  observing  and  comparing  the  expressions  in 
the  object  lessons  which  form  the  nucleus  of  the  whole 
system  and  the  center  of  all  instruction. 

In  the  Washington  high  schools  this  plan  has  proved  a 
decided  success,  and,  judging  from  the  fact  that  the  <Bij)xa^' 
unb  Sefebud^  within  these  twelve  years  has  reached  its 
thirty-fifth  edition,  it  would  seem  that  elsewhere,  too,  this 
honest  attempt  to  found  linguistic  study  upon  the  laws  of 
mind  has  met  with  the  approval  of  both  teachers  and 
students  of  German. 

Already,  at  an  early  date,  these  gratifying  results  led  the 
author  of  the  present  volume  to  conceive  the  idea  of  found- 
ing a  preparatory  course  in  German  composition  upon  a 
similar  rational   method.     An   opportunity,  however,  for 


yi  INTRODUCTION. 

experimenting  in  this  line  was  not  offered  before  1888, 
when  special  academic  classes  were  organized,  which,  in  the 
last  two  years  of  their  quadrennial  course,  had  to  study- 
German  with  the  view  of  being  fitted  for  colleges  or  scien- 
tific schools. 

The  author,  when  assuming  charge  of  two  of  these  classes 
in  the  central  school,  examined  half  a  dozen  or  more  courses 
in  German  composition  ;  but,  not  being  able  to  find  in  the 
market  a  book  corresponding  to  his  ideas  of  a  guidebook 
for  his  classes,  he  was  compelled  to  arrange  for  himself 
such  a  manual  as  he  deemed  best  fitted  for  his  particular 
wants.  Thus,  after  the  ©pracl^=  unb  £efebu(^  had  been  used 
exclusively  for  about  six  months,  one  of  the  five  weekly 
recitations  allotted  to  German  was  set  aside  for  composition 
work.  Once  a  week  a  short  narrative,  conspicuous  for 
interesting  contents  as  well  as  for  beauty  and  clearness  of 
language,  was  dictated  to  the  pupils,  who  were  given  a 
whole  week  to  make  themselves  thoroughly  familiar  with 
its  contents,  vocabulary,  and  phraseology.  The  next  recita- 
tion would  then  be  devoted  partly  to  the  deduction  of 
grammatical  principles  from  the  narrative,  and  partly  to 
the  application  of  these  observations  to  composition  and 
conversation  ;  in  other  words,  to  a  written  and  oral  test  of 
the  thoroughness  with  which  the  students  had  made  the 
matter  their  own.  Each  lesson  was  terminated  by  a  drill 
on  the  words  contained  in  the  narrative,  and  an  entry, 
into  the  notebook  of  each  student,  of  the  proper  rules  given 
by  the  teacher  in  the  phraseology  of  Joynes-Meissner's 
grammar. 

In  spite  of  all  the  drudgery  to  which,  for  want  of  a  text- 
book, teacher  and  pupils  were  subjected,  the  plan  as  a 
whole  worked  so  well  and  the  results  were  so  encouraging 


INTRODUCTION.  yii 

,  that  year  after  year  it  was  taken  up  anew  with  only  slight 
innovations  and  improvements.  At  last,  in  1896,  before 
retiring  from  active  teaching,  after  a  twenty-six  years' 
experience  in  German  and  American  schools,  the  author, 
being  convinced  that  his  course  in  German  had  been  suffi- 
ciently tested  in  the  class-room  as  to  its  practicability  and 
usefulness,  made  up  his  mind  to  give  it  book  form  in  order 
to  make  it  accessible  to  teachers  who,  laboring  under  such 
difficulties  as  he  himself  had  once  encountered,  might  per- 
haps welcome  a  work  of  such  scope  and  purpose.  This 
is,  in  its  main  features,  the  history  of  the  present  volume, 
which  is  herewith  offered  to  teachers  and  students  of 
German  and  to  the  public  at  large. 

Of  the  reading  matter  at  the  disposal  of  the  author, 
thirty-two  pieces  have  been  selected  for  this  volume  as  the 
groundwork  for  just  as  many  lessons,  which  the  author 
thinks  can  be  thoroughly  studied  in  one  school  year  of 
thirty-six  weeks,  allowing  one  recitation  at  the  end  of  each 
quarter  for  reviewing,  sight  reading,  or  extempore  writing. 

The  German  selections  include  narrative,  epistolary, 
descriptive,  and  easy  essay  styles,  and,  being  carefully 
graded,  they  rise  from  the  light  and  pleasing  mystery  of 
the  nursery  tale  to  the  sober  disquisition  of  the  scientific 
theorem.  For  this  reason,  and  since  no  two  of  these  selec- 
tions have  come  from  the  pen  of  the  same  writer,  they 
naturally  differ  greatly  in  regard  to  diction  and  phrase- 
ology, a  feature  not  to  be  underrated  in  a  book  purporting 
to  serve  as  an  introduction  to  composition  work. 

As  to  the  arrangement  of  the  grammatical  material,  a 
method  has  been  devised  consistent  with  the  author's  experi- 
ence and  the  latest  state  of  educational  science.  We  know 
now  that  grammar  in  the  abstract  does  not  appeal  to  the 


viii  INTRODUCTION. 

mind  of  the  pupil;  it  is  uninteresting,  unintelligible,  and  is 
not  long  remembered  ;  it  makes  the  study  of  language  dry 
even  to  pupils  with  strong  linguistic  tendencies.  It  must  be 
put  into  concrete  form  if  we  are  to  give  it  any  vitality. 
This  can  be  done  only  in  connection  with  reading.  If,  for 
example,  in  the  Thirteenth  Lessox  of  this  book,  the 
student  comes  across  the  sentence,  „(Sine§  ^iage^  na^men 
roir  unfer  5Rittag§ma^I  im  ©arten  ..."  and,  failing  to  find  a 
satisfactory  meaning  for  the  first  two  words,  has  to  be  told 
that  ^'  indefinite  time  when  is  expressed  in  German  by  the 
genitive  case,"  then  he  will  feel  the  need  of  grammatical 
rules  and  will  eagerly  welcome  any  assistance  that  grammar 
can  give. 

Upon  these  facts  the  grammar  drill  or  grammar  review 
is  based.  Six  or  more  concrete  instances  have  been  taken 
from  each  narrative,  illustrative  of  just  as  many  idioms, 
and  presenting  in  all  some  two  hundred  of  the  most  strik- 
ing features  of  German  grammar.  Substantially,  they 
cover  the  range  of  about  one  hundred  examination  papers 
issued  by  leading  colleges  and  scientific  schools,  all  of 
recent  date.  For  this  reason  these  queries  and  answers  — 
the  latter  to  be  found  under  Grammatical  Notes  in  the 
Appendix  —  are  considered  sufficient  to  serve  as  a  brief 
grammar  in  schools  where  the  systematic  study  of  a  com- 
plete grammar  is  not  on  the  program ;  on  the  other  hand, 
where  the  cart  is  put  before  the  horse,  —  that  is,  where  the 
study  of  language  is  introduced  by  grammar  work  instead 
of  by  practice,  —  these  questions  and  answers  may  be  wel- 
comed as  an  excellent  opportunity  for  reviewing  the 
essential  features  of  German  grammar  with  the  least 
amount  of  dryness  and  drudgery.  The  rules  are,  as  already 
stated,   taken   verbatim  from  Joynes-Meissner^s    German 


INTRODUCTION.  ix 

Grammar  for  Schools  and  Colleges,  a  book  of  the  merits  of 
which,  the  author  could  only  speak  hyperbolically,  if  he 
were  called  upon  to  express  an  opinion. 

In  arranging  the  material  for  composition  work,  which 
forms  the  third  stage  of  each  lesson,  instead  of  dragging 
the  learner  through  endless  labyrinthic  turnings  and  wind- 
ings of  disconnected  sentences,  often  void  of  thought  and 
interest,  the  author  has  taken  the  ground  that  here,  too, 
reading  must  be  the  center  of  instruction  and  the  only  source 
of  the  matter  to  which  the  various  grammatical  principles 
must  be  applied.  He  further  holds  that  as,  above  all,  the 
minds  of  the  young  delight  in  discoveries  of  their  own,  the 
student  should,  even  at  an  early  stage  of  his  work  in  compo- 
sition, be  encouraged  to  express  his  thoughts  independently 
in  any  one  or  more  of  the  various  forms  offered  by  the  lan- 
guage he  is  trying  to  learn,  rather  than  be  compelled  to 
move  on,  grumbling  and  indifferent,  in  a  fixed  manner,  any 
longer  than  is  absolutely  necessary.  In  consistency  with 
this  view,  after  the  Twenty-first  Lesson  the  exercises 
for  translating  into  German  cease,  and  henceforth  the 
student  is  given  an  opportunity  for  testing  his  skill  in 
original  composition  work,  aided  solely  by  suggestions  of  a 
broad  and  general  character. 

Conversation,  taken  as  oral  composition,  is  of  vital  im- 
portance in  a  course  of  study  like  this  ;  for  if,  according 
to  Lord  Bacon's  dictum,  "  conference  maketh  a  ready  man 
and  writing  an  exact  man,"  why  should  not,  then,  an  earnest 
effort  in  both  disciplines,  composition  and  conversation 
combined,  be  crowned  with  still  more  satisfactory  results  ? 
But  it  must  not  be  overlooked  that,  just  as  reading  at  sight 
would  never  precede  reading  by  the  aid  of  a  dictionary,  so, 
logically,  conversation,  being  nothing  less  than  extempore 


X  INTRODUCTION. 

composition,  should  invariably  come  after  composition, 
never  vice  versa;  it  should  not  be  practiced  before  the  field 
of  discourse  is  thoroughly  explored  and  made  clear  by  pre- 
vious exercises.  Besides,  since  conversing  in  a  foreign 
tongue  makes  a  twofold  demand  upon  the  beginner's  mental 
activity,  control  of  the  topic  of  conversation  and  readiness 
to  overcome,  on  shortest  notice,  the  linguistic  difficulties,  it 
is  but  fair  that  the  former  of  these  two  difficulties  should 
be  reduced  to  a  minimum  by  keeping  the  subject-matter 
strictly  within  the  learner's  sphere  of  personal  interest  and 
immediate  observation. —  It  seems  hardly  necessary  to  add 
that  in  the  conversational  exercises  a  faulty  answer  must 
never  be  permitted  to  pass  without  correction,  nor  must 
the  student  be  allowed  to  answer  a  question  by  simply 
repeating  the  identical  vocabulary  in  the  form  of  an 
affirmative  sentence  ;  for  in  this  way  the  value  and  dig- 
nity of  these  exercises  would  degenerate  to  mere  parrot 
babbling,  not  worth  while  the  time  they  occupy.  The  least 
effort  on  the  part  of  the  student  that  can  reasonably  be 
expected,  is  to  substitute  in  his  answer  the  proper  forms  of 
the  personal  pronoun  for  the  nouns  contained  in  the  ques- 
tion, so  far  as  this  can  be  done  without  impairing  the  sense. 
Most  emphatically  the  author  wishes  to  call  attention 
to  the  great  importance  of  a  thorough  ivord  drill,  to  the 
lack  of  which  he  attributes  one  of  the  chief  obstacles 
that  teachers  of  Grerman  in  our  higher  secondary  schools 
have  to  battle  with;  viz.,  the  lack  of  a  ready  vocabulary  on 
the  part  of  the  students.  In  American  schools  there  seems 
to  be  an  inherent  aversion  to  the  drudgery  of  a  written 
preparation  of  the  lessons,  which  is  elsewhere  so  scrupu- 
lously adhered  to  that,  for  example,  in  the  high  schools  of 
Germany,  it  is  considered  one  of  the  principal  requirements 


INTRODUCTION.  xi 

for  language  study.  What  should,  then,  be  adopted  as  the 
fittest  substitute  ?  After  various  kinds  of  experiments  in 
this  line,  the  author  has  found  the  best  working  scheme  to 
be  a  word  drill  such  as  is  outlined  at  the  end  of  each 
lesson.  The  more  common  vocables  of  the  German  reading 
matter,  arranged  according  to  word  classes,  are  given  in 
the  vernacular,  and  the  student  is  required  to  deduce  the 
German  equivalents  direct  from  the  Reader ;  since,  for  the 
very  best  of  pedagogical  reasons,  they  are  not  given  in 
the  English-German  vocabulary  at  the  end  of  the  book, 
though  they  are,  of  course,  all  represented  in  the  German- 
English  part. 

The  two  vocabularies  appended  to  the  book  are  com- 
plete and  cover  all  points,  so  that  they  will  give  not  only 
the  philological  but  also  the  encyclopaedic  information 
needed  by  the  pupil  for  any  one  of  the  various  exercises. 

These  directions  must  suffice.  The  author  would  not 
say  everything,  even  if  he  could ;  the  best,  the  most  valu- 
able, must  always  come  from  the  teacher's  own  soul.  In 
conclusion,  the  author  expresses  his  firm  belief  that, 
although-  he  makes  no  pretension  whatever  to  offering  in 
this  new  course  a  "  royal  road  to  learning  "  or  a  magic 
method  which  will  filter  into  the  heads  of  students  in  one 
short  school  year  a  language  so  rich  and  vast  as  the  Ger- 
man, on  the  other  hand,  its  earnest  followers  may  rest 
assured  that  on  completing  the  book  they  will  have  gained 
for  themselves  what  briefly  might  be  expressed  in  the 
German  compounds,  ©prad^oerftdnbniS  —  a  certain  degree  of 
6prac^fertigtett  and  ©prad^be^anblung  —  and  the  creation  of 
6prad)9efii^l. 


xu 


INTRODUCTION. 


The  author  desires  to  express  his  thanks  for  the  revision 
of  the  English  parts  of  the  book  to  Prof.  James  H.  Dillard, 
of  Tulane  University,  New  Orleans,  La.,  and  to  Prof. 
Edward  S.  Joynes,  of  South  Carolina  University,  for  his 
valuable  suggestions  during  the  progress  of  the  work. 

WILHELM  BERNHARDT. 

Washington  City,  Christmas,  1897. 


A  COURSE   I'N   GERMAK 


FIRST   LESSON. 


^ie  brei  8d)mettetUnge. 

1. 

(g§  toaren  einmal  brei  ©d^mettcrlinge,  etn  roeifeer,  ein  rotcr 
unb  ein  gelber.  ©ie  fpielten  im  roarmen  ©onnenfd^ein  unb 
flogen  t)on  einer  35Iume  ^ur  anbern.  ®ie§  gefiel  i^nen  fo  gut, 
ba§  fie  gar  nic^t  miibe  rourben.  ^a  aber  !am  auf  einmal  ber 
Sftegen  unb  mac^te  fie  nafe.  '^nn  flogen  fie  fc^neU  m6)  ^avi\t,  5 
aber  bie  §au§t^iir  roar  gugefc^loffen,  unb  fie  fonnten  ben  6c^liiffel 
nid^t  finben.  ©0  mufeten  fie  vox  bem  §aufe  bleiben  unb  rourben 
naffer  unb  naffer.  ®a  flogen  fie  in  i^rer  3lngft  gu  ber  gelb=  unb 
rotgeftreiften  Xuipe  unb  fagten  :  „Xiilpd^en,  mad^  ung  ein  roenig 
beine  Slume  auf,  bafe  voxx  ^ineinfd^liipfen  fbnnen  unb  nic^t  gang  10 
na^  roerben."  ^ie  Stuipe  aber  antroortete :  „®er  ©elbe  unb 
ber  9lote  mogen  ^ereinfommen,  aber  ben  SSei^en  mU  x6)  nic^t." 
^arauf  antroorteten  bie  beiben,  ber  ©elbe  unb  ber  9^ote :  „5^ein, 
roenn  bu  unfern  33ruber,  ben  SSei^en,  nid^t  l^aben  roiUft,  fo  raoHen 
roir  aud^  nid^t  ju  bir  fommen."  15 


2'  '•*         '    '        '     A 'COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 


GRAMMAR. 

1.  (a)-  Add  the  definite  article  to  the  following  nouns 

—  ©c^metterling  —  ©onne  —  ©c^Iujfel 

—  9legen  —  2lngft  —  Slume 

—  Xulpe  —  2;iilp(^en  —  »au^ 

—  ^au^t^iit  —  Sruber  —  33ruberc^en 

(h)    Add  to  the  above  nouns  the  proper  forms  of  the 
pronouns  rocld^er  ?  welc^e  ?  roeld^eS  ?  and  biefer,  biefe,  bicfcS. 

2.  State  the  general  rules  as  to  the  gender  of 

nouns  ending  in  — ling,  e.gr.,  ©d^metterltng  ;  (^rUJ^ling  ;  ©perling.^ 

nouns  ending  in  — e,  e.gr.,  Slumc  ;  ^ulpe  ;  9Jafe.2 

nouns  ending  in  — c^en,  e.gr.,  ^iilpc^en ;  Sliimc^en ;  ^id^c^en.^ 

3.  Supply  the  endings  of  the  following  root-forms* 

bief—  roei^—  ©c^metterltng  ber  wei^ —  ©c^metterling,  roeld^ 

btef—  f(^on —  2;ulpe  bie  fc^roarj —  2BoIte,  roelc^— 

jen —  rot —  33Iiimc^en  bag  flein —  ^au^,  roelc^ — 

roelc^—  flein—  ^au^  ?  jen—  fc^on—  Slume 

bcrfelb—  gut —  Sruber  jeb—  gut—  33ruber 

4.  Give  genitive  sing,  and  nominative  plu.,  both  with 
the  article,  of 


©c^mettcrling 

—  ©c^riiflcl 

—  Slumc 

Xuipe 

—  Sruber 

—  £iaug 

^aust^iir 

—  Xiilpc^en 

—  ^du^c^cn 

5.  (a)  State  the  rules  regarding  the  comparison  of  ad- 
jectives.* 

{b)  Compare  warm  ;  fd^ncH  ;  nafe. 

6.  How  is  the  definite  numeral  einmal,  once,  one  time, 
distinguished  from  the  indefinite  einmal,  once  upon  a  timer?  ^ 


FIRST  LESSON. 


COMPOSITION. 


The  butterfly.  A  butterfly.  Which  butterfly?  This 
butterfly.  That  butterfly.  Each  (every)  butterfly.  —  The 
red  butterfly.  A  red  butterfly.  The  yellow  butterfly.  A 
yellow  butterfly.  —  This  butterfly  is  white,  but  that  butter- 
fly is  red.  —  How  many  butterflies  ?  Three  butterflies. 
Three  beautiful  butterflies.  The  three  beautiful  butter- 
flies. Which  three  butterflies  ?  These  three  beautiful 
butterflies.  Those  three  beautiful  butterflies.  The  three 
butterflies,  which  ...  I  play.  He  plays.  They  play.  — 
I  played.  He  played.  They  played.  The  three  butter- 
flies played.  They  played  in  the  warm  sunlight.  —  I  say. 
He  says.  They  say.  —  I  said.  He  said.  They  said.  The 
butterflies  said  to  the  tulip.  —  What  did  they  say  to  the 
tulip  ?  They  said  :  "  Open  thy  flower  to  us  !  "  —  I  answer. 
He  answers.  She  answers.  —  I  answered.  She  answered. 
The  tulip  answered.  What  did  she  answer  ?  She  answered : 
"  I  do  not  want  the  white  butterfly." 


CONVERSATION. 

9Bie  oiele  6(i^metterlinge  roaren  in  bem  ©arten  ?  2Baren  fie 
alle  bret  rot  ?  2Saren  fie  aCe  brei  rceife  ?  2Bte  roar  ber  erfte  ? 
ber  jroeite  ?  ber  britte  ?  —  ^\i  bie  Silie  roei^  ?  3fl  "^ei^  bie 
garbe  ber  Silie  ?  2Ba§  ift  bie  garbe  be§  Rapiers?  be§ 
©d)nee§  ?  —  2Bte  ift  bie  ^reibe  ?  3ft  bie  Xuipe  roei^  ?  —  3ft 
bie  ^ulpe  eine  33Iume  ?  SP  ^^^  Silie  an^  etne  Slume  ?  3Bie 
t)iele  33Iumen  finb  eine  Silie,  eine  %ulpt,  eine  3ftofe,  eine 
§t)a-^int^e  unb  eine  ^Rarjiffe  ?  —  2Ba§  fagten  bie  ©d^metterlinge 
5U  ber  3:ulpe  ?    2Ba§  antroortete  bie  Xuipe  ? 


A   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 


VOCABULARY. 

the  house 

o 

the  garden                    = 

the  flower 

= 

the  tulip                         = 

the  sun 

= 

white                      = 

red 

= 

yellow                    = 

tired 

= 

wet                         = 

quick(ly) 

= 

good                       = 

to  fly 

= 

to  come                      = 

to  rain 

= 

to  make                      = 

to  find 

= 

to  stay,  remain          = 

to  say 

= 

to  answer                    = 

to  come  in 

= 

once  upon  a  time  = 

all  at  once 

= 

before  the  house  = 

SECOND   LESSON. 


^ie  btei  8c^metterUttge» 


@S  rcgnctc  aber  me^r  unb  me^r,  unb  fo  flogen  fte  gu  ber 
Silie  unb  fagten :  „©ute  Silte,  mad^  unS  betnc  S3lume  cin 
roenig  auf,  ba§  xoxx  nid^t  gang  na^  roerben."  ^ie  Silte  ant= 
roortele :  „S)en  SSei^en  roiU  td^  in  mein  §au§  aufne^mcn, 
5  roeil  er  gerabe  fo  auSfie^t,  rote  id^,  aber  bie  beiben  anbem 
mag  id^  nid^t."  3)a  fagte  ber  Sffieifee :  „3^etn,  roenn  bu  meine 
Sriiber  nid^t  aufne^men  rotHft,  fo  mag  id^  aud^  nid^t  gu  bir. 
2Btr  rooHen  lieber  jufammen  na^  roerben,  al§  ba^  einer  ben 
anbem  in  ber  ^Qi  oerld^t."     Unb  fo  flogen  fie  roeiter. 


SECOND  LESSON.  5 

Slbcr  bie  ©onne  ^atle  Winter  ben  2BoI!en  ge^ort,  roaS  fur 
gute  ^ameraben  bie  brei  ©d^metterlinge  roaren  unb  raie  feft 
fie  gufammen^ielten.  2)arum  fam  fie  burd^  bie  2BoIfen, 
trieb  ben  S^legen  fort  unb  fd^ien  wieber  l^eE  unb  freunblid^ 
in  ben  ©arten  unb  auf  bie  ©djimetterlinge.  @§  bauerte  nid^t  5 
lange,  ba  l^atte  fie  i^nen  bie  gliigel  getrodtnet  unb  i^ren 
'>it\h  erroarmt.  Unb  nun  tanjlen  bie  brei  ©d^metterlinge 
roieber  fo  fro^lid^  n)ie  t)or  bem  9legen  unb  fpielten,  Vx^ 
e§  Slbenb  roar,  ^ann  flogen  fie  gufammen  nad^  §aufe  unb 
fd^Iiefen.  lo 

GRAMMAR. 
1.    (a)  Add  the  indefinite  article  to  the  following  nouns 


—  StHc 

—  SBlume 

—  §aug 

—  ^du^c^en 

—  Sruber 

-g^ot 

-  28ot!c 

—  Earner  ab 

—  DfJegen 

—  ©artcn 

—  ©artd^en 

-  ^lugel 

—  Seib 

—  2lbenb 

(h)  Add  to  the  same  nouns  the  proper  forms  of  the 
possessive  adjectives  ntein,  bein,  fein  (i^r) ;  unfer,  euer 
(3W,  i^r.^ 

2.  Give,  together  with  the  definite  article,  the  nomi- 
native sing,  of  the  following  plurals 

93ruber  SOBoIfen  ©d^metterlinge  SSIumen 

©arten  ^ameraben  '^i^^i  ^aufer 

Seiber  Slbenbe 

3.  State  gender,  number  and  case  of 

bet  Silic  (1.  1)  bie  2Bol!en  (p.  6  1.  3) 

ben  SOBei^en  (1.  4)  ben  ©arten  (p.  5  1.  5) 

ber  5«ot  (1.  9)  bie  ©c^metterlinge  (p.  5  1.  6) 
ben  aSolfen  (p.  6  1.  1) 


Q  A   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 

4.  Give  the  German  equivalent  of  ^ 

my  house  thy  flower  his  brothers,  her  brothers 

our  lilies  your  garden         their  wings 

5.  Decline  in  the  sing,  ajid  plu.  the  Grerman  equivalent 
of« 

the  good  brother  the  white  lily  the  small  house 

a  good  brother  a  white  lily  a  small  house 

good  brothers  white  lilies  small  houses 

6.  Give  at  least  five  impersonal  verbs  expressing 
phenomena  of  nature.* 

COMPOSITION. 

It  rains,  it  lightens  and  it  thunders.  Where  is  the  sun? 
The  sun  is  behind  the  clouds.  —  It  rained,  it  lightened  and 
it  thundered.  Where  was  the  sun  ?  It*  was  behind  black 
clouds.  —  The  sun  came  through  the  clouds.  —  The  three 
butterflies  were  three  good  comrades.  They  dance  merrily. 
They  danced  merrily  in  the  warm  sunlight. —  Do  they 
dance?  Did  they  dance?  Did  they  not  dance  ?  Do  you 
dance  ?  No,  we  do  not  dance.  Did  you  not  dance  ?  —  It 
is  evening.  It  was  evening.  —  They  flew  home.* — They 
slept  at  home. 

CONVERSATION. 

28a§  fagten  bie  ©d^metterltnge  ju  ber  £ilte  ?  3Ba§  antroortetc 
bieje  ?  —  2Ba§  fiir  ^ameraben  roaren  bie  brei  (gd^metterlinge  ? 
—  2Bo  ift  bie  (Sonne,  roenn  e§  regnet  ?  9Bo  roar  bie  Sonne, 
al§  e§  regnete  ?  2Ba§  \)aiU  fie  ge^brt  ?  2Ba§  il)ai.  fie  nad^  bem 
9f{egen  ?  —  2Ba§  t^aten  bie  brei  (Sd^metterlinge  na6)  bem  3flegen  ? 
SSie  lange  fpielten  fxe  ?  —  SSo^in  flogen  fte  am  2lbenb  ?  SSo 
fd^Iiefen  fie  in  ber  9iaci^t? 


THIRD  LESSON. 


the  lily  = 

the  brother  = 

the  cloud  = 

the  garden  = 

the  evening  = 

friendly  = 
together  = 


VOCABULARY. 

the  flower  =  ? 

the  need,  trouble  = 

the  comrade  = 

the  wing  = 

firm(ly)  = 

merry  (ily)  = 

just  so  = 


after  the  rain  = 

behind  the  clouds  = 

on  (upon)  the  butterflies  = 


the  house  = 

the  sun  = 

the  rain  =: 

the  body  = 

bright(ly)  = 

more  and  more  = 

before  the  rain  = 


through  the  clouds  =  ? 
into  the  garden       = 


THIRD   LESSON. 


21IS  bcr  Ixzhz  ©ott  bie  3SogeI  fd)uf,  gab  er  x\)mn  33etne  ^um 
§upfen  unb  gliigel  gum  gliegen  unb  ©d^nabel  gum  ©ingen. 
Unb  al§  fie  nun  alle  fertig  roaren  unb  urn  \))Xi  l)erumftanben, 
ba  na^m  er  einen  gro^en  garbenfaften  unb  malte  i^nen  bunte 
gebern.  2)ie  %(x\xht  er^ielt  einen  blauen  §al§  unb  rijtlic^e  s 
gliigel,  ber  ^anarient)ogeI  rourbe  fo  gelb  n)ie  eine  Sitrone, 
unb  aUe  3Sogel  rourben  jo  prad^tig  gefarbt,  raie  e§  fiir  einen 
jeben  am  beften  roar. 

3^ur  einer  roar  iibrig  geblieben,  roeil  er  Winter  ben  anbern 
ftanb  unb  fid^  nid)t  t)orbrangen  rooKte,  ba§  roar  ber  ^iftelfinfe.  lo 
2113  er  enblic^  axK  bie  3fiei^e  !am,  ba  ^atte  ber  liebe  ©ott  aHe 


g  A  COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 

garben  oerbraud^t,  unb  e§  roar  nid^t§  me^r  iibrig  al§  bic 
leeren  ©d^dld^en.  2)a  roeinte  ba§  arme  3SogIein,  ba§  e§  nid^t 
aud^  cin  fo  fd^oneS  bunteS  ^leib  ^aben  foQte  rote  bic  anbern. 
2)cr  licbe  ©otl   aber   rebete   t^m   freunblic^   5U    unb   fprac^: 

5  „6et  nur  ru^ig!  @§  ift  nod^  in  jebem  ©d^dld^en  ein  flein 
roenig  garbe  guriicfgeblieben,  bag  will  id^  mit  bem  $infel 
auf  beine  gebem  flreic^en."  Unb  er  t^at  e§  unb  malte  ben 
2)iftclfin!en  ein  bifed^en  rot  unb  ein  bi|jd^en  blau  unb  cin 
bigd^en  fd^roarj  unb   ein  bifed^en  gelb  unb  n)ei§,   au^  jebem 

10  ©c^dld^en  ein  gang  flein  roenig,  fo  ba^  er  ber  buntefte  t)on 
aUen  3SbgeIn  raurbe  unb  bem  lieben  ©ott  bantte,  bafe  er  i^n 
fo  fd^on  gemad^t  ^atte. 

GRAMMAR. 

1.  Define  the  meaning  of  strong — weak  —  mixed  declen- 
sion.^ 

2.  (a)    Give,   together   with   the    definite    article,    the 
nominative  sing,  of  the  following  plural  forms 


S)iftelfinfen 

©otter 

SSogel 

Seine 

^liigel 

©itronen 

(2(^ndbel 

^dlfe 

^ebem 

^leiber 

{^ar  ben 

<Bd)dld)m 

(b)    State  to  which  declension  each  of  the  above  nouns 
belongs. 

3.   Decline  in  full  the  following  root-forms  ' 

ber  blau—  ^al§  ein  blau—  §alg 

bie  rot—  ^eber  cine  rot—  j^eber 

bag  fc^on—  bunt—  ^leib  cin  fc^on—  bunt—  ^leib 


THIRD 

LESSON. 

4.   Find  the  German  cognates 

of 

thistle 

finch 

(fowl) 

(bone) 

feather 

dove 

canary  (-fowl) 

cloth 

(pencil) 

(little)  bit 

gave 

to  hop 

to  fly 

were 

stood 

great 

would 

was 

came 

had 

(whined) 

to  have 

should 

(spake) 

to  strike 

did 

thanked 

blue 

reddish 

yellow 

more 

friendly 

red 

swart;  swarthy 

5.  Conjugate  the  present  and  past,  indicative  and  sub- 
junctive moods,  of  the  auxiliary  verbs  \)(ihzx\.  and  fein.^ 

6.  {a)  Which  prepositions  govern  sometimes  the  dative 
and  sometimes  the  accusative  ?  * 

(h)    State  when  they  govern  the  dative  or  accusative 
respectively. 


COMPOSITION. 

The  birds  have  two  legs,  two  wings  and  a  beak.  Have 
they  wings  ?  Have  you  wings  ?  No,  I  have  no  wings 
and  no  beak.  What  have  you  ?  I  have  two  arms  and  a 
mouth.  I  have  two  hands  and  ten  fingers.  —  The  birds 
can  hop,  they  can  also  fly  and  sing.  They  hop  and  fly  and 
sing.  —  The  birds  have  feathers.  They  have  many  gay- 
colored  feathers.  —  The  dove  has  white,  or  blue,  or  reddish 
wings.  The  canary-bird  has  yellow  feathers ;  they  are  as 
yellow  as  a  lemon.  —  The  thistle-finch  is  the  gayest-colored 
of  (t)on)  all  birds.  His  feathers  are  a  little  bit  red,  and  a 
little  bit  blue,  a  little  bit  black  and  white,  and  also  a  little 
bit  yellow.  —  The  Father  in  Heaven  has  made  this  little 
bird  so  beautiful. 


10 


A  COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 


CONVERSATION. 

2Ba§  t^un  bic  SBogcI  mit  t^ren  S3einen  ?  2Ba§  t^un  ftc  mit 
ben  gliigeln  ?  2Ba§  t^un  fie  mit  ben  ©d^ndbeln  ?  —  ^onnen 
©ie  fmgen  ?  §aben  ©ie  einen  ©d^nabel  ober  einen  2J^unb  ? 
SSomit  fingen  ©ic  ?  2So  ift  3^r  3JJunb  ?  —  2Ba§  fur  gebern 
^aben  bie  3SogeI  ?  —  3ft  ber  ^anarienoogel  rot,  blau,  braun, 
gelb,  griin  ober  fc^toarg  ?  SSie  ift  bie  Gitrone  ?  —  3ft  gelb 
eine  garbe  ?  3P  ^^^^  «"^  ^i"C  garbe  ?  2Bie  piele  garben 
ftnb  rot,  blau,  gelb,  braun  unb  griin  ?  9Sie  oiele  garben  }^ai 
ber  3ftegenbogen  ?  SSie  oiele  garben  ^aben  bie  gebern  be§ 
2)iftelfin!en  ?  —  2BeIci^er  ift  ber  buntefte  ton  alien  SSogeIn  in 
2)eutfci^Ianb  ?    3Ser  \)at  i^n  fo  fc^on  gema(^t  ? 


VOCABULARY. 

the  bird 

=  9 

the  leg 

the  wing 

= 

the  beak,  bill 

the  color,  paint 

= 

the  box 

the  color-box 

= 

the  feather 

the  dove,  pigeon 

= 

the  neck 

the  canary-bird 

= 

the  lemon 

the  thistle-finch 

= 

the  color-saucer 

the  birdie 

= 

the  dress,  garment 

the  brush  (of  a  painter) 

^ 

a  little  bit 

ready,  done 

= 

big,  large 

gay-colored 

= 

blue 

red 

= 

reddish 

yellow 

= 

splendid,  gorgeous 

empty 

= 

poor 

beautiful 

= 

quiet 

each,  every 

= 

to  hop 

to  fly 

= 

to  sing 

to  paint 

= 

to  stand 

to  weep,  cry 

= 

to  do 

to  thank 

= 

to  make 

as  yellow  as 

= 

for  each  one 

behind  the  others 

= 

at  last,  finally 

nothing  was  left  but  = 

be  quiet ! 

FOURTH  LESSON.  H 


FOURTH   LESSON. 


S)ie  S3aume  fatten  einmal  ©treit  unter  einanber,  roeld^er 
t)on  i^nen  ber  nii^lici^fle  fei.  ®a  trat  bie  (Sic^e  t)or  unb 
fagte :  „©e^t  mic^  OiX\,  ic^  bin  ^od^  unb  ftarf  unb  \)(xht  t)iele 
5lfte,  unb  meine  S^eige  finb  teid^  an  33Iattern  unb  gtud^ten." 
—  „grucl)te  ^afl  bu  wo^I,"  fagte  ber  ^firfid^baum,  „aber  e§  5 
finb  nur  griic^te  fiir  bie  ©djiroeine,  bie  5Jienfc^en  fonnen  fie 
nidjt  effen.  Slber  id^  liefere  meine  rotbacfigen  ^firfic^e  auf 
bie  Xafein  ber  ^onige."  —  „^a§  ^ilft  nic^t  oiel/'  entgegnete 
ber  Slpfelbaum,  „Pon  beinen  ^firfid^en  werben  nur  roenige 
Seute  fatt ;  audji  bauern  fie  nic{)t  lange,  bann  roerben  fie  faul,  10 
unb  niemanb  fann  fie  me^r  braud^en.  ^a  bin  \6^  ein  anbrer 
33aum  ;  id^  trage  aHe  '^(x\)xt  ^orbe  t)olI  Spfel ;  bie  braud^en 
fid)  m6)  nid^t  gu  fd^amen,  roenn  fie  auf  eine  Dorne^me  2;afel 
gefe^t  roerben,  aber  fie  madden  aud)  bie  5lrmen  fatt ;  au^erbem 
fann  man  fie  im  Dfen  borren  ober  fann  5lpfelu)ein  bat)on  15 
feltern.  ^d^  bin  ber  nu^lid^fte  S3aum."  —  „^a§  bilbeft  bu 
bir  nur  ein,"  erroiberte  bie  ©beltanne,  „aber  bu  irrft  bid^. 
9Jlit  meinem  §015  fjeigt  man  bie  fifen  unb  haui  man  bie 
§aufer,  mid^  fd^neibet  man  5U  33rettern  unb  mad^t  ^ifd^e, 
©tu^Ie,  6d)ranfe  unb  fogar  gro^e  ©d^iffe  barauS ;  ferner  bin  20 
id^  im  SBinter  nid^t  fo  fa^l  roie  i^r,  fonbern  id^  bin  ba§ 
gange  ^a^r  griin  unb  fd^bn,"  —  ,,2)a§  bin  id^  mi^,"  fiel  i^re 


12 


A   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 


©d^roefter,  bic  3flottanne,  ein,  „aber  id^  ^ohz  noc^  einen  anbcm 
SSorjug.  2Senn  gu  2Bei^nac^len  ba§  ©^riftfinb  !ommt,  bann 
fc^cn  mid^  bie  Seute  in  i^re  6tube  unb  ^dtigen  golbene  unb 
filbeme  3^uffe,  Spfel,  3Jianbeln  unb  9{ofinen  an  meine  ^rotx^t, 
Unb  iiber  mtd^  freuen  fid^  bie  ^inber  am  allermeiflen.  3f^ 
bag  oielleic^t  nid^t  roa^r  ?  " 


GRAMMAR. 

1.    Give,  together  with  the  definite  article,  the  nomi- 
native sing,  of  the  following  plural  forms 


Sdume 

Stfte 

Sroeige 

SSIdtter 

^riic^te 

©c^roeinc 

3Jienfc^en 

^bnige 

^firfic^e 

Sa^re 

^brbe 

2tpfel 

Dfen 

^dufer 

Sretter 

Xifc^e 

©tii^Ie 

©c^rdnfe 

©c^iffe 

ms\t 

aJJanbeln 

Hlofinen 

^inber 

r.    Find  the  German  cognates  of 

(beam) 

oak 

said 

high 

thick 

twig 

rich 

(blade) 

fruit 

for 

swine 

to  eat 

table 

king 

to  help 

apple 

more 

year 

full 

when 

to  make 

oven 

to  dry 

apple-wine 

board 

(desk) 

(stool) 

ship 

green 

sister 

nut 

raisin 

child 

t.    (a)  Compare 

nii^Iid^  — 

•  bid  —  reid^  - 

-  faul  —  grofe  — 

3. 

fd^on  —  xo(x\fc} 

(h)   Compare  ^oc^  —  na^.* 

4.   Conjugate  the  perfect  and  pluperfect,  indicative  and 
subjunctive  moods,  of  the  auxiliary  verbs  ^aben  and  fein.' 


FOURTH  LESSON.  13 


5.  Account  for  the  grammatical  construction  of 

i^tten*  (1.  2)  bie  ©d^roeine^  (1.  6) 

beinen  ifirfic^ett^  (1.  9)  meinem  ^olj'  (1.  18) 

i^re  ©tu6e«  (p.  12  1.  3)  tneine  ^roeige*  (p.  12  1.  4) 

6.  (a)   When    is   the    conjunction    but    translated    by 
fonbern,  instead  of  aber?^^ 

(b)    Account  for  the  use  of  fonbern  in  line  21. 


COMPOSITION. 

The  tree.  A  tree.  Which  tree?  What  kind*  of  a 
tree  ?  —  A  useful  tree.  A  more  useful  tree.  The  most 
useful  tree.  Which  is  the  most  useful  tree?  Is  it  the 
oak  or  the  peach-tree  or  the  apple-tree  or  the  pine  ?  —  The 
oak  is  high  and  strong ;  it  *  has  many  leaves  and  fruit(s), 
but  we  cannot  eat  the  fruit (s)  of  the  oak.  The  fruit (s)  of 
the  oak  are  not  eatable.  Are  the  acorns  eatable?  The 
hogs  can  eat  them.  —  The  peach-tree  bears  beautiful  fruit(s). 
The  peach  is  the  fruit  of  the  peach-tree,  and  the  apple  is 
the  fruit  of  the  apple-tree.  What  is  the  acorn  ?  It  *  is 
the  fruit  of  the  oak.  —  The  apple  is  a  very  fine  fruit ;  it  * 
lasts  much  longer  than  the  peach  and  it  is  a  fruit  not  only 
for  the  rich  (plu.),  but  also  for  the  poor.  —  Is  the  pine  a 
useful  tree?  Yes,  it*  is  very  useful.  We  heat  our  stoves 
with  the  wood  of  the  pine.  We  build  our  houses  with  the 
wood  of  the  pines.  We  make  large  and  small  tables  and 
all  kinds*  of  chairs  of  (au§)  pine-wood. — But  the  finest 
tree  is  the  Christmas-tree.  It  *  bears  many  kinds  *  of 
fruits,  apples  and  nuts,  almonds  and  raisins.  —  Is  this  not 
true? 


14 


A  COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 


CONVERSATION. 

3Bad^ft  bie  (Sid^e  im  SSalbe  ober  im  ©arten?  Sft  (te  ctn 
SBalbbaum  ober  ein  ©artenbaum  ?  3ft  ber  Slpfelbaum  ein 
©artenbaum  ?  3ft  w  aud^  ein  gtuc^tbaum  ?  3P  ^^^  ?5Wt(l^= 
baum  ein  grud^tbaum  ?  3f*  ^i^  ^anne  ein  gtuc^tbaum  ?  — 
3fl  ber  2lpfel  bie  grud^t  beg  SlpfelbaumS  ?  2Ba§  ift  bie  $fir= 
ftd^e  (ber  ifirfic^)  ?  28a§  ift  bie  ^ic^el  ?  —  ^ahtn  bie  ©id^en 
gro^e  breite  SIdtter  ober  biinne,  fpi^e  3^abeln?  §aben  bie 
Xannen  'flatter  ober  9]abeln  ?  —  ©inb  bie  3fiabeln  ber  Xanncn 
immer  griin,  im  6ommer  unb  im  3Sinter  ?  ©inb  bie  SIdtter 
ber  ©id^en  immer  griin?  6inb  bie  (Sid^en  ju  SBei^nad^ten 
griin  ?  —  SBann  ift  2Bei^nad^ten  (2Bann  finb  bie  SSei^nad^ten), 
im  ©ommer  ober  im  3Sinter?  3"  toeld^em  3Jlonate  ift  e§? 
3ft  ber  2)e5ember  ber  erfte  ober  ber  le^te  5Jlonat  be§  3ttl^te§  ? 
SBelc^er  3Konat  ift  ber  ^meite  ?  ber  oierte?  ber  fed^fte?  ber 
je^nte  ?  —  SSie  oiele  3Jlonate  \^CLi  ein  3^^^^  ?  2Bie  oiele  Xage 
\oiX  ein  ©d^altja^r  ?  2Bie  oiele  Xage  l^at  ber  gebruar  in  einem 
©c^altja^r?  —  2Bie  oiele  Stage  madden  eine  2Bod^e?  2Bie 
t)iele  Xage  finb  groifc^en  ©onntag  unb  greitag  ?  2BeId^e  t)ier 
2:age  ftnb  jroifd^en  (Sonntag  unb  greitag  ?  —  3ln  roeld^em 
.Stage  ift  !eine  ©d^ule  ?  2ln  roeld^em  Xag  ge^en  roir  in  bie 
le? 


VOCABUL 

ARY. 

the  tree 

=  ? 

the  oak 

—  9 

the  peach-tree 

the  apple-tree 

= 

the  pine 

r= 

the  Christmas-tree 

the  branch 

= 

the  twig 

= 

the  leaf 

the  fruit 

= 

the  swine,  hog 

= 

the  apple 

the  peach 

= 

the  nut 

= 

the  almond 

the  raisin 

= 

the  table 

= 

the  king 

the  year 

= 

the  basket 

= 

the  stove 

the  cider 

= 

the  wood 

= 

the  board 

FIFTH  LESSON. 

15 

he  chair 

«> 

the  ship               =  ? 

the  sister  =? 

Christmas 

= 

the  child              = 

useful  = 

high 

= 

strong,  big  = 

rich      = 

rotten,  putrid 

= 

hare,  bald    = 

golden  = 

(silvern)  of  silver  = 

true              = 

to  eat       = 

to  furnish 

= 

to  last,  keep     = 

to  bear     = 

to  dry 

= 

to  reply            = 

to  build    =: 

to  cut 

=  ?        to  come 

=  ? 

among  themselves 

=               no  one,  nobody 

= 

(quite)  a  different  tree 

=               besides,  furthermore  = 

FIFTH   LESSON. 


(2lug  einem  3Karc^en  ooti  (Srnft  t)on  SBilbenbruc^.) 


3n)ei  3Rofen,  eine  gelbe  unb  eine  roei^e,  toaren  neben  einanber 
in  einem  ©arten  aufgeroadifen.  6me§  ^age§  rourben  fie  ge= 
trennt.  ^ie  gelbe  Sloje  tarn  in  ben  S3efi^  eineS  fteinreid^en 
3J?anneg,  unb  barum  \a\)  fie  fo  ftolg  unb  gliidEIid^  au§  raie 
eine  ^rinjeffin,  bie  eineS  iungen  ^onigS  SBeib  roerben  foU.  5 
S^re  neue  §eimat  wax  gang  prad^tDoU,  ^a§  §au§  be§  reid^en 
9Jianne§  lag  in  ber  3[$orftabt,  roo  nur  reid^e  2eute  wolinten, 
unb  in  ber  ©tra^e,  in  ber  ba§  §au§  ftanb,  n)o{)nten  nur  bie 
reic^ften  ber  Sfieic^en.  ^n  ben  §aufern  befanben  fidj)  fo  gro^e 
8d^a^e,  ba^  bie  2uft  in  ber  3^ad^barfd^aft  roie  mit  ©olbftaub  lo 


16 


A  COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 


erfiiHt  roar,  fo  ba^  bte  Sperlinge,  roenn  ftc  butc^  bie  ©tra^c 
flogen,  mit  oergolbeten  ©d^rodnsen  ^jeraugfamen. 

§inter   bent    §auje   be§    reid^en    SRanneS    lag    ein    grower 
©atten,  in  befjen  TOtte  ein  fleiner  2BaIb  bet  feltenften  unb 

5  fd^onflen  9^ofen  flanb.  2Ba§  biefen  ein  befonberS  ftattlid^e§ 
2lu§fe^en  gab,  ba§  roaren  gierlid^e  2:dfelc^en,  t)on  benen  jebe 
ein§  urn  ben  §al§  Itug.  5luf  biefen  roar  ber  3f2ame  einer  jeben 
3^ofe  aufgefd^rieben,  foroie  i^re  gamilie  unb  i^r  ©eburtgort. 
3)a  roaren  3^ofen,  bie  au§  6^ina  ftammten,  anbere  au§  Dft= 

10  inbien  unb  eine  fogar  t)on  ber  ^x{\t\  Sourbon.  3^^  ^i^  @efefl= 
fd^aft  roar  roirflic^  roeit  ^er! 


GRAMMAR. 


1.    Give  gender,  meaning,  genitive  sing,  and  nominative 
plu.  of 


3flofc 

^ontg 

©tra^e 

©c^roans 

©eburtsort 


©artcn 
SBeib 


2Calb 
Snfel 


Xag 

Suft 
Safeld^en 


aRann 
SSorftabt 
©perltng 
^amilie 


2.    (a)  How  do  feminine  nouns  ending  in  -in  form  their 
plural  ?  1 

(b)    Give  meaning,  genitive  sing,  and  nominative  plu.  of 


bie  ^rinjeffin 
bie  ^aiferin 


bie  ^bnigin 
bie  Slmerifanerin 


3.  State  the  gender  of  most  names  of  plants,  fruits  and 
flowers,  and  illustrate  the  rule  by  examples.** 

4.  (a)  Decline  the  two  forms  of  the  relative  pronoun 
(roelc^er,  roelc^e,  roelc^eS  and  ber,  bie,  baS)  through  sing,  and 
plu.» 


FIFTH  LESSON.  17 

(b)  Substitute  in  the  following  sentences  one  form  of 
the  relative  pronoun  for  the  other 

Sine  ^rinjeffin,  ro  e  I  rf)  e  eineg  jungen  ^onigS  9Bei5  tuerbcn  joU. 

2)te  ©tra^e,  in  roelc^er  bag  §aug  beg  reid^en  2J?anne§  ftanb. 

2)ie  ©perlinge,  bie  burc^  bie  Strafe  flogen. 

3ierlic^e  Xdfeld)en,  von  tceld^ett  jebe  dio\e  ein§  urn  ben  §alg  trug. 

2)ie  Stofen,  bie  aug  ©^ina  ftammten. 

2)ie  3tofen,  beren*  ^eimat  Dftinbien  roar. 

^ie  3fiofe,  beren*  ©eburtgort  bie  ^nfel  SBourbon  war. 

5.  Determine  case,  number  and  gender  of 

einem  ©arten  (1.  2)  eineg  Xageg  (1.  2) 

eineg  fteinreic^en  3Jlanneg  (1.  3)  ber  33orftabt  (1.  7) 

ben  ^ciufern  (1.  9)  ben  §alg  (p.  16  1.  7) 

einer  jeben  9tofe  (p.  16  1.  7)  ber  Snfel  (p.  16  1.  10) 

6.  State  the  present,  the  past  and  the  past  participle  of 
the  modal  verbs'*  (modal  auxiliaries). 

COMPOSITION. 

A  rose.  No  rose.  My  rose.  Her  rose.  —  Two  roses. 
Two  beautiful  roses.  Beautiful  roses.  Beautiful  yellow 
roses.  —  The  yellow  rose  was  as  proud  as  a  young  princess. 
Princesses,  queens  and  empresses  are  often  very  proud,  but 
they  are  not  always  happy.  —  Why  was  the  yellow  rose  so 
proud  and  happy  ?  The  house  of  the  rich  man  lay  in  the 
most  fashionable  street  of  the  suburb.  Only  the  richest 
families  lived  there. — The  street  in  which  the  house  of 
the  rich  man  stood,  was  very  fashionable.  —  A  large  garden 
was  behind  the  house  of  the  rich  man.  Behind  the  house 
of  the  rich  man  was  a  large  garden.  —  The  finest  and  rarest 
roses  grew  in  the  center  of  the  same.  In  the  center  of  the 
same  grew  the  finest  and  rarest  roses.  —  Which  roses  ? 


18 


A   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 


How  many  roses  ?  What  kind  of  roses  ?  These  roses. 
Those  roses.  Several  hundred  roses.  No  roses.  Red 
roses.  White  roses.  Yellow  roses.  Tea-roses.  Moss- 
roses.  Each  (every)  rose.  That  rose.  All  roses.  —  The 
roses  had  small  wooden  tablets  about  their  necks.  —  The 
names  of  the  families  of  these  roses  were  written  on  those 
little  wooden  tablets.  —  One  rose  was  from  China,  another 
came  from  the  East  Indies,*  and  again  another  from  the 
island  of  *  Bourbon  in  the  Indian  Ocean. 

CONVERSATION. 

2Bcr  faufte  bic  gclbe  9lofc  ?  SSarum  roar  biefc  nun  fo  ftolg 
unb  gliicfltd^  rote  einc  junge  ^rinjeffin  ?  —  3So  lag  ba§  §au§ 
beS  reid^en  3J?anne§  ?  2Sa§  fiir  gamilien  roo^nten  in  ber 
SSorftabt?  SSo  lag  ber  ©arten  be§  reid^en  9Jknneg  ?  2Sa§ 
fiir  9^ofen  ftanben  in  ber  3)Zitte  be§  ©arteng  ?  —  2Ba§  trug 
eine  jebe  5Rofe  urn  ben  §al§  ?  2Ba§  ftanb  auf  biefen  2:dfel= 
6:^tx{  ?  —  2Bar  S)eutjci^Ianb  bie  §eimat  biefer  feltenen  Stofen  ? 
2Bo^er  famen  bie  einen  ?  bie  anbern  ?  2Bo^er  !am  bie  feltenfte 
unb  fd^onfte  9lofe?  —  3"  roeld^em  Djean  liegt  bie  Snfel 
Sourbon  ?  3n  roelc^em  3Jieere  liegt  bie  S^fel  (Sijilien  ?  2Bo 
liegen  bie  Snfeln  3Jlart^§  SSeingarten  unb  9^antuc!et  ? 


VOCABULARY. 

the  king                  =  ? 

the  princess 

=  ? 

the  wife              = 

the  home                = 

the  city 

= 

the  suburb         = 

the  street               = 

the  treasure 

= 

the  gold             = 

the  dust                 = 

the  gold-dust 

= 

the  air                 = 

the  neighborhood  = 

the  sparrow 

= 

the  tail              = 

the  center              = 

the  forest 

= 

the  tablet          = 

the  neck                 = 

the  name 

= 

the  family          = 

the  birthplace       = 

the  company 

= 

rich              = 

mighty*  rich  = 

proud 

= 

happy          = 

young             = 

fashionable 

1  = 

gilt,  gilded  = 

SIXTH  LESSON.  19 


SIXTH   LESSON. 


^ie  beiben  9lofem 

2. 

^ie  rceifee  3f{ofe  ^alte  ein  atmer  ©d^u^mad^er  fiir  feine 
fran!e  grau  gefauft.  ©ie  ftanb  in  einem  33Iumentopf  t)or 
ber  §au§tpr  unb  fu^lte  fid^  im  ^ergen  rec^t  ungludtlid^,  bag 
fie  in  ben  Sefi^  won  armen  Seuten  gefommen  raar.  SSa^renb 
fie  fo  in  i^rer  ^rauer  ben  ^opf  ^angen  lieg,  ^orte  fie  auf  5 
einmal  eine  feine  ©timme  l^inter  fid^,  rceld^e  fagte :  „@uten 
^Jiorgen,  grau  Siofe!"  Unb  al§  fie  fid^  umrcanbte,  erblidEte 
fie  einen  fleinen  ^anarienoogel,  ber  in  feinem  ^afig  in  bent 
gebffneten  genfter  ^ing,  ^inler  weld^em  ber  ©d^u^mad^er  auf 
feinem  breibeinigen  ©tu^l  fag  unb  an  feinen  ©tiefein  unb  10 
©d^u^en  arbeitete.  2)er  3Sogel  l^atte  graei  !Iuge  fdjiroarge 
Slugen  unb  einen  !Ieinen  weigen  ©d^nabel.  ^it  bem  le^teren 
fagte  er  nod^  einmal :  „(^uitx\  3Jiorgen,  ^rau  $Rofe !  3^  ^^^^ 
geftern  2lbenb  feine  ©elegen^eit  ge^abt,  ©ie  ju  begriigen. 
@rlauben  ©ie  mir,  bag  id^  mid^  $5^nen  je^t  tjorfteUe ;  mein  15 
3^ame  ift  ^ieping."  — 

GRAMMAR. 

1.  Decline  the  personal  pronouns  '\6^,  bu,  er  (fie)  —  xo'xx, 
i^r  (©ie),  fte.^ 

2.  Decline  ber,  bic,  baS  as  article  and  as  relative  pro- 


20  ^   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 

3.  Which  verbs  undergo  in  their  conjugation  an  external 
change,  the  weak  or  the  strong  ? ' 

4.  Complete  the  following  relative  clauses 

©in  ©c^u^mac^er  ift  ein  SKann,  ber  .  .  . 

ein  Slumentopf  ift  ein  %ov\t  in  ro  e  I  c^  e  m  .  .  . 

Slrme  Seute  finb  iieute,  b  i  e  .  .  . 

(Sin  breibeiniger  ©tu^I  ift  ein  ©tu^l,  roelc^er  .  .  . 

5.  Which  verbs  are  conjugated  with  the  auxiliary  ^abcn, 
and  which  with  f ein  ?  * 

6.  Account  for  the  use  of  the  auxiliaries  ^aben  and  fein 
in  the  following  sentences 

(Sin  ©c^u^ma(^er  ^atte  bie  roei^e  S^lofe  gefauft. 

2)ie  roei^e  3fiofe  toot  in  ben  Seft^  oon  armen  Scuten  gefommen. 

©ie  l^at  eine  feine  ©ttmme  Winter  fic^  geprt. 

35er  ©c^u^mac^er  l^at  an  bem  genfter  gefeffen. 

2)er  SSogel  i|l  aug  feinem  ^dfig  in  ben  SBalb  geflogen. 


COMPOSITION. 

I  buy  a  rose.  He  buys  a  white  rose.  She  buys  a  beau- 
tiful red  rose.  —  He  bought  the  white  rose.  Who  bought 
that  white  rose  ?  He  will  buy  the  rose.  He  has  bought 
it.*  He  had  bought  it  for  me,  for  thee,  for  him,  for  him- 
self,* for  her ;  for  us,  for  you,  for  them.  —  That  poor  man 
has  bought  this  beautiful  white  rose  for  his  sick  wife.  — 
The  white  rose  was  unhappy  in  her  heart.  Why  was  she 
unhappy  ?  —  A  canary-bird  sits  in  the  cage.  A  little 
canary-bird  sat  in  his  cage.  A  little  canary-bird  with  two 
bright  black  eyes  and  a  white  beak.  What  kind  of  eyes 
had  he  ?  What  kind  of  eyes  have  you  ?  What  kind  of 
eyes  have  I  ?  —  What  did  the  canary-bird  say  to  the  white 
rose  ?     "  Frau  Rose,"  said  he,  "  permit  me  to  introduce 


SIXTH  LESSON. 


21 


myself  to  you  ! "  —  My  friend  said  :  "  Miss  Brown,  permit 
me  to  introduce  to  you  my  brother  Charles  ! "  —  "  Profes- 
sor,* permit  me  to  introduce  to  you  my  friend,  Mr.  Smith, 
of  Boston  ! "  —  Good  morning  !  Good  day  !  Good  even- 
ing !  Good  night ! —  I  am  glad  to  see  you.  How  are  you  ? 
Thank  you,  I  am  well.  And  how  are  you  ?  Are  all  well 
at  your  home  ? 

CONVERSATION. 

2Ber  ^atte  bie  tDeifee  3^ofe  gefauft  ?  giir  rcen  l)atte  er  fie 
gefauft  ?  —  2Barum  fU^lte  fid^  bie  roeifee  9lofe  fo  ungliidlid^  ? 
—  SSeld^e  2Borte  prte  fie  auf  einmal  am  nad^ften  ?iJJorgen  ? 
2Ber  ^atte  biefe  SSorte  gefprodjien  ?  —  ©teHen  ©ie  mid^,  bttte, 
S^rem  5Rad^bar  (S^ter  ^ad^barin)  t)or!  TOt  raeld^en  2Borten 
roiirbe  grau  ©enator  §anna  t()re  ©d^wefter  5J?aub  ber  grau 
^rafibent  ^iJic^inlep  t)orfteHen  ?  —  2Bo  fag  ber  ^anarienwogel  ? 
33efd^retben  ©ie  ben  3Sogel,  bie  garbe  feiner  J^bern,  feiner 
'^\x%zn  unb  feineS  ©d^nabels! 


VOCABULARY. 

the  shoemaker  =  ? 

the  flower 

=  ? 

the  pot                = 

the  flower-pot    = 

the  door 

= 

the  house-door= 

the  heart            = 

the  possession 

= 

the  people        = 

the  sadness        = 

the  head 

= 

the  voice            = 

the  morning       = 

the  cage 

= 

the  window      = 

the  stool,  chair  = 

the  boot 

= 

the  shoe             = 

the  bird               = 

the  eye 

= 

the  beak,  bill    = 

the  evening        = 

the  chance 

= 

the  name           = 

to  buy               = 

to  sell 

= 

to  hear             = 

to  work             = 

to  greet 

= 

to  permit         = 

to  introduce     = 

once  more 

= 

to-day         = 

last  night 

:=:  ? 

yesterday    =  ? 

the  day  before  yesterday    = 

to-morrow  = 

the  day  after 

to-morrow    = 

22  ^   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 


SEVENTH   LESSON. 


^ie  bcibett  9{ofem 


3. 


2)a§  arttge  2Befen  be§  ^anarienoogels  gefiel  ber  roei^en 
SRofc,  fic  mad^lc  cincn  freunbltd^en  ^nij,  lie^  fid^  mit  t^m 
in  cin  ©efprad^  cm  unb  fragte  i^n,  rote  olt  er  fei,  unb  rate 
lange  er  fc^on   hd    ©d^u^mad^erS    rodre.      2)a    feufgte    §err 

5  ^teping  unb  fagte :  „^6)  bin  leiber  fein  bungling  me^r,  benn 
id^  bin  fc^on  ein  ^a\)x  unb  groei  Xage  alt ;  oorgeftern  war 
mein  ©eburtstag.  S5ei  ©d^u^mad^erg  aber  bin  id^  fd^on  brei 
3Konatc,  unb  ^offentlid^  bleibe  x6)  mein  gan^eS  Seben  lang  bei 
i^nen."     Unb  al§  bie  5Rofe  i^n  roeiter  fragte,  ob  e§  i^m  benn 

10  fo  gut  bei  ©d^u^mad^erS  gefaOe,  ha  bre^te  er  bie  Suglein  im 
^opfe  ^erum  unb  fagte :  „D,  ba§  ftnb  engelSgute  Seute,  unb 
befonberS  bie  ^inber/'  unb  bann  rourbe  er  fo  meland^olifd^, 
ba^  er  fd^neH  einen  fleinen  ©d^Iuc!  SSafjer  ne^men  mufete, 
loeil  i^m  fonft  bie  3:^rdnen  in  bie  5lugen  ge!ommen  rodren. 


GRAMMAR. 
1.    (a)  What  is  the  mixed  declension  ?  ^ 
(b)   Decline  baS  Sluge  and  baS  ^erg. 


SEVENTH  LESSON.  23 

2.    Translate  by  the  proper  cases  of  the  personal  pro- 
nouns without  prepositions^ 


me 

of  me 

to  me 

to  her 

of  him 

of  her 

she 

her 

they 

to  them 

to  you 

to  us 

3.  Account  for  the  accusatives  of  time*  in  the  following 
sentences 

3c^  ^tt6e  ©ie  geftern  2lbenb  ttid^t  begrii^en  lonnen. 
Sc^  bin  ein  "^0.^1  unb  jroei  %a%t  alt. 
Sd^  bin  fc^on  bret  aJionate  bei  ©c^ul^mac^erg. 
jQoffentlic^  bleibe  ic^  mein  ganjeg  Seben  bei  i^nen. 

4.  How  is  the  preposition  bci  *  translated  in  each  of  the 
following  sentences  ? 

S)er  ©d^u^mad^cr  arbeitete  bei  bem  offenen  (^enfter. 

§offentlid^  bleibe  id^  mein  ganje^  Seben  bei  ifjnen. 

3c^  \)aU ©ie  geftern  Slbenb  bei  S^^^er  2ln!unft  nic^t  begrii^en  lonnen. 

5.  Distinguish  mein  langeS  Sebcn  and  mein  Seben  lang. 

6.  Account  for  the  present  tense*  in  ic^  bin  fd^on  brei 
3Jlonate  bei  ©d^u^mad^erS. 


COMPOSITION. 

She  asks  him.  Does  she  ask  him  ?  Does  she  not  ask 
him?  —  She  asked  him.  Did  she  ask  him?  Did  she  not 
ask  him  ?  Yes,  she  asked  him  :  "  How  old  are  you  ? '' 
And  what  did  he  answer  ?  He  replied  :  "  I  am  a  year  and 
two  days  old."  —  <'  I  am  12  months  and  2  days  old."  — 
"  I  am  52  weeks  and  2  days  old."  —  ^<I  am  367  days  old." 
—  The  day  before  yesterday  was  my  birthday.  —  When  is 


24  ^   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 

your  birthday,  Miss  Mary  ?  When  is  Washington's  birth- 
day ?  —  Then  she  asked  him  :  "How  long  have  you  been* 
with  shoemakers  ?  "  He  replied :  "  I  have  been  with  them 
already  three  months."  —  Her  next  question  was  :  "  Are 
they  *  good  people  ?  "  He  answered  :  "  They  are  as  good 
as  the  angels." 

CONVERSATION. 

2Ba§  roar  ber  ^^lame  beS  ^anarien»ogeI§  ?  SSelc^en  Xiamen 
l^aXiz  er  ?  2Bie  ^ie§  er  ?  —  2Bte  ^eifeen  ®ie  ?  2Bie  \)t\%i  3^r 
beutfd^er  Setter  (3^re  beutfc^e  Se^rerin)?  2Bie  ^ei^t  ber 
^rdfibent  ber  35ereintgten  Otaaten  t)on  2lmeri!a  ?  —  2Bie  ^iefe 
ber  erfte  ^rdfibent  unferer  9^epubltf  ?  2Bie  ^ie^  feine  grau  ? 
2Bie  ^ie^  fein  Sanbgut  in  ^Sirginien  ?  —  2Bie  ^eifet  ber  ^aifer 
oon  2)eutfci^Ianb  ?  —  2Bte  alt  roar  ber  ^anarienoogel  ?  9Bie 
alt  finb  6ie  ?  —  2Bann  roar  fein  ©eburtstag  ?  2Bann  ift  3^r 
©eburtstag  ?  2Bann  feiern  roir  2Baf^ington§  ©eburtstag  ? 
SSann  i[t  2lbra^am  SincoInS  ©eburt^tag  ?  SSiffen  ©ie  baS 
nid^t  ?  ^onnen  ©ie  mir  morgen  fagen,  roann  Slbra^am  SincoInS 
©eburtstag  ift? 

VOCABULARY. 

the  conversation  =  ?  the  youth,  young  man  ==? 

the  year  =  the  day  -= 

the  birthday  =  the  month  = 

the  life  =  the  head  = 

the  child  =  the  water  = 

the  tear  =  the  eye  = 

to  please  =  to  sob,  sigh  = 

to  stay,  remain  =  courteous  = 

old  =  as  kind  as  an  angel  ^ 

especially,  particularly  = 


EIGHTH  LESSON.  25 


EIGHTH    LESSON. 


(®ine  Snbianerfage.) 

Unter  bem  ^nbianerftamme  ber  ©eminolen  in  gloriba  finbet 
fid^  bie  fotgenbe  ebenfo  merfraurbige  rate  finnooCe  ©age,  roelc^e 
ben  Hrfprung  be§  ^raei^en  5!J?anne§"  unb  feine  iiberlegen^eit 
iiber  bie  anbern  '^aWzxi  gum  ©egenftanb  ^at: 

2ll§  ber  gro^e  ©eift  bie  ©rbe  erfc^affen  ^atte,  fd^uf  er  gleid^=  5 
geitig  brei  5Jianner,  aHe  t)on  roei^er  §autfarbe.  ®ann  fU^rte 
er  fie  an  einen  %zx^  unb  befal)l  i^nen  ^ineingufpringen  unb 
gu  baben.  ®er  eine  ge^ord^te  fofort  unb  fam  rein  unb  rcei^ 
au§  bem  28affer  ^erauS.  3)er  gmeite  gogerte  eine  9BeiIe,  unb 
ba  ba§  2Baffer  bur^  ba§  $Iatfd()ern  be§  erften  elroaS  jd^Iammig  10 
gemorben  roar,  fo  ging  er  lupferfarben  au§  bem  Sab  ^eruor. 
2)er  britte  fprang  erft  ^inein,  al§  bie  glut  t)om  ©d^Iamme 
gang  bunfel  geroorben  roar,  fo  ba^  er  mit  t)oUig  fd)roarger  §aut 
guriidffam.  ^ann  legte  i()nen  ber  gro^e  ©eift  brei  Siinbel 
t)or  unb  eriaubte  bem  fd)roargen  3Jianne  guerft  gu  roci^len,  benn  15 
er  fii^lte  3J^itleib  mit  i^m,  roeil  er  \o  fd^roarg  geroorben  roar, 
liefer  naf)m  aKe  brei  33iinbel  in  bie  §anb,  unb  nad^bem  er 
i^r  ©eroid)t  gepriift  ^atte,  na^m  er  baS  fd^roerfte.  2)ann  folgte 
ber  ^upferfarbene,  roeld^er  bag  nad^ftfd^roere  Siinbel  roa^lte  unb 
bem  roei^en  3Kanne  ba§  leid^tefte  iiberliefe.    51I§  bann  ein  jeber  20 


26  ^   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 

fein  SBiinbel  bffnete,  ba  jetgte  e§  fid),  ba^  ba§  erfte  §adfen, 
©paten  unb  allerlei  ^anbroerf^jeug  fiir  fd^roere  gelbarbeit  ent= 
^ielt.  3n  bcm  jroeiten  Siinbel  toaren  33ogen,  ^feile  unb 
2lngel^a!en  fiir  ^rieg,  gagb  unb  gifd^fang.  ®a§  btitte  abet 
5  gab  bem  roei^en  5[Ranne  papier,  geber  unb  Stinte,  bie  ©runb= 
lagen  feiner  Ubermad^t  iiber  bie  anbern  9iaffen. 

GRAMMAR. 
1.    Find  the  German  cognates  of 


white 

(ghost) 

earth 

three 

third 

feather 

both 

bath 

through 

water 

great 

spade 

the  (hide) 

field 

bundle 

man 

hook 

light  (of  weight) 

flood 

copper 

has 

over 

slime 

first 

fuUy 

laid 

2.  (a)  Which  prepositions  govern  the  genitive  ?  ^ 

(b)  Which  prepositions  govern  the  accusative  ?  * 

(c)  Which  prepositions  govern  always  the  dative  ?  * 

3.  Explain  the  grammatical  construction  of 

bem  Snbtanerftamme  (1.  1)  ben  Urjprung  (1.  3) 

beg  roei^en  SWannes  (1.  3)  bie  ©rbe  (1.  6) 

roet^er  ^autfarbe  (1.  6)  fie  (1.  7) 

t^nen  0-  7)  bem  SBaffer  (1.  9) 

4.  State  principal  parts  and  meaning  of  the  following 
weak*  verbs 

fagen  fii^rcn  baben  jogem  legetx 

roa^len  fii^Ien  priifen  folgen  offnen 


EIGHTH  LESSON.  27 

5.  State  principal  parts  and  meaning  of  the  following 
strong  ^  verbs 

finben  jd^affen  jpringen  fomnten         gef)en 

nel^men  laflen  fatten  geben  roerben 

6.  (a)  What  is  the  position  of  the  verb  in  clauses  be- 
ginning with  such  subordinating  conjunctions  ®  as :  al§, 
when;  nacf)bem,  after;  ba,  as,  since;  ba^,  bamit,  that;  fo 
ba^,  so  that;  tDCil,  because? 

(b)   Account  for  the  position  of 

^atte  (1.  6)  max  (1.  11)  roar  (1.  13) 

5uruc!fam  (1.  14)  roar  (1.  16)  ^atte  (1.  18) 

offnete  (p.  26  1.  1)  entt)ielt  (p.  26  1.  2) 


COMPOSITION. 

The  Great  Spirit  creates  the  earth.  The  Great  Spirit 
created  the  earth.  When  he  created  the  earth.  He  has 
created  the  earth.  He  had  created  the  earth.  When  the 
Great  Spirit  had  created  the  earth.  —  He  created  three 
men.  They  were  white.  These  three  white  men.  Those 
three  white  men.  —  I  jump  into  the  water.  I  jumped  into 
the  water.  Those  three  white  men  jumped  into  the  water. 
Why  did  they  jump  into  the  water  ?  Because  the  Great 
Spirit  had  ordered  it.  The  water  of  the  pond  was  clear. 
The  clear  water  of  the  pond  turned  muddy.  —  A  white 
skin.  A  copper-colored  skin.  A  black  skin. — A  man 
with  a  white  skin.  A  man  with  a  copper-colored  skin.  A 
man  with  a  black  skin.  —  A  bundle.  Three  bundles.  Here 
are  three  bundles.  There  were  three  bundles.  One  bundle 
was  light,  but  the  two  other  bundles  were  heavy.  —  The 
man  with  the  black  skin  took  the  heaviest  bundle.     The 


28  ^   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 

negro  chose  the  bundle  which  was  the  heaviest.  —  The  man 
with  the  copper-colored  skin  took  the  second  bundle,  which 
was  not  as  heavy  as  that  *  of  the  black  man.  The  Indian 
chose  the  second  bundle.  —  The  bundle  of  the  white  man 
was  very  light.     It  was  the  lightest  of  the  three  bundles. 

—  What  was  in  those  three  bundles  ?  A  spade  and  a  pick- 
axe were  in  that  of  the  negro.  In  the  bundle  of  the  Indian 
was  an  arrow  and  a  bow.  —  What  did  the  white  man  find 
in  his  bundle  ?  He  found  in  it  (barin)  pens,  ink  and 
paper. 

CONVERSATION. 

2Ba§  ift  ©ijilicn,  eine  3"^l  ober  eine  §albinfel  ?    2BaS  ift 
gloriba?    ©ried^enlanb?    ^orfifa?     ©anemat!  ?     3^antucfet? 

—  2iegt  gloriba  im  Siiboften  ober  im  ©iibroeften  ber  3Ser= 
etnigten  (BiaaUrx  von  Slmerifa  ?  Siegt  ber  <Biaai  Tlaxnc  im 
^Jiorbroeften  ober  im  ^fJorboften  ber  Union?  3So  liegt  ^ali= 
fomien  ?  2Bo  liegt  bag  Xerritorium  2lla§fa  ?  —  SSeld^eg  Sanb 
ift  ba§  3SaterIanb  ber  ^eutfc^en  ?  SSeld^e^  Sanb  ift  bie  §eimat 
be§  granjofen  ?  2Bo  roar  bie  §eimat  ber  ©emtnolen  ?  3" 
toelc^em  3"^^«"c^^«"^"is  ge^orte  ber  §duptling  DSceoIa  ?  3" 
toeld^em  Stamme  ge^orte  Xecumfe^  ?  3Son  rceld^em  ©tamme 
roar  ©itting  33uII  ber  §duptling  ? 


VOCABULARY. 

the  Indian 

=  ? 

the  negro 

9 

the  white  man          =  ? 

the  race,  type  = 

the  race  of  mankind  = 

the  ghost,  spirit        = 

the  skin 

= 

the  color 

= 

the  color  of  the  skin  = 

the  pond 

= 

the  water 

= 

the  while                    = 

the  bath 

= 

the  flood 

= 

the  compassion         = 

the  hand 

= 

the  weight 

= 

the  war                      = 

the  chase 

= 

clean 

= 

slimy,  muddy     = 

dark 

= 

black 

= 

heavy                  = 

NINTH  LESSON.  29 

light  (of  weight)  =  ?  simultaneously        =  ? 

somewhat  muddy  =  each  one  = 

the  two  others  =  among  the  Indians  = 

out  of  (from)  the  water  =  so  that  = 

because  = 


NINTH   LESSON. 


^er  iiibifd)e  ^^ilofop^  3}Jofe§  5D^enbel§fo^n,  ber  tntime 
greunb  SeffingS,  ftanb  6ei  bem  ^reu^enfonig  griebridj)  bem 
©ro^en  in  ^o^en  @t)ren  unb  roar  ein  gerngefe^ener  ©aft  an 
ber  !bniglid)en  Xafel  int  ©i^Io^  gu  ©an^fouci.  21I§  er  eineS 
^age§  eingelaben  war,  unb  groar  gu  einer  befttmmten  ©tunbe,  5 
crjc^ien  er  nid)t.  ^fZiemanb  Derriet  Ungebulb  ober  mad^te  eine 
S3emer!ung.  2ll§  aber  ber  £bntg  feine  Ut|r  <x\x^  ber  %<x\6)z 
jog  unb  biefelbe  in  ber  §anb  ^ielt,  al§  rooUte  er  fagen:  „3Bo 
bleibt  benn  9J?enbel§fo^n  ?"  ba  bemer!te  einer  ber  ©afte:  „3a, 
fo  finb  bie  ©elei^rten,  roenn  fie  Winter  i^ren  Siid^ern  fi^en,  lo 
bann  cergeffen  fie  alle§."  —  „3Run,"  antroortete  ber  £onig 
ladienb,  „mx  rooUen  i^n  fiir  feine  llnpiin!tlid)!eit  ftrafen  unb 
i^n  red^l  in  3Serlegent)eit  fe^en."  —  ^ann  na^m  er  papier  unb 
Sleiftift  unb  f^rieb  bie  SSorte  „3JienbeI§fo^n  ift  ein  @fel. 
griebrid^  11."  —  ©arauf  befall  er  einem  $agen,  't>ci^  papier  15 
m  beS  ^^ilofop^en  $la^  ju  legen.  33alb  !am  3Kenbel§fo^n, 
la§  bie  ^arte  unb  fledtte  fie  in  bie  ^afd^e,  o()ne  ein  ^iBort 


30  ^   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 

gu  fagen.  2)cr  ^onig  fragte  fd^alf^aft :  „@i,  ei,  mein  Itebet 
3JlenbeI§fo^n,  toaS  ^aben  ©te  benn  ba  ?  25a§  ift  roo^I  ein 
SiebeSbriefd^en  ?  2Botlen  ©ie  un§  nid^t  ben  S^^alt  mitteilen?" 
„6e^r  gem,  (Sure  ^JJajeftdt/'  antroortete  ber  $^iIofop^  unb 
Ia§  mit  lauter  ©timme:  „9JienbeI§fol^n  ift  ein  (Sfel.  Jriebrici^ 
bet  groeite."  —  ^er  ^onig  lad^te  ^erjlid^. 


GRAMMAR. 

1.   Add  to  the  following  nouns  the  definite  article,  and 
state  the  nominative  plu.  of  the  compound  nouns 


—  gJreu^e 

—  33Iei 

—  «iebe 

—  ^onig 

—  ©tift 

—  33rief 

—  '^reu|enfonig 

—  Sleiftift 

—  Siebesbrief 

—  Siebesbriefc^en 

2.  Decline   the  following   nouns,   and   state   to   which 
declension^  they  belong 

ber  (Sele^rte  bcr  ^^tlofop^  ber  ^age 

bcr  3ro«te  ber  ®ro^c  ber  ^reu^e 

3.  How   are   the   ordinal    numbers   derived    from    the 
cardinal  numbers?^ 

4.  How  is  the  indefinite  article  ein  (a)  distinguished 
from  the  numeral  ein  (o7ie)  ?  ^ 

5.  Account  for  the  dative  and  the  accusative  after  the 
preposition  in^  in  the  following  sentences 

S5er  5lomg  ^ielt  bie  U^r  in  ber  §anb. 

3)er  ^^ilofop^  ftetfte  bie  ^arte  in  bie  Xafd^c. 


NINTH  LESSON.  31 

6.    (a)  When  is  the  genitive  of  time*  used,  answering 
the  question  when? 

(b)   Account  for  the  genitive  eineS  Xage§  (line  4). 


COMPOSITION. 

Frederick  II.,  the  Great,  was  king  of  Prussia  from  1740 
to  1786.  —  The  philosopher  Moses  Mendelssohn  was  a 
close  friend  of  Lessing.  He  was  a  close  friend  of  the  poet 
Lessing."*  —  The  German  philosopher  Moses  Mendelssohn 
was  a  Jew.  The  great  musician  and  composer  Mendelssohn- 
Bartholdy  was  his  grandson.  —  The  philosopher  was  fre- 
quently a  guest  of  king  Frederick  at  the  castle  of  Sanssouci. 
One  day  *  he  did  not  come  at  the  appointed  hour.  —  The 
king  took  a  pencil  and  wrote  on  a  paper  the  words :  "  Men- 
delssohn is  an  ass.  Frederick  II." — The  philosopher  came 
at  last.  At  last  he  came.  —  The  paper  lay  before  his  seat. 
The  paper  lay  before  the  seat  of  the  philosopher.  —  He  saw 
the  paper,  took  it,  read  it  and  put  it  into  his  pocket.  — 
Frederick  said  to  the  philosopher  :  "  My  dear  Mendelssohn, 
what  have  you  there  ?  Is  that  perhaps  a  love-letter  ?  " 
Then  the  king  asked  the  philosopher :  "  Will  you  not  read 
the  contents  aloud  ?  "  —  The  philosopher  read  :  "  Mendels- 
sohn is  one  ass.  Frederick  the  second.'^  —  The  king  laughed 
heartily. 

CONVERSATION. 

9Bar  ?!Kofe§  3JienbeI§fo^n  ein  Shrift,  ein  Sube,  ein  3Ko^ammc= 
baner  ober  ein  §eibe  ?  2Ser  roar  fein  intimfler  greunb  ?  — 
2Bcr  roar  bamals  ^onig  in  ^reu^en?  2SeId^en  5f?amen  ^attc 
ber  bamalige  ^onig  Don  $reu^en  ?     3Sie  l)ie^  ber  bamaligc 


32 


A   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 


^bnig  oon  ^reufeen?  —  2Bie  ^ieg  ba§  Sd^Io^  beS  ^onigS 
in  ber  3'^d^e  oon  ^otgbam  ?  —  ^am  9JlenbeIgfo^n  an  jenem 
Xage  piinhlic^,  ju  frii^  ober  ju  fpdt  ?  —  2SeIc^e  2Borte  fc^rteb 
ber  ^ontg  auf  ba§  ^J^apier  ?  9JJit  xool^  fc^rieb  er  fie  ?  2luf 
was  fc^rieb  er  fie  ?  —  2Bo  lag  bie  ^arte,  al§  3JJenbelgfo^n 
enblid^  anfam  ?  ©a^  er  fie  ?  Sa§  er  fie  ?  2Ba§  t^at  er 
bamit  ?  —  2Ba§  fragte  i^n  ber  ^bnig  ?  —  2a§  ^Jtenbel^fo^n 
ben  3n^alt  be§  ^^^apier§  oor?  Sluf  rceld^e  jroei  2Borte  legte 
er  befonbern  5lccent  ? 


VOCABULARY. 


the  philosopher         =  ? 
the  honor,  esteem     = 
the  hour  = 

the  watch  (time-piece)  = 
the  scholar  = 


the  friend 
the  guest 
the  impatience 
the  pocket 
the  book 


=  ? 


the  king       =  ? 
the  castle      ^ 
the  remark  = 
the  hand       = 
the  paper     = 


the  lead-pencil  = ' 

the  ass  = 

the  seat,  place  = 

the  love-letter  = 

the  voice  = 

to  appear  = 

to  hold  = 

to  sit,  be  seated  = 

to  answer  = 

to  write  = 

to  read  = 

close,  intimate  = 

certain,  fixed  = 

heartily  = 

from  his  pocket  = 

behind  their  books  = 

with  (a)  loud  voice  = 


the  word  ==? 

the  page  (young  nohleman)   ^ 

the  card  = 

the  contents  = 

to  invite  = 

to  betray,  show  = 

to  remark  = 

to  forget  = 

to  take  = 

to  order  = 

to  laugh  *  = 

royal  = 

loud  = 

in  high  honor*  = 

in  his  hand  = 

without  saying  a  word  ^ 


TENTH  LESSON.  33 


TENTH  LESSON. 


@in  armer  '^(xm,  ber  einen  ©telgfu^  ^atte,  ging  burd^S 
^orf  unb  mu^te  an  eitter  ©d5)ar  ^naben  ooriiber.  ^er  un= 
gegogene  §einrt^  lad^te  iiber  i^n,  ging  ^infenb  Winter  i^m 
^er  unb  fpottete  il^n  au§.  ^a  roanbte  fid^  ber  ^Jlann  urn, 
\ql\)  roe^mutig  auf  ben  ©potter  unb  fagte  ju  i^m :  „^nabe,  5 
id^  ^be  al§  ©olbat  fiirg  SSaterlanb  gefod^ten  ;  metn  Sein  \^CLhz 
id^  in  ber  ©d^lad^t  bei  ©raoelotte  burd)  etne  ^anonenfugel 
oerloren.  liefer  ©tel^fu^  uerbtent  alfo  beinen  ©pott  nid^t." 
®ie  freunblid^en  9Borte  be§  9Jlanne§  brangen  in  aHe  ^er^en. 
^ie  ^naben  gogen  grii^enb  bie  ?D^U^en  t)or  i^m  ah,  unb  §einrid^  10 
fd^amrot  im  ©efid^t,  roagte  nid^t  auf^ublicfen.  @r  fpottete  nie 
me^r  iiber  einen  UngliidElidjien. 


GRAMMAR. 

1.   Distinguish  between  the  plural  forms* 

SSorte   and  SBorter 
©efic^te  "    ©eftrf)ter 
Sanfe      "    Sanfen 
Sdnbe,  33anbe,  33anbcr 


34  ^   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 

2.  (a)  How  are  adjectives  declined  when  used  as  nouns  ?  ^ 

(b)   Decline,  through  sing,  and  plu.,  the  following  adjec- 
tives used  substantively 

the  German  the  old  man  the  unfortmiate  man 

the  German  woman  the  old  woman  the  unfortunate  woman 

a  German  an  old  man  an  unfortunate  man 

a  German  woman  an  old  woman  an  mifortunate  woman 

Germans  old  people  unfortunate  people 

3.  Distinguish  between  toiffen  and  fennen.^    * 

4.  (a)  What  are  the  peculiarities  in  the  conjugation  of 
mixed  *  verbs  ? 

(b)   What  is  the  Grerman  equivalent  of  * 

I  know  (fennen)  thou  namest  he  turns 

I  knew  thou  namedest  he  turned 

I  have  known  thou  hast  named  he  has  turned 

we  bring  you  know  («)iffen)  they  think 

we  brought  you  knew  they  thought 

we  have  brought  you  have  known  they  have  thought 

5.  (a)  State  which  of  the  following  verbs  are  separable 
and  which  inseparable  compounds® 

ticrfpotten  ouSfpotten  umraenben  uerliercn 

tierbienen  obaie^en  oufblicfen 

(b)    Give  of  each  of  these  verbs  the  1.  pers.  sing,  of  the 
present,  past,  and  perfect  indicative. 

6.  Explain  the  idiom  „ct  mu^te'  an  cincr  ©d^at  ^ttabcn 
coriibet." 


TENTH  LESSON.  35 


COMPOSITION. 

A  man  with  a  wooden  leg.  A  man  with  a  wooden  leg  is 
unfortunate.  A  man  who  has  a  wooden  leg,  is  unfortunate. 
The  unfortunate  (subst.)  man  had  a  wooden  leg.  —  The 
poor  man  with  the  wooden  leg  was  an  old  German  soldier 
of  (au§)  the  Franco-German  war.  That  unfortunate  (subst.) 
man  had  fought  for  his  fatherland.  — The  battle  of  (bet) 
Leipzig.  The  battle  of  Waterloo.  The  battle  of  Gettys- 
burg. —  The  poor  (subst.)  man  with  the  wooden  leg  had 
fought  in  the  battle  of  Gravelotte,  on  August  18,  1870. 
He  had  lost  his  left  leg  through  a  cannon-ball  in  the  battle 
of  Gravelotte.  —  Among  the  boys  who  were  in  (auf)  the 
street,  was  Henry.  He  was  a  bad  boy.  The  other  boys 
took  oif  their  caps,  when*  the  old  soldier  passed  by.  Henry 
did  not  look  up.     He  did  not  dare  to  look  up. 

CONVERSATION. 

2Bo  roo^nte  ber  atnte  9)iann,  in  einer  ©tabt  ober  in  einem 
5Dorfe?  2Ba§  ift  grower,  bte  ©tabt  ober  ba§  ^orf  ?  2Ba§ 
ift  ttttt  grb^ten,  bie  ©tabt,  ba§  ©tabtd)en  ober  ba§  ®orf  ?  — 
Slm^erft  ift  ein  ®orf  unb  Sinn  3lrbor  ift  ein  ©tabtd^en  ;  ift 
^^ilabelp^ia  ein  3)orf,  ein  ©tabtd)en  ober  eine  ©tabt  ?  SSaS 
finb  g?en)  5)or!,  ^Baltimore  unb  (S^icago  ?  —  Sft  ^ennf^banien 
auc^  eine  ©tabt  ?  2Ba§  ift  e§,  eine  ©tabt  ober  ein  ©taat  ? 
—  2Ba§  ift  2llabama  ?  Detroit  ?  3JliIn)au!ee  ?  28i§confin  ? 
^Jlic^igan  ?  S3erltn  ?  ^reufeen  ?  —  3"  u)eld)em  ^riege  ^atte 
ber  arme  3Jlann  al§  ©olbat  getcimpft  ?  2Bann  roar  ber  beutfc^= 
frangofifd^e  It'rieg  ?  —  3«  roeld^er  ©d^lad^t  ^atte  er  fein  linfeS 
33ein  oerloren  *^  —  2Bann  roar  bie  ©d^laci^t  bei  ©raoelotte  ? 
2Bag  ift  ba§  SDatum  ber  ©d^lad^t  bei  ©raoelotte  ?    2ln  roelc^em 


36 


A   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 


2:age  fanb  bie  B6)la6)t  bei  ©raoelotte  ftatt  ?  —  2Bann  roar  bie 
©d^Iac^t  bei  SSaterloo  ?  2Ba§  ift  bag  2)atum  ber  ed^la^t  bd 
©ett^Sburg  ? 


VOCABULARY. 

the  leg                  =  ? 

the  wooden  leg    =  ? 

the  soldier    =  ? 

the  village            = 

the  town 

= 

the  city         = 

the  boy                = 

the  fatherland      = 

the  battle      = 

the  cannon-ball  = 

the  word 

= 

the  man         = 

the  heart 

=  9 

the  cap,  hat 

—  9 

the  face 

= 

bad,  mischievous       = 

kind,  friendly 

^ 

blushing  with  shame  = 

to  laugh 

= 

to  limp 

= 

to  scoff,  scom 

= 

to  turn  around 

= 

to  fight 

= 

to  lo?e 

= 

to  deserve 

= 

to  take  off 

== 

to  dare 

= 

to  look  up 

= 

ELEVENTH   LESSON. 


^et  atmc  Steic^e. 


1. 


©in  armer  §olg^auer  ging  eineS  ^age§  iiber  Sanb  unb  fam 
enblid^  miibe  unb  t)erbroffen  bet  einem  ©aft^ofe  an,  roo  er 
fid^  ein  ©Ia§  Tl\l6)  unb  ein  <Bi\xd  Srot  geben  liefe.  @r  roar 
unjufrieben,  ba^  er  feine  3f{ctfe  gu  gu^  madden  mu^te,  unb 
ba^  er  ni^t§  beffere§  gu  eflen  \)aiie,  Salb  barauf  fant  eine 
fd^one  ^utfd^e  angefa^ren,  in  roeld^er  ein  reid^er  §err  ]a%  ber 


ELEVENTH  LESSON.  37 

fic^  eine  portion  falten  33raten  unb  eine  glafd^e  SSein  befteHtc, 
roaS  er  bann  in  fetnem  2Bagen  cerse^rle.  ^er  ^olj^auer  fa^ 
i^m  neibifd^  gu  unb  bad^te :  „  2)  e  m  9J?anne  ge^t  e§  befler  alg 
mir."  ®er  3Reid^e  merfte  e§  unb  fagte  gu  it)m :  „Steber  ^reunb, 
^aben  ©ie  Suft,  mit  mir  §u  taufd^en  ?"  —  „®a§  t)erfte^t  fic^ 
Don  felbft,"  antraortete  ber  ©efragle,  o^ne  fid^  lange  gu  be= 
benfen  ;  „n)enn  ©ie  auSfteigen  unb  mir  alleg  geben  rcoHen, 
mag  ©ie  ^aben,  fo  mill  id^  S^nen  aud^  aEe§  geben,  ma§  ic^ 
^abe." 

GRAMMAR. 

1.  State  which  of  the  following  compound  verbs  are 
separable  and  which  inseparable^ 

onfommen  anfa^ren  BcfteEen  ticrse^ren 

jttfe^en  Ucrftef)en  bcbenfen  ougftetgen 

2.  Account  for  the  idiomatic  use  of  the  perf.  partic.  in 
eine  ^utfd^e  f am  angefa^ren.^ 

3.  Account  for  the  idiom  ^  in 

ein  ©lag  a«  i  I  c^  ein  ©tuc!  33  r  o  t 

eine  portion  33  r  a  t  e  n  eine  ^lafd^e  3B  e  i  n 

4.  Account  for  the  position  of 

lie^  (1.  3)         muBte  (1.  4)  l^atte  (1.  5)  lam  (1.  5) 

fa^  (1.  6)         beftellte  (p.  37  1.  1)        cerse^rte  (p.  37  1.  2) 

5.  Account  for  the  idiomatic^  use  of  the  reflexive  pro- 
noun in  ba§  nerfte^t  f  t  d^  non  felbfl. 

6.  How  are  the  demonstrat.  adjective  ber,  bte,  ba§, 
and  the  definite  artic.  ber,  bie,  ba§,  distinguished  from 
each  other  ?  ^ 


38  ^   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 


COMPOSITION. 


Rich.  Poor.  This  man  is  rich  and  that  man  is  poor. 
The  rich  (subst.)  man.  A  rich  (subst.)  man.  The  rich 
(subst.)  woman.  A  rich  (subst.)  woman.  The  poor  (subst.) 
man.  A  poor  (subst.)  man.  The  poor  (subst.)  woman. 
A  poor  (subst.)  woman.  Rich  (subst.)  people.  Poor  (subst.) 
people.  —  Woodcutters  are  poor  people.  A  poor  wood- 
cutter arrived  at  an  inn.  He  will  arrive  at  an  inn.  He 
has*  arrived  at  an  inn.  He  had*  arrived  at  an  inn.  — 
The  rich  man  orders  a  bottle  of*  wine.  He  ordered  a 
bottle  of  wine.  He  will  order  a  bottle  of  wine.  He  has 
ordered  a  bottle  of  wine.  What  have  you  ordered  ?  —  The 
poor  man  was  discontented.  Why  was  he  discontented? 
Because  he  had  nothing  better  to  eat  than  a  piece  of*  bread. 

CONVERSATION. 

9Ba§  a§  ber  ^olj^auer  in  bem  ©aft^ofe  ?  2Ba§  tran!  er  ? 
2Ba§  beftellte  ber  reid^e  §err  gu  effen  ?  2Ba§  tranf  er  ?  2Bo 
tjer^e^rte  er  beibe§  ?  —  2Bte  ^atte  ber  §oI§l)auer  feine  9Retfe 
gemad^t  ?  3Sie  ber  Sieid^e  ?  —  2Ba§  badbte  ber  §oIg^auer  bei 
ftd^,  al§  er  ben  3fleid^en  in  feiner  ^utfd^e  eflen  unb  trinfen  \a\^  ? 
—  2BeId^e  %x(io^z  ri^tete  ber  Sfleid^e  an  i^n  ?  3Sa§  antraortete 
ber  ^oljl^auer  barauf  ? 

VOCABULARY. 

the  rich  man  =  ?  the  poor  man  =  ? 

the  woodcutter         =  the  inn  = 

the  glass  =  the  milk  = 

the  piece,  slice  =  the  bread  = 

the  journey  =  the  foot  = 

the  coach,  carriage  =  the  gentleman  = 


TWELFTH  LESSON. 


39 


the  portion,  plate 
the  wine 


=  ? 


ill-humored,  peevish  = 

to  arrive  = 

to  drive  up  = 

to  think  = 

to  exchange  situations  = 

to  reply  = 

to  step  out,  alight  = 


the  bottle 
tired 

discontented,  grudg- 
ing, jealous 
to  order 
to  consume 
to  notice 
to  be  understood 
to  deliberate 


}  = 


TWELFTH   LESSON. 


^eir  atme  0lcic^e» 


2. 


3e^t  befall  ber  S^eid^e  feinen  gwei  S3ebienten,  ba^  fie  t^n 
am  bem  SSagen  ^eben  joHten.  D  §immel,  wa^  fur  ein 
Slnblicf!  ©eine  gii^e  roaren  gela^mt,  er  fonnte  nic^t  aufre^t 
ftel^en,  fonbern  mu|te  \x6)  t)on  feinen  Sebienten  fo  lange  mten 
lafien,  bis  bie  ^riidEen  gebrad^t  twurben,  auf  bie  er  fid^  ftii^te.  5 
„5^un/'  fragte  er,  „]^aben  ©ie  nod^  Suft,  mit  mir  gu  taufc^en  ?" 
—  „33eim  §immel  niciit!"  Q,ab  ber  erj^rodtene  ^olj^auer  gur 
Slntwort,  „id^  tDttl  lieber  trodEeneS  ^rot  efjen  unb  babei  gefunb 
fein,  al§  2Bein  unb  33raten  ^aben  unb  mid^  raie  ein  !leine§ 
^inb  t)on  anbern  fu^ren  laffen.  ©ott  be^iite  ©ie!"  mit  10 
biefen  SSorten  ftanb  er  auf  unb  ging  fort.  — „©ie  ^aben  red^l," 
rief  i^m  ber  SReid^e  nad^ ;  „n)enn  <5ie  mir  ^\)x^  gefunben  Seine 


40  ^   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 

geben  fbnnten,  fo  foUten  6ie  meine  ^utfd^e,  metne  3^appen, 
tnein  ©elb,  alleg  bafiir  ^i^ahzn.  (Sin  gefunber  armer  3Jlann  ift 
gliicflid^er,  als  cin  teid^er  ^riippel." 


GRAMMAR. 

1.  Name  the  inseparable  verbal  prefixes.^ 

2.  Name  the  more  common  separable  verbal  prefixes.^ 

3.  State  which  of  the  following  compound  verbs  are 
separable,  and  which  inseparable 

befe^Ien  auffte^en  bepten  nad^rufcn 

4.  Give  principal  parts  of  the  verbs  just  named. 

5.  Account  for  the  use  of  fonbcrn'  in  line  4. 

6.  What  is  the  meaning  of  I  a  f  f  e  n  /  when  used  with  an 
infinitive  ? 

COMPOSITION. 

The  feet  of  the  rich  (subst.)  man  were  paralyzed.  He 
was  not  able  to  walk  or  to  stand  upright.  He  was  lame. 
He  was  a  lame  (subst.)  man.  Lame  (subst.)  people  use 
crutches.  —  Two  attendants  must  lift  the  rich  man  from 
his  carriage,  because  he  could  not  stand  on  his  feet.  —  The 
woodcutter  was  horrified,  when*  he  saw  that.  Now  he  did 
not  want  to  exchange  situations  with  the  rich  (subst.)  man. 
He  said  :  "  It  is  true,  I  have  neither  wine  nor  roast-meat, 
and  yet  I  feel  happy  that  I  am  a  healthy  man."  —  "  You 
are*  right,"  replied  the  rich  man,  "your  good  strong  legs 


TWELFTH  LESSON. 


41 


are  much  more  valuable  than  my  carriage,  my  fine  black 
horses  and  all  my  money.  You  are  poor  but  healthy,  and 
therefore  you  are  richer  than  the  richest  invalid." 


CONVERSATION. 

3Bie  t)iele  Sebiente  ^atte  ber  3fiet(^e  bet  fid^?    2Bag  mu^ten 
biefe  t^un  ?  —  2Barum  ftteg  er  nic^t  jelbft  au^  feiner  £utfc^e  ? 

—  2Bie  ift  ein  5Rann,  ber  nid)t  ge^en  fann  ?  9Bie  ift  einc 
grau,  n)eld)e  nic^t  fe^en  fann  ?  2Bie  ift  ein  ilnabe,  ber  nid^t 
fprec^en  fann  ?  2Sie  ift  ein  9Jidbd)en,  roeld^eg  nid^t  ^oren  fann  ? 
2Sie  ift  eine  $erfon,  bie  nic^t  fpred^en  unb  nic^t  l^bren  fann  ? 

—  2Ba§  ift  eine  la^me  grau  ?  (Sine  la^me  grau  ift  eine 
grau,  bie  [roelc^e]  .  .  .)  2Ba§  ift  ein  blinbeS  9J?abd)en  ? 
2Ba§  ift  ein  tauber  ^nabe  ?  2Ba§  ift  eine  taubftumme  ^erfon  ? 
2Sa§  mu^  ein  Saunter  ^aben,  raenn  er  ge^en  will  ?  2Ba§  benu^t 
ein  Sal)mer  beim  ©e^en  ?  —  SSorauf  ftii^te  fid^  ber  9ieid^e  ?  — 
33enu^te  ber  ^ol^^auer  auc^  ^riidten  beim  ©e^en  ?  2Barum 
braud^te  er  feine  ?  —  2Ba§  ift  beffer,  reid^  unb  babei  franf  gu 
fein  ober  arm  wnb  babei  gefunb  gu  fein?  2Ber  ift  gliicflidier, 
ein  gefunber  5lrmer  ober  ein  reid^er  ^riippel  ?  —  2Ba§  roollte 
ber  Sfteid^e  bem   §olg^auer  fiir  feine  beiben  gefunben  Seine 


VOCABULARY. 

the  attendant   =  ? 

the  aspect,  sight    =  ? 

the  crutch                   = 

the  leg               = 

the  black  horse      = 

the  money                  = 

the  invalid        = 

paralyzed         = 

horrified               = 

dry  bread   = 

healthy             = 

to  order,  command  = 

to  lift,  help     = 

to  stand  upright  = 

to  lean,  repose  on    = 

to  rise             = 

to  go  away           = 

to  be*  right              = 

to  call  after  =  ? 

for  mercy's  sake,  no !  = 


what  a  sight !  :=  ? 

the  Lord  have  you  in  his  keeping !  = 


42  ^   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 


THIRTEENTH   LESSON. 


1. 

So^ann  $eter  ©ctermann,  @oet^e§  ^nt)atfe!retar,  \<x%X  in 
feinem  ^od^intereflanten  9Bet!e  „@efpraci^e  mit  ©oet^e" :  ©ine§ 
XageS  na^men  roir  unfer  TOttagSma^I  im  ©arten  unb  \)Oiii^n 
babci  aOcrlci  gutc  Unter^altung.     Qm   Saufe  be§  ©efprdd^eS 

5  erga^Ite  id^: 

„3c^  ^atte  im  t)origen  ©ontmer  in  ber  ^a\)z  t)on  ^iefurt 
groei  junge  3aun!onige  gefangen,  bie  roa^rjd^einlid^  erft  fiirjlid^ 
i^r  3^efl  tjetlaffen  fatten,  benn  fie  fagen  in  einem  SBufd^e  auf 
einem  Sn^eige  mit  fieben  ©efd^roiftern  in  einer  9^ei^e  unb  liefeen 

10  fid^  t)on  i^ten  Sllten  fiittern.  3d^  na^m  bie  jungen  SSogel  in 
mein  feibeneS  Xafd^entud^  unb  ging  in  ber  9ftid^tung  nad^ 
2Beimar  bi§  an§  <Sd^ii^en^au§,  bann  ted^tg  nad^  ber  3Siefe 
an  ber  3^"^  ^inunter  unb  bann  roieber  lin!§  in  ba§  Heine 
©e^olj.     §ier,  bad^le  i^,  \)(i!\i  bu  Sluice,  einmal  nad^  beinen 

15  3ttunfonigen  gu  fe^en.  21I§  id^  aber  ba§  %\x6:i  offnete,  ent= 
fd^IUpften  fie  mir  beibe  unb  roaren  fogleid^  im  ©ebiifd^  t)er= 
fc^rounben.  —  ®en  folgenben  6onntag  !am  id^  JufaEig  roieber 
an  biefelbe  ©tefle,  unb  ba  id^  bie  Socftone  eineS  9{ol!e^Id^en§ 
^ortc,  fo  Dermutete  id^  ein  ^fJeft  in  ber  9f2a^e,  baS  id^  benn 

20  aud^  balb  fanb." 


THIRTEENTH  LESSON. 


43 


GRAMMAR. 
1.    Give  the  contracted  forms  ^  for 


an  bag 

an  bem 

in  bag 

in  bem 

5U  bem 

auber 

bei  bem 

burc^  baS 

auf  bag 

um  "na^ 

2.    Find  the  German  cognates  of 

says 

high 

(the)  work 

our 

(midday-meal) 

thereby 

young 

(town-)king 

sat 

twig 

seven 

row  (=  line) 

(to)  fodder 

(fowl) 

satin  (adj.) 

I  thought 

I  opened 

I  slipped 

both 

I  heard 

3.    (a)  Distinguish  between  3lblaut  and  Umlaut.^ 

(b)   State  which  of  the  following  vowel-alterations  are 
cases  of  2lblaut  or  Umlaut  respectively 


§onb,  piu.  ^iinbe 

gro§,  compar.  grower 
finbcn,  impf,  fanb 

„     p.  p-  gefunben 


IBucI^,  dimin.  Sud^lein 
rot,  derivat.  rotlid^ 
fprcc^e,  2.  pers.  fpric^ft 
„       3.  pers.  fprid^ft 


4.  (a)  What  is  the  force  of  the  suffix  sici  (erlei)^  ap- 
pended to  cardinal  numbers  ? 

(h)    Illustrate  the  rule  by  examples. 

5.  Account   for  the  genitive  and  accusative  of  time/ 
respectively,  in 

eineg  Xageg  na^men  roir  unfer  aWittaggma^I  \m  ®artcn 
ben  f  olgenben  ©onntag  !am  ic^  roteber  an  biefelbe  ©telle 

6.  What  is  the  force  of  the  inseparable  prefix  etlts,*  as, 
/.  e.,  in  entfc^Iiipfen? 


44  ^   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 


COMPOSITION. 

Who  was  Eckermann  ?  When  and  where  did  he  live  ? 
John  Peter  Eckermann  was  Goethe's  private  secretary  from 
1823  to  1832.  —  In  1830  he  accompanied  Augustus  Goethe, 
the  son  of  the  great  poet,  to  (nad^)  Italy.  —  In  1836,  four 
years  after  the  poet's  death,  he  published  the  first  two 
volumes  of  his  work  "  Conversations  with  Goethe^''  which 
has  been  translated  into  nearly  all  European  languages,  even 
into  (in§)  Turkish.  —  One  day  Goethe  and  his  secretary 
took  their  dinner  in  the  poet's  garden  in  Weimar.  Ecker- 
mann told  a  story  of  two  young  wrens  which  he  had  found 
in  the  nest  of  a  redbreast.  He  had  caught  them,  but  they 
had  slipped  away,  after  he  had  put  them  into  his  silk 
handkerchief. 

CONVERSATION. 

2Ser  roar  ©oet^e  ?  2Sann  unb  roo  \)qX  er  gelebt  ?  ^bnnen 
©ie  mir  ben  %\it\  etne§  2Ber!e0  ober  etne§  ©ebtd)te§  Don 
©oet^e  nennen  ?  2Ber  §at  ba§  S)rama  „gaufl"  gebic^tet  ? 
2Bte  ^eifet  @oet^e§  3JJetflerroer!  ?  —  2Ber  ift  ber  ^id^ter  bet 
SBaKabe  „©rl!onig"  ?  —  3"  loeld^em  %o^)xt  rourbe  ©oet^e  ge^ 
Boren  ?  2Bo  rourbe  er  geboren  ?  3"  roeld^em  ^^^^^e  ftarb  er  ? 
2Bo  ftarb  er?  3SeIcl^e§  roaren  feine  le^ten  2Borte?  2Bte  alt 
roar  er  bet  feinem  2^ob  ?  —  2Ber  roar  in  ben  le^ten  neun  S^^ren 
feine§  SebenS  ©oet^e§  $rit)atfe!retdr  ?  2BeIci^e§  tntereffante 
2Berf  \^Qii  biefer  iiber  ben  grofeen  ^ic^ter  gefd^rieben  ?  —  ©inb 
3aun!bnige  gro^e  ober  fleine  SSogel  ?  SSarum  ^eifet  biefer 
fleine  3SogeI  ein  „^onig"  ?  Nennen  ©te  bie  gabel  com 
3aunfomg  nic^t  ?  6oU  id^  fie  3^"^"  er^a^Ien  ?  ©o  ^bren 
©ie! 


THIRTEENTH  LESSON. 


45 


3)ie  33ogeI  raoUten  einntal  einen  ^onig  l^aben  unb  fagten :  „3)er= 
jenige  foU  unfer  £onig  jetn,  ber  am  ^oc^ften  fliegen  !ann.  2)er 
3lbler,  ber  gro^te  unb  ftcirffte  oon  alien,  flog  ^o\)tx  al^  alle  anbern. 
@r  rou^te  aber  nid^t,  baf;  in  feinen  raeid^en  33ruftfebern  ein  fleincr 
SBogel  faf;.  211^  ber  2lbler  enblic^  nicf)t  p^er  fliegen  fonnte,  ba 
er^ob  fic^  biefer  !Ieine  SSogel  unb  flog  nod^  etraag  {)of)er  al^  jener. 
©eit  jenem  Xage  ift  ber  ^leine  ber  ^onig  ber  SSbgel,  unb  ba  er 
feinen  fleinen  ^alaft  meift  in  einen  '^a\xn  baut,  f o  ^ei^t  er  „3  «  u  n  = 
f  ottig." 

2Bie  gefallt  S^nen  biefe  gabel  ?    ^onnen  ©ie  biefelbe  n)ieber= 
^olen  ?     3Serfuc^en  6ie  eg ! 


VOCABULARY. 


the  work 

the  dinner 

the  wren 

the  bush,  shrub 

the  brothers  and  sisters 

the  bird 

the  direction 

the  grove 

the  place,  spot 

highly  interesting 

last  summer 

lately 

to  the  right 

at  once 

the  same 


the  conversation 

the  course 

the  nest 

the  twig 

the  row  (=  file,  line) 

the  handkerchief 

the  meadow 

the  Sunday 

the  redbreast 

of  all  kinds 

probably 

silk,  of  silk  (adj.) 

to  the  left 

next,  following 

soon 


46  ^   COURSE  IN  GERMAN 


FOURTEENTH   LESSON. 


2. 

„3Bie  gro^  abet  war  mein  ©rftaunen,  al§  id^  in  biefem  ^f^efte 
neben  brei  beina^e  fliiggen  9^ot!e^lc^en  auc^  meine  beiben  tieinen 
Saunfonige  fanb,  bie  fid^  ^ier  gang  gemiitlid^  einquartiert  l)atten 
unb  fid^  oon  ben  alien  3tot!e^Id^en  fiittem  He^en.     3^  ^^"^  i" 

5  ^o^em  ©rabe  glucflid^  iiber  biefe  merfroiirbige  ©ntbedtung. 
^a  i^r  \o  flug  feib,  bad^te  ic^  bet  mir  felbft,  unb  eud^  in  eurer 
^fiot  fo  gut  5U  ^elfen  roi^t,  unb  ba  bie  guten  Sftotfe^lc^en  fic^ 
eurer  fo  ^ilfreid^  angenommen  \)(xhtn,  fo  bin  id^  xotxi  entfemt, 
ba§  gaftfreunblid^e   SSerpltnig  gu  ftbren ;    im   ©egenleil,   \6) 

10  n)Unfd^e  eud^  t)iel  ©liidt!" 

„^a§  ift  eine  ber  be[ten  ©efd^id^ten  au§  bem  ^ierleben,  bie 
mir  je  gu  D^ren'gefommen  ift,"  fagte  ©oet^e.  „2Ber  ba§  ^brt 
unb  nid^t  an  @ott  glaubt,  bem  fonnen  9Jlofe§  unb  bie  ^rop^eten 
nic^t   ^elfen.     2)a§  ift  e§,  n)a§  id^  bie  SlUgegenroart   ©otte§ 

15  nenne,  roeld^er  einen  ^eil  feiner  unenblid^en  Siebe  iiberaH  t)er= 
breitet  unb  eingepflangt  \:^(!ii  unb  fd^on  im  Xiere  baSjenige  al§ 
^nofpe  anbeutet,  roaS  im  3JJenfd^en  gur  fd^onften  Sliite  fommt. 
ga^ren  ©ie  ja  in  S^ren  ©tubien  unb  33eobad^tungen  fort! 
©ie  f(^einen  barin  ein  bejonbereS  ©liicf  ju  ^aben  unb  fonnen 

20  noc^  gu  unfd^d^baren  ^tefultaten  fommen." 


FOURTEENTH  LESSON.  47 


GRAMMAR. 


1.  (a)  What  are  the  peculiarities  in  the  declension  of 
foreign  nouns  ending  in  stum  ?  ^ 

(b)  Give  genitive  sing,  and  nominative  plu.  of  ba§ 
©tubium  ;  ba§  ©pmnafium  ;  ba§  Saboratorium ;  ba§  Xern= 
torium. 

2.  Account  for  the  auxiliary  ift  ^  in 

bie  ©efd)id)te  i  ft  mir  ju  D^ren  gefommen 

3.  (a)  How  are  the  nouns  ending  in  suttg  *  formed,  and 
what  is  their  gender  and  general  character  ? 

(h)  Apply  the  rule  to  the  nouns  ©ntbecfung  and  33e= 
obad^tung. 

4.  Account  for  the  forms  of  the  personal  and  possessive 
pronouns'*  in  the  following  sentences 

ba  i  ^  r  fo  flug  feib 

bie  3ftotfeJ)lc^en  f)aben  fief)  eurer  angenommen 

i  c^  raiinfc^e  e  u  d^  t)iel  %\M 

i  c^  fanb  m  e  i  n  e  beiben  f leinen  ^awnfontge 

i ^ r  roi^t  eud)  in  eurer  9?ot  ju  fielfen 

bie  ©ejc^id^te  ift  tn  i  r  ^u  D^ren  gefommen 

fa^ren  ©ie  in  S^ren  ©tubien  unb  Seobac^tungen  fort  I 

5.  Substitute  in  the  following  sentences  the  perfect 
tense  for  the  present 

i^r  feib  fo  f lug  i^r  ra  t  ^  t  cuc^  ju  ^elf en 

ic^  b  i  n  meit  entfernt  id^  to  ii  n  f  c^  e  euc^  ®luc! 

bie  @efrf)ic^te  f  ommt  mir  ju  D^ren       mer  ba^  ^ort 
ba^  i  ft  eg,  roag  ic^  bie  ^lUgegenmart  ©otteg  n  e  n  n  e 


48  ^   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 

6.    (a)    What  is  the  English  equivalent  for 

in  ^o^em  ©rabe  (1.  4)  alg  ^nofpe  (1.  16) 

(b)  Give  a  few  other  adverbial  phrases  in  which,  con- 
trary to  English  usage,  no  article  is  used  in  German.* 

COMPOSITION. 

My  surprise  is  great.  His  surprise  was  great.  Her 
surprise  will  be  great.  Our  surprise  has  been  great.  Your 
surprise  had  been  great.  The  surprise  of  the  friend  of 
the  great  poet  was  great.  —  He  found  in  one  and  the  same 
nest  three  young  redbreasts  and  his  two  little  wrens.  His 
surprise  was  great,  when*  he  found  his  two  little  wrens  in 
the  nest  of  the  redbreasts.  When  he  found  the  wrens  in 
the  nest  of  the  redbreasts,  his  surprise  was*  great.  Why 
was  his  surprise  so  great  ?  Because  his  two  little  wrens 
were  in  the  same  nest  with  three  young  redbreasts. 

CONVERSATION. 

28o  roaren  bie  groei  jungen  Sou^^onige  ?  2Bo  fanb  fic 
©cfermann  ?  —  SBie  t)iele  junge  3^otfe^lc^en  waxen  in  bent 
^^efl  ?  2Bte  t)tele  junge  3flwnJonige  roaren  baritt  ?  2Bie  oiele 
juTtge  SBogel  roaren  gujammen  in  bem  etnen  fleinen  S^Jefte  ?  — 
^bnnen  ©ie  ba§  nid^t  fagen  ?  §aben  ©te  nic^t  abbieren  ge= 
lernt  ?  2i5te  vkl  ift  3  +  2  ?  —  ^bnnen  <Ste  fubtra^ieren  ? 
2Bie  t)iel  ift  3  —  2  ?  ^onnen  6ie  multiplijteten  ?  2Bie  t)tcl 
ift  3X2?  —  3Sa§  t^aten  bie  alten  3^otte^lc^en  ?  2Bie  oiele 
fleine  3SogeI  mu^ten  bie  beiben  alten  SRotfe^ld^en  fiittern  ?  — 
2Bte  nannte  ©oet^e  bie  ©efd^id^te,  bie  i^m  ^cfermann  erjd^It 
^atte  ? 


FIFTEENTH  LESSON. 


49 


VOCABULARY. 

the  surprise  =  ?  the  redbreast 

the  degree  =  the  discovery 

the  contrary  =  the  good  luck,  fortune : 

the  animal  =  the  animal-life 

the  prophet  =  the  omnipresence 

the  love  =  the  bud 


the  wren  =  ? 

the  need,  distress  = 
the  story  = 

the  ear  = 

the  part  = 

the  man,  mankind= 


the  flow^er,  blossom       =  ? 
the  observation  = 


happy  = 

smart,  intelligent    = 
hospitable  = 

especial,  particular  = 


the  study 
the  result 

pleasant,  comfortable 

remarkable 

helpful,  benevolent 

boundless 

inestimable 


FIFTEENTH   LESSON. 


mix  «ttcf. 


^I^tlabelp^ia,  ben  28.  aWat  1897. 

Sieber  §crr  $Ri(f)ter! 

SBenn  id^  nic^t  irre,  roaren  ©ie  oorigeS  3a^r  in  ©aranac 
Safe  in  ben  SlbironbacfS.  3^^  eriaube  mir  ba^er,  bet  S^nen 
(Srfunbigungen  iiber  bie  bortigen  3Serl)dltmfle  einjujte^en,  ba 
bie  ©efunb^eit  meiner  grau  mid^  nottgt,  Idngere  ^z\i  in  einem 
milben  unb  gleid^md^igen  ^lima  j^ujubringen. 


50  ^   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 

3ft  bie  Suft  bort  roirHic^  fe^r  roo^Itl^uenb  fiir  ^ranfe  ?  6inb 
Qute  Sirgte  in  bem  ^orfe  ?  2Ba§  fiir  ©aft^bfe  finbet  man  bort  ? 
3ft  bie  S3ebienung  gut,  obcr  roiirbc  e§  tatfam  fcin,  cine  gu= 
oerlaffige  ^erfon  oon  ^ier  mitjune^men  ?  2Bie  ftnb  bie  ^reife 
5  fiir  ^oft  unb  S^^"^^'^  ?  3P  ^§  oorteil^after,  mbblierte  Simmer 
5u  mieten  unb  nur  bie  ^Ka^Ijeiten  im  ©aft^of  gu  ne^men,  obcr 
roiirben  ©ie  mir  raten,  auc^  im  ©aft^of  ju  mo^nen? 

3Bcnn  <Sie  mir  biefe  gragen  beantroorten  unb  nod^  anbere 
$un!te  Don  3"^^^^f!s  beifiigen  raoUten,  fo  roiirben  ©ie  mic^ 
10  5u  grogem  2)anf  oerpflid^ten. 
35eften§  griifeenb  oerbleibe  id^ 

3^r  ergebener 

!WaE  §ofmeifler. 


GRAMMAR. 

1.  Give  the  ordinal*  numbers  from  1  to  31. 

2.  (a)  State  two  ways  of  giving  a  date^  in  German. 

{b)    Give  in  two  ways  the  date  in  the  sentence  "  Schiller 
was  born  Nov.  10,  1759." 

3.  Give  gender,  meaning,  genitive  sing,  and  nominative 

plu.  of 


Sricf 

^crr 

f^ou 

Sa^t 

©rfuttbigung 

gScrpItniS 

3eit 

Suft 

3lrat 

2)orf 

©aft^of 

^erfon 

^rci§ 

3immcr 

2Wa^l5eit 

^agc 

^unft 

FIFTEENTH  LESSON.  51 

4.  {a)  State  a  peculiarity  in  the  conjugation  of  verbs 
of  foreign  origin  ending  in  sietett/  and  apply  the  rule  to 
moblieren  ;  ftubieren  ;  abbieren  ;  bit)ibteren. 

(h)  Substitute,  in  the  following  sentences,  the  perfect 
tense  for  the  present 

ein  ^rcijtbent  unb  ein  ^ongre^  regieren  bie  9ieput)Uf  ber 

33eretnigten  ©taaten  con  2lmerifa 
rote  lange  ft  u  b  i  e  r  e  n  ©ie  frf)on  beutfc^  ? 
auf  roelc^er  beutfc^en  Unioerfitdt  ft  u  b  i  e  r  t  ^^r  33rubcr  ? 
bie  2lrmee   marfc^iert   gegen  3)ie^  unb   attacfiert  bie 

^ranjofen  bei  ©racelotte 

5.  (a)  What  relation  exists  between  bort  (p.  50  1.  1)  and 
bortig*  (1.5)? 

(b)    Give  at  least  three  adjectives  formed  from  adverbs. 

6.  Give  the  two  future  tenses  and  the  two  conditionals 
act.  of 

id^  erlaube  ntir 

bie  ©efunb^eit  nteiner  ^rau  3  ra  i  n  g  t  ntid^ 

wag  r  a  t  e  n  ©ie  mir  gu  t^un  ? 

©ie  cerpfHc^ten  mic^  5U  gro^em  3)an!e 


COMPOSITION. 

Mr.  Smith.  To  (dat.)  Mr.  Smith.  For  Mr.  Smith.  Dear 
Mr.  Smith  !  My  dear  Mr.  Smith  !  —  Mrs.  Brown.  To  Mrs. 
Brown.  For  Mrs.  Brown.  Dear  Mrs.  Brown !  My  dear 
Mrs.  Brown  !  —  Miss  Johnson.  To  Miss  Johnson.  For  Miss 
Johnson.  Dear  Miss  Johnson  !  My  dear  Miss  Johnson  ! 
—  Dear  Charles  !  My  dear  Charles  !  Dear  friend  (mas.) ! 
My  dear   friend    (mas.)  !  —  Dear   Elizabeth  !     My  dear 


52  ^   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 

Elizabeth  !  Dear  friend  (fern.)  !  My  dear  friend  (fern.)  ! 
—  You  oblige  me  greatly.  You  will  oblige  me  greatly. 
You  would  oblige  me  greatly.  —  Yours  truly  Charles 
Fletcher.  Yours  truly  Elizabeth  Baker.  —  The  first  of* 
January  is  New  Year's  Day.  —  On  the  22nd  of  February 
we  celebrate  Washington's  birthday.  —  Easter  falls  on  the 
first  Sunday  after  the  first  full  moon  which  comes  after 
the  21st  of  March.  —  Palm-Sunday  is  the  Sunday  before 
Easter.  —  The  seventh  Sunday  after  Easter  is  Whit- 
sunday. —  Decoration-Day  comes  on  the  30th  of  May.  — 
The  schools  close  in  June  and  then  the  long  vacation  be- 
gins. —  The  fourth  of  July  is  the  day  of  the  Declaration 
of  Independence.  —  On  the  last  Thursday  in  November  we 
have  Thanksgiving-Day,  and  on  the  25th  of  December  we 
celebrate  Christmas.  New  Year's  Day,  Washington's  Birth- 
day, Decoration-Day,  the  day  of  the  Declaration  of  Inde- 
pendence, Thanksgiving-Day  and  Christmas  are  holidays. 


CONVERSATION. 

9Bie  ^ei^t  bet  5lbfenber  biefeS  SriefeS  ?  2Bie  ^ei^t  ber 
Slbrefjal  ?  —  3n  roelc^er  ©tabt  roo^nt  ber  5(6fenber  ?  2BeIc^eg 
ift  ba§  Saturn  be§  33rtefeg  ?  —  ^er  roieoielte  ^omi  be§  3a^re§ 
ifl  ber  3Kai  ?  2Bie  oiele  Xage  ^at  er  ?  2Beld^eg  offentlic^e  geft 
fdHt  auf  ben  SOften  9Jiai  ?  S^iW^n  roelc^en  groei  ^Jionaten  liegt 
ber  Mai  ?  —  2Bte  t)tele  ^age  l)at  ber  2lpril  ?  ber  Sunt  ?  — 
SBeld^e  ^Honate  l^aben  jeber  31  Xage  ?  —  3«  ^^^  fw^  ^^"^"^ 
Sa^re  ^t  ber  gebruar  29  Xage  ?  —  2Bte  t)iele  ^a\)xe^exkn  giebt 
e§  ?  —  2ln  roelc^em  Stage  ifl  ber  grii^Itng^anfang  ?  2Bann  be= 
ginnt  ber  ©inter  ?  —  SBeld^e  Sa^re^jeit  ^aben  Sie  am  liebften  ? 
SBeld^e  Jreuben  bietet  un§  ber  SBinter  ? 


SIXTEENTH  LESSON. 


53 


VOCABULARY. 


=  ? 


the  letter 

the  health  = 

the  time  = 

the  air  = 

the  sick  (subst.)  woman  = 

the  village  = 

the  service  = 

the  price  = 

the  room  = 

the  query,  question  = 

the  interest  = 

last  year  = 

to  spend  some  time  = 

to  oblige  greatly  = 


the  inquiry 

the  wife 

the  climate 

the  sick  (subst.)  man 

the  physician 

the  hotel 

the  person 

the  board  (=  fare) 

the  meal 

the  point 

the  thanks* 

to  make  inquiries 
to  live  in  the  hotel 


SIXTEENTH   LESSON. 


^nttnottfc^tetben* 


Baltimore,  am  30.  max  1897. 

SBerter  §err  §ofmetfter! 

©oeben  er^alte  x^  g^ten  33nef  com  28.  biefeS  9Jlonat§  unb 
beetle  mid^,  benjelben  i\x  beantroorten. 

@S  t^ut  mir  letb,  bag  g^re  grau  ©ema^lin  !rdn!Itd^  x\i, 
^offe  jebod^,  bag  i^r  ber  2lufent^alt  in  ©aranac  Sa!e  ebenjo  gut 
be!ommen  mbge,  rote  mir;  id^  bin  namlid^  bort  oon  einem 
^artndcfigen  §uften  ooHftdnbig  ge^eilt  toorben. 


54  ^   COURSE  IN  GERMAN.      - 

^a§  ^lima  ift  au^crorbentlid^  milb  unb  gletd^mdgtg,  fo  ba^ 

man  fic^  ben  ganjen  3^ag  im  greien  auf^alten  !ann.     Br.  filler 

ift  cin  au^gejeid^neter  Slrjt,  ben  id^  S^nen  mit  gutem  ©eroifjen 

empfe^len  !ann.    2)ie  ©afl^ofe  beS  DrteS  laf^en  t)iel  gu  roiinfc^en 

5  iibrtg,  benn  ©ie  finben  bort  nic^tg  t)on  ben  Sequemlic^feiten, 

an  bie  ©ie  al§  ©ro^fldbter  geroo^nt  finb,  tro^  ber  ^flero  3)orfer 

^reife.    UbrigenS  finbet  man  fid^  fd^neH  in  fold^e  SSer^dltniffe. — 

Dbft,  3JliId^,  33utter  unb  gleifd^  finb  oorjiiglid^,  bie  3w^ereitung 

jeboc^  nur  mittelmd^ig.    ^enn  ©ie  ein  geinfd^medter  finb,  fo 

10  miiffen  6ie  auf  jeben  gaU  eine  ^od^in  mitbringen.  —  ^^eater, 

^onjerte   unb   bergleid^en    3etflreuungen   giebt   e§  bort  nid^t. 

3)afUr  roerben  ©ie  reid^lid^en  @rfa^  in  ber  ^errlid^en  Umgebung 

finben,  roo  ©ie  tdglid^  bie  fd^bnften  5lu§fliige  madden  !onnen. 

§offentIid^  roerben  S^nen  biefe  menigen  ^^^unftc  t)on  cinigem 

15  5Ru^en  fein. 

©mpfe^len  ©ie  mid^  gefdHigft  '^\)xtx  gtau  ©ema^Iin  unb 
feien  ©ie  l^erjlid^ft  gegrii^t  oon 

S^rem  ergebenen 

$aul  Sflid^ter. 


GRAMMAR. 

1.  Give,  together  with  the  article,  the  names  of   the 
days  and  months  ^  in  German. 

2.  State  the  meaning  of  the  demonstrative  adjectives^ 
berfelbe  and  berjenige,  and  decline  in  sing,  and  plu. 

bcrjclbc  fd^onc  Xag      bicjenige  gutc  ^rau      baffclbe  gro^c  3:§catet 


SIXTEENTH  LESSON.  55 

3.  {a)   What  is  the  difference  in  the  declension  of  the 
personal  and  the  reflexive  pronouns  ?  ^ 

(b)    Translate  the  accusatives  of  the  personal  and  re- 
flexive pronouns 

me  thee  him  her 

us  you  them 

myself  thyself  himself*  herself* 

ourselves  yourselves  themselves* 

4.  Give  the  German  impersonal  *  idioms  for 

I  am  sorry  I  am  well  I  succeed 

he  was  sorry  we  were  well  do  you  succeed  ? 

she  has  been  sorry  we  had  been  well  has  he  not  succeeded  ? 

5.  Explain  the  position  ^  of 

ift  (1.  5)  moge  (1.  7)  !ann  (p.  64  1.  2) 

fann  (p.  54  1.  4)  finb  (p.  54  1.  6)  finb  (p.  54  1.  9) 

6.  State  the  meaning  and  conjugate  the  present  and 
perfect  indicative  act.  of  ^ 

ic^  beetle  mic^  id^  eriaube  tntr 

ic^  empfe^Ie  mic^  ic^  fc^meic^Ie  mir 

id^  l^alte  tni;c^  auf 


COMPOSITION. 

I  received  your  letter  yesterday.  Have  you  received 
my  letter?  —  What  do  you  say  ?  You  have  not  received 
my  letter  of  the  day  before  yeste'rday  ?  —  Your  letter  of 
the  19th  I  received  this  morning.  —  I  received  his  letter 
and  answered  the  same  at  once.  —  The  mild  air  of  the 
mountains  will  do  you  good.  I  hope  that  the  mild  climate 
and  salubrious  air  may  restore  your  health.  —  May  the 


56  ^   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 

salubrious  air  of  those  mountains  restore  your  health  !  — 
Are*  there  good  physicians  in  that  part  of  the  country? 
I  know  several  excellent  doctors  in  that  little  town.  — 
There  are  three  hotels  in  the  village,  but  not  one  of  them 
is  good.  Fruit,  cream,  milk,  butter,  meat  and  vegetables 
are  very  fine ;  the  cooking,  however,  is  poor. 

CONVERSATION. 

SBo  roo^nt  §err  S^td^ter  ?  3"  roeld^em  ©taate  ber  Union 
licgt  Baltimore  ?  2Bie  ^ei^t  bie  §auptftabt  jeneS  ©taateS  ?  — 
2So  ift  bie  ^Jlarinefc^ule  ber  3Sereinigten  6taaten  fUr  ©ec= 
offijiere  ?  28o  ift  bie  3Sereinigte  (Staaten=^rteg§afabemie  ?  3n 
roelc^em  6taate  liegt  2Befl  $oint  ?  —  2Bie  ^ei^t  bie  §auptftabt 
be§  ©taates  5^en)  3)or!?  2ln  roeld^em  gluffe  liegt  5llbanr)? 
2Barum  ^eifet  ber  §ubfon  aud^  ber  3R^ein  t)on  5lmeri!a  ?  3" 
roelc^em  ©ebirge  entfpringt  er  ?  —  2Bte  ift  ba§  ^lima  in  ben 
SlbironbadtS  ?  3ft  bag  Seben  in  ben  ©aft^bfen  bort  teuer  ober 
binig  ?  ©iebt  e§  bort  2:^eater  unb  ^ongerte  ?  —  2Ba§  bietet 
reid^lid^en  (Srfa^  bafiir  ? 

VOCABULARY. 

the  Stay,  sojourn  =  ?  the  cough  =  ? 

Ihe  climate  =  the  o^n  air  = 

the  physician  =  the  conscience  = 

the  hotel,  inn  =  the  place,  town  = 

the  comfort  =  the  inhabitant  of  a  large  city  := 

the  price  =  the  fruit  = 

the  milk  =  -  the  butter  = 

the  meat  =  the  cooking  = 

a  nice  feeder,  gourmet^  the  cook  (mas.)  = 

the  cook  (fem.)  =  the  theater  = 

the  concert  =  the  amusement  = 

the  reparation  :=  the  surroundings  = 


SEVENTEENTH  LESSON. 


57 


the  excursion 
to  answer 
to  do  good 
to  recommend 
to  greet 

sickly 

extraordinary 

even,  uniform 

splendid 


to  hasten,  hurry 
to  hope 

to  cure,  relieve 
to  bring  along 

sick 

persistent,  severe 

mild 

excellent 

ordinary 


SEVENTEENTH   LESSON. 


®iti  ^efurfi  bci  ©^atle^  ^icfen^* 


3n  feinem  Sudjie  „@in  Sefud^  bei  6^rle§  ^idtenS  im 
©ommer  1857"  \aq,i  §an§  (S^riftian  2lnberfen,  ber  beru^mte 
bdnifc^e  ®td5)ter  unb  Wdx6)zncxial}kx : 

„21I§  x6)  am  12.  Sum  in  ©abg^iQ  anfam,  roar  3)ic!en§' 
gamilie  nodj)  nid)t  oietjetin  ^age  auf  i^rem  Sanbfi^  geroefen.  5 
®ie  Umgegenb  unb  afle  ©pajiergange  roaren  i^nen  nod)  neu. 
33alb  fanb  x6)  aber  felbft  bie  fd^bnften  $un!te  in  ber  3f2ad^bar= 
fd^aft  ^erau§,  unb  nad)  einem  t)on  biefen,  bem  ^bd)ften  tjon 
©abs^in,  fu^rte  id^  2)tc!en§  unb  feine  gamilie.  ®er  2Beg 
bort^in  ging  iiber  bie  breite  Sanbflra^e,  an  roelc^er  ein  3Sirt§=  10 
^au§  liegt.  3luf  bem  ©d^ilbe  beflelben  raaren  jur  ©rinnerung 
an  bie  33ebeutung  t)on  ©abS^iU  burc^  6^afefpeare§  ©d^aufpiel 
„§einrici^  IV.",  auf  ber  einen  6eite  bie  luftigen  SSeiber  t)on 


58  A   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 

SSinbfor,  auf  ber  anbern  galflaff  unb  %xmi  §einri(i^  abgebilbet. 
3Som  2Sirt§^au§  fu^rle  ein  ^o^Iroeg  jroifd^en  griinen  Saunen 
gu  einer  ©ruppe  oon  Sauern^dufern  ^inauf.  2)ie  9J?auern  ber 
§aufcr  roaren  t)on  3Setn  iiberroad^fen,  unb  lange,  raei^e  ©ar= 
5  binen  ^ingen  an  ben  genftem.  ^ii^e  unb  6ci^afe  graften  auf 
ber  2Biefe." 

GRAMMAR. 

1.  Give  all  1.  persons  sing.,  active  and  passsive,  in- 
dicative and  subjunctive  of  finben  ;  ^erau^finben  ;  ne^men  ; 
mitne^men. 

2.  (a)  What  are  the  characteristics  of  the  mixed  ^  declen- 
sion? 

(h)  Give  meaning,  genitive  sing.,  and  nominative  plu.  of 

ber  Sauer  ber  ^ac^bar  ber  ©ee 

ber  ©tra^l  ba^  Sluge 

3.  Give,  together  with  the  defin.  article,  the  nominative 
sing,  of  the  following  plurals 

©pajiergdnge  ^unttc  SCeiber  ^aum 

S3auern^aufer  2Rauern  ©arbinen  ^enfter 

^u^e  ©c^afe 

4.  Distinguish  between 

^in^        and  ^er 
roo^in?    "    roofer? 
bort^in    "    bort^er 
^inauf      "    ^erauf 
^inaug     "    ^erau^ 

5.  (a)  What  is  the  normal^  the  inverted,  the  transposed 
position  ^  or  order  of  words  ? 


SEVENTEENTH  LESSON.  59 

(b)  State  the  word-order  of  each  of  the  following 
sentences 

3n  feinem  $8ud^e  f  a  g  t  2lnbcrfen. 

2llg  ic^  anfam. 

S)ie  Umgegenb  roar  i^tien  neu. 

Salb  f  anb  ic^  felbft  bie  fc^on[ten  ^un!te  ^erauS. 

2)er  SBeg  ging  iiber  bie  ^anbftra^e,  an  roelc^er  ein  2Birt^f|au§  liegt. 

6.    State  their  meaning  and  compare  the  adverbs  * 
too^l  baih  gem 

COMPOSITION. 

We  have  in  our  school-library  the  works  of  Charles 
Dickens  in  19  volumes.  —  Inns  have  sign-boards.  —  On 
the  sign-board  of  an  inn  near  Gadshill  were  represented 
on  the  one  side  the  merry  wives  of  Windsor,  and  on  the 
other  side  Prince  Henry  and  Falstaff.  —  Gadshill  is  the 
name  of  a  hill  in  the  county  of*  Kent  in  England.  — 
Charles  Dickens's  country-seat  was  near  Gadshill.  — It  was 
in  the  summer  of  1857  that  Hans  Christian  Andersen 
went  to  Gadshill  and  remained  there  several  weeks  with 
his  friend  Charles  Dickens  and  his  family.  —  The  walls 
of  the  houses  of  the  peasants  were  overgrown  with  grape- 
vine. 

CONVERSATION. 

2Bo  finb  ©te  geboren,  in  ©nglanb,  ©eutfd^Ianb,  granfreic^ 
ober  in  2lmen!a  ?  ©inb  ©ie  ein  ©nglanber  (eine  ©nglanberin), 
ein  2)eutfc^eif  (eine  ®eutfd)e),  ein  granjoje  (eine  grangbfin)  ober 
ein  Slmerifaner  (eine  Slmerifanerin)  ?  —  2Bar  (S^arleS  2)icten§ 
ein  5lmeri!aner  ?  9Bo  ift  er  geboren  ?  3n  weld^er  gro^en  ©tabt 
©nglanbS  lebte  er?     2So  roo^nte  er  im  ©ommer  beS  3a^re§ 


60  ^  COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 

1857?  3n  roeld^er  engltfd^en  ©raffd^aft  liegt  ©abS^tU  $Iace? 
3n  tr)eld)em  %nU  ©nglanbg  liegt  ^ent?  SSer  befud^te  i^n  in 
©abg{)iU  ?  —  9Bar  §an§  S^riflian  2lnberjen  ami)  ein  ©ngldnber  ? 
2SeIc^eg  Sanb  war  feine  §eimat?  2BeI(^e§  wax  jeine  9JIutter= 
fprad^e  ?  §aben  ©ie  feine  DJiard^en  gelefen  ?  —  2BeId^eg  ift  3^re 
3J?utterfprad^e  ?  ^onnen  ©ie  auc^  etma^  beutfc^  fpred^en,  lefen 
unb  fd)retben ?  —  SBer  ^at  „DIioer  2;n)tft"  unb  „^id^ola§ 
3^idtleb9"  gefd^rieben?  2Ber  ift  ber  S^erfaffer  von  „®a§ 
§eimc^en  am  §erb"?  —  2Ber  ift  ber  ^ic^ter  be§  2)rama§ 
„§einrid^  IV."?  ma^  finb  „2)ie  Sufligen  SBeiber  Don 
SSinbfor/'  ein  Xrauerfpiel,  ein  Suftfpiel  obet  ein  ^iftorifd^eS 
2)rama  ?  —  2Ber  ^at  ba§  ©ebid^t  gefd^rieben,  roeld^eg  in  beutfd^er 
ttberje^ung  f o  beginnt : 

2)te  5«ac^t  fant  auf  ber  2llpen  3oc^, 
3)a  509  burc^g  Xf)ai  ein  SCanb'rer  nod^; 
2)er  trug  ein  banner  in  ber  ^anb, 
SBorauf  t>a^  frembe  2J?otto  ftanb : 
Excelsior  \ 


VOCABULARY. 

the  visit  =  ?  the  country-seat  =.? 

the  surrounding  country  =  the  walk  = 

the  neighborhood  =  the  highway  = 

the  inn,  tavern  =  the  sign-board  = 

the  memory  =  the  significance,  importance  = 

the  drama  =  the  hollow  way,  defile  = 

the  hedge,  fence  =  the  group  = 

the  country-house  =  the  wall  = 

the  curtain  :=  the  window  = 

the  cow  =  the  sheep  = 

the  meadow  =  at  Charles  Dickens's  = 

not  yet  two  weeks  =  the  way  thither  = 


EIGHTEENTH  LESSON.  61 


EIGHTEENTH   LESSON. 


2. 

„3Son  bem  ^od^flen  ^unfte  ^atte  man  etne  rounberfc^one  2lu§= 
fid^t.     2)er  3^orben  t)on  ^ent  roirb  mil  5Rec^t  ©nglanbS  ©arten     . 
genannt.     ®a§  Sluge  iiberbltdtt  gtiine  2Btefen,  gelbe  ^ornfelber, 
SSdIber  unb  2;orfmoore,  unb  bei  flarem  SSetter  !ann  man  fogar 
bie  3^orbfee  fe^en.     2)ie  Sanbfc^aft  befi^t  graar  feinen  Sanbfee,    5 
aber  meilenroeit  ^at  man  bie  2:;^emfe,  bie  fid^  breit  unb  gidngenb 
ba^infc^ldngelt.      Dft  gingen  mir  be§  Slbenbg  ^inauf  unb  be= 
trac^leten  ben  Untergang  ber  6onne,  beren  ©tra^Ien  bie  St^emfe 
n)ie  mit  ©olb  Ubergoffen.     2luf  biefem  ©runbe  geigten  fid^  bonn 
bie  6d^iffe  roie  bunfle  ©il^ouetten.     3Son  ben  Sanb^dufern  10 
tings  ^erum  flieg  blduUrfier  9^aud^  au^  ben  ©d^ornfteinen:     2)ie 
©raS^iipfer  girpten,  unb  ein  unenblidjier  grieben  mar  iiber  bie 
©egenb  auggebreitet,  ber  nod^  burd^  ben  ^lang  ber  Slbenbglocfen 
erp^t  murbe.     2)er  3JJonb  ging  auf,  runb,  grog  unb  rot,  bi§ 
er  in  reiner  ^lar^eit  leud^tete,  unb  nerfe^te  mid)  oft  in  ben  15 
©ebanfen,  bag  bieS  alleS  nur  ein  fd^oner  ©ommernad)t§traum 
im  Sanbe  ©^atefpeareS  fei.     Unb  e§  mar  bod^  me^r  —  e§  mar 
2BirfIic|!eit," 

GRAMMAR. 

1.    (a)  Distinguish  between  ber  (See  and  bie  ©ee. 
(b)  State  gender  and  meaning  of  Sanbfee  and  ^^^orbfec. 


62  ^   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 

2.  (a)   Account  for  the  genitive  ^  bc§  SlbcnbS. 

(h)  Give  other  examples  of  the  adverbial  genitive  (of 
time  —  of  place  —  of  manner). 

3.  (a)  Introduce  the  following  principal  clauses  by  the 
adverb  „t>\i,"  and  change  the  word-order^  accordingly 

2Kan  ^at  ^ier  eine  rounberfc^one  2lu^ftc^t.  —  Dft .  . 

2)er  ?iorben  oon  ^ent  n3irb  ©nglanb^  ©arten  genannt.  —  Dft .  . 

3Kan  fann  Bon  §ier  bie  9iorbfee  fe^cn.  —  Dft .  . 

2Bir  gingen  be^  3Ibenbg  auf  ben  S3erg.  —  Dft .  , 

2)er  3tauc^  ftieg  au^  ben  ©c^omfteinen.  —  Dft .  . 

2)ie  ©ra^ijupfer  jirpten.  —  Dft .  . 

(b)  Change  the  following  principal  clauses  to  subordi- 
nate clauses  by  introducing  them  with  one  of  the  following 
subordinating^  conjunctions  :  ba,  a^,  since;  roeil,  because ; 
bafe,  that;  obgletd^,  although;  inbem,  while,  as;  ob, 
whether,  if ;  fobalb  (fobalb  al§),  as  soon  as, 

SWan  f)ai  ^ter  eine  rounberfc^one  2lu5fic^t.  —  25a  .  .  . 
2)cr  9iorben  r»on  ^ent  roirb  ©nglanb^ 

©arten  genannt.  —  SBeil  .  .  . 

2)?an  fann  t)on  f)ier  bie  9?orbfee  fe^en.      —  2)a^  .  .  . 
2Cir  gingen  bes  Slbenb^  auf  ben  Serg.     —  Dbgleic^  ... 
S)er  Hlauc^  ftieg  am  ben  ©c^ornfteinen.    —  Snbem  .  .  . 
2)er  2Ronb  ge§t  auf.  —  Db  .  .  . 

2)ie  ©rag^upfer  jirpten.  —  ©obalb  (©obalb  alg)  .  .  . 

4.  Account  for  beren  *  (line  8). 

5.  Is  the  derivative  blaulid^  formed  from  blau  by  Um- 
laut or  Slblaut  ? ' 

6.  (a)  Parse  the  sentence  :  ^et  5^otben  ^ent§  roirb  (Sng= 
lanbS  ©arten  genannt. 

(b)  Account  for  the  two  nominatives*  3^orben  and  ©artcn. 


EIGHTEENTH  LESSON.  03 


COMPOSITION. 

Our  friends  had  a  charming  view  from  the  top  of  the 
hill.  From  the  top  of  the  hill  we  had  a  charming  view. 
Had  you  a  charming  view  last  evening  from  the  top  of 
that  hill  ?  —  They  call  the  northern  part  of  the  county 
of*  Kent  "the  Garden  of  England."  "The  Garden  of 
England"  they  often  call  the  North  of  the  county  of 
Kent.  The  northern  part  of  Kent  is  (roirb)  called  the 
garden  of  England.  From  the  top  of  that  high  hill  we 
saw  the  North  Sea.  The  North  Sea  was  (rourbe)  seen 
from  the  top  of  the  hill  which  was  near  Dickens'  country- 
seat.  —  No  lake  was  (rourbe)  seen  from  that  point.  Al- 
though no  lake  is  seen  from  that  point.  —  We  overlooked 
countless  green  meadows  and  yellow  cornfields.  From 
there  green  meadows  and  yellow  cornfields  are  (roerben) 
seen.  —  Often  we  watched  the  sunset.  In  the  evening 
we  often  watched  the  sunset.  The  sunset  was  (aux.  ?) 
watched  by  us  in  the  evening.  When*  we  watched  the 
sunset  yesterday  evening.  —  The  moon  rises.  The  moon 
rose.  The  moon  has  *  risen.  The  moon  had  risen.  When 
did  the  moon  rise  ? 


CONVERSATION. 

liber  raeld^en  ^^eil  t)on  ^ent  ^at  man  t)on  ©abS^iU  einc  fd^one 
2lu3fic^t  ?  2BeIc^en  Seinamen  \)(xi  ber  ^^orben  t)on  ^ent  ?  SSarutn 
nennt  man  ba§  Sanb  fo  ?  33efdj)reiben  @ie  bie  2lu§fid)t  t)on 
@ab§l)in  aug  !  —  3Bann  !ann  man  t)on  bort  bie  3^orbfee  fe^en  ? 
—  SSann  ge^t  bie  ©onne  auf  ?  3Sann  ge^t  fie  unter  ?  2Bann 
unb  TOO  ge^t  fie  auf  ?  2Bann  unb  mo  ge^t  fie  unter  ?  —  2Bie 
fie^t  bie  ^^emfe  bei  ©onnenuntergang  auS  ?  —  SKaS  finb  2lbenb= 


64 


A   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 


gIo(fcn?  (Slbcnbgloden  ftnb  ©lorfen,  roeld^e  [bie]  .  .  .)  9Ba§ 
ift  ein  ©ommernad^t^traum  ?  (@in  ©ommernad^tgtraum  ift 
ein  Xraum,  roeldjen  [ben]  man  .  .  .)  —  2Ba§  ift  ein  ^ornfelb? 
cm  SSauern^aug  ?  —  2Ba§  finb  Sanb^dufer  ?     ©raS^iipfer  ? 


the  point 

the  North 

the  meadow 

the  wood,  forest 

the  landscape 

the  sea 

the  beam,  ray 

r  country-house,  i 
1  farm-house        / 

the  chimney 

the  peace 

the  moon 

the  thought 

the  reality 


VOCABULARY. 

=  ?  the  view 

=  the  right 

=  the  cornfield 

^  the  weather 

=  the  lake 

=  the  sunset 

=  the  ship 


=  ? 


the  smoke  = 

the  grasshopper  = 

the  sound,  peal  = 

the  clearness,  splendor  := 

the  summemight's  dream  = 


NINETEENTH  LESSON. 


$(ttf  bet  (Sifcttba^m 

2)er  Omnibus  beS  @aft^ofe§  brad^te  un§  unb  unfer  (^ti(iM 
jum  Sa^n^of.  2luf  bem  ga^rplan  fa^en  roir,  ba§  e§  nod^  eine 
Stunbe  bis  inx  Slbfa^rt  beS  3"9e§  roar.  2Bir  begaben  un§ 
ba^ct  in  ben  2Bartejaal,  biS  ber  ©d^alter  gebffnet  rourbe.  2)ann 
loften  roir  ein  SiUet  jroeiter  ^lafle  nad^  ^bln  unb  ^a^Iten  5  3Jiatf 


NINETEENTH  LESSON.  66 

Sufd^Iag  fiir  ein  ©d^Iafcoupe.  Wit  unfern  53tIIet§  gingen  mix 
gur  ©epacf=2lnna^me,  roo  ba§  ©epacE  geroogen  roirb.  Qeber 
Sleifenbe  \)ai  50  ^funb  greigepcic!,  fiir  jebeS  raeitere  $funb 
roirb  liberfrad^t  bered^net.  3^ac^bem  tDtr  11  Maxt  42  ^fennigc 
fur  Ubergen)id)t  bega^lt  ()atten,  rourbe  unfer  ©epcidE  eingefd^rieben,  s 
unb  roir  empfingen  unfern  ©epactfd^ein.  ©§  bauerte  nic^t  me^r 
lange,  fo  raurbe  ber  3wg  fignalifiert  ;  ^roei  TOnuten  fpater  !am 
berfelbe  an.  ©leic^geitig  trat  ein  ©ifenba^nbeamter  in  ben 
SSartefaal  unb  rief  mil  lauter  (Stimme:  „@infteigen  in  ber 
g^ic^tung  nac^  9«unfler,  SSefel,  min  unb  Slacken!".  2lfle  lo 
beeilten  fid^  nun,  bie§  gu  t^un.  3Sir  fanben,  bafe  ein  beutfd^er 
(Sifenba^nroagen  gang  werfc^ieben  t)on  ben  amerifanifd^en  ift: 
3eber  2Bagen  l)at  5  5lbteilungen,  6oupe§  genannt,  \>ie  nid^t  mit 
einanber  oerbunben  finb.  3"  1^^^"^  ©oupe  finb  8  ^la^e,  unb 
bie  9fteifenben  fi^en  einanber  auf  bequemen  6ofa§  gegeniiber.  i5 
®er  ©c^affner  erfd^ien  won  Sett  gu  3eit  unb  rief :  „SiIIet3 
Dorgeigen,  meine  §errfc^aften!" 

GRAMMAR. 

1.  Give  a  synopsis  of  the  3.  per.  sing,  of  offnen^  through 
all  tenses  of  the  passive  voice. 

2.  (a)  What  does  the  auxiliary  roerben^  express,  when 
combined  with  the  perf .  partic.  ? 

(b)  What  does  the  auxiliary  fein  express,  when  combined 
with  the  perf.  partic.  ? 

3.  State  the  difference  of  meaning  between 

21I§  miv  auf  bem  58al)n^of  an!atnen,  xoav  ber  (Sd^alter  geoffnet,  and 
2110  miv  auf  bem  S3al^nl^of  anfamen,  ro  u  r  b  e  ber  ©c^alter  g  e  o  f  f  n  e  t. 


66  ^   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 

4.  (a)  State  a  peculiarity  in  the  expressions  of  iveight 
and  vieasure  ^  in  German. 

(b)  Account  for  the  sing,  in  50  ^^  f  u  n  b  greigepttc!. 

5.  (a)  In  what  tenses  is  the  prefix  detached*  in  separ- 
able verbs  ? 

(b)    In  what  clauses  *  is  the  prefix  never  detached  from 
the  separable  verb  ? 

6.  Account  for  the  idiomatic  infinitive  ®  in 

2lUe  einfteigen! 
S3iUet^  Dorjeigen! 


COMPOSITION. 

How  far  is  it  from  the  hotel  to  the  railroad-station? 
Is  this  the  railroad-station?  At  what  time  does  the  train 
-leave  for*  Cologne  ?  It  will  leave  at*  20  minutes  past  nine. 
Is  the  ticket-window  always  open  ?  No,  it  is  (aux.  ?) 
opened  15  minutes  before  the  departure  of  the  trains.  — 
How  much  is  *  a  second-class  ticket  to  *  Cologne  ?  How 
much  had  you  to  pay  for  the  sleeper  ?  —  Where  is  the 
baggage-room  ?  Here  is  my  baggage.  How  many  pounds 
does  my  trunk  weigh  ?  It  weighs  125  pounds.  What  does 
the  excess  amount  to  ?  —  Where  is  (aux.  ?)  the  baggage 
weighed  and  registered  ?  In  the  baggage-room.  —  Who 
is  that  man  there,  who  just  now  opens  the  door  of  the 
waiting  room,  and  what  does  he  say  ?  He  is  a  railroad- 
employe  ;  he  says  :  "  All  aboard  for  Cologne  and  Aix-la- 
Chapelle  !  "  —  Why  !  that  's  my  train ;  I  am  going  on  * 
that  train.  —  The  train  will  start  in  a  minute,  hurry-up ! 
Get  into  this  compartment !  —  This  compartment  is  for 


NINETEENTH  LESSON.  67 

those  who  do  not  smoke  ;  it  is  not  allowed  to  smoke  here. 
You  must  vacate  this  seat  ;  I  have  had  it  all  the  way 
from  Amsterdam.  —  There  comes  the  conductor.  I  can- 
not understand  what  he  says.  What  does  he  say  ?  He 
asks  for  the  tickets.  He  says  :  "  Please,  show  your  tickets, 
ladies  and  gentlemen ! "  —  Do  you  like  the  German  rail- 
road-cars better  than  ours  *  in  America  ?  Are  they  just 
like  ours  or  are  they  different  from  them  ? 

CONVERSATION. 

2Baren  ©ie  worigen  ©ommer  in  @uropa  ?  Mxt  raeld^er  Stnie 
finb  6ie  gefa^ren  ?  3JJit  roeld^em  ^ampfer  ?  3Ste  lange 
roaren  ©ie  auf  ber  ©ee  ?  SSaren  ©ie  fee!ran!  ?  2So  finb 
©ie  gelanbet  ?  —  Sefc^reiben  ©ie  '^l)xc  3fteife !  —  §aben  ©ie 
au6)  ben  3R^ein  gefet)en  ?  2Baren  ©ie  in  ^oln  ?  §aben  ©ie 
bie  3Reife  nad^  ^bln  per  33oot  ober  per  33af)n  gemad^t  ?  ©inb 
©ie  jroeiter  ober  britter  Piaffe  gefal)ren  ?  —  2Bie  t)iele  ^funb 
greigepdcf  erlauben  bie  beutfd^en  @ifenba{)nen  hen  9ieifenben  ? 
§aben  ©ie  Uberfrac^t  bega^Ien  miiffen  ?  —  §at  man  auf  ben 
beutfc^en  ©ifenba^nen  auc^  ©d^lafroagen  ?  2Bie  t)iel  !oftet  ba§ 
33illet  fiit  ein  ©c^lafcoupe  ?  —  3Bie  t)iel  finb  5  Maxt  in 
amerifanifc^em  @elbe  ?  —  §at  man  auf  ben  beutfd^en  @ifen= 
ba^nen  m^  "  baggage-checks  "  ?    2Ba§  befommt  man  bafiir  ? 

VOCABULARY. 

.     the  railroad  =  ?  the  baggage  =  ? 

the  railroad-station  =  the  time-table  = 

the  hour  =  the  departure  = 

the  waiting  room  =  the  ticket-window  = 

the  ticket  =  the  class  = 

the  additional  payment  =  the  baggage-room  = 

the  traveler  =  the  pound  = 


68 


A  COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 


the  overweight,  excess 

the  railroad-employe 

the  direction 

the  car 

the  place,  seat 

the  time 

to  betake  one's  self 

to  pay 

to  charge 

to  receive 

to  arrive 

to  shout 

to  be  seated 

to  show 


the  minute 
the  voice 
the  railroad-car 
the  compartment 
the  conductor 

ladies  and  gentlemen ! 

to  procure  a  ticket 

to  weigh 

to  register 

to  signal 

to  enter 

to  make  haste 

to  appear 


TWENTIETH   LESSON. 


SenfeitS  be§  (Slfa^,  ber  SSogefen  unb  ^eutfd^^Sot^ringenS 
gclangt  man  an  bie  franjbfifd^e  ©renje.  ^ort  liegt  bie  6^am= 
pagne,  too  auf  biirrem  ^reibeboben  ber  foftlid^e  2Betn  radd^ft, 
unb  bort  toeitcr  im  ^l^orbcn  bie  ?Rormaijbte  mit  i^ren  emften 

5  unb  flugen  35en)o^nern  norroegifd^er  Slbfunft.  2Better  nad^ 
SBeften  Hegt  bie  nebelige  33relagne  am  ftiirmifd^en  3Jieere,  mit 
i^ren  2)Unen  unb  ben  mit  §eibefraut  beroad^fenen  gladden,  mo 
einfl  bie  eingeroanberten  33riten  ftd^  niebergelajjen  ^aben.  Unb 
an  ber  @ren5e  be§  9^orben§  unb  6uben§,  an  ber  triiben  Seine 

10  liegt  $ariS  mit  feincn  2j  3JliIlionen  ©inmo^nern,  mit  feinem 


TWENTIETH  LESSON.  69 

ScbcTt,  fetnem  ©lange  unb  fetnen  ^iftorifc^en  (Srinnerungcn. 
©ifenba^nen  fu^ren  ben  SReifenben  won  $arig  nad^  alien 
§tmmel§nc^tungen,  nad^  Orleans  aw  ber  Soire,  nad)  3SerfaiEe§, 
nad^  §at)re  an  ber  ^Jliinbung  ber  ©eine,  nad^  33ruffel  unb 
anbern  belgifdien  ©tdbten,  foroie  nad^  bem  ©iiben  burd^  33urgunb,  s 
ba§  SSeinlanb,  iiber  Sr)on  bie  9f{l)one  ^tnab  in  ba§  ^arables 
t)on  gran!retd),  in  bie  $rot)ence,  n)o  an  ben  gliidtlid^en  ©eftaben 
be§  3Jlittelmeere§  9Jlanbeln  unb  Sitronen  blii^en,  3}?t)rte  unb 
Sorbeer,  £aftanien  unb  ^apern,  SBein,  Dlioen  unb  geigen 
gebei^en,  unb  roo  gn)ifd)en  ben  5Ruinen  alter  rbmifd^er  33au=  lo 
werfe  Sawenbel  unb  ©albei,  ^Jlelifla  unb  3Ro§marin  buften  ; 
TOO  bie  2;roubabour§  gefungen  ^aben,  unb  vdo  ber  luftige 
$rot)enQale  nodj)  ^eute  fingenb  unb  jubelnb  feine  gefte  unb 
2:an5e  feiert- 

GRAMMAR. 

1.  (a)  Account  for  the  genitives  ^  be§  @lfa^  and  ber 
33ogefen  (line  i). 

(h)  Form  sentences  with  the  prepositions  jenfeitS ; 
roii^renb  ;  roegen. 

2.  Distinguish  between  ^ 

an  bie  franjofifc^e  ©renje  (line  2) 
an  ber  triiben  ©eine  (line  9) 

3.  Change  the  word-order^  of  the  following  principal 
clauses  by  introducing  the  same  with  the  relative  n)0, 
where. 


70  ^  COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 

2)er  foftlid^e  3Bein  to  a  c^  ft  auf  bilrrem  —  2)ie  G^ampagne,  too  .  .  . 

^reibeboben. 

2)ie  eingeroanberten  33riten  ^aben  fi(^  —  2)ie  33retagne,  roo  .  .  . 

niebergelafjen. 

aWanbcIn    unb    ©itronen    blii^en    aw,  —  3?ie  gJtoDcnce,  roo  .  .  . 

2J2itleImeere. 

2)ie  2;rou5abourg  ^aben  gefungen.  —  2)er  ©iiben  »on  ^ranfrcic^, 

TOO  .  .  . 

2)et  luftige  ^roocngalc  feiert  feine  gefte.  —  2lm  2KitlcImeere,  too  .  .  . 

4.  Account  for  the  case  *  in  norroegifd^er  2lbtunft. 

5.  (a)  Kead  the  term  2J  3Jitflionen  in  two  different  ways/ 

{b)  Explain  the  meaning  of  brttt(e)^alb,  Diert(e)^alb,  fiinft(e)= 
^alb. 

6.  Account  for  the  modification^  of  the  root-vowel  in 
tDad^ft. 

COMPOSITION. 

On  this  side,  i.e.  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  Vosges,  lies 
Germany,  on  the  other  side  of  the  Alsace  is  France. — On  the 
other  side  of  the  Atlantic  Ocean  is  Europe.  What  are  the 
Vosges  ?  They  are  mountains  or  a  mountain-range  between 
(the)  western  Germany  and  the  eastern  provinces  of  France. 
—  Those  two  great  countries  are  (aux.  ?)  separated  from 
one  another  by  the  Vosges.  —  "  Champagne  "  is  the  name 
of  a  costly  wine,  which  is  made  in  the  province  of*  Cham- 
pagne in  France,  while  "  Rhenish  wine  "  and  *'  Moselle  " 
are  German  wines.  —  The  Northmen  conquered  (the)  Nor- 
mandy in  the  beginning  of  the  ninth  century  after  Christ. 
In  the  ninth  century  after  Christ  (the)  Normandy  was  (aux.?) 
conquered  by  the  Northmen,  whose  home  was  in  Scandi- 
navia, the*  most  northern  part  of  Europe.  —  (The)  Bretagne, 


TWENTIETH  LESSON.  71 

which  is  the  northwestern  peninsula  of  France,  was  taken 
by  British  immigrants  about  the  middle  of  the  fifth  cen- 
tury.—  (The)  Provence  is  (aux.?)  called  the  "Paradise  of 
France."  They  often  call  (the)  Provence  the  "  Paradise  of 
France,"  on  account  of  the  extraordinary  beauty  and  fer- 
tility of  the  land.  —  What  part  of  France  was  the  home 
of  the  troubadours  ? 


CONVERSATION. 

2Bte  ^et^t  bte  §auptftabt  oon  granfreic^  ?  Don  ©nglanb  ?  t)on 
^eutfc^lanb  ?  oon  StaHen  ?  t)on  ber  %mlt\  ?  con  ber  ©d^roet^? 
—  3[t  $art§  grower  alg  Sonbon  ?  —  2Bte  t)iele  ©inrao^ner  ^ai 
bte  §auptftabt  won  granfreic^  ?  —  2ln  roelc^em  glufle  liegt 
$arig?  Sonbon?  S3erlin  ?  9f?om  ?  2ln  roel^em  giuffe  Hegt 
bte  33unbe§^auptftabt  ber  33er.  ©taaten  t)on  3lmeri!a  ?  —  ®urd^ 
n)eld)e§  ©ebtrge  roirb  grantreic^  t)on  ©eutfc^Ianb  getrennt  ? 
granfretc^  t)on  6panten  ?  ©eutfd^lanb  t)on  Stalten  ?  ©nglanb 
t)ott  ©d^ottlanb  ?  9^u^Ianb  won  ber  2:iir!ei  ?  —  2Barum  wirb 
bie  ^rooence  ba§  „$arabie§  t)on  granfreic^"  genannt  ?  2Sa§ 
fiir  33dume  tuadifen  bort  ?  2Ba§  fiir  griid^te  finbet  man  bort  ? 
9BeIrf)e  roo^Iriec^enben  33Iumen  blit^en  bort  ?  —  2Ber  raaren  bie 
XroubabourS  ?    2Bann  unb  too  ^aben  fie  gelebt  unb  gefungen  ? 


VOCABULARY. 

French;  France;  Frenchniai  =  ?  the  chalk 

the  North  =  the  West 

the  South  =  the  East 

the  inhabitant  =  the  ocean 

the  border,  boundary  =  the  down,  dune,  sandliil 

the  heather  =  the  flat  surface 

the  life  =  the  splendor 


72 


A   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 


the  reminiscence  = 

the  traveler  = 

the  mouth  (of  a  river)  = 

the  shore  = 

the  lemon  = 

the  laurel  = 

the  wine  = 

the  fig  = 
the  architectural  structure  = 

the  rosemary  = 

the  dance  = 


the  railroad  =  ? 
the  point  of  the  compass  = 

the  paradise  = 

the  almond  = 

the  myrtle  = 

the  chestnut  = 

the  olive  = 

the  ruin  = 

the  (spike-)  lavender  = 

the  festival  = 


TWENTY-FIRST   LESSON. 


3n  ben  romantifd^cn  2;l^alem  be§  9R^etne§  unb  ber  ^onau, 
be§  3)?atn§  unb  9^edfar§,  foroie  auf  ben  roalbigen  §bl|en  be§ 
(Sd^roarjroalbeg  unb  be§  X^iiringer  3SaIbe§  ^aben  etnft  auf 
mand^en  Sergfpi^en  ^o^e  unb  ftarte  Sutgen  geftanben.  SDort 
5  ^aben  mdd^tige  flitter  in  ben  ^o^en  ©dien  geroo^nt ;  in  ben 
©tdCen  ^aben  bie  9f?of(e  ge^arrt  ;  SSaffer  ift  in  ben  33urg= 
gmben  gefloffen  ;  %\)oxc  unb  3«9briic!en  ^aben  fid^  geoffnet 
unb  gefd^Ioflen.     2Sa§  fiir  ein  Seben  ift  ba  geroefen! 

2Benn  ber  3:urmn)art  in  ba§  §orn  ftbfet :  „geinbe  fommen!" 

10  fc^reit  e§   in   ber  Surg,     ^a  fd^mettert  bie  Xrompete ;    bie 

^nappen  reifeen  bie  ^ferbe  au§  bem  (BtaU^ ;  auf  bem  Surgl^ofe 

ftampft  unb  roie^ert  e§.     SDie  Slitter  flinen  ba^er  mit  fc^roeren 


TWENTY-FIRST  LESSON.  73 

©poren  unb  mdd)tigem  ©c^trert,  in  ©ifen  gefleibet  t)om  ^opf 
h\^  iwm  gu^ :  „^\x  3fto^!"  ruft  ber  SBurg^etr,  unb  Sftitter  unb 
Hnappen  fpnngen  raflelnb  in  bie  6attel.  ©c^roert,  ©peer  unb 
©c^ilb  bli^en  im  ©onnenfd^ein  ;  §elmbitfd^e  unb  gat)nen  flatlern 
in  ber  Suft.  ®ie  Swgbriidte  finft ;  fd)nau6enb  unb  ftampfenb  s 
galoppiert  bie  ©c^ar  ^iniiber,  ben  ©c^loperg  ^inab,  bent  geinbe 
entgegen.  2Bie  ba  bie  ©d^roerter  ^auen!  ©peere  fplittern, 
©d^ilbe  bred^en,  ba§  33lut  flie^t,  bie  Slofle  baumen  fid),  unb 
mand^er  3Ritter  finft  in  ben  ©anb. 

Unb  abenbs,  raenn  bie  fiegreid^e  ©d^ar  ^eimfe^rt  mit  ge=  lo 
fangenen  geinben  unb  erbeuteten  Sftoffen  —  n)a§  fiir  ein  Swbel 
ift  ba  in  ber  33urg  !  ^a^i^  bei  bem  9J?a^le  erja^ilen  fie  fid) 
bann  fc^aurige  ©efd^id^ten  t)on  bem  ^ampfe ;  ber  SSein  peril 
in  ben  gro^en  33ed^ern,  unb  bie  ^'naben  laufd^en  aufmerffam 
Winter  ben  ©i^en  ber  ^titter.  15 

GRAMMAR. 

1.  Give  meaning,  genitive  sing,  and  nominative  plu.^  of 

ba^^^al  I         bag^^or  I  bag  ©c^tlb 

ber  %\)a\tx  I         ber  %\)ox  I  ber  ©d^ilb 

2.  Account  for  the  spelling  of   the  plural  form  ©ale, 
from  sing,  ©aal.^ 

3.  Account  for  the  use  of  the  auxiliaries '  \)(xh^x\.  and 
fein,  respectively,  in  the  following  sentences 

33urgen  ^ahtn  auf  ben  Sergen  geftanben. 
Slitter  ^  a  b  e  n  bort  geioo^nt. 
Stofje  1^  a  b  e  n  in  ben  ©tcillen  gefrfiarrt. 
2)te  ^einbe  f  i  n  b  gefommen. 


74  ^   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 

35ie  2;^ore  ^  a  b  e  n  fic^  geoffnet. 

Hlitter  unb  ^nappen  f  i  n  b  in  bie  ©attel  gefpningen. 

2Bag  fiir  ein  Seben  i  ft  ba  geroef en ! 

4.  Substitute,  in  the  following  sentences,  the  perfect 
tense  for  the  present 

2)er  Xunnroart  ft  5  ^  t  in  ba^  £>om. 
;,j5einbe  fommen!"  fc^reit  e^  in  ber  Surg. 

S)ie  2;rompete  fd^mettert. 
^3u  9ioB!"  ruft  bet  SSurg^err. 

©a^SIut  flie^t. 

3Wan(^er  flitter  f  inft  in  ben  ©anb. 

5.  What  is  the  sense  of  the  reflexive  plu.  fic^  *  in 

2)ie  Slitter  crja^len  f  id^  fd^aurige  ©efc^ic^tcn  ? 

6.  (a)  When  is  the  English  conjunction  when^  trans- 
lated by  roenn?   by  al§?   by  roann  ? 

(b)    Translate : 

When  does  (did)  the  victorious  troop  return  home  ? 
WTien  (Whenever)  the  knights  and  squires  return  home. 
When  they  returned  home. 

When  the  swallows  homeward  fly. 
When  the  swallows  homeward  flew. 
Wfien  do  the  swallows  homeward  fly  ? 


COMPOSITION. 

When  the  warder  on  the  castle-tower  had  seen  the 
enemy  (plu.),  he  sounded  his  horn.  The  horn  of  the  tower- 
warder  was  sounded,  as  soon  as  the  enemy  had  been 
seen.  When  the  squires  and  knights  in  the  castle  heard 
this  signal,  they  hurried  to  the  castle-yard.  —  While  the 
knights  put  on  their  arms,  the  squires  pulled  the  stamping 


TWENTY-FIRST  LESSON.  75 

and  neighing  horses  from  their  stables  and  led  them  to 
(in  ;  tiad^)  the  castle-yard.  By  the  squires  the  stamping 
and  neighing  horses  were  pulled  from  the  stables  and  led 
to  the  castle-yard.  —  When  all  are  ready,  the  lord  of  the 
castle  shouts :  ^'  To  horse  ! "  When  all  were  ready,  the 
lord  of  the  castle  shouted :  "  To  horse  ! "  —  Knights  and 
squires  mount  their  spirited  animals.  They  have  mounted 
their  spirited  animals.  —  Immediately  after  the  knights 
and  squires  had  mounted  their  horses,  the  castle-gate 
opened  (refl.)  and  the  draw-bridge  was  lowered.  —  The 
hostile  troops  fought  from  10  o'clock  in  the  (am)  morning 
till  5  o'clock  in  the  afternoon  (adverb,  genit.).  Then  they 
returned  home.  —  Although  they  had  lost  many  a  noble 
knight  and  many  a  brave  squire,  yet  they  had  beaten  their 
enemies  and  had  taken  many  prisoners.  —  Many  prisoners 
have  been  taken  during  the  battle.  During  the  battle 
many  prisoners  had  been  taken. 

CONVERSATION. 

3n  tceld^em  2;et(e  tjon  ^eutfd^Ianb  ift  ber  Sfi^etn  ?  bie  ^onau? 
SBeld^er  grofee  glu^  miinbet  bet  ^JJaing  in  ben  9f{^ein?  3" 
roeld^er  Stidjituttg  (2Bte)  flie^t  ber  5H^ein,  t)on  ©iiben  nad^  3fiorben, 
t)on  Dften  nad^  2Beften,  t)on  02orben  nad^  ©iiben  ober  t)on  2Beften 
nad^  Dften  ?  2Bte  fliefet  bie  ©onau  ?  ber  3Jlain.?  ber  §ubfon  ? 
ber  9Jiifftfftppi  ?  ber  ©an!t  Sorenjflrom  in  ^anaba  ?  ber  2lma= 
gonenftrom  in  33rafilien  ?  —  2Ba§  ift  eine  Swg'^i^iic'fc  ?  (@ine 
gugbrude  ift  eine  33riidte,  weld^e  [bie]  .  .  .)  2Sa§  ift  ein  ^urm= 
roart?  (@in  Xurmroart  ober  ^urmrodrter  ift  ein  3Jlann,  ber 
[roeld^er]  .  .  .)  2Ber  ift  ber  33urg^err?  (^er  33ur9^err  ift 
berjenige  9ftitter,  .  .  .)  3Sa§  ift  ber  ©d^Ioperg  ?  (^er  ed^Io^= 
berg  ift  ber  S3erg,  auf  .  .  .)  3Ba§  ift  eine  fiegreid^e  ©d^ar  ?  ein 
5Ritter  ?  ein  ^nappe  ?  ein  ^age  ? 


76  ^   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 


VOCABULARY. 

1.  Find,  for  each  word  in  the  following  lines,  the 
German  cognate 

Many  a  high  burgh  (borough)  has  once  y-stood  in  the  romantic  dales 
of  the  Rhine  and  of  the  Danube.  Doors  and  tug-bridges  have  there 
y-opened  and  y-closed.  The  riders  y-clad  in  iron,  had  mighty  swords, 
long  sharp  spears,  round  shields  of  iron  or  steel,  and  silver  spurs. 
When  the  tower-warder  blows  the  horn,  the  men  in  the  burgh  (borough) 
cry:  "  Fiends  come  !  "  Then  the  burgh-door  opens  and  the  tug-bridge 
sinks,  the  riders  gallop  over  the  bridge  against  the  fiends.  How  then 
the  swords  hew  !  How  the  spears  splinter  and  the  shields  break  ! 
The  blood  flows  and  many  a  good  rider  sinks  dead  in  the  sand.  — 
Evenings  they  go  home  to  the  burgh.  Nights  by  the  meal  the  wine  pearls 
in  the  great  beakers  and  the  knaves  listen  hind  the  seats  of  the  riders. 

2.  Explain  historically  the  close  resemblance  ^  between 
German  and  English. 


TWENTY- SECOND   LESSON. 


3*/  Sofep^  See  gorfpt^,  bin  am  2.  ganuar  1879  ju 
3fleabtng  im  ^iaai  ^ennfriloanien  geboren.  5Retne  ©Item 
ftnb  Beibe  Slmerifaner.  Qd^  ^aU  nod^  einen  Stuber  unb  groei 
©d^roeftern,  roeld^e  fdmtlid^  alter  ftnb  al§  id^.  3Son  meinem 
5  fec^ften  6i§  ad^ten  Sa^re  befud^te  id^  bie  2Bittiam=$enn=©c^uIe 
meiner  3Saterftabt.     ^m  Sa^re  1887  gog  id^  mit  meinen  ©Item 


TWENTY-SECOND  LESSON.  7^7 

unb  @efd)n)iftern  nadj)  ber  33unbe§^auptflabt  SSaf^ington,  roo 
mein  ^aUx  eine  Sf^egierungSanfleHung  im  ^atent=2lmt  er^alten 
^atte.  St§  gum  ^uni  1894  befu^te  ic^  bie  2Sebfter=©ci^ule, 
eine  ber  bffentltd^en  ©d)ulen  im  ^iftrift  Columbia,  unb  im 
September  bejjelben  3a^re§  trat  id^  al§  ©d)iiler  in  bie  6entral=  s 
^od^fci^ule  in  SSaf^ington  ein.  3c^  ermd^lte  ben  a!abemi|d)en 
^urfu§,  meil  id^  ein  gro^eg  Snterefle  fUr  ba§  ©tubium  ber 
©prad)en  fii^Ite.  '^n  meinen  erften  beiben  S^^i^c^  in  ber  §od)' 
fd^ule  befd^ciftigte  id^  mid^  ^auptfdd^lid)  mit  englifd)er  ©prad^e 
unb  Sitteratur,  mit  Sateinifc^  unb  ©ried^ifd^  fomie  mit  romifd^er  lo 
unb  gried^ifd^er  ©efdbid^te.  2Bd^renb  beg  britten  unb  cierten 
3a^re§  murbe  ©eutfd)  mein  SieblingSftubium.  9Jlein  erftcS 
beutfd^e^  Sud)  mar  ba§  „®eutfd)e  ©prad^=  unb  2t\zh\x6),"  3Son 
beut)d)en  Xcitcn,  bie  mir  in  ber  £Iafje  gelefen  ^aben,  finb  ^n 
nennen  :  2^^eobor  ©torm§  „3mmenfee"  —  9luboIf  33aumbad^§  is 
9Jldrd^en  unb  ©rjd^Iungen  —  ^aul  §epfe§  „S'2lrrabbiata"  — 
Sef[ing§  „gjlinna  t)on  Sarn^elm"  —  ©d)iaer§  „2BiI^elm  %tU" 
unb  @oetl)eg  „§ermann  unb  ^orot^ea."  3d^  f)ahe  audj)  einige 
@ebidf)te  auSmenbig  gelernt,  \o  §.  33.  „Sorelei"  —  „®ie 
©renabiere"  —  „§eibenro§Iein"  —  „2)er  Si9^«"c^^w^e  im  20 
3^orben"  —  „@rlfonig"  —  gjlonolog  au§  „2Bil^elm  XeU/'  — 
(S§  ift  ber  SBunfd^  meiner  ©Item,  ba§  id^  meine  ©pradS)ftubien 
bie  ndd^ften  t)ier  Sa^re  in  3)ale  College  fortfe^en  unb  bann  nodj) 
ein  paar  Sa^re  eine  beutfd^e  Uniuerfitdt  befud^en  foU.  3J?eine 
Slbfid^t  ift,  ©prad^lel)rer  an  einer  {)o^eren  6d)ule  meineS  3Sater=  25 
lanbeS  gu  merben. 


78  ^   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 

GRAMMAR. 

1.  (a)  Compare  the  adverb  gem/ 

(b)  Apply  the  proper  forms  of  gem  in  translating 

he  likes  Latin 

he  likes  French  better  than  Latin 

he  likes  German  best  of  all 

2.  (a)  How  is  the  future  act.  formed,  and  how  the 
present  pass.?* 

(b)  Illustrate  the  rule  by  examples  formed  with  genfter 
.  .  .  offnen;  Stl^Ur  .  .  .  fd^Iie^en;  (Stein  .  .  .  toerfen;  Srief 
.  .  .  fd^reiben. 

3.  Substitute,  in  the  following  sentences,  the  plupf. 
tense  for  the  present 

er  §at*  ein  2tebling§ftubium. 

Sateinifd^  unb  ©riec^ifc^  jinb*  feine  Sieblinggftubien. 

2)eutjc^  roirb^  fein  Sieblinggfhibium. 

4.  Apply  the  3.  pers.  sing,  feminine,  of  all  tenses  of 
the  act.  voice,  in  the  phrase 

fic^  mit  englijc^er  Sitterahir  befc^dftigen. 

5.  Change,  in  the  following  sentences,  all  pronouns  — 
personal  and  possessive  —  to  those  of  the  3.  pers.  fem., 
sing. 

i  d)  bin  im  ^a^rc  1879  geboren. 
i  (^  f^abe  noc^  einen  33ruber  unb  jroei  ©c^roeftem. 
meine  ©Item  finb  2lmenfaner. 
meine  ©efc^roifter  finb  alter  al^  id). 

meine  ©Item  jogen  mit  meinen  ©efd^roiftcm  unb  mtr  na(^ 
aSaf^ington. 


TWENTY-SECOND  LESSON.  79 

6.  Substitute  the  perfect  for  the  present  tense,  and 
introduce  the  following  sentences  with  the  subordinating® 
conjunction  roeil,  because 

id)  roadie  ben  af abemifd^en  ^urfug.  —  roeil 

id^  fuf)le  gro^eg  Sntereffe  fiir  bag  ©tubiunt  ber  ©prac^en.  —  roeil 
unjere  ^lafje  Heft  beutfc^e  Xejte.  —  raeil 

roir  lernen  beutjc^e  @ebid)te  augraenbig.  —  rceil 

er  foil*  feine  ©tubien  in  ^ale  fortje^en.  —  roeil 

er  will*  auf  eine  beutfd^e  Uniuerfitat  ge^en.  —  roeil 


COMPOSITION. 

1.  Omit  the  first  word  of  the  above  autobiography  (^6)), 
and  substitute  throughout  the  3.  pers.  sing.,  thus  changing 
the  autobiography  to  a  biography  of  Joseph  Lee  Forsyth. 

2.  State,  in  German,  at  what  school  you  were  prepared, 
—  how  long  you  have  studied  German  —  what  grammar, 
dictionary,  and  text-books  were  used  —  what  college-course 
you  desire  to  enter. 


CONVERSATION. 

Enter  into  a  conversation,  in  German,  with  one  of  your 
class-mates,  about  such  topics  as  are  found  in  the  above 
autobiography ;  inquire  after 

his  (her)  full  name  —  date  and  place  of  birth  —  name, 
age,  nationality  and  occupation  of  his  (her)  parents  — 
brothers  and  sisters  —  his  (her)  primary  and  higher  edu- 
cation —  fauorite  studies  and  other  predilections  —  future 
pursuits  and  prospects,  etc. 


m^ 


A   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 


VOCABULARY. 


the  biography  :=  ? 

the  parents  = 

the  native  town  = 
the  government-position      = 

the  pupil,  student  = 

the  interest  := 

the  language  = 

the  favorite  study  = 

the  text  = 

the  fairy-tale  = 

the  poem  == 

"  The  Gipsy-Boy    in  the 

North"  = 

the  language-study  = 

the  intention  = 

to  attend  a  school  = 

to  receive,  get  = 

to  select  = 
to  memorize,  leam  by  heart = 


the  autobiography 

the  brothers  and  sisters 

the  national  capital 

the  patent-ofl&ce 

the  course 

the  study 

the  history 

the  "German  Grammar  and 

Reader" 
the  class 
the  story 

' The  Rose  on  the  Heath" 
the  wish 
the  university 
the  teacher  of  languages 

to  remove,  change  residence : 

to  enter 

to  busy,  interest  one's  self    : 

to  continue 


TWENTY- THIRD   LESSON. 


Mantel  ^chfttt, 

3)iefer  gro^e  ©taat^mann  unb  S^ebner  rourbe  tm  3a^re  1782 
gu  ©ali^burp,  im  (Btaat  ^em  §ampf^ire,  geboren.  2)et  Unter= 
tid^t,  ben  er  bi§  gu  fcinem  ijierge^nten  ^a\)xe  gcno^,  wax  fe^t 
mangel^aft,  ba  er  nur  gelegentltd^  bie  ^orffd^ulen  in  ber  ^ad^hax- 
fc^aft  befud^te.  ©pdter  oerbrad^te  er  neun  9Jlonate  in  ber  ^^iCiipS 
Slfabemie  in  ©jeter  unb  bereitete  [ic^  bann  in  ber  gamilie  eineS 


TWENTY-THIRD  LESSON.  81 

^rebigerS  fiit  ben  33efucl^  etner  p^eren  ©d^ule  t)or.  3"^  3<J^re 
1801  abfobierte  er  ©artmoutf)  College  mit  bet  grb^ten  2lu§= 
geid^nung.  @r  getgle  bort  eine  erftaunlid^e  ^Irbeit^fraft  unb 
rourbe  babei  oon  einem  ©ebad^tnis  unterftu^t,  rate  man  e§  nur 
felten  finbet.  —  3m  3a^re  1805  tourbe  SSebfter  in  ben  2lbt)o!aten=  5 
ftanb  aufgenommen,  roorauf  er  fid^  gu  ^ortSmout^,  im  ©taat 
^eit)  §ampft)ire,  nieberlie^.  —  3m  ^al^xz  1812  roa^Iten  if)n  bie 
gbberaliflen  in  ben  ^ongre^,  unb  er  mar  md^renb  -^meier  ^ermine 
ein  ^eroorragenbeS  ^itglieb  beflelben.  —  ^arauf  gog  er  nad^ 
33ofton  unb  geraann  balb  ben  9luf  al§  be§  bebeutenbften  "^t^^^i^-  lo 
anmalts  feiner  3^it.  —  1823  murbe  er  mieber  in  ba§  9^e|)rafen= 
tanten^auS  gefc^idtt  unb  groeimal  miebergemd^lt.  —  1827  murbe 
er  in  ben  6enat  Derfe^t,  beflen  berii^mtefleS  ^Jlitglieb  er  in  ben 
nun  folgenben  gmblf  3^^^^"  w^^^-  —  Unter  ben  ^rafibenten 
§arrifon  unb  3^t)ler  fomie  unter  giUmore  mar  er  ©taat§fe!retdr  is 
unb  oermaltete  al§  foldjier  bie  2lngelegent)eiten  ber  5^ation  mit 
grower  ©efd^idtlid^feit.  —  3"^  ^^i  1852  murbe  er  au§  feinem 
^Bagen  gemorfen  unb  fd)mer  t)erle^t,  meld^er  UnfaH  feinen  Stob 
befc^Ieunigte.  6r  ftarb  nod^  in  bemfelben  .3<J^^^6  8^  3Jiarf^fieIb, 
im  ©taate  5Jlaffac^ufett§.  20 

GRAMMAR. 

1.  (a)  Which  cardinal  numbers  ^  can  be  inflected  ? 

(b)    Give  the  German  equivalent  of  during  one  term  — 
during  two  terms  —  during  three  terms. 

2.  (a)  Which  preposition  ^  is  used  in  German  with  the 
passive  to  express  agency? 


82  ^   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 

(b)  Change,  in  the  following  sentences,  the  active  con- 
struction to  the  passive 

er  befud^te  bte  2)orffc^ule. 

er  Derbrac^te  ein  '^a^t  in  (Sjetet. 

ein  ^rebiger  bereitete  i^n  fiir  ben  Sefuc^  eincr  p^cren  ©c^ule  oor. 

bie  ^oberaliften  rod^Iten  i^n  in  ben  ^ongre^. 

er  cerroaltete  bie  Slngelegen^eiten  bes  ©taate^  mit  grower  ®efc^tcf= 

lic^feit. 
biefet  Unfatt  befc^leunigte  feinen  2:ob. 

3.  (a)  What  idioms  are  employed  in  German  as  substi- 
tutes for  the  English  passive  ^  voice  ? 

(h)    Translate  idiomatically 

he  voas  prepared  (reflex.)  for  a  higher  school 
a  memory  as  is  (mon)  rarely  found 

4.  What  is  the  normal  —  the  inverted  —  the  transposed 
position  *  of  the  verb  ? 

5.  Find  m  the  above  text  examples  of  these  three  word- 
orders. 

6.  Account  for  the  position  of 

gcboren  (1.  2)  finbet  (p.  81  1.  5) 

geno^  (1.  3)  aufgenommen  (p.  81  1.  6) 

befuc^te  (1.  5)  nieberliefe  (p.  81  1.  7) 

oerbrac^te  (1.  5)  rod^Iten  (p.  81  1.  7) 

abfoluierte  (p.  81  1.  2)           roar  (p.  81  1.  8) 

jeigte  (p.  81  1.  3)  ^og  (p.  81  1.  9) 

untcrpit  (p.  81  1.  4)  gefc^icft  (p.  81  1.  12) 

COMPOSITION. 

1.  He  was  (tt)urbe)  born.  He  died.  —  He  attended  a 
village-school  in  the  state  of*  New  Hampshire.  Later 
he  spent  a  year  in  Phillips  Exeter  Academy.  —  With  the 


TWENTY-THIRD  LESSON.  83 

highest  honors  he  graduated  from  Dartmouth  College  in 
the  year  1801.  —  His  faculty  of  labor  was  not  less  wonder- 
ful than  his  tenacious  memory.  —  In  1805  he  was  (aux.?) 
admitted  to  the  bar.  In  his  thirtieth  year  he  was  (aux.  ?) 
elected  to  (in  ben)  Congress.  Again  he  was  sent  to  the 
(in  ba§)  House  of  Kepresentatives,  and  was  twice  re- 
elected. Later  he  entered  the  U.  S.  Senate.  —  President 
William  Henry  Harrison  made  him  his  (gu  feinem)  Secre- 
tary of  State.  By  President  Harrison  he  was  (aux.?)  made 
(jum)  Secretary  of  State. 

The  United  States  are  (roetben)  governed  by  a  President 
and  a  Congress.  The  President  is  (aux.?)  elected  for  a 
term  of  four  years.  (The)  Congress  is  (aux.?)  formed  by 
the  House  of  Representatives  and  the  Senate.  —  The  Con- 
stitution of  the  U.  S.  is  (aux.?)  praised  everywhere  as 
excellent. 

2.  Write  —  from  memory  —  in  about  75  German  words 
all  you  know  of  the  life  of  Daniel  Webster. 


CONVERSATION. 

3n  roeld^em  6taate  rourbe  SSebfter  geboren  ?  9Bte  ^ei^t  bte 
§aupt[tabt  jeneg  6taate§  ?  9Bie  ^ei^t  bte  ^auptftabt  t)on  3)Zar9= 
lanb  ?  ^ennf^banien  ?  9Jliflouri  ?  gainois  ?  —  2Belc^en 
©taat  nennt  man  ben  ©ranitftaat?  2BeId)et  ©taat  roirb 
ber  ©ranitflaat  genannt  ?  2Belc^en  ©taat  nennt  man  ben 
^almettoftaat  ?  2Belc^er  ©taat  roirb  ber  ^alntettoftaat  genannt  ? 
—  3"  roeld^em  ©taat  finb  ©ie  geboren  ?  2Bie  oiele  ©taaten 
bilben  je^t  bte  norbametifanifd^e  Union  ?  —  2BeIc^e  ©taaten 
nennt  man  bte  9^eu'@nglanb=©taaten  ?  2BeIci)e  ©taaten  raerben 
bie  3Jiittelftaaten  genannt  ?  —  2lu§  roie  t)ielen  §dufern  ht\it^i 


84  ^   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 

ber  ^ongrcj  bcr  SSer.  ©taaten  ?  2Bie  ^eifeen  bie  beiben  §dufer  ? 
—  2Bic  oiele  6enatoren  roerben  t)on  jebem  ©taat  ber  Union  in 
ben  ^ongre^  gefanbl  ?  2luf  roie  oiele  ^a^re  roirb  ber  ^rdfibent 
gerod^It  ?  —  2Bie  ^eigt  ber  je^ige  ^rdfibent  ber  i8er.  ©taaten  ? 
3u  roeld^er  ^^^artei  geprt  er  ?  2Bar  ©rooer  (Slewelanb  ein 
9iepubli!aner  ober  ein  ^emofrat  ?  ©e^orte  benjamin  §arrifon 
ber  bemofratifd^en  ober  ber  republifanifc^en  ^artei  an? 


VOCABULARY. 

What  are  the  German  opposites  of 


geborcn 

fpftt 

^oc^ 

gro^ 

bort 

felten 

unter 

fc^roer 

biefer 

ba^  2)orf 

ber  aWann 

finben 

u  n  bebcutenb 

u  n  beru§mt 

bcrXob? 

TWENTY-FOURTH   LESSON. 


(Sn^alt^angabe.) 

Ungliidtlid^e  Slugroanberer  beutfd^er  5Rationalitdt  jie^en  mit 

§ab  unb  @ut,  ba§  fte  planloS  ouf  SSagen  gepacft  ^aben,  in 

ber  !Rd^e  eineS  ©tdbtd^enS  auf  bent  red^ten  3fl^einufer  ooriiber. 

^ie  neugierigen  (Sinroo^ner  fommen  ^erau§,  urn  bie  Ungliicf= 

6  lid^en  ju  fe^en  unb  urn  i^nen  Unterftii^ung  ju  bringen.     '^\x6^ 


TWENTY-FOURTH  LESSON.  85 

ber  2Birt  be§  ©aft^ofg  „3um  golbenen  Sbroen"  ^at  i^nen 
feinen  ©o^n  Hermann  entgegengefd)icft,  urn  i^nen  3^a^rung  unb 
^leibung  ^u  bringen.  2lm  @nbe  be§  Suge§  trifft  le^terer  ein 
5Dfidbd)en,  namenS  ^orot^ea,  bte  etnen  mit  Dd)fen  befpannlen 
SSagen  fii^rt,  auf  bem  eine  franfe  grau  liegt.  2)te  Qungfrau  5 
rebet  §ermann  freunblid^  an  ;  er  giebt  il^r  alle§,  tt)a§  er  t)on 
§aufe  mitgebrac^t  ^at  unb  bittet  fie,  e§  511m  33eften  ber  Slrmen 
gu  Derteilen.  33on  ber  au^ern  ©rfd^einung  fotDie  t)on  ber 
greunblic^teit  ber  Sungfrau  tief  ergriffen,  gefte^t  er,  nac^  §aufe 
guriicfgefe^rt,  feiner  9Jiutter  mtt  ungeroo^nter  Serebfamteit,  ba§  10 
er  ba§  frembe  5!Jlabci^en  liebe  unb  fie  jur  grau  fid^  rciinfd^e. 
2)er  33ater,  ber  fiir  feinen  eingigen  <So^n  eine  reidie  grau 
roiinfd^t,  roilligt  enblid^  ein,  ba^  §ermann  gufammen  mit  bem 
^^5aftor  unb  bem  2lpot^eter,  groei  bema^rten  greunben  ber 
gamilie,  fid^  nad)  bem  6§ara!ter  beg  ?U?dbd^en§  ertunbigen  15 
follen.  3m  Sager  ber  (Smigranten  er^alten  bie  beiben  greunbe 
'Dd^  befle  3^U9"i§  u^^^  ^en  moralifc^en  9Bert  be§  3[Rdbci^en§. 
©leic^  barauf  trifft  Hermann  bie  ©eliebte  am  S3runnen  Dor 
bem  ^orfe  unb  nimmt,  nad^bem  3)orotf)ea  fic^  t)on  ben  g^rigen 
uerabfd^iebet  l^at,  bie  §eimatIofe  in  ba§  Qau^  feiner  ©Item,  20 
mo  nod^  an  bemfelberi  5lbenb  bie  3Serlobung  be§  jungen  ^aareg 
gefeiert  mirb. 

GRAMMAR. 

1.  Give  the  forms  of  the  imperative^  act.  and  pass,  of 
ne^men  and  annef)men. 

2.  Account  for  the  two  genitives  ^  beutfd^er  9f?ationalitdt 
(line  1)  and  namenS  (p.  85  l.  4). 


86  A   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 

3.  What  does  the  preposition  tion^  express  (place  — 
time  —  source  —  agency  —  specification  or  limiting  object) 
in  the  sentences 

aUe^,  roa^  ^cnnann  d  o  n  §au|e  mitgebrad^t  §atte 
Don  ber  (Srfc^einung  2)orot^eeng  ttef  ergriffen 

4.  Account  for  the  missing  definite  article  ^  before  the 
subject,  in 

am  ®nbe  beg  3"9^  t^^ff*  I  e  ^  t  e  r  e  r  ein  SJiabc^en 

5.  (a)  To  express  "  purpose  "  =  Eng.  in  order  to^  what 
combination  is  generally  used  in  Grerman  ? 

(6)  Illustrate  the  location  of  the  two  words  (um  .  .  .  ju) 
by  examples  taken  from  the  second  and  third  sentences  of 
the  above  text. 

6.  (a).  What  does  the  indirect  subjunctive^  (Oratio 
obliqua)  express  ? 

(J)    What  is  the  direct  statement  in  the  sentences 

(Hermann  fagt,)  er  lie bc  bag  frembe  aWdbc^en. 

„  ba^  er  bag  frembe  SJidbc^en  V\^h^. 

„      '    er  roiinfc^e  fie  fi(^  jur  j^rau. 
t,  ba^  er  fie  f ic^  jur  ^rau  ro  it  n  f  c^  e. 


COMPOSITION. 

Write  in  about  50  German  words  all  you  know  of  the 
plot  of  Goethe's  poem  „§ermann  unb  3)orot^ca." 

CONVERSATION. 

Make  the  principal  incidents  in  Goethe's  poem  „§ermann 
unb  ^orot^ea"  the  topics  of  conversation  between  yourself 
and  one  of  your  class-mates. 


TWENTY-FIFTH  LESSON. 


87 


VOCABULARY. 

Vhat  are  the  German  opposites  of 

u  n  gliitflid^ 

ber  ©inroanberer 

bie  3la^e 

rec^teg  Ufcr 

fommen 

l|eraug 

bringen 

golben 

ber  ©o^n 

bag  ®nbc 

le^terer 

bag  2«dbc^en 

!ran! 

bie  f^rau 

liegen 

freunblid^ 

geben 

aUeg 

oon  §aufe 

bie  2lrmen 

(tuyere 

bie  greunblic^feit 

tief 

nac^  ^aufe 

l\xxM 

bie  abutter 

u  n  geroo^nt 

fremb 

lieben 

ber  SBater 

reid^ 

ber  ^reunb 

nac^ 

befte 

iiber 

u  n  moralifc^ 

t)or 

ne^men 

ber  2lt)enb 

iung? 

TWENTY-FIFTH   LESSON. 


(Drt  unb  3eit  ber  ^anblung.) 

^er  Dtt  ber  §anblung  ift  bie  ©egenb  urn  ben  3Siern)aIb= 
ftdtter  ©ee,  an  ben  bie  brei  alten  ^antone  ©d^rotij,  Uri  unb 
Unterraalben  grengen.  ^ie  t)on  3wnci^  nadj)  bent  ©an!t  @ott= 
^arb  fii^renbe,  ben  3^orben  mit  bem  ©iiben  verbinbenbe  ©tra^e 
ge^t  burdi  bie§  ©ebiet.  Dbgleid^  ©d^iCer  niemalg  in  ber 
©(^roei^  roar,  ^at  er  bennod^  bie  Sofalitat  mit  uniiber= 
trcfiUd^er  SSa^r^eit  oor  unfern  Slugen  ^ingemalt.     Dffenbar 


88  ^   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 

lag  e§  in  be§  2)ici^terg  Slbfic^t,  un§  nic^t  nur  einen  ©ef(i^ici^t§= 
moment  bc§  altcn  ©c^njeijerooIfeS  oor5ufu^ren,  fonbern  aud^ 
bie  9?atur  beS  SanbeS  felbft  ju  fd^ilbem,  ba  ja  bcibe  fo  innig 
mit  einanbet  oerfniipft  finb.  —  ^ie  3^^*  '^^^  §anblung  ifl 

5  urn  bie  ©rense  beg  13.  unb  14.  Sa^r^unberts.  ^er  ^id^ter 
fletit  aber  nur  bie  (Sreignifje  eineg  ^alben  ^a^reg  bar,  ndmlid^ 
be§  3^itraume§  oom  28.  Oftober  (bem  2:agc  ©imon§  unb  Subd) 
1307  \i'\%  gum  1.  max  1308,  an  roeld^em  ^age  ^aifer  3llbred^t 
t)on  feinem  9Zeffen  3o^anne§  oon  ©d^maben  „^arriciba"  ermorbet 

10  rourbe.  (Sben)o  fe^t  fic^  ©driller  iiberall  iiber  bie  ungiinftige 
fpate  '^o^:jX^^t\i  ^inroeg  unb  t^ut,  als  ob  bie  §anblung  im 
©ommer  ober  im  grii^^erbft  flattpnbe.  2luf  biefe  2Beife  ift 
e§  i^m  gelungen,  bag  9f2a^e  mit  bem  gcmliegenben  funftooU 
gu  einem  ©anj^en  gu  oereinigen. 

GRAMMAR. 

1.  When  are  the  adjectives  ganj,  ?^/io^e,  and  l^alb,  half, 
indeclinable  ^  and  when  are  they  inflected  ? 

2.  Explain  the  idiomatic  form'^  c8  tft  i^m  gelungen,  he 
has  succeeded. 

3.  What  does  the  preposition   um^   express   (place  — 
time  —  rotation  or  remote  object)  in 

bie  ©egenb  u  m  ben  3>iern)albftdtter  <See 

bie  3eit  u  m  bie  ©renje  beg  13.  unb  14.  ^a^r^unbertg  ? 

4.  Account  for  the  transposed  position*  of  roar  and  the 
subsequent  inverted  position  of  \^Cii  (line  6). 


TWENTY-FIFTH  LESSON.  89 

5.  Render  in  the  following  idiomatic  *  construction  each 
of  the  two  participles  by  a  relative  clause 

bie  Bon^wric^  ttacl^  ^em  ©anft  ©ott^arb  fii^renbe,  ben  9?orben 
tnit  bent  ©iiben  nerbinbenbe  ©tra^e 

6.  Account  for  the  mood^  in  ftattfinbe  (p.  88  1.  12). 


COMPOSITION. 

Write,  in  German,  a  brief  account  of  the  twofold  aim 
pursued  by  Schiller  in  his  drama  „2Cil^elm  XeU." 

CONVERSATION. 

2Bo  Itegen  bie  ^antone  ©d^rcps,  Uri,  Unterroalben  unb 
Su^ern  ?  2Beld^e  finb  bie  brei  alten  ^antone  ?  2BeId)e  roic^ttge 
Sanbftra^e  ge^t  mitten  burc^  biefeS  ©ebiet  ?  §at  ©chiller  bie 
©c^roeij  je  gefe^en  V  —  28  a  n  n  lebten  XeH,  (Seller,  6tauffac^er 
unb  bie  anbern  §elben  be§  ®rama§  ?  ?!Jlit  roeldfiem  Xage  be= 
ginnt  ber  erfte  2l!t  ?  9Jiit  roeld^em  ^iftorifd^en  ©reigniS  enbet 
ba§  ^rama  im  fiinften  Sift  ?  2ln  roelc^em  Xage  raurbe  ^aifer 
Sllbred^t  I.  ermorbet  ?  2Ber  roar  ber  gjibrber  ?  —  2BeId)e 
boppelte  Slbfic^t  t)erfoIgt  ©djiiHer  in  feinem  ©rarna  „2BiI^eIm 
%t\i"  ? 

VOCABULARY. 

around  the  Lake  of  the  Four  through  this  territory  =  ? 

Forest-Counties  =  ?  in*  Switzerland  = 

with  unsurpassed  fidelity        =  before  our  eyes  = 

in  the  mind  of  the  poet  =  closely  connected  with  each 

about  the  boundary  of  the  other  = 

XIII  and  XIV  centuries  =  everywhere,  throughout  = 

he  acts  as  if  =  the  far  and  the  near  = 


90  ^   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 


TWENTY-SIXTH   LESSON. 


(6^arafter5eic^nung  ber  ^elbin.) 

3)a§  graulcin  3Jiinna  Don  Sam^elm  ftammt  au§  ©ad^fcn. 
©ie  tft  eIternIo§  unb  ^at  i^ren  D^eim,  ben  ©rafen  Srud^fall, 
jum  3Sormunbe.  S^re  ©liter  liegen  in  2:^uringen.  @ine 
eble,  bem  fad^fifd^en  Sanbe  erroiefene  X^t    be§    preu^ifd^en 

5  3Jiaior§  oon  SCeU^eim  ifl  ber  ©runb  geroefen,  roeS^alb  fie  ftd^ 
mit  bemfelben  oerlobt  ^at. 

SSon  ber  ©entimentalitdt  anbrer  grauen  tft  fte  gang  frei. 
©ie  Derel^rt  in  2^eII^eim  bie  mannlic^e  2Biirbe  unb  eble  5[Renfd^= 
Ud^feit.     ^abei  jeigt  fte  jugleid^   i^re  beutfd^=nationaIe  @e= 

10  finnung :  (Sic,  bie  ©dc^fin,  x>tx%\^i  all  ba§  Ungliidt,  ba§  bie 
^reu^en  i^r  unb  i^rem-3SoI!e  im  fiebenjd^rigen  ^riege  jugefUgt 
^aben.  3Son  i^rem  ed^t  beutfd^en  9Befen  giebt  fie  un§  mi^ 
in  bem  ©efprdd^e  mit  bem  granjofen  9ticcaut  eine  $robe.  2luf 
bicgrage  beffelben:  „©ie  fpref  nit  frangbfifd^  ?"  antroortet  fie: 

15  „5^ein,  §en,  nid^t  in  2)eutfd^lanb.  3n  granfreic^  roiirbe  id^ 
e§  fpred^en,  unb  id^  roerbe  ©ie  geroi^  aud^  oerfte^en ;  fpred^en 
©ie,  ttjie  e§  Sl^nen  beliebt!" 

3n  i^ren  Sfteben  unb  §anblungen  id%i  fte  t)iel  3Serftanb. 
2)er  Slnblicf  ber  3^ot  erregt   fogleid^   i^r  3Kitleib,   felbft  fiir 

20  einen  ^enfd^en  raie  3Riccaut.     ©rofe  ift  auc^  i^re  ©nergie  unb 


TWENTY-SIXTH  LESSON.  91 

©elbfldnbigfeit,  bie  fie  bei  t^rer  SSerlobung,  i^rer  9?eifc  nad^ 
Berlin,  foroie  uberl)aupt  in  ber  fonfequenten  ^urc^fiit)rung  i^rer 
%\mz  5eigt,  unb  burc^  bie  fie  in  jeber  Se^ietiuiig  alg  2:eU^eim§ 
roiirbig  erfd^eint. 

©oettie  fat)  in  „3Kinna"  ben  (S^aratter  beg  ®ic^ter§  felbfl. 
@r  fagte  einmal :  „3^ici^t  nur  l^effingS  3Serflanb,  fonbern  auc^ 
fein  gro^eg,  roarmeS  unb  ebleS  ^erj^,  fein  §er5  doH  @^re  unb 
li^iebe  ftecft  in  i^r." 

GRAMMAR. 

1.  (a)  Explain  the  impersonal  ^  form  roie  e§  ^\)mn  beliebt. 
(b)    Give  more  examples  of  this  idiomatic  construction. 

2.  Explain  the  idiom  pj^^  t)erIoben,  to  become  engaged. 

3.  (a)  Explain  the  idiom  §um^  SSormunbe  (line  3). 

(b)  Translate  : 

In  1841  President  Harrison  made  Daniel  Webster  Secretary  of  State. 
The  Congress  of  the  U.  S.  nominated,  in  1864,  Ulysses  S.  Grant 
commander-in-chief  of  the  army. 

4.  Replace  in  the  following  idiomatic  construction  the 
participle  by  a  relative  clause 

eine  eble  bem  fdc^ftfd)en  Sanbe  eriBiefene  %\)ai  beg  aWqorg  t)on 
Xell^eim 

5.  Explain  the  genitive  ^  ieU^eimg  (p.  91  1.  3). 

6.  Change  the  following  direct  quotations  to  indirect^ 
statements  (Oratio  obliqua) 

^d^  (fem.)  roerbe  ©ie  (masc.)  oerftefien,  wenn  ©te  franjofifd^  fpred^en. 
©prec^en  ©ie  (masc.)  beutjc^  ober  franjofifcf),  ganj  rote  ©ie  rooEen. 


92  ^   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 


COMPOSITION. 


Write  in  about  50  German  words  what  you  know  of 
Minna^s  personal  circumstances,  her  jmtriotism  and  other 
characteristic  qualities. 


CONVERSATION. 

3n  roeld^em  Xeile  ^eutfc^lanbs  roar  ba§  graulein  3Jlinna 
t)on  Sarn^elm  geboren  ?  9Bo  lagen  3^re  ©iiter  ?  —  gn  roeld^em 
3Ser^dItnig  [tanb  fie  ju  bem  ©rafen  33ruc^faE  ?  9Barum  f)atte 
fie  einen  3Sormunb  ?  —  2Sie  roar  fie  mit  2:efl^eim  befannt  ge= 
roorben  ?  SBarum  liebte  fie  i^n  ?  —  2Bann  roar  ber  fieben= 
jd^rige  ^rieg  ?  2SeI(i^^  Sanber  fii^rten  jenen  ^rieg  gegen 
^reu^en  ?  2Bie  ^iefe  ber  batnalige  gro^e  ^reufeenfbnig  ?  ^ie 
enbete  ber  ^rieg  ?  —  SSaren  bie  ©ad^fen  im  Tjd^rigen  ^riege 
greunbe  ober  geinbe  griebrid^g  be§  ©ro^en  ?  9Sar  9J?inna  aud^ 
cine  geinbin  $reu|en§  V  2Borin  jeigte  fie  i^re  ed^t  beutfd^= 
nationale  ©eftnnung  ?  —  ^onnte  fie  fran^oftfd^  fprec^en  ?  SSarum 
fprad^  fie  mit  bem  granjofen  3fiiccaut  nid^t  fran^bfifd^  ?  —  9Sorin 
jeigte  fie  il)ren  praftifd^en  (S^arafter  ?  i^r  guteS  §er5  ?  i^r 
cnergifc^e§  SSefen  ?  —  2Bag  ^di  ©oet^e  uon  i^rem  6^ara!ter 
geiagt  ? 

VOCABULARY. 

the  generous  deed  =  ?  the  ground,  reason  =  ? 

the  sentimentality  of   otiier  the  manly  dignity  = 

women  =  the  noble  humanity  = 

the  national  sentiment  =  the  misfortune  = 

the  genuine  German  character  =  the  conversation  = 

the  proof,  sample  =  the  question  = 

the  talk,  words  =  the  action  = 


TWENTY-SEVENTH  LESSON.  93 

the  aspect,  sight  =  ?  the  need,  misery  =  ? 

the  compassion,  sympathy  =  the  energy  = 

the  independence  =  the  engagement,  betrothment  = 

the  journey,  trip  :=  the  consistent  execution  = 

the  plan  =  in  every  way  ^ 

the  love  = 


TWENTY- SEVENTH    LESSON. 


3n  i^rem   intereflanten  Sud)e  „<B6)xiUx^  Seben"   fagt 
Caroline  won  SSoI^ogen,  be^  ®id)ter§  ©d^rodgerin: 

„®d)iner§   gro^e    ©eflalt    ^atte    etroaS   von   militarifd^er 
§altung.     ^er  n)ot)Igerunbele  ^opf  ru^te  auf  einem  ^c^lanfen 
§alfe;    bie  ^o^e  unb  roeite  ©tirn  trug  ba§  ©eprdge  beg    5 
@eniu§.     gu^e  unb  5lrme  fianben  ju  bem  (Ban^m  in  gutem 
^Ser^dltnig.     ©eine  §dnbe  roaren  me^r  ftarf  als  fd^bn  unb 
i^r  ©piel  me^r  energifd^  al§  grasioS.     ^ie  garbe  feiner  5lugen 
roar  unenlfd^teben,  groifd^en  blau  unb   ^ellbraun.     3Son  feiner 
ettt)a§  gebogenen  unb  giemlic^  gro^en  9^afe  fagte  er  im  Scfierj,  lo 
bafe  er  fie  fid)  felbft  gemad)!  ^abe ;   fie  fei  von  '?flatux  furj  ge= 
raefen,  aber  in  ber  9JUIitdr=2l!abemie  l^aU  er  fo  lange  baran 
ge^ogen,  bi§  fie  eine  ©pi^e  betommen  l)ahe,     ©ein  §aar  roar 
lang  unb  fein  unb  fiel  in§  9fiotlid^e.     ^ie  §autfarbe  roar 
roei^,  ba§  9^ot  ber  2B  an  gen  gart.     @r  errotete  leid^t.     ^a§  15 
^inn  ^atte  eine  angene^me  ^orm.     ®ie  Unterlippe  geigte 


94  ^   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 

gang  befonberS  feine  momentane  ©mpfinbung.  ©etn  2ac^eln 
war  fe^r  anmutig,  unb  in  feinem  lauten  Sadden  lag  tivoa^ 
^inblid^eS.  Seine  Stint  me  roar  roeber  ^eU  noc^  rco^I= 
flingenb,  bod^  ergriff  fie ;  etroaS  Dom  fc^rodbifc^en  ^ialeft  ^at 
5  er  fcin  gonj^eS  Seben  beibe^alten.  Sein  @ang  ^atte  gerob^n= 
lic^  etroag  9fiac^Iaffige§.  Seine  ^leiber  roaten  einfad^.  (Sr 
^ielt  oiel  auf  feine  SBdfd^e.  Sein  Sd^reibtifd^  mu^te  immer 
roo^Igeorbnet  fein.  ©r  liebte  Slumen  urn  fic^,  befonberg  gem 
Silien.    Sila  roat  feine  2iebling§farbe." 

GRAMMAR. 

1.    (a)  State  in  general  the  rules  regarding  the  German 
accentuation  of  foreign  words.^ 

(b)    Give   the   German   accentuation   of  the   following 
words  of  foreign  origin 


intereffant 

militanjc^ 

®entu^ 

energifc^ 

grajioQ 

aWilitar 

Slfabemie 

ntomentan 

2)iateft 

2.  (a)  By  what  is  the  German  adverb*  distinguished 
from  the  uninflected  adjective  ? 

(b)  Give  examples  of  adverbs^  which  take  the  sign  of  the 
genitive,  5§. 

3.  Account  for  the  use  of  the  comparative  *  forms  me^r 
ftarf  (line  7)  and  me^r  energifc^  (line  8)  instead  of  the  more 
common  ftdrfer  and  energifd^er. 

4.  What  does  the  accusative  *  fein  ganger  Seben  (p.  94  1.  5) 
imply  ? 


TWENTY-SEVENTH  LESSON.  95 

5.  State  the  various  meanings  of  the  preposition  tion  in 

etroag  t)on^  mttitarifc^er  ^altung 
Don^  feiner  ^^iafe  fagte  er 
feine  9^afe  roar  oon^  '^aiuv  furj 
etrca^  t)om^  fc^roabifc^en  ^ialeft 

6.  Apply  the  c?^rec^  quotation  ^^  in  the  following  cases 
of  "  Oratio  obliqua  " 

crfogte,  ba^  er  ftd^  [eine  9^aje  felbft  gemoc^t  f)abe 
„       fie  fei  t)on  S^atur  furs  geroefen 
„       ba^  er  fo  lange  baran  gejogen  fiabe,  big  fie  eine  ©pi^e 
befomtnen  \)abt 


COMPOSITION. 

Give  in  about  50  German  words  a  description  of   the 
personal  appearance  of  your  best  friend. 


CONVERSATION. 

3Bie  ^et^t  S^r  befler  greunb  (3^re  befle  greunbin)  beim 
3Sornamen  ?  —  2Bie  grofe  ift  er  (fie)  ?  2Belc^en  ©inbrudt  mad^t 
feine  (i^re)  ©rfd^einung  ?  —  3Sie  ift  ber  ^opf  geformt  ?  ber 
§alg  ?  bie  ©tirn  ?  Slrme  unb  §anbe  ?  —  2Ba§  ift  bie  garbe 
ber  Slugen?  bie  gorm  ber  9^afe?  2Bie  ift  ba§  §aar?  bie 
§autfarbe  ?  ba§  ^inn  ?  ber  9Jlunb  unb  bie  Sippen  ?  ber  ^^on 
unb  bie  ©tarfe  ber  ©timme  ?  bie  SluSfprad^e  ?  —  2Bie  ift  fein 
(i^r)  ©ang  ?  ©eine  (iljre)  2Beife  fidj)  gu  fleiben  ?  —  28a§ 
fonnen  ©ie  fagen  x)on  feiner  (i^rer)  SSorliebe  fiir  ^inber  ?  fiir 
33lumen  ?  t)on  feinem  (i^rem)  Stebling§ftubium  ?  Siebling§= 
bid^ter?  Steblinggfarbe  ?  Sftabfa^ren?  ©d^roimmen?  ©d^Utt= 
fc^u^laufen?     33allfpielen  ?  u.  f.  ro. 


96 


A   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 


VOCABULARY. 

Give  the  German  opposites  of 

inner                                     intereffant 

ber^ob 

ber  ©c^roager                         bie  fleine  ©eftalt 

ber  ecfige  ^opf 

bie  niebrige  unb  enge  ©tim      in  fc^Iec^tem  SSer^dltnig 

fd^roac^ 

^ci^lic^                                    bunfel 

bunfelbraun 

bie  gerabe  3i(x\t                      bie  fleine  9laje 

im  emft 

furje^  £>aar                            fc^roarje  ^autfarbe 

jc^roer 

u  n  angene^m                         bie  Dberlippe 

laut 

f)eU                                         rau^flingenb 

foftbare  ^leiber 

er  ^ielt  roenig  auf                fc^Iec^t  georbnet 

^aflen 

TWENTY- EIGHTH   LESSON. 


'^ud  bem  Seben  be^  Zolxait^. 


eineg  %<x%z^  ofib  ein  gorniger  3Jlann  bera  ^^ilofop^en  einc 
O^rfeige.  „©§  ift  bod^  fd^Iimm,"  fagte  barauf  6of rates 
Idc^elnb,  „bafe  man  nie  oorauSfe^en  fann,  roann  e§  gut  ift, 
einen  §elm  gu  tragen."  ©benfo  ^brte  er  mit  ber  gro^ten  9?u^e, 
5  bag  jemanb  Winter  feinem  3fiiicfen  fd^Ied^t  oon  i^m  gefprod^en 
^attc.  „@r  mag  mid^  aud^  fd^Iagen,"  fagte  er,  „n)enn  td^  nid^t 
babei  Bin." 

©inft  begegnete  ©ofrateS  in  einem  engen  ^urd^gange  bem 

^Eenop^on.     2)iefer  roar  ein  oieloerfprec^^nber  Siingling,  unb 

10  @ofrate§  roiinf d^te  i^n  jum  ©c^iilcr  gu  ^aben.     @r  ^ielt  i^m 

feincn  ©tab  oor,  unb  ber  junge  3Kann  blieb  fte^en.     „^annft 


TWENTY-EIGHTH  LESSON.  97 

^u  mxv  fagen,"  Begann  6o!rate§,  „tx)o  man  9J?e^l  fauft  ?"  — 
„2luf  bent  WaxUc  tarn  man  e§  ^aben."  —  „Unb  rao  finbet 
man  Dl  ?"  —  „5lu^  ba§  fannft  2)u  bort  ^ben."  —  „2lber 
roo^in  mu§  man  ge^en,  urn  gut  unb  weife  gu  raerben?"  — 
—  aSenop^on  [tu^te.  —  „^omm  mit  mir !  ^^  voiU  e§  ®ir  5 
jetgen."     ©eit  jenem  Stage  roaren  beibe  bie  beflen  greunbe. 

2)er  junge  Slfd^ineS  roiinfc^te  fe^r,  etn  6d)uler  beS  ©ofrateS 
5U  werben ;  er  roar  <jber  fe^r  arm.  ©ofrateS,  ber  ben  28unfdj) 
bejfelben  merfte,  fragte  i^n  :  „3Barum  furc^teft  2)u  2)ic^,  gu 
mir  5U  fommen?"  —  „2BeiI  ic^  nid^ts  ^abe,  n)a§  id)  ®ir  geben  lo 
!ann."  —  ^©c^d^eft  ®u  ®id)  fo  gering/'  entgegnete  ©otrateS  ; 
„giebft  S)u  mir  nid^tg,  roenn  2)u  ^\6)  jelbft  mir  giebft  ?" 

GRAMMAR. 

1.  (a)  State  the  rules  relating  to  the  inflection  of  parti- 
ciples.^ 

(b)    Decline  the  German  equivalent  of 
a  promising  youth  —  the  teaching  philosopher. 

2.  Of  two  objects  ^  coming  together  (as  in  line  1),  which 
stands  first,  the  direct  or  the  indirect  ? 

3.  What  does  the  preposition  cttf  ^  imply  in  such  phrases 
as  auf  bem  3Jlar!te  —  auf  ber  Uniuerfitdt  —  auf  ber^oft? 

4.  Account  for  the  infinitive'*  in  er  blieb  fie ^ en. 

5.  Account  for  the  idiom  gum*  ©d^Uler  ^aben. 

6.  (a)  What  rules,  regarding  mood  and  tense,  apply  to 
the  indirect  *  question  ? 


98  ^   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 

(b)  By  which  conjunction'  must  an  indirect  question 
be  introduced  when  not  beginning  with  an  interrogative 
pronoun  ? 

(c)  Express  the  following  direct  questions  through  the 
indirect  form 

ffSBie  »iel  U^r  ift  C3  ?*  cr  frogtc  mt(^,  toie  . . . 

;,2Bie  ge^t  eg  S^nen ?«  „        „       mie... 
„^at  eg  fd^on  12  gefc^Iagcn  ?'' 

„®ef)t  eg  S^nen  quf?^  „       »       .  ♦ . 


COMPOSITION. 

Reproduce  the  above  anecdotes  referring  to  Socrates,  in 
the  form  of  indirect  statement  (Oratio  obliqua). 


CONVERSATION. 

3n  tocld^em  Sonbc  Icbte  6o!rate§  ?  3Banti  lebte  er,  t)ot 
obcr  nac^  G^rifti  @eburt  ?  3n  roeld^em  3^^i^^""^^rt  ?  2Ba§ 
roar  er  ?  28a§  t^at  er  ?  ^bnnen  ©ie  groei  t)on  feinen  ©d^iilem 
nennen  ?  2Ba§  fonnen  ©ie  t)on  36enop^on  fagen  ?  oon  Stfd^ineg  ? 
2BeIci^e§  befannte  unb  intereflante  Sud^  ^at  3Eenop^on  gefd^rteben  ? 
—  2Bie  l)ie6  bet  gro^te  ©d^iiler  be§  Sofrateg  ?  —  2Bar  ©ofrateS 
Dcr^eitatet  ?  2Bie  ^iefe  feine  grau  ?  2Ba§  fonnen  ©ie  oon  i^r 
fagen  ? 

2So  begegnete  ©ofrateS  bem  ^enop^on  ?  SSie  otele  gragen 
rid^tete  ©o!rate§  an  ^enop^on  ?  2Ba§  roar  bie  erfte  grage  ? 
2Ba§  roar  bie  groeite  grage  ?  bie  britte  gtage  ?  —  2Ba§  roar 
3Ecnop^on§  Slntroort  auf  bie  erfte  J^age  ?  auf  bie  ^roeite  ?  — 
3Sarum  beantroortete  er  bie  britte  Srage  nic^t  ?  SSaS  jagte 
barauf  ©o!rate§  ^u  i^m  ? 


TWENTY-EIGHTH  LESSON. 


99 


3Ste  t)iele  S^agen  rid^tete  ©o!rate§  an  ben  jungen  5ifc^ine§  ? 
2Sa§  n)ar  bie  erfle  grage  ?  bie  Slntroort  auf  biefelbe  ?  2BaS 
roar  bie  groeile  grage  be§  ©ofrateS  ? 


VOCABULARY. 


the  day  = 

the  noon,  midday  = 

the  night  = 

is  it  not  bad  ?  = 


the  morning  = 

the  afternoon        = 

the  midnight         = 

it  is  very  bad  = 


the  forenoon  = 

the  evening  = 

it  is  bad  = 

it  is  still  worse  = 


it  is  worse  than  = 

it  is  good  = 

everybody,  every  one  = 

something  = 

nothing  = 

can  you  give  me  ?  = 

can  you  show  me  ?  = 

they  (man)  buy  flour  = 
they  sell  potatoes,  eggs,  butter 

and  meat  = 

in  *  the  market  = 

in  the  library  = 

at*  the  ball  = 
in  order  to  become  good  and 

wise  = 

come  with  me  !  = 

go  with  them  !  = 

he  will  show  you  the  way  = 

I  will  write  (to)  her  = 


it  is  not  as  bad  as 

is  it  not  good  ? 

nobody,  no  one 

everything 

nothing  at  all 

whether  he  could  give  him 

whether  he  could  show  him 

they  sell  oil 

we   make   clothes,    shoes, 

boots  and  hats 
in  the  book-store 
at*  the  post-office 
in*  this  world 
in  order  to  become  happy 

and  content 
come  with  us  ! 
go  with  your  friends  ! 
he  will  give  it  (to)  him 


100  ^   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 


TWENTY-NINTH   LESSON. 


©oct^cd  ^Kubicnj  bet  91a^o(com 

(2luS  „%a%''  unb  Sa^res^efte.") 


®rfurt,  ben  2.  Dftober  1808. 

Sd^  rourbc  urn  11  U^r  oormittagS  i^um  ^aifer  W\kVii.  — 
3cl^  trete  bei  i^m  ein.  (Sr  ft^t  an  eincm  gro^en  runben  %x\(j[^t 
frii^ftiidenb.  3"  jeiner  S^ed^ten  fte^t  ^aHeriranb,  ju  feiner 
Sinfen  2)aru,  mit  bem  er  fid^  iibet  ^ontnbution§=2lngeIegen= 

5  ^eiten  unter^dlt.  —  2)er  ^aifer  mrdi  mix  ^eran^ufommen.  — 
3^ad^bcm  ct  mid^  aufmer!fam  angeblidtt,  fagte  er :  "  Vous  etes 
un  homme."  ^d^  oerbeugte  mid^.  —  (Sr  fragt :  „2Bie  olt 
finb  6ie  ?"  —  „©ed^5tg  S^l^re."  —  „6ie  ^aben  ftd^  gut  er^alten. 
©ie  ^aben  Xragbbien  gefd^rieben  ?"     3d^  antroortete  ba§  9f2ot= 

10  roenbigfte.  —  §ter  na^m  2)aru  ba§  2Bort  unb  fagtc,  ba^  i^ 
aug  bem  gran,^bftfd^en  iiberfe^t  ^abe,  unb  groar  SSoItaiteS 
„^a^omeb."  SDer  ^aifer  Derfe^te :  „©§  ift  !ein  gute§  ^iM" 
unb  legte  fe^r  flat  au§einanber,  roie  unfd^irflid^  e§  \t\,  'tia'i^  ber 
3SeItubern)inber  oon  ftd^  felbft  eine  fo  ungiinftige  ©d^ilberung 

15  mad^e.  (Sr  roanbte  fobann  ba§  ©efprdd^  auf  ben  „3Sert^er/' 
ben  er  burd^  unb   burd^   ftubiert  ^atte.     2)ann  bejeid^nete  er 


TWENTY-NINTH  LESSON.  101 

eine  geroiffe  ©telle  im  „2Bertl)er"  unb  fagte :  ^^Sa'^wm  ^aben 
®ie  ba§  get^an  ?  ©§  t[t  nidjit  naturgemd^/'  roofiir  er  feine 
©riinbe  tjollfommen  tid^tig  auSeinanberfe^te.  S*^  antroortete 
mil  etnem  Sdd^eln,  ba^  id^  feinen  SSorraurf  gang  bered^tigt  finbe. 
„2lEein/'  fe^te  id^  ^ingu,  „e§  ift  bem  ^id^ter  gu  ©erget^en, 
roenn  er  fid^  eine§  ^unftgriffe§  bebient,  urn  geroiffe  2Btrtungen 
^eroor^ubringen,  bie  er  auf  einem  einfac^en  unb  natiirlid^en 
2Bege  nic^t  erreid^en  fann."    ^er  £aifer  fd^ien  bamit  gufrieben. 


GRAMMAR. 

1.  (a)    How  may  the  Eng.  conjunction  6ui^  he  trans- 
lated ? 

(b)  Distinguish  the  use  of  the  different  forms  ? 

(c)  What  position  in  the  clause  does  aber,    fonbern, 
allein,  take? 

2.  Is  the  pres.^  partic.  frul)flUdfenb  (line  3)  used  as  attri- 
bute, as  apposition,  or  as  predicate  ? 

3.  Account  for  and  supply  the  missing  ^  auxiliary  after 
angeblicft  (line  6). 

4.  Change  the  following  direct  quotations*  to  indirect 
statements 

Direct  Indirect 

„<Bie  finb  ein  [ganger]  3!J2ann"  ber  ^oifer  fagte,  -;  r^'  '' 

„©ie  {)aben  ^id)  gut  er^alten"  ber  Soiyer  fagte,  }  ^'  *  * 


102  ^   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 


Direct  Indirect 


ift  !ein  gutcg  ©tiid.^  /   "  ""'^^  '"^*''  \  ba|  SSoItaireg  „aJJa^omeb"  .  .  . 

,r®§  ift  nic^t  naturgcmaft.^  bcr  ftaifer  fagtc,  I  f^  ;  *  * 

(^  oa^  e^  .  .  . 

»®g  ift  bcm  2)icbter  ju  oeneibcn."  ®oct^c  Qntroortete,  i  ^  ;  *  * 

1^  oaf;  e^  .  .  . 

5.  Change  the  following  indirect  statements  to  direct 
quotations  * 

Indirect  Direct 

{ id^  ^dttc  au5  bem  granjofifc^cn  Ubcrfe|t.  ] 
UajTii^ogte-!  oa^  icy  au§  >)em  ^ranjofifc^en  iiberfe^t  ^  ,/^err  ®oet§c . . ." 
L        Ptte.  J 

5)er  ftoifer  erfWrte,  rote  unfc^itflic^  eg  fei.  ^2Cte  unfd^icfltd^  .  .  ." 

6.  Give  the  following  direct  questions  the  indirect^  form 

Direct  Indirect 

;,3Bie  alt  finb  ©ic  ?''  bet  «otfer  frogtc,  roie  alt .  .  . 

„9Barum  \:^ahtn  ©ie  bag  get^an  ?''  „  „       roarum .  .  . 

ff^aben  ©ie  auc^  Xragobien  gefd^rieben  ?*         „  „       ob  .  .  . 


COMPOSITION. 

Reproduce  the  conversation  of  the  trees,  as  found  in  the 
text  of  Fourth  Lesson  „^er  S^rtftbaum,"  page  11,  in  the 
form  of  the  indirect  discourse. 


CONVERSATION. 

3Ser  roar  ^JZapoIeon  ?  2Bann  unb  too  roar  er  geboren  ? 
2Bann  unb  roo  ftarb  er?  3"  roeld^en  ga^ren  roar  er  ^aifer 
ber  granjofcn  ?  —  9Bo  traf  SRapoIeon  mit  ©oet^e  jufammen  ? 


TWENTY-NINTH  LESSON.  IQg 

2Bo  liegt  jene  ©tabt  ?  SSann  trafen  bort  bie  beiben  gro^en 
?D^dnner.gufammen?  —  ^\x  tx)elc^er  ©lunbe  erfc^ien  ©oet()e  gur 
3lubieng  beim  ^aifer  ?  2Sa§  t^at  le^terer,  al§  ©oet^e  bei  t^m 
eintrat  ?  2Ber  ftanb  gu  feiner  9lec^ten  unb  xozx  gu  feiner  Sinfen  ? 
SBoriiber  fprad^  ^'^apoleon  mit  ^aru,  al§  ©oet^e  eintrat  ?  — 
^J^it  tDeld^en  2Borten  empfing  9^apoleon  ben  beutfc^en  3)id^ter  ? 
2Bie  ban!te  i^m  ©oet^e  fur  biefeS  Compliment  ?  —  3Sa§  roar 
9^apoIeon§  Urteil  iiber  3SoItaire§  ^ragbbie  „^a^omeb"  ?  2Ba§ 
ift,  nac^  9flapoleon§  3J?einung,  barin  unfd^idlid^?  —  SSon  roeld^em 
©oet^efd^en  $Roman  fprad^  ber  Caifer  bann  ?  §atte  er  ben 
3floman  „2)ie  Seiben  be§  jungen  SSert^er"  aufmerffam  gelefen  ? 


VOCABULARY. 

in  the  forenoon  =  ?  at  midday  =  ? 

in  the  afternoon  =  in  the  evening  == 

at  night  =  he  is  seated  at  the  table  = 

he  stands  by  the  window  =  he  lies  in  bed  = 

to  his  right  hand  =  to  his  left  hand  = 

he  beckons  him  =  he  enters  ^ 

he  leaves,  goes  away  =  a  fine  piece  = 

it  is  improper  =  such  a  derogatory  description 

to  read  a  book  thoroughly  =                   of  himself  !  = 

to  read  a  book  hastily  =  it  is  not  natural  = 

it  is  unnatural  =  a  just  reproach  = 

an  unjust  reproach  =  he  seemed  to  feel  satisfied  = 
he  seemed  to  feel  dissatisfied  = 


104  ^   COURSE  IN  GERNAN, 


THIRTIETH   LESSON. 


®i>tiht9  ^Kubictts  hti  ^apoUotu 


TOt  ^KipiQigung  fprad^  ber  ^aifer  oon  ben  ©d^tctfal§= 
ttagobien  unb  fagte,  fie  fatten  einer  bunfleren  Seit  ange^ort. 
„2Ba§  tcitt  man  je^t  mit  bem  ©c^irffal  ?"  rief  er  aug,  „bie 
^oliti!  ift  ba§  ©d^icffal."  —  (Sr  roanbte  fid^  bann  roteber  ju 

5  SDaru,  mit  bem  er  uber  gerotfle  ^ontributton§=5lngelegen^eiten 
fpra^.  —  3^  trat  etroas  gnriict  unb  bemer!te,  bag  red^ts  oon 
mir  naf)e  ber  X^iir  Sert^ier  unb  (Saoarp  flanben ;  2:aIIer)ranb 
^atte  fid^  entfernt,  —  SRarfd^aU  ©oult  roarb  angemelbet.  ©iefe 
groge   ©eftalt  mit  ftarf   be^aartem   ^auT^ii  trat  herein.     ®er 

10  ^aifcr  ftefltc  gragen  iiber  einige  unangene^me  ©reigniffe  in 
$olen,  unb  fo  ^atte  id^  Si^xi,  mic^  im  Simmer  umgufe^en. — 
SDer  ^aifer  ftanb  auf,  ging  auf  mid^  Io§  unb  fd^nitt  mid^  burd^ 
eine  2lrt  3J?anot)er  oon  ben  iibrigen  ©liebern  ber  ^Reil^e  (xh,  in 
ber  id^  ftanb.     3nbem  er  jenen  ben  3ftiidten  jufc^rte  unb  mit 

15  gemdgigter  ©timme  gu  mir  fprad^,  fragte  er,  ob  id^  oer^eiratet 
fei,  unb  ob  id^  ^inber  ^abe.  @benfo  fragte  er  mid^  iiber  meine 
SSer^dltniffe  gu  bem  fiirftlid^en  §aufe  in  3Seimar,  nad^  ^erjogin 
Slmalie,  bem  giirften  unb  ber  Jiirftin.  3^  antroortete  i^m 
auf  eine  natiirlic^e  SBeife,  roomit  er  gufrieben  ju  fein  f(^ien. 


THIRTIETH  LESSON.  105 

—  Sd^  mu^  nod^  bemerfen,  ba^  id^  tm  gangen  ©efprad^  bie 
DJiannigfaltigteit  feiner  93eifaUgau^erung  gu  berounbern  ^atte, 
benn  er  prte  felten  unberaeglid^  gu  ;  entraeber  er  ntdEte  nad^= 
benfUd^  mit  bem  ^opf  ober  fagte  "oui,"  ober  "c'est  bien'' 
ober  bergleid^en.  3Senn  er  auSgefprod^en  ^atte,  fiigte  er  ge= 
n)0t)nlic^  ^ingu  :  "  Qu'en  dit  M.  Goet  ?  " 

GRAMMAR. 

1.  Account  for  the  form  roarb  ^  (line  8). 

2.  Substitute  the  perf.  tense  for  the  past  in  lines  12-14 
beginning  with  ®er  ^aifer  ftanb  auf  .  .  . 

3.  {a)  Translate  mit  gema^igter  ©timme  (line  14). 

(h)  Account  for  the  missing^  indef.  article  in  German. 

4.  Account  for  the  inversion  ^  rief  er  auS  (line  3). 

5.  Why  is  the  verb  neither  inverted  nor  transposed  in 
the  dependent  clause  benti*  er  ^orte  felten  unberaeglid^  5U 
(p.  105  1.  3)  ? 

6.  Account  for  the  change  of  tense  ^  l)dtten  (line  2), 
where  according  to  the  rule  we  should  expect  the  subj. 
perf.  \)(ihzxi  angef)brt. 

COMPOSITION. 

The  ©d^idfalStragbbte  is  a  drama  (which  is)  founded  on 
the  idea  of  Fate.  It  had  its  time,  said  Napoleon,  in  the 
darker  ages  of  antiquity,  with*  the  Greeks,  in  those  days* 
when  Sophocles  wrote  his  "  Oedipus.'^  —  Schiller's  tragedy 


106  ^   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 

"  The  Bride  of  Messina  "  belongs  to  the  same  class  of  the 
drama.  Mtillner,  Grrillparzer,  and  other  German  poets  of 
the  XIX  century  wrote  also  tragedies  in  which  Fate 
plays  an  important  role. 

The  five  distinguished  Frenchmen  whom  Goethe  met  at 
Napoleon's  headquarters  in  Erfurt,  on  October  2,  1808, 
were  Daru,  Berthier,  Savary,  Talleyrand  and  Soult. — Daru, 
at  that  time  40  years  old,  was  a  great  statesman  and 
scholar,  a  member  of  the  French  Academy,  and  the  author 
of  a  "  History  of  the  Kepublic  of  Venice."  —  Berthier, 
Prince  of  Wagram,  born  1753,  died  1815,  was  a  famous 
general  of  the  army  and  a  marshal  of  France.  In  1778 
he  had  been  with  Lafayette  in  this  country  where  he  had 
helped  the  (dat.)  Americans  in  their  war  of  independence. 
—  Savary,  duke  of  Rovigo,  1774-1838,  was  a  lieutenant- 
general  of  the  army  of  Napoleon.  —  Talleyrand^  at  that 
time  in  his  fifty-fourth  year  of  age,  was  one  of  the  greatest 
French  diplomats.  —  Soult,  duke  of  Dalmatia,  the  youngest 
of  these  five  men,  was  also  a  French  general  and  a  mar- 
shal of  France. 


CONVERSATION. 

^aiit  5^apoIeon  bie  ©d^idtfalgtragobien  gem  ober  nid^t  gem  ? 
3Ka§  fagte  er  t)on  t^nen  ?  3Sa§  ift,  nad^  S^apoleons  2Reinung, 
^eutjutage  mdd^tiger  al§  ba§  ©d^icffal  ?  —  SSeld^e  gragen  oon 
perfbnlic^em  Snterefle  rid^tete  ber  ^aifer  an  ©oel^e  ?  2Bag  roar 
5flapoIeon§  erfte  grage  (direct)  ?  2Ba§  tDar  bie  groeite  grage 
(direct)  ?  —  2Sar  ©oet^e  oer^eiratet  ?  §atte  er  ^inber  ?  — 
2Ber  roar  bie  ^erjogin  Slmalia?  3Ser  roar  bamal§  ber  giirft 
t)on  <Sad^fen=2Beimar  ?    2Ber  roar  bie  gUrftin  ? 


THIRTY-FIRST  LESSON. 


107 


the  approval 
to  disapprove 
the  king 
the  princess 
the  drama 
the  opera 


=  ? 


VOCABULARY. 

the  disapproval 
the  emperor 
the  queen 
the  duke 
the  tragedy 


=  ? 


to  approve 
the  empress 
the  prince 
the  duchess 
the  comedy 


=  the  policy,  politics   =  the  politician     = 


political 

in  front  of  the  emperor 

above  him 
to  come  in 

one  had  withdrawn 
the  question 

annoying  occurrences 
to  stand  up 
to  seat  one's  self 

with  (a)  subdued  voice 

married 

single,  unmarried 


the  police 
behind  him 
beneath  (under)  him 
to  withdraw,  go  away 

the  other  came  in 
the  answer 

pleasing  occurrences 
to  sit  down 
to  lie  down 

with  (a)  loud  voice 
betrothed 


THIRTY-FIRST   LESSON. 


1. 

2lm  3.  Sluguft  1492  fegelte  S^riftop^  (SolumbuS  mit  brei 
fleinen  ga^rgeugen,  weld^e  il)m  bie  ^onigin  Sfabetta  gegeben 
()atte,  unb  mit  120  ©efa^rten  t)on  $aIo§,  einem  fleinen  §afen 
in  Slnbalufien,  (x^  unb  erreid^te  balb  bie  !anarifd)en  3"feln. 
2luf  biefen  t)erfa^  er  fid^  mit  frifdiem  SSaffer,  unb  nun  ging  e§ 
guten  5!Jiute§  in  bie  unenblic^e,  nod^  nie  befa^rene  SBafferroiifle. 


108  ^   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 

TOt  jebem  Xage  ber  lang  fid^  ^injte^enben  ga^rt  minberte  fid^ 
bie  ipoffnung  unb  iDud^S  bie  Ungebulb  ber  9J?atrofen,  obgleid^ 
i^nen  (lolumbug  t)erfci^tt)ieg,  roie  unge^euer  gro^  bie  guriidt; 
gelegte  ^Keilenja^l  fei.     ©eroi^  \)<xi  bie  Semannung  ber  Sd^iffe 

5  mand^en  (Sc^recfen  erlebt,  aber  bie  befannte  ©rjd^Iung,  ba^  fie 
in  i^ter  SSersroeiflung  ben  gii^rer  fatten  iiber  Sorb  roerfen 
rooUen,  \\i  langft  al^  un^iftorifd^  erroiefen. 

2lm  7.  Dttober,  bent  65flen  Xage  ber  langen  ga^rt,  fanb 
eine  2lrt  ^riegSrat  groifd^cn  ben  beiben  §duptern  bc§  Unter= 

10  ne^menS,  G^riftop^  6oIumbu§  unb  9Jiartin  Sllonfo  ^ingon, 
ftatt,  an  Sorb  beg  2lbmiralfd^iff§  Santa  9Jkria.  Sig  ba^in 
roar  ein  ftreng  roeftlic^er  £urg  einge^alten  roorben  ;  bag  @e= 
f^roaber  befanb  fid^  groifd^en  bem  25.  unb  26.  ©rab  norbli^er 
Sreite,  unb  in  uier  ober  fiinf  Xagen  ^dtle  eg  ber  ^affatroinb 

15  nod^  gloriba  getragen.  ^injon  oerlangte  aber,  ba^  man  ben 
^urg  nad^  Siibroeften  ric^te,  roofiir  er  feinen  anbern  ©runb 
^atte,  alg  bafe  eg  eine  (Singebung  jeineg  ^erjeng  fei.  Golumbug 
lie^  bie  5Rid^tung  dnbern,  unb  fo  gefd^a^  eg,  bafe  am  12.  Dftober 
bie  3nfel  ©uana^ani  (©an  ©alnabor)  in  Oid^t  !am. 

GRAMMAR. 

1.  What  does  the  adverbiaP  genitive  guten  3Jluteg  (line  6) 
express,  pldce  ?  time  ?  or  manner  ? 

2.  Account  (a)  for  the  subjunctive^  fatten  and 

(b)   for  the  idiomatic  use  of  the  infinitive*  mo  Hen,  in 
the  sentence 

bie  befannte  ©rsd^lung,  ba^  fie  ben  ^u^rer  fatten  iiber  Sorb 
roerfen  roollen 


THIRTY-FIRST  LESSON.  109 

3.  Account  for  the  reflexive'*  form  minberte  fid). 

4.  What  is  the  meaning  of  the  dative  ^  in  er  oerjc|n)ieg 
i^nen  (p.  108  1.3)? 

5.  Give,  in  German,  the  actual  words  of  Pinzon,  which 
(p.  108  11.  15-17)  are  stated  indirectly. 

6.  (a)  Account  for  the  subjunctive^  ^atte  (p.  108  1.  14). 

(b)  Substitute  the  proper  form  of  the  conditional  for  the 
subj.  ^atte. 


COMPOSITION. 

Give  in  about  50  or  75  German  words  a  brief  account 
of  the  first  voyage  of  Columbus,  from  his  departure  from 
Spain  (Aug.  3,  1492)  to  the  discovery  of  the  island  of 
St.  Salvador  (Oct.  12,  1492). 

CONVERSATION. 

3Jltt  tt)ie  t)ielen  ©d^iffen  jegelte  6oIumbu§  x>m  ©panien  ab  ? 
3Son  tt)em  raaren  fie  i^m  gegeben  roorben  ?  2Bie  E)ie^  ba§  grb^te 
ber  brei  ga()rgeuge,  ba§  fogenannte  Slbmiralfc^iff  ?  2BeIdj)e§ 
roaren  bie  9^amen  ber  beiben  anbern  ?  SSaren  ©ie  im  ©ommer 
1893  auf  ber  2Beltau§ftelIung  xn  6^icago  ?  §aben  ©ie  bort  bie 
brei  fleinen  fpanifc^en  ©c^iffe  „©anta  9Jtaria/'  „'^\m"  unb 
„$inla"  gefe^en  ?  2Ba§  fatten  biefe  brei  (5arat)el§  mit  ber 
2lu§ftellung  in  S^icago  ^u  t^un  ?  —  3"  roeld^er  Sftic^tung  roar 
ba§  ©efc^roaber  bi§  gum  7.  Dftober  gefegelt  ?  2Ba§  fanb  an 
jenem  3:age  ftatt  ?  —  2So  roiirben  bie  ©d^iffe  gelanbet  fein, 
roenn  6olumbu§  roeiter  roeftlid)  gefegelt  roare  ?  —  2Barum  dnberte 
er  ben  ^ur§  ?  —  2Bag  roar  ba§  Sftefultat  biefer  ^urSdnberung  ? 


110 


A  COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 


VOCABULARY. 


to  set  sail,  put  to  sea 
•  a  sea-port 
fresh  water 
a  long  extended  voyage 
the  crew 

on  board  of  the  flagship    : 
a  Western  course 
a  Southwestern  course 
the  degree 
the  25th  degree 
the  Northern  latitude 

between  the  25th  and  26th 
degrees    of    Northern 
latitude 
to  change  the  course  of  a  ship : 
to  come  (heave)  in  sight 


a  small  vessel  = ! 
the  coast  of  Andalusia  = 
the  endless  watery  waste  = 
the  number  of  miles  made  = 
to  throw  (heave)  one  over- 
board = 
a  strictly  Western  course  = 
the  squadron  = 
90°  = 
between  the  25th  and  26th 
degrees  = 
the  Southern  latitude  = 
the  trade-wind  = 
to  direct  the  coui^e  to  SW.  = 
to  have  the  course  changed  = 


THIRTY- SECOND   LESSON. 


^ie  (Stttbecfttttg  ^metifa^. 

2. 

^nn  f^ai  ^llejanber  t)on  §um6olbt  („^o§mo§/'  33anb  2,  ©eite 
301)  gefagt,  ba§,  roenti  jene  ^urSanberung  nid^t  gemad^t  roorben 
roare,  bie  6c^iffe  r\a6)  gloriba  gefommen  fein  roilrben,  ba^  bann 
bie  ©panier  nid^t  9Jiittel=5lmen!a,  fonbern  bie  ^eutigen  3Ser= 
einigten  ©taaten  beoolfert  ^aben  roiirben,  unb  ba^  bann  bie 
neue  2Belt  einen  gang  anbem  et^nograp^ifc^en  S^arafter  seigen 
roiirbe.  —  2)ie  neueren  (St^nograpl^en  benfen  nid^t  fo,  fonbern 


THIRTY-SECOND  LESSON.  \\\ 

\<x%zn :  @§  max  fur  bie  ©efd^id^te  ber  (SbiUfatton  ber  neuen 
2BeIt  gang  gleid^giltig,  voo  Slmerifa  guerft  gefe^en  wurbe,  benn 
t)on  Slnfang  an  gitigen  bie  ©panier  bem  ©olbe  r\a6).  2luf 
§aiti  fanben  fie  "oa^  erfte  @olb,  unb  bort  legten  fie  an<i)  bie 
erfte  ^^ieberlaffung  an.  5!Kit  3?ed^t  roirb  je^t  be^auptet,  ba^  5 
5lmerifa  fpanifd)  getoorben  unb  fpanifdj)  geblieben  ift,  fo  raeit 
bie  3Serbreitung  t)on  ©olb  reid^t.  3«/  ^^^^  ^«§  ®olb  6ali= 
fornienS  250  ga^re  frii^er  entbecft  tt)orben  tuare,  bann  ware 
DieUeic^t  ber  @ang  ber  SSeltgefc^ic^te  einer  anbern  3Ridj)tung 
gefolgt.  lo 

GRAMMAR. 

1.  Account  for  the  use  of  fonbern^  (line  4). 

2.  Why  ift^  geblieben  (p.  m  l.  6)  (has  remained)  and  not 
\)at  geblieben  as  in  English? 

3.  Why  the  indicative    ift   in  the  indirect^  statement 
(p.  Ill  1.  6)? 

4.  Which  part  is  the  principal  and  which  the  dependent 
clause  in 

roenn  jene  ^ur^dnberung  nic^t  gemad^t  roorben  roare,  fo  toiirbcn 
bie  ©d^iffe  nad)  ^-loriba  gefommen  fein  ? 

5.  Change  the  order  by  placing  the   principal   clause 
first* 

6.  Omit  the  conjunction  roenn  *  in  the  dependent  clause, 
and  change  the  construction  accordingly. 


112  A   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 


COMPOSITION. 

(a)  If  Columbus  had  not  changed  his  course,  the  ships 
would  have  reached  Florida. 

The  ships  would  have  reached  Florida,  if  Columbus  had 
not  changed  his  course. 

Had  Columbus  not  changed  his  course,  the  ships  would 
have  reached  Florida. 

Alex.  V.  Humboldt  says,  that  if  Columbus  had  not 
changed  his  course,  the  ships  would  have  reached  Florida. 

(b)  If  Columbus  had  not  changed  his  course,  the  Span- 
iards would  have  discovered  North  America. 

The  Spaniards  would  have  discovered  North  America, 
if  .  .  . 

Had  Columbus  not  changed  his  course,  the  Spaniards  .  .  . 

Alex.  V.  Humboldt  says,  that  if  Columbus  had  not 
changed  his  course,  the  Spaniards  .  .  . 

(c)  If  Columbus  .  .  .,  the  new  world  would  to-day  show 
a  different  ethnological  character. 

The  new  world  would  to-day  show  a  different  ethno- 
logical character,  if  .  .  . 

Had  Columbus  .  .  .,  the  new  world  would  .  .  . 

Alex.  V.  Humboldt  says,  that  if  Columbus  had  .  .  .,  the 
new  world  would  .  .  . 

(d)  If  the  gold  of  California  had  been  discovered  about 
the  year  1600,  the  world's  history  would  have  taken  a 
different  direction. 

The  world's  history  would  have  taken  a  different  direc- 
tion, if  .  .  . 


THIRTY-SECOND  LESSON.  113 

Had  the  gold  of  California  been  discovered  about  the 
year  1600,  the  world's  history  .  .  . 

Alex.  V.  Humboldt  says,  that  if  .  .  .,  the  world's  his- 
tory ... 

CONVERSATION. 

Report  in  the  form  of  indirect  statement  the  following 
passage  from  the  III  act  of  Shakespeare's  <' Julius  Caesar." 

SSieIc  33iirger: 
2Btr  roollen  Sfled^enfd^aft.    Segt  9Reci^enjci^aft  un§  (^h ! 

33rutug : 

©0  folget  mir  unb  %tli  ©epr  mir,  greunbe ! 

—  ^u,  6affiu§,  ge^ft  in  eine  anbere  ©tra|e  unb  leilft  bie 

§aufen  — 
3Ser  mid^  roiH  reben  ^bren,  bleibe  ^ter, 
3Ser  ©aJfiuS  folgen  wid,  ber  ge^  mit  t^m ! 
2Bit  rooHen  offentltd^  bie  ©riinb'  ertlaren 
^^on  6afar§  ^ob. 

®rfter  93urger: 
3d)  roiH  ben  33rutu§  ^oren. 

3n)eiter  Siirger: 

^en  (SaffiuS  ic^.     ©o  fonnen  roir  bie  ©riinbe 
33ergleici^en,  raenn  rotr  beibe  ange^ort. 

VOCABULARY. 

the  volume,  the  volumes  =  ?  the  ribbon,  the  ribbons  =  ? 

the  bond  (tie),  the  bonds  =  North  America  = 

Central  America        =  South  America  = 

the  U.  S.  of  to-day  =  the  history  of  civilization  = 


114 


A   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 


the  ethnological  character  of 

the  new  world  = 

to  found  a  colony  = 

in  Sicily  = 

justly  = 

the  diffusion  of  gold  = 

the  course  of  the  world's  history  = 


from  the  beginning  =  ? 

the  first  colony  = 

in*  Haiti  = 

in  St.  Helena  = 

wrongly  = 

the  world's  history  = 


GRAMMATICAL    NOTES. 


FIRST   LESSON. 

1.  Masculine  are  all  nouns  ending  in  sig,  si^,  'Itttg^  sm 
{e.g.,  ^aftg,  ^ranit^,  Seigling,  33aum) ;  and  most  nouns  ending 
in  it\,  sen,  itx  {e.g.,  3SogcI,  ©artcti,  3:^alcr). 

2.  Feminine  are  most  nouns  in  sc,  not  of  masculine 
meaning,  and  not  beginning  with  ©e —  {e.g.,  bte  SRofe,  bie 
©d^erc,  bie  SSeftc  —  but  ber  9^effe,  ber  6f  Uoc  ;  ba§  ©cs 
birgc,  ba§  ©cmdlbc). 

3.  Neuter  are  all  diminutives  ending  in  sr^cn  and  slcill 
(e.^.,  gingeri^cn,  33Ud^(ctn). 

4.  biefcr  raei^c  ©c^metterling  ber  raei^c  ©d^metterling,  toelc^cr 

biefc  jc^onc  ^ulpe  bie  fc^roargc  2BoI!e,  roelc^c 

jencS  rote  Sliimc^en  bag  !Ieinc  §aug,  roelc^cS 

roelc^cS  fleinc  §aug  ?  jenc  fc^onc  33Iume 

bcrfelbe  gutc  33ruber  jebcr  o,\xit  33ruber 

5.  {a)  The  endings  forming  the  comparative  and  super- 
lative of  adjectives  are  cr  and  eft  (sometimes  shortened  to 
r  and  ft). 

(b)  Most  monosyllabic  adjectives  whose  vowel  is  a,  0  or 
U  (not  au),  modify  the  vowel  in  the  comparative  and  super- 
lative. 

6.  etttmal  is  distinguished  in  meaning  by  accent :  ein'= 
ntal,  once  (definite),  one  time  ;  einma'l,  once  (indefinite),  once 
upon  a  time. 


116 


A  COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 


SECOND   LESSON. 


1.    The  possessive  adjectives  are 
Masc.  Fern. 


Sing,  mein 
bein 
jein 
i§r 

Plu.  unfer 
cuct 

2.  mein  ^aug 
unfere  Silien 


meine 
beine 

ifeine 
i^rc    . 

uny(e)re 
eu(e)re 
t^re 
(S^re) 


Neuter 

mein, 
bein, 
(jein, 

unfer 

euer 

i^r 


my 
thy 

his  (its) 
her  {its) 

our 
your 
their 
(your) 


beine  Slume  feine  Sriiber,  i^re  Srilber 

euer  ©arten,  ^f)X  ©arten    i^re  gliigel 


3.  ber  gutc  Sruber 
be^  guten  Sruberg 
bem  gutcn  ^ruber 
ben  guten  33ruber 


btc  Qutttt  Sriibet 
ber  guten  Sriiber 
ben  guten  Sriibern 
bie  guten  Sriiber 


Sing. 

bie  mei^e  Silie 
ber  rcei^en  Silie 
ber  roeifien  Silie 
bie  roei^e  Silie 

Plu. 

bie  roei^en  Silien 
ber  roei^cn  Silien 
ben  roei^en  Silien 
bie  roei^en  Silien 


bas  fleine  £>au§ 
be^  fleinen  §aufe8 
bem  fleinen  bam  (^aufe) 
ba§  fleine  §aug 


bie  fleinen  §dufet 
ber  fleinen  Joaufer 
ben  fleinen  ^dufem 
bie  fleinen  §aufer 


ein  guter  ©ruber 
eineg  guten  Sruberg 
cinem  guten  Sruber 
einen  guten  ©ruber 


Sing. 

eine  rcei^e  Silie 
einer  roei^en  Silie 
einer  roei^en  Silie 
eine  roei^e  Silie 


ein  fleineS  &au§ 
eineS  fleinen  &aufeg 
einem  fleinen  ^aug  (^aufe) 
ein  fleineS  £)au^ 


GRAMMATICAL  NOTES.  117 

Plu. 

gute  Sriibcr  wei^c  Silien  !tetnc  ^ciujcr 

gutcr  Sriiber  raei^cr  Silten  fteincr  §aufcr 

gutctt  Sriiberti  roei^cn  Silien  fleincn  ^aufern 

gutc  SSriiber  loei^c  Silien  Heine  ^aufcr 

4.  Verbs  which  express  phenomena  of  nature  have  always 
the  impersonal  subject  el,  it.     As 

e§  regnet,  it  rains  e§  friert,  it  freezes 

e§  fd^nett,  it  snows  e§  blt^t,  it  lightens 

e§  ^agelt,  it  hails  e§  bonnett,  it  thunders 


THIRD   LESSON. 

1.    (a)  Nouns  which  form  their  plural  in  sctt  or  sn  are  ot 

the  weak  declension. 

^x. :  (ber  ^cn\(i)),  plu.  bte  ^Jienfd^cn  ;  (ber  'jpra[ibenl), 
plu.  bie  ^^Jrcifibentcn  ;  (bie  ^tofe),  plu.  bie  3^ofen. 

(b)  All  other  nouns  are  of  the  strong  declension. 

Ex. :  (ber  Slbler),  plu.  \i'\z  Slbler  ;  (ber  SSater),  plu.  bie 
SSater  ;  (ber  §unb),  plu.  bie  §unbc  ;  (ber  S^i^n),  i?'?^.  bie 
Sa^nc  ;  (ba§  §au§),  plu.  bie  §aufcr. 

(c)  A  few  masculine  and  neuter  nouns  of  the  weak 
declension,  which  in  the  genitive  sing,  take  the  endings 
g  or  c8  constitute  the  mixed  declension. 

Ex. :  (ber  ©taat),  gen.  be§  <Biaciit^,  plu.  bie  ©taatcn  •, 
(ba§  2luge),  gen.  be§  Slugeg,  plu.  bie  2lugen  ;  (ba§  D^r), 
^e^.  be§  D^rcg,  i?^w.  bie  D^rcn ;  (ba§  ^erg),  ^ew.  beS 
^erjcng,  i?^^.  bie  ©ergen. 


118 


A   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 


2.  ber  bloue  Jpalg,  see  ber  gute  Sruber 
ein  blaucr  ^al^,  see  etn  guter  35ruber 
bie  rote  ^e'bex,  see  bie  roei^e  2tlie 
eine  rote  ^^^ber,  see  eine  roet^e  Silie 
bag  fc^one  bunte  ^leib,  see  ba§  Heine  ^aug 
ein  jd^oneS  bunteS  ^leib,  see  ein  fleineg  ^aug 


(Second  Lesson,  Note  3). 


3. 


Indicative  Mood. 

Subjunctive  Mood. 

Present  Tense. 

ic^  f)abe 
bu  ^aft 
er  §at 

id)  bin 
bu  bift 
erift 

id)  f)abe 
bu  ^aHeH 
er  ^abe 

ic^fei 
bu  feted 
erfei 

rotr  ^aben 
i§r  ^abt 
fie  ^abcn 
(©ic  ^aben) 

rott  ftiib 
i^r  feib 
fie  finb 
(©ie  finb) 

roir  ^aben 
i§r  l)aM 
fie  i)aben 
(©ie  ^aben) 

roir  feien 
i^r  feiet 
fie  feien 
(©ie  feien) 

Past  Tense. 

id)  f^atte 
bu  f)atU\t 
cr  ^atte 

id)  roar 
bu  roarft 
er  roar 

ic^  ^atte 
bu  l^'dtteft 
er  ^atte 

id)  roare 
bu  ro'drefl 
er  ro'dre 

roir  fatten 
i^r  ^attet 
fie  fatten 
(©ie  fatten) 

roir  roaren 
i^r  roaret 
fie  roaren 
(©ie  roaren) 

roir  fatten 
i^r  ^attet 
fie  fatten 
(©ie  gotten) 

roir  roaren 
i{)r  rodrct 
fie  roaren 
(©ie  roaren) 

4.  The  prepositions  an,  ottf,  ^nitx,  tteBett,  in,  iibcr,  nntcr, 

lior,  ))tlt{l!^en  govern  the  dative  in  expressions  of  position, 
or  motion  in  a  place  ;  the  accusative  whenever  direction, 
change  of  position  or  motion  to  a  place  is  expressed  or 
implied. 


GRAMMATICAL  NOTES, 


119 


FOURTH   LESSON. 


.  ttullid^ 

bitf 

reid^ 

faul 

groB 

fd^on 

maf)v 

nii^Iic^cr 

— er 

— cr 

— cr 

— cr 

— cr 

— cr 

nii^Iic^fl 

-n 

-ft 

-n 

-efl 

-n 

-n 

2.  §ori^,  high,  changes  d^  to  ^  in  the  comparative,  ^o^cr ; 
superl.  ^bd^ft.  The  [)  of  no^,  near^  comparative  na^er,  be- 
comes d^  in  the  superlative :  ndr^ft. 

3.  Indicative  Mood.  Subjunctive  Mood. 

Perfect  Tense. 


id)  ^abe  ge^abt     id^  bin  geroefen 
bu  l^aft  ge^abt,     bu  bift  geroefen, 
etc.  etc. 


ic^  ^abe  ge^abt      td^  fei  geroefen 
bu  ^abeft  ge^abt,    bu  feieft  geiDefen, 
etc.  etc. 


(See  Third  Lesson,  Note  3.) 


Pluperfect  Tense. 

id)  f)aite  ge^abt     ic^  roar  geroefen      id^  ptte  gel^abt     ic^  rocire  geroefen 
bu^attcftge^abt,  buroarftgeroefen,    bu^atteftge^abt,  bu  roareft  geroef en, 
etc.  etc.  etc.  etc. 

(<See  Third  Lesson,  Note  3.) 

4.  The  following  prepositions  always  govern  the  dative  : 
aus,  Bet,  mii,  nai^,  tion,  ju,  fett,  au^er. 

5.  The  following  prepositions  always  govern  the  accu- 
sative :  buri^,  filt,  gcgen,  (ttiibcr),  ol^nc,  urn. 

6.  See  Kote  4,  above. 

7.  i^&&  Note  4;  above. 


120  ^  COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 

8.  See  Third  Lesson,  Note  4. 

9.  See  Third  Lesson,  Note  4. 

10.    Sonbern   (but)    is  used   only  after  a  negative,  and 
introduces  an  opposite  statement.     As: 

„^^  bin  xm  2Binter  nid^t  fo  fa^l  rote  i^r,  fonbern 
id^  bin  ba§  gange  ga^r  griin." 

|[bcr  (^2«^)  is  used  both  after  affirmative  and  negative 
clauses,  and  merely  qualifies,  but  does  not  contradict,  the 
preceding  statement.     As : 

„griic^te  ^aft  bu  rool^I,  aber  eg  finb  nur  griii^te  fiir 
bie  6d^n)eine." 


FIFTH   LESSON. 

1.  Feminine  derivatives  in  sin  double  the  n  in  the  plural. 
As: 

bie  2lmeri!aner i n ,    the  American  woman;   plu.    bie 
5lmenfanennnen. 

2.  Feminine  are  most  abstract  nouns;  and  most  names 
of  plants^  fruits,  flowers. 

3.  9Be((|et  {who ;  ivhich),  as  a  relative,  is  declined  like 
biefer,  except  that  it  lacks  the  genitive  case,  both  sing,  and 
plural. 

^cr  (who;  which),  when  used  as  a  relative,  is  declined 
like  the  demonstrative  ber,  except  that  in  the  genitive  plu. 
it  has  only  beren  (never  berer). 


GRAMMATICAL  NOTES. 


121 


Sing. 


roelc^er  welci^e  roeld^eg 

bcffcn  iicrcn  bcffcn 

raeld^em  raeld^er  voel^em 

tuelctien  roeld^e  roeld^e^ 

roeld^e 
tieren 

rcelc^en 
raelc^e 


Plu. 


bcr  bte  bag 

bcffcn  ticrcn  bejfcn 

bem  ber  bem 

ben  bic  baS 


bte 

bercn 

benen 

bie 


Pres. 
Tense. 


biirf  en,  to  be  allowed  (dare)     x6)  barf 
fonnen,  to  be  able  (can)  idj)  !ann 

mo  gen,  to  like  (may)  ic^mag 

muffen,tobe  compelled  (must)  tdjimug 
f  ollen,  to  be  obliged  (shall)     id)  foU 
tDoHen,  to  be  willing  (will)     \^  roiE 


Past 
Tense. 

id)  burfte 
id)  fonnte 
id^moc^te 
i6)  mu^te 
i6)  foHte 
id^rooUte 


Past 
Partic. 

geburft 

gefonnt 

gemoc^t 

gemu^t 

gefoEt 

gerooUt 


SIXTH   LESSON. 


I. 

1.  ic^,  I 

meiner,  o/me 
mir,  {to)  me 
mid),  me 


Singular. 


II. 


bu,  thou 
ttzimtfOfthee 
bir,  {to)  thee 
bic^,  thee 


III. 


er,  Ae  fie,  she         e§,  i< 

feiner,o/Am  i^rer,o//ier  [feiner,  of  if} 

i^m,  (io)  /lim  i^r,  {to)  her  [i^m,  (io)  it] 

if)n,  /im  fie,  Aer         eg,  ii 


TOtr,  t«e 
unfer,  of  us 
ung,  (<o)  MS 
ung,  us 


if)Vt  you 
euer,  of  you 
end),  {to)  you 
eurf),  ?/oit 


Plural. 

fte  (©ie),  they  {you) 
if)vex  {'^^vev),  of  them  {of  you) 
i^nen  (^^nen),  {to)  them  {[to]  you) 
fie  (®ie),  them  {you) 


122  ^  COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 

Article.  Relative  Pronoun. 

Sing. 

2.  bcr  bie  bag,  the  ber  bie  bag,     who;  which 

beg  ber  beg,  of  the  Jieffen  bfrcn  beffcn^ioAose,  o/u7^7n(ioAic^) 

bem  ber  bem,  io  t/ie  bem  ber  bem,    to  whom,  to  which 

ben  bie  bag,  the  ben  bie  bag,     whom^  which 

Plu. 

bie,  the  bie,       who,  which 

ber,  o/<^e  tieten,  whose,  of  lohom  {which) 

hen,  to  the  liencn,  to  whom,  to  which 

bie,  the  bie,       whom,  which 

3.  (a)  Verbs  of  the  strong  conjugation  form  their  past 
tense,  and  usually  their  perfect  participle,  by  changing  the 
vowel  of  the  root ;  they  undergo  an  internal  change. 

For  example :  id^  finge,  id^  fang,  gefungen. 

(b)  Verbs  of  the  weak  conjugation  are  conjugated  by 
adding  suffixes  to  the  stem;  they  undergo  an  external 
change  only. 

For  example :  ic^  lobe,  id^  lobtc,  gelobt. 

4.  (a)  The  auxiliary  l^abett  is  used  with  all  transitive 
verbs  (including  all  reflexive  verbs)  —  with  the  modal 
verbs  —  with  most  impersonals  —  and  with  most  intransi- 
tives,  which  have  no  direct  object  or  express  simple  action, 
not  motion. 

(b)  The  auxiliary  fettl  is  used  with  inti'ansitive  verbs 
denoting  motion  to  or  from  a  place  or  a  change  of  con- 
dition. 


GRAMMATICAL  NOTES.  123 


SEVENTH  LESSON. 

1.  See  Third  Lesson,  Note  1  (c). 

2.  See  Sixth  Lesson,  Note  1. 

3.  The  accusative  is  used  to  express  a  definite  time 
when  ;  as : 

„^ommen  ©ie  biefen  Slbenb,  nad^ftcn  ©onntag,  jebcn 
Xag!"  etc. 

(Compare  Ninth  Lesson,  Note  5.) 

4.  85et,  with  dative  only  —  by,  near  —  expresses 

(a)  Place  —  properly  (near)  by. 

Ex.:  ©riDO^nt  bei  ber  ^trd^e. 

(b)  More  especially  at  one^s  house. 

Ex. :   33  e  i  bcm  ©d^neiber,  at  the  tailor^s. 

(c)  Instrument  —  by. 

Ex. :  §8  e  i  ber  §anb,  %  his  hand ;  b  e  i  feinem  3f2amen, 
by  his  name. 

(d)  Time  —  on,  as  occasion. 

Ex. :  S3  e  i  btef er  @eIegenE)eit,  on  this  occasion. 

5.  The  present,  usually  with  fd^on,  already,  or  feit, 
«*7ice,  is  regularly  used,  corresponding  to  English  perfect, 
to  express  what  has  been  and  still  is. 

Ex.:  „SKie  lange  finb  6ie  fd)on  ^ier?"  how  longwave 
you  been  here  ? 


124  ^  COURSE  IN  GERMAN, 


EIGHTH   LESSON. 

1.  The  following  prepositions  always  govern  the  geni- 
tive :  obcr^olft  unb  untcr^olft,  inncr^ttlb  unb  aufecr^alb,  bicgs 
fcit(g)  unb  ienfeit(0),  ptttt  ober  anjiatt,  unfern  ober  uxmtxi, 
tod^rcnb,  tucgcn,  (dngg  unb  tro^. 

2.  See  Fourth  Lesson,  Note  5. 

3.  See  Fourth  Lesson,  Note  4. 

4.  See  Sixth  Lesson,  Note  3  (b). 

5.  See  Sixth  Lesson,  Note  3  (a):  finbc  (C-u);  fd^ttffc 
(u-o) ;  fpringe  (o-u) ;  famme  (tt-u) ;  gc^e  (i-o) ;  ne^me  (a-a) ; 
Ittfle  (ic-tt) ;  ^olte  (ic-o) ;  gcbe  (a-e) ;  roerbe  (a-n). 

6.  In  dependent  clauses  beginning  with  subordinate  con- 
junctions, the  verb  is  transposed  to  the  end  of  the  clause. 


NINTH   LESSON. 

1.  See  Third  Lesson,  Note  1  (a). 

2.  The  ordinal  numerals  from  2  to  19  are  derived  from 
the  cardinal  numerals  by  adding  the  suffix  t,  and  from  20 
upwards  j|. 

3.  @tn,  one,  is  pronounced  with  more  stress  than  ein, 
an^  a;  and,  for  distinction,  is  often  printed  with  spaced 
letters  ;  as : 

ein  2Bort,  a  word;  ein  3Sort,  one  word. 


GRAMMATICAL  NOTES.  125 

4.  See  Third  Lesson,  Note  4. 

5.  Time  (indefinite)  whe7i,  is  expressed  by  the  genitive 
used  adverbially,  as : 

beg  3Jlorgeng  ;  beg  Slbenbg  ;  beg  6onntag8  ;  eineg  ^Tageg. 
A.S  to  definite  time  when,  see  Seventh  Lesson,  Note  3. 


TENTH   LESSON. 

1.  (a)  Some  nouns  have  a  double  meaning  in  the  singular, 
as : 

bag  ©efid^t,  the  face'  plu.  bie  ©ejid^tcr,  the  faces 

bag  ©efic^t,  the  vision  "     bie  ©eftc^tc,  the  visions 

bie  33an!,  t^e  6encA  plu.  bie  Sanfc,  ^/le  benches 

bie  San!,  <Ae  (commercial)  6anfc     "    bie  58an!en,  the  banks 

ber  33anb,  the  volume  plu.  bie  Scinbe,  the  volumes 

bag  S3anb,  i^  ribbon  "     bie  Sanber,  ^^e  ribbons 

bag  S3anb,  <^e  <ie,  bond  "     bie  33anbC/  ^/le  ties,  bonds 

(b)   Some  nouns  have  double  plurals  with  different  mean- 
ings, as  : 

/s»  ;?  on    X  *!.         ^\  f  Pl^-  bie  2Sorter,  single  words 
{t>a^  ^ovi,  the  word)  i    .,    .•   cm    x  ^^       ^ 

I   "    bte  SBorte/  connected  words 

2.  Adjectives  used  as  nouns  retain  the  declension  of 
adjectives.     Thus : 

hcui^ii), German;  \)ci^zui\6)t,the  German ; cxn^CUt\6)tV , 
a  German  ;  bie  (eine)  ^eutfd^e,  the  (a)  German  woman  ; 
bie  ^eutfd^en,  the  Germans ;  2)eutfc^e,  Germans. 


126 


A  COURSE  IX  GERMAN. 


3.  As  between  mtffett  and  fennett,  both  meaning  to  kjiow, 
it  may  be  said  that  ro  i  f  f  e  n  is  used  more  particularly  of 
facts,  fennen  of  persons  and  things,  so  that  the  latter 
may  be  said  to  be  synonymous  with  to  be  acquainted  with  : 

I  know  him,  ic^  f  cnne  i^n  |  I  know  who  he  is,  ic^  mei%  tuer  er  ift 
I  know  his  house,  ic^  f  e  n  n  e   ^   I  know  his  house  (=  the  house  where  he 
fein  S^au^  1        lives),  ic^  roeife  fein  ^aug 

4.  A  small  number  of  verbs  change  their  root-vowel  in 
the  past  tense  and  the  perfect  participle,  and  also  add  the 
endings  of  the  weak  conjugation.  These  are  called  mixed 
verbs. 


Infinitive. 

Past  Tense. 

Per/.  Partic. 

brennen,  to  bum 

brannte 

gebronnt 

fennen,  to  know 

fannte 

gefannt 

nennen,  to  name,  call 

nonnte 

genannt 

rennen,  to  run 

ronnte 

geronnt 

jcnben,  to  send 

fonbte 

gefonbt 

rocnben,  to  turn 

roonbte 

geioonbt 

bringen,  to  bring 

broc^te 

gebroc^t 

bcnfen,  to  think 

bttc^te 

gebac^t 

lotffen,  to  know 

rouite 

gen)u|t 

5.  /See  Note  4. 

6.  (a)  In  verbs  compounded  with  the  unaccented  iiv- 
separable  prefixes  be — ,  cm|J — ,  ent — ,  cr — ,  gc — ,  tier — , 
jet—,  the  prefix  is  always  written  in  one  word  with  the 
verb. 

(b)  Prepositions  and  adverbs,  when  forming  the  first 
part  of  a  compound  verb,  are  sejjarable.  Such  prefixes  are  : 
ab,  on,  auf,  auS,  bei,  ba  (bot),  ein  (instead  of  in),  em|ior, 
entfleflen,  fort,  ^er,  ^in,  mit,  noi§,  nieber,  ob  (=  iiber),  urn, 
tior,  meg,  toieber,  )u,  juriii!,  ^ujammen. 


GRAMMATICAL  NOTES.  127 


ELEVENTH   LESSON. 

1.  See  Tenth  Lesson,  Note  6. 

2.  Idiomatically  with  the  verb  fommen,  to  come,  the 
perfect  participle  of  a  verb  of  motion  is  used,  instead  of 
the  present,  to  express  the  manner  of  coming.     As  : 

@r  tarn  gelaufen,  he  came  running;  ein  3SogeI 
!ommt  g  e  f  1 0  g  e  n ,  a  bird  comes  flying. 

3.  After  nouns  of  measure,  weight,  number  or  quantity 
a  simple  noun  is  construed  without  case-declension,  as : 

(5ec^§  glafc^en  2Bein,  six  bottles  of  wine ;  groei  ^u^enb 
(Sier,  two  dozen  (of)  eggs. 

But  if  the  noun  is  accompanied  by  an  3id]ectiYe,  the  genitive 
or  t)  0  n  may  be  used  ;  for  instance  : 

eine  5Jlenge  reifct  Slpfel,  a  great  number  of  ripe  apples. 

4.  The  passive  being  less  used  in  German  than  in  Eng- 
lish, other  idioms  are  frequently  employed : 

(a)  most  frequently  man  with  the  active  verb : 

the  chair  was  placed,  man  fteUte  ben  ©tul^l ;  he  begged 
that  he  might  be  allowed  to  go,  er  bttt  man  mbd^te  il^n 
ge^en  laflen. 

(b)  the  reflexive  verb,  as : 

the  key  has  been  found,  ber  ©d^liifjel  ^at  f  id^  gefunben ; 
that  can  be  explained,  baS  Id^t  fic^  erflaren  ;  etc. 


128  ^  COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 

5.  The  demonstrative  adj.  ber,  bie,  ba§,  that^  is 
declined  like  the  article  ber,  bie,  ba§,  the^  but  is  pro- 
nounced with  a  greater  stress  of  voice.  As  a  pronoun  it 
has  the  following  enlarged  forms  : 

Sing.     Gen.  beffen,  beren,  bcf^en  {of  him,  of  her,  of  it) 
Plu.         "       \itxtx\.  ov  "titxtx  {of  those,  of  them) 
Dat.  bcncn  {to  those,  to  them) 


TWELFTH   LESSON. 

1.  See  Tenth  Lesson,  Note  6  (a). 

2.  See  Tenth  Lesson,  Note  6  {b). 

3.  See  Fourth  Lesson,  Note  10. 

4.  The  verb  I  a  ff  c  n  is  used  with  an  infinitive,  nearly 
like  the  modal  verbs  {see  Fifth  Lesson,  Note  4),  as  a 
causative  auxiliary,  in  the  sense  of  to  make  do,  or  to  have 
{cause  to  be)  done,  and  in  many  idiomatic  phrases.     As : 

@r  He^  ba§  $fetb  fpttngcn,  he  made  the  horse 
jump ;  er  H  e  ^  einen  Srief  f  d^  r  e  i  b  e  n ,  he  had  a  letter 
written. — „gr  liefe  fic^  con  feinen  Sebienten  ^allen"  =  ? 


THIRTEENTH   LESSON. 

1.   The  definite  article  is  often  contracted  with  prepo- 
sitions.    The  most  usual  forms  are : 


Neuter. 

ang 

for  an  bag 

aufg 

"   auf  bag 

burc^g 

"   burc^  bag 

fiirg 

"   fiirbag 

ing 

"   in  bag 

umg 

"  urn  bag 

GRAMMATICAL  NOTES.  129 

Dative  Singular. 

Masc.  or  Neuter. 

am    for  an  bcm,  at  the 

beim  "   bei  bem,  6?/  the,  near  the 

im      "in  bem,  in  the 

t)om    "   loon'azm,  from  the 

IMm    "   5U  bem,  to  the 

Fern. 
%\xt     "  3U  ber,  to  i^e 

2.  51B I  a  u  1  must  not  be  confounded  with  Um  I  a  u  t.  The 
former  is  called  ^ vowel  modification^  (a,  o,  u  to  a,  i),  it); 
the  latter  'vowel  change,''  that  is  the  substitution  of  a 
different  sound  (see  Sixth  Lesson,  Note  3,  a).  —  The  term 
'  vowel  alteration '  is  used  when  necessary  to  include  both 
of  these  processes. 

3.  With  the  suffix  serlet  appended  to  the  cardinal 
numbers,  indeclinable  numeral  adjectives  are  formed  (some- 
times called  '  variatives ')  ;  as  : 

einerlei,  of  one  kind;  gnjeterlei,  of  two  kinds ; 
breierlet,  of  three  kinds,  etc.;  mandjierlei  and  oielerlet, 
of  many  kinds  or  many  kinds  of;  tute  t)ielerlei?  of  how 
many  kinds  or  how  many  kinds  of? 

4.  See  Ninth  Lesson,  Note  5. 

5.  The  inseparable  prefix  cnts  in  compound  verbs  chiefly 
denotes  privation  or  separation,  as  : 

(laffen,  to  let)  entlaffen,  to  dismiss 

(jie^en,  to  draw)  cntgiel^en,  to  withdraw 

(laufen,  to  run)  etttlaufen,  to  run  away 

(ttjronen,  to  sit  on  a  throne)  cntt^ronen,  to  dethrone 


130  ^  COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 


FOURTEENTH   LESSON. 

1.  Latin  noims  in  sum  and  sium  add  0  in  the  genitive 
sing.,  and  change  ;um  to  en  in  the  plural,  as : 

bas   5lbDerbium,   gen.  beg   Slboerb i u m § ,  plu.  bie 
SlbDerbten. 

2.  See  Sixth  Lesson,  Note  4  (b). 

3.  sung  (related  to  the  English  verbal-noun  ending  sing) 

is  used  for  forming  a  large  number  of  nouns  from  verbs, 
most  of  which  are  abstracts.  All  of  these  are  of  t\iQ  feminine 
gender : 

(auSftellcn,  to  exhibit)  b  i  c  2lu§ftellung,  exhibition 
(bemerfen,  to  observe)  b  i  e  33emer!ung,  observation 
(erfinben,  to  invent)  b  i  e  (^rfinbung,  invention 

4.  See   Sixth  Lesson,   Note  1,   and    Second  Lesson, 
Note  1. 

5.  Contrary  to  English  use,  no  article  stands  in  German 
in  adverbial  phrases  like : 

in  @ilc,  in  a  hurry;  mit  fd^road^er  ©timme,  with  a 
feeble  voice  ;  in  2But,  in  a  passion  ; 

and  in  such  idioms  as : 

td^  \j(ibt  ^opfroe^,  ^tt^nroe^,  I  have  a  headache,  a 
toothache ;  ic^  ^abe  Suft,  I  have  a  mind,  etc. 


GRAMMATICAL  NOTES.  131 


FIFTEENTH   LESSON. 


1.  See  Ninth  Lesson,  Note  2. 

2.  In  giving  a  date,  the  dative  ordinal  with  an  (an  bem 
contracted  to  ttlll)  is  used,  or,  especially  in  dating  a  letter, 
the  simple  accusative  ben ;  as  : 

er  ftarb  a  m  ge^nten  Max,  or  b  e  n  ge^nten  9Jlai,  he  died 
(on)  the  tenth  of  May  ;  Lofton,  ben  ge^nten  (lOten)  Max 
1897,  Boston,  May  10th,  1897. 

3.  The  perfect  participle  regularly  takes  the  prefix  ge= 
("the  augment^')  in  verbs  of  all  conjugations.  But  verbs 
of  foreign  origin  in  si^ercn  (old  spelling  also  i'ren),  do  not 
take  the  augment  ge=.     Thus  : 

(marfc^  i  e  r  e  n ,  to  march),  perf.  partic.  marfd^tert, 
marched;  (bombarbieren,  to  bombard),  perf.  partic. 
bombarb  i  e  r  t ,  bombarded. 

4.  By  far  the  greater  number  of  adjectives  are  derived 
by  means  of  suffixes ;  sig,  the  most  usual  adjective  suffix 
(English -y)  forms  derivatives  from  nouns  —  adjectives  — 
verbs  —  and  from  the  following  adverbs  : 

(^eute,  to-day)  ^tVii\%  of  to-day 

(geftern,  yesterday)  ficfttig,  ofyesterdaij 

(\t%i,  now,  at  present)  jc^tg,  present 

(oor,  before)  tlOttg^  previous 

(bamal§,  at  that  time)  batttaltg^  of  that  time 

(eternals,  formerly)  ejcmdtg,  former 

{\)XZX,  here)  ^tefifif  ^f  {from)  here 

(bort,  there)  iottig,  of  {from)  there 


132 


A  COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 


SIXTEENTH   LESSON. 


1.  See  the  English-German  Vocabulary  at  the  end  of  the 
book,  under  the  respective  names  of  the  months. 

2.  {a)  The  demonstratives  berCOjenige,  bie(=)ienigc,  ba§(=) 
jenige  {that)  and  ber(=)felbe,  bie(=)felbe,  ba3(=)felbe  [baf(=)felbe] 
{the  same)  decline  each  component : 


bcrfelbe 
bc0felbcii 

berjenige 
begjenigen 


Sing. 

bicfelbe 
betjclben 

biejentge 
bericnigeii 


bagfelbe 
bcSfelben,  etc. 

ba^jenige 
bcSienigcn,  etc. 


Plu. 

btcfelbeit 
bcrfelben,  etc. 

bicjenigeti 
bicienigcn,  etc. 


{b)  As  to  the  declension  of  the  adjectives  (here :  fd^onc, 
gute,'gro^c)  the  rule  is  that  when  the  attributive  adjective 
is  preceded  by  the  definite  article  or  an  adjective  pronoun  of 
three  terminations  (here :  ber=,  bie=,  baSfelbe  and  ber=,  bie=, 
baSjentgc),  it  follows  the  laeak  declension,  that  is,  it  takes 
in  the  nominative  sing,  of  all  three  genders,  and  in  the 
accusative  sing,  feminine  and  neuter,  the  termination  ^e ; 
and  in  all  other  cases  of  the  sing,  and  plu.,  =en. 

3.  The  regular  forms  of  the  personal  pronouns  {see  Sixth 
Lesson,  Note  1)  are  also  used  reflexively  for  the  first  and 
second  persons,  sing,  and  plu. : 


GRAMMATICAL  NOTES.  I33 


I.  Pers. 
Sing.  Plu. 

AcGus. :  mid^  ^  we  and  myself  un§  =  us  and  ourselves 

Dat. :  mir  =  to  me  and  to  my-  unS  =  to  us  and  ^0  owr- 
self  selves 


II.  Pers. 


Plu. 


Accus. :  btd^  =  ^Aee  and  thyself        t\x6:^  =  you  and  yourselves 
Dat. :  bir  =  to  thee  and  ^0  thy-      eud^  =  ^0  2/^m  and  to  your- 
self selves 

For  the  third  person  the  reflexive  pronoun  has  its  own 
distinct  forms,  viz.  : 

III.  Pers. 
Sing.  Plu. 


Accu^.:'^         C  him^self  herself  itself  C  themselves 

Dat. :  ]  ^^\to  himself,  to  herself,  to  itself   ^^\to  themselves 


'\6)  fe^e  mtd^,  I  seat  myself;  er  fe^t  f id^,  he  seats  A^m- 
self;  id^  fd^meid)le  mir,  I  flatter  myself;  fie  fd^meid^eln 
f  id^,  they  flatter  themselves. 

4.    The  impersonal  form  is  much  more  usual  in  German 
than  in  English.     Some  impersonal  idioms  are  : 

eg  t^ut  mir  leib,  "I  _  c8  ge^t  mir  gut,  I  am  doing  well 

e0  ift  mir  leib,     i  eS  fe^lt  mir  etroag,  something  ails  me 

e0  gcfciUt  mir,  J  like  it  e8  getingt  mir,  J  succeed 
ti  ift  mir  wo^l,  I  feel  well 

(See  Twenty-Sixth  Lesson,  Note  1.) 


134  ^  COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 

5.  {See  Eighth  Lesson,  Note  6.)  There  are  three  classes 
of  dependent  clauses 

(a)  substantive  or  declarative  claitseSf  always  intro- 
duced by  „hai"  (thai). 

(b)  adjective  clauses,  introduced  by  a  relative  pro- 
noun or  a  relative  adverb. 

(c)  adverbial  clauses,  introduced  by  the  subordinating 
conjunctions :  roenn  (t/,  when),  al§  (when,  as),  ba  (as, 
since),  f  o  b  a ^  (so  that,  that),  ro  e  1 1  (because),  n  a  d^  b  c  m 
(after),  etc. 

6.  iS^ee  Note  3,  above.  —  The  conjugation  of  reflexive 
verbs  offers  no  peculiarities.  The  reflexive  object  has  the 
usual  place,  before  an  infinitive  or  participle,  but  elsewhere 
immediately  after  the  verb  form.  The  perfect  auxiliary 
of  a  reflexive  verb  is  always  ^abcn. 


SEVENTEENTH   LESSON. 

1.  See  Third  Lesson,  Note  1  (c). 

2.  The  adverb  ^tx  denotes  motion  toward  the  speaker ; 
Ijtll,  motion  from  the  speaker.     As  : 

2Bo  ge^cn  6ie  ^in?  where  are  you  going  (^o)?     2So 
!ommen  ©ie  ^  e  r  ?  where  do  you  come  from  ? 

Or  in  composition : 

2B  0  ^  i  n  gc^cn  ©ic  ?    2B  o  ^  e r  f ommen  ©ie  ?    „'^6)  gc^c 
bort^in."     „^6)  fommc  bort^cr." 


GRAMMATICAL  NOTES.  135 

Also  in  composition  with  prepositions  (as :  auf  and  au§), 
^er  and  ^in  retain  their  original  meaning,  as : 

„^ommen  ©te  ^erauf!"  come  up  (here,  ^.e.,  toward 
the  speaker).  —  ,,@e^en  <Sie  ^  i  n  auf !"  go  up  (there,  i.e., 
from  the  speaker).  Likewise  :  „^ommen  <Ste  ^erauS !" 
and  „@e^en  ©ie  ^inauS!" 

3.  (a)  In  the  normal  order  of  words  the  verb  stands 
next  after  the  subject,  as  : 

2lnberfen  f  a  g  t  in  fcitiem  33uc^e. 

(b)  In  the  inverted  order  of  words  the  verb,  instead  of 
following,  precedes  the  subject,  as  : 

3n  feinem  S3u^e  jagt  Slnberfen. 

(c)  In  a  dependent  clause,  the  verb  is  transposed  to  the 
end  of  the  clause,  as  : 

(2Bir  fe^en),  ba§  Slnberfcn  in  feinem  S3uc^e  fagt. 

4.  Most  adjectives  are  used  in  their  predicate  form  as 
adverbs,  not  only  in  the  positive,  but  also  in  the  compara- 
tive and  superlative  degrees.  The  following  adverbs,  how- 
ever, form  their  comparative  and  superlative  from  other 
stems  : 

roo^l,  well  beffcr,  better  am  beften,  best 

balb,  soon  e^cr,  sooner  am  el^eften,  soonest 

gem,  ivillingly,  I i e b e r ,  more  willing-  am  I i e b ft e n ,  most 

gladly  ly,  rather  willingly 


136  ^   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 


EIGHTEENTH   LESSON. 

1.  {See  Ninth  Lesson,  Note  5.)  The  genitive  is  used 
adverbially,  expressing 

(a)  Place :  red^ter  §anb  ;  linfcr  §anb,  on  the  right, 
—  left. 

(b)  Tune  (indefinite) :  bcS  ^KorgenS  ;  beS  2lbenbg  ; 
cineS  XageS  ;  abenbS  ;  nad^tS. 

(c)  Manner,  regularly  with  descriptive  adjective: 
fd^neHen  Sd^ritteg,  swiftly;  fte^enben  gu^eg,  iminediately ; 
frozen  ^Jiutes,  ^'^o^^^  ;  biiftern  SlicfeS,  gloomily  looking  ; 
etc. 

2.  (See  Seventeenth  Lesson,  Note  3,  h.)  —  The  inverted 
order  occurs,  if  any  other  word  but  the  subject  heads  the 
sentence. 

3.  See  Seventeenth  Lesson,  Note  3  (c), 

4.  See  Fifth  Lesson,  Note  3. 

5.  See  Thirteenth  Lesson,  Note  2. 

6.  With  the  verbs  fcin  {to  he),  roerbcn  (to  become), 
b  I  e  i  b  e  n  (to  continue),  ^  e  i  ^  e  n  (to  be  called),  f  d^  e  i  n  e  n  (to 
seem,  to  appear)  ;  and  with  the  passive  of  some  verbs  (which 
take  in  the  active  a  second  accusative  as  factitive  or  com- 
plimentary object),  such  as  nennen  (to  name,  to  call), 
t  a  u  f  c  n  (to  baptize),  etc.,  the  predicate  noun  will  be  a  nomi- 
native.   As  : 

2)iefer  (nom.)  %\a%  ^eifet  ber  (nom.)  ^arlSpIa^.  ®te 
(nom.)  ^rooence  roirb  baS  (nom.)  ^arabieS  t)on  granheid^ 
genannt. 


GRAMMATICAL  NOTES.  I37 


NINETEENTH   LESSON. 

1.  The  passive  voice  is  formed  by  the  auxiliary  verb 
rocrben  (wurbe  [roarb],  geroorben)  in  combination  with  the 
perfect  participle  of  a  transitive  verb.  In  the  compound 
tenses,  the  participle  getoorben  loses  the  augment  ge=,  as : 

id^  bin  gelobt  n)  o  r  b  e  n ,  /  have  been  praised. 

2.  German  has  no  special  forms  for  the  English  the  house 
is  building  —  is  being  built,  etc.  These  are  translated  by 
the  simple,  bag  §au§  tnitb  (impf.  rourbe,  etc.)  G^zh(x\xi.  — 
„2[BctbCtt"  is  therefore  combined  with  the  perf.  partic.  only 
to  express  the  true  passive  —  that  is,  the  passive  action. 

In  English  the  perf.  partic.  with  be  often  expresses  only 
a  state  or  result  of  the  action  ;  in  this  case  the  German  uses 
fcin  (not  roerben).     Thus  : 

bie  %\)v:i,  ttiutbe  urn  8  Ul)r  gefd)loffen,  the  door  was 
closed  at  8  o'clock  (the  closing  took  place  at  that  hour), 
but  bie  %\)Xkx  mar  urn  8  U^r  gefd^loffen  —  it  was  found 
closed  (had  been  closed  earlier). 

This  distinction  requires  careful  attention. 

3.  Kouns  of  quantity,  weight,  or  measure,  except 
feminines  in  se,  are  used  in  the  singular  after  a  numeral. 
The  English  '  o/'  is  not  expressed.     Thus  : 

brei  ^funb  (sing.)  ^^ee,  three  pounds  o/tea;  gelin 
gu^  (sing.)  lang,  ten/ee^  long  —  but  brei  Xaffen  (pin.) 
%\)zz,  three  cups  of  tea;  jroei  ©Ken  (pin.)  lang,  two 
yards  long. 


133  ^  COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 

4.  In  principal  clauses,  in  the  simple  tenses  of  the  verb 
(pres.  and  past),  the  prefix  is  separated  from  the  verb.    As: 

2)er  3wg  fommt  an;   ber  3"9  ^awi  on. 

5.  Whenever  the  verb  is  removed  to  the  end  of  the 
sentence,  that  is,  in  dependent  clauses,  the  prefix  is  never 
detached  from  the  verb.     As : 

2Bcnn  ber  3w9  a  n  f  o  m  m  t ;   als  ber  3ws  a  n  fam. 

6.  Frequently  the  infinitive  is  used  in  Grerman,  instead 
of  the  English  imperative.     As  : 

^©infteigen  \"  (on  starting  a  train)  get  in!  all  aboard! 
^Slu^fteigen!"  get  out!  all  out! 

The  perf.  partic.  is  likewise  used  instead  of  the  English 
imperative.     Thus : 

„@ingeftiegen  \" — „5lu§geftie9en  \"    „§tite  abgenommen !" 
hats  off! 


TWENTIETH   LESSON. 

1.  See  Eighth  Lesson,  Note  1. 

2.  See  Third  Lesson,  Note  4. 

3.  See  Eighth  Lesson,  Note  6,  and  Sixteenth  Lesson, 
Note  5. 

4.  See  Eighteenth  Lesson,  Note  1  (c)   and   Twenty- 
fourth  Lesson,  Note  3  {e). 

5.  (a)  ^M,  half,  is  indeclinable  when  used  alone  before 
the  names  of  countries  and  places,  but  is  elsewhere  declined. 


GRAMMATICAL  NOTES.  139 

Thus: 

^alb  (guropa  ;  ^alb  Sonbon  ;  but  ba§  ^albe  Sanb ;  eine 
\)oXht  ^JiiUio'n  ;  ein  ^alber  2:^aler. 

(^)  Peculiar  are  the  compounds  of  the  ordinals  with 
^  a  I  b  following  them  ;  as  : 

anbert^alb  =  Ij  ;  bntl(e)^alb  =  2J  ;  t)iert(e)^alb  =  3J  ; 
neunl(e)^alb  =  8J  ;  meaning,  „ba§  anbere  (=  gtueite)  nut 
^alb"  ;  „bag  britte  nur  ^alb" ;  „ba§  oierte  nur  l^alb,"  etc. 

6.  Most  strong  verbs  which  have  a  for  their  root-vowel 
modify  a  into  a  in  the  second  and  third  persons  sing,  of  the 
present  indicative,  but  not  in  the  imperative  : 

id^  fade,  bu  fiiflft,  er  faUt ;  imperative :  fattc ! 


TWENTY-FIRST   LESSON. 

1.  baS  %\)oX,  dale,  valley  (plu.  -et) 
ber  2^^aler,  thaler ;  dollar  (plu.  — ) 


bag  %\)0X,  gate  (plu.  -e) 
bet  ^^or,  fool  (plu.  -en) 


ba§  ©d^ilb,  sign  (plu.  -et) 
ber  ©cl)ilb,  shield  (plu.  -e) 


2.  The  modified  vowels  are  never  doubled  ;  hence  sub- 
stantives which  have  a  double  vowel  in  the  singular  are 
spelled  with  only  one  vowel,  when  modified,  as : 

ber  ©ttol,  hall,  plu.  bie  ©ale  (compare  also :  baS  §car, 
dimin.  baS  §dr(i^en). 

3.  See  Sixth  Lesson,  Note  4  (a,  b). 


140  ^   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 

4.  The  reciprocal  pronoun  has  no  special  form  ;  as  such 
are  used  the  accusatives  and  datives  plural  of  the  reflexive 
pronouns : 

un8,  ourselves  (=  one  another,  each  other ;  or  to  our- 
selves =  to  one  another,  to  each  other)  —  tnt^,  your- 
selves or  to  yourselves  (=  one  another  ;  to  each  other) 
—  fi(^,  themselves  or  to  themselves  (=  one  another  ;  to 
each  other). 
As: 

3^r  fd^Iagt  eud^  (accus.  reciproc.)  ;    mx  ^elfen  wnS 
(dat.  reciproc.)  ;  fie  ergd^Ien  fid^  (dat.  reciproc). 

5.  When  =  tnmtt,  expresses  time  indefinite,  future  or 
contingent  (=  whenever). 

When  =  aU,  expresses  a  definite  past  time. 
When  ?  =  toann  ?   is  always  interrogative,  in  questions 
direct  or  indirect. 

6.  The  close  resemblance  between  Grerman  and  English 
rests  upon  historical  kinship.  The  Angles  and  the  Saxons, 
who  conquered  Britain  before  a.d.  500  —  whence  the 
united  name  Anglo-Saxon,  applied  to  the  people  and  the 
language  —  and  from  the  Angles,  the  names  England 
(=  Angle-land)  and  English  —  were  German  peoples. 
These  brought  with  them,  of  course,  their  own  German 
tongues,  which  with  some  other  admixture,  formed  the 
Anglo-Saxon  (sometimes  called  Old  English)  —  the  basis  of 
the  English  language. 

But,  though  of  the  same  Germanic  stock,  these  peoples 
were  of  a  different  branch  from  those  whose  language  has 
given  rise  to  the  modern  literary  German.  The  Angles 
and  Saxons  were  Low-Germans,  dwellers  on  the  low,  or 
coast,  lands,  as  distinguished  from  those  who  dwelt  in  the 


GRAMMATICAL  NOTES.  141 

high,  or  central,  lands  of  the  continent,  whose  language, 
known  as  High-German,  is  the  basis  of  the  modern 
German.  The  nearest  kinship  of  English  is  thus  with  the 
Low-German  tongues,  as  the  modern  Dutch,  and  the  dialects 
of  common  speech  in  North  Germany,  called  ^latt=®eutfc^ 
—  but  all  are  included  in  the  general  term  Germanic,  or 
Teutonic. 

There  were  thus  already  considerable  diversities  of  speech 
between  the  High-German  and  the  earliest  English.  These 
diversities  have  been  still  further  increased  by  historical 
causes  subsequently.  Still,  the  kinship  of  English  to 
German  is  of  fundamental  importance,  the  more  so,  as  it 
shows  itself  especially  in  the  most  essential  and  important 
elements  of  our  own  language  —  implying  cognate  origin, 
not  mere  derivation. 


TWENTY- SECOND   LESSON. 

1.  See  Seventeenth  Lesson,  Note  4. 

2.  (a)  The  future  act.  is  formed  by  the  present  of  the 
aux.  verb  toetbett  and  the  present  infinitive  of  the  principal 
verb. 

(b)  The  present  passive  is  formed  by  means  of  the  aux. 
verb  Uierben  and  the  perf.  partic.  of  the  principal  verb.    As  : 

(Infinit. :  to  build,  hanm ;  perf.  partic. :  gebaut,  built). 
Fut.  act. :  er  ro  i  r  b  ba§  §au§  b  a  u  e  n  ;  pres.  pass. :  baS 
roirb  gebaul. 


3.    Principal  parts  of  the  aux.  t)aben,  to  have:  l)ahcn 
-  ^atte  —  ge^abt. 


142  ^   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 

4.  Principal  parts  of  the  aux.  Jctii,  to  he:  Jcin  —  wax 

—  gcroef  en. 

5.  Principal  parts  of  the  aux.  roerben,  to  he  :  to  hecome: 
roerben  —  rourbe  [roarb] — getoorbcn. 

6.  {See  Seventeenth  Lesson,  Note  3,  c.)  The  com- 
pound tenses  of  the  modal  auxiliaries  (biirfen,  fonnen,  mogen, 
tniiffen,  foUen,  rooUen)  are  formed  like  those  of  other 
verbs  (viz.,  geburft,  gefonnt,  gemod^t,  gemufet,  gefollt,  gerooflt), 
with  the  important  exception  that  in  the  perf.  and  pluperf. 
tenses,  when  used  along  with  the  infinitive  of  another  verb, 
the  infinitive  is  put  in  place  of  the  perf.  partic,  thus  : 

er  foil  ben  53nef  fd^retben,  perf.  tense:  er  \)(xi  ben 
93rtef  fd^reiben  follen  (infinit.  instead  of  perf.  partic. 
g  e  f  0  U  t) ;  fie  ro  i  1 1  bie  6tabt  oerlaffen,  perf.  tense :  fie 
^aX  bie  6tabt  oerlaffen  to  o  U  e  n  (in  place  of  g  e  to  o  11 1). 


TWENTY- THIRD   LESSON. 

1.  Of  the  cardinal  numerals,  citl  is  regularly  inflected  — 
ein,  cine,  ein  —  when  before  a  noun  ;  when  without  a  noun, 
einer,  eine,  eineS;  or  with  the  article  bet  @ine,  bie  (Sine, 
ba§  @ine,  etc.  The  neuter  form  einS  (for  etneS)  is  used  ab- 
stractly in  counting.  —  '^V^tX  unb  bret  have  a  genitive  jTOeiet, 
bteiet,  and  a  dative  groeien,  breien,  which  may  be  used  when 
the  case  is  not  otherwise  indicated.  Other  simple  numerals 
usually  remain  unaltered. 

2.  Agency  —  especially  of  passive  verbs  —  is  expressed 
by  the  preposition  Hon,  hy ;  (act.:  bie  goberaliften  roa^Iten 
i^n);  pass.:  er  ronrbe  t)on  ben  JiJi^^i^^^ipcn  geTOd^lt. 


GRAMMATICAL  NOTES. 


143 


3.  See  Eleventh  Lesson,  Note  4. 

4.  See  Seventeenth  Lesson,  Note  3. 


TWENTY-FOURTH   LESSON. 


1.  Certain  strong  verbs  undergo  modification  or  change 
of  the  root-vowel  in  the  2nd  and  3rd  persons  sing,  of  the 
present  indie,  and  in  the  imperative  sing.     Thus  : 


Pres.  indie. 

(ic^  ne^me) 
(bu  nimmft) 
(er  nimmt) 
{mx  tie^men,  etc.) 


Imperat.  act. 

nimm ! 
(ne^nxe  er!) 
(nel^men  rair!) 
nel)met! 
(ne^men  jie !) 


Imperat.  pass. 
roerbc  genommen! 

roerbet  genommen ! 


2.  See  Eighteenth  Lesson,  Note  1  (c),  and  also  Note  3  (e) 
below. 

3.  The  preposition  bon  (from,  ofj  hy),  expresses 

(a)  Place:  motion /T-om ;  oon  ber  ©tabt ;  won  oben. 

transition  from:  oon  SBorten  ju  ©d^ldgen,  from  words  to 
blows. 

separation  from:  yed^g  SUieiten  t)on . . .,  six  miles  from , . . ; 
fret  t)on  ©d^ulben,  free  of  debts ;  freigefprod^en  con,  ac- 
quitted of. 

(6)  Time,  from:  Dom  5!Worgen  bi§  3lbenb ;  t)on  ^WQCitb  auf. 

(c)  Source,  from :  t)on  ^erjen,  from  the  heart ;  t)on  felbft,  volun- 
tarily. 

or  Material,  from,  of:  eine  Sriicte  t)on  (Sifen;   ein  ^er3  t)on 
etein. 


144  ^   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 

{d)  Agency,  by,  especially  of  passive  verbs :  t)on  bent  SSoI!e  ge= 
xoaf)it,  elected  by  the  people. 

(e)  Specijicaiion,  of  (and  here  often  for  a  genitive) :  in  terms 
of  rank  and  title,  bie  ^onigin  t)on  (Snglanb ;  description,  ein 
Tlann  oon  ®§re ;  cine  grau  oon  60  ^a^ren ;  Slusroanberer  beutjc^er 
S'iationalitdt. 

(/)  Limiting  object,  of,  concerning,  with  verbs  like  benfen, 
^alten,  fagen,  etc.;  roa^  benfen  ©ie  t)on  t^m  ?   (of  him). 

4.  As  a  rule,  the  definite  article  is  used  in  Grerman  more 
largely  than  in  English.  On  the  other  hand,  it  is  omitted 
in  German  where  used  in  English : 

(a)  in  a  few  pronominal  or  adjective  phrases  ;  as  : 

crflerer  and  Ic^tcrer,  the  former,  the  latter; 
folgenber,  the  following. 

(b)  in  phrases  expressing  direction  to  or  from  the  points 
of  the  compass  ;  as  : 

t)on  3^orben,  na6)  ©iiben,  gegcn  Often,  from  the  north, 
towards  the  south  (east). 

5.  To  express  ^purpose,'   in  order  to,  the  combination 

tttn  .  .  .  JU  is  generally  used ;   um  standing  at  the  head  of 

the  clause  and  gu  in  its  usual  position  with  the  infinitive ; 

as: 

ic^  t^ue  mein  SBefleS,  um  bie  beutfd^e  ©prad^e  ju  lernen, 

/  do  my  best  to  learn  the  German  language. 

6.  The  subjunctive  as  Indirect  Subjunctive  (Oratio 
obliqua)  is  used  in  dependent  sentences,  expressing  the 
statement  of  another  as  related  —  not  quoted  —  and  not 
affirmed  by  the  writer  or  speaker.     Ex.  : 

he  believes  that  he  is  sick    er  glaubt,  ba^  er  franf  f  e  i 

he  asked  how  I  had  slept     er  frogtc,  rote  ic^  gefd^lafen  ^cittc 


GRAMMATICAL  NOTES.  I45 


TWENTY-FIFTH   LESSON. 

1.  @onj,  whole,  and  ^a\h,  half,  are  indeclinable  when 
used  alone  before  the  names  of  countries  and  places,  but 
are  elsewhere  declined.     Thus : 

Q^an^  (^no^lanh ,  all  E7iffland ;  but  ba§  ganjc  ©nglanb ; 
\)alh  Sonbon  —  ba§  l^albc  Sonbon  ;  ber  ^albc  X^aler  ;  ein 
ganger  2:^aler. 

2.  See  Sixteenth  Lesson,  Note  4. 

3.  The  preposition  um,  with  accusative  only  (around, 
about)  expresses 

(a)  Place:  urn  ben  2;ifcl^  fi^en;  um  ben  §al§  Mnben;  bie 
©egenb  um  Softon. 

(6)  Time,  or  number :  indefinite,  about. 

time  of  day,  definite,  at:  um  roelc^c  3cit  ?  um  2  U^r,  at 
two  o'clock. 

excess,  by:  nm  ein  '^af)v  alter,  a  year  older. 

succession,  after:  einer  um  ben  anbern,  one  after  another. 

(c)  Rotation.,  around. 

alternation,  einen  %a%  um  ben  anbern,  every  other  day. 

exchange,  3luge  uxa  2luge,  an  eye  for  an  eye. 

end  or  loss,  um  bag  Seben  bringen,  to  deprive  of  life  ;  um 
bag  ®elb  fommen,  to  lose  one's  money ;  bie  ^t\t  ift  um, 
time  is  over. 

id)  Remote  object,  about,  for:  um  etroaS  ftretten,  to  fight  for 
(about) ;  um  S3rot  bitten,  to  ask  for ;  um  diat  fragen,  to  ask  ad- 
vice ;  um  §ilf e  rufen,  to  cry  for  help 


146  ^   COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 

4.  See  Seventeenth  Lesson,  Note  3  (c).  —  A  dependent 
clause  preceding  the  principal,  has  the  value  of  an  intro- 
ductory adjunct  (adverb,  etc.),  and  causes  the  inversion  of 
the  principal  verb.     As  : 

21I§  roir  anfamen,  ro  a  r  eg  fd^on  %<x%  (=  33ei  unfrer  2ln= 
funft  [adv.]  roar  e§  fc^on  Xag). 

5.  A  present  participle  used  appositively,  is,  when  de- 
scriptive, usually  expanded  into  a  relative  clause.     As  : 

We  met  a  man  caiTying  a  fishing-rod,  n)ir  trafen  einen 
3Kann,  roclc^er  [bcr]  einc  Slngcltute  trug. 

6.  The  conjunctions  a(§  oft,  o(8  ttienn,  ttiic  ttictltl  (as  »/), 
expressing  an  unreal  condition,  are  followed  by  the  (con- 
ditional) subjunctive.     As : 

@r  fie^t  au§,  al§  toenn  cr  front  roarc,  ^  fooA^s,  as  if  he 
were  sick. 


TWENTY- SIXTH   LESSON. 

1.    Some  verbs  expressing  states  of  body  or  mind  are 
used  as  impersonal^  with  the  person  as  object : 

Accus.  Dat. 

ti  ^ungert  mid^,  I  am  hungry  e8  fc^roinbelt  mir,  I  am  giddy 

ti  biirftet  mi(^,  I  am  thirsty  ed  bangt  mir,  I  feel  afraid 

t»  friert  mic^,  /  am  cold  ^^  (  gefdUt  j  ^.^^  j  ^^^  ^ 

L  beliebt ) 

{See  SixTKBMTH  Lrsson,  Note  4.) 


GRAMMATICAL  NOTES.  147 


2.    See  Eleventh  Lesson,  Note  4. 


3.  Contrary  to  the  English  usage,  verbs  of  electing,  ap- 
pointing, creating,  etc.,  take  the  second  object  in  the  dative 
with  jtt  and,  in  the  singular,  the  contracted  article.     As  : 

@r  na^m  fie  gur  grau;  man  mad^te  x\)n  gum  ^rofeffor. 

4.  Corresponding  generally  to  English  of,  the  genitive 
is  used  with  a  number  of  adjectives  and  their  opposites,  as: 


berou^t    and  unbetou^t 

conscious  —  unconscious  (of) 

eingebenf  "    uneingebenl 

mindful  —  unmindful  (of) 

fro^          "    iiberbruffig 

glad  —  weary  {of) 

geroi^       "    ungeroi^ 

certain  —  uncertain  (of) 

funbig       "    unfunbtg 

acquainted  (with)  —  ignorant  (of) 

TOiirbig      "    unroiirbig 

worthy  —  unworthy  {of),  etc. 

5.  In  changing  direct  quotations  to  indirect  statements, 
the  rule  is,  that  the  mood  is  the  (indirect)  subjunctive  and 
that  the  tense  is  usually  the  same  in  Oratio  obliqua,  as 
would  be  used  in  the  indicative,  if  the  words  were  directly 
quoted.  But  frequently  the  past  subjunctive  will  be  used 
for  the  present,  especially  when  the  present  subjunctive 
would  be  of  the  same  form  with  the  present  indicative.   As : 

(a)  Direct  quotation :  ^er  ©d^netbet  be^auptcte :  „6ie 
^aben  (pres.  indie.)  bte  9f{eci^nung  nic^t  bega^It." 

(b)  Indirect  statement  should  be :  ®er  ©d)neiber  be= 
l^auptete,  td^  ^abe  .  .  .  (pres.  indie,  and  subjunct.,  there- 
fore the  past  subj.  to  be  used)  : 

^cr  ©djineiber  be^auptete,  x^  l^atte  (past  subjunct.) 
bic  3Red^nutig  nid^t  bega^lt  (or  ba^  id^  bie  Sted^nung  nid^t 
bega^It  ^atte). 


148  ^  COURSE  IN  GERMAN. 


TWENTY- SEVENTH   LESSON. 

1.  Foreign  words  usually  take  the  accent  on  the  last 
syllable,  unless  they  have  become  quite  germanized. 

2.  As  most  adjectives  are  used  in  their  predicate  form 
as  adverbs,  not  only  in  the  positive,  but  also  in  the  com- 
parative and  superlative  degrees,  the  adverb  in  German  is 
distinguished  from  the  uninflected  adjective  only  by  the 
sense. 

3.  Some  adverbs  take  the  sign  of  the  genitive,  g  : 

abenbg,  in  the  evening  re(^t5,  to  (on)  the  right 

tnorgeng,  in  the  morning  {\nU,  to  {on)  tJie  left 

mittagg,  at  midday  fc^onfteng,  in  the  best  manner 

nac^tg,  at  night  fpdtefteng,  at  the  latest 

anfangg,  in  the  beginning  anberl,  otJierwise 

4.  Instead  of  the  usual  formation  of  the  comparative 
(see  First  Lessox,  Note  5),  an  adverb  comparison  with 
me^r  is  used,  when  two  qualities  are  compared  in  the  same 
subject,  as : 

^arl  ift  m  e  ^  r  I  e  i  d^  t  f  i  n  n  i  g  alS  bofc,  more  thought- 
less than  bad. 

5.  The  adverbial  accusative  expresses  measure  or  extent, 
duration  of  time  in  answer  to  the  questions  how  far  ?  hotv 
much  ?  how  long  ? 

6.  The  partitive  genitive  names  the  whole  of  which  a 
part  is  taken. 

7.  See  Twenty-fourth  Lesson,  Note  3  (/). 


GRAMMATICAL  NOTES.  149 

8.  See  Twenty-fourth  Lesson,  NotS  3  (c). 

9.  See  Note  6,  above. 

10.    See  Twenty-sixth  Lesson,  Note  5. 


TWENTY-EIGHTH   LESSON. 

1.  The  participles  are  verb-adjectives,  having  the  mean- 
ing of  a  verb,  and  the  grammatical  construction  of  an  ad- 
jective. Both  present  and  perfect  participles  follow  the 
usual  rules  of  adjective  inflection,  and  may  be  used  as 
simple  adjectives.     When  so  used  they  may  be  compared. 

2.  Of  two  objects,  the  direct  and  indirect  coming  together, 
the  dative  (indirect  object)  stands  first.  But  if  the  accusa- 
tive is  a  pronoun,  it  will  usually  precede  the  dative. 

Ex.:  @r  ^at  bcm  ^nakn  (dat.)  bog  ©ur^  (accus.)  ge= 
geben,  but  er  ^at  cS  (accus.)  i^m  (or  bent  ^naben,  dat.) 
gegeben. 

3.  The  preposition  auf  (with  dative  or  accus.),  on,  upon 
(a  surface)  expresses  with  dative : 

Place,  on,  upon,  Hterally,  as:  auf  bem  Xifd^e,  auf  bcm  Serge, 
auf  ber  See,  auf  bem  ©c^iffe,  auf  ber  ©tra^e  fein,  etc.  Hence 
with  places  implying  eleuation  or  importance,  at:  auf  meinem 
dimmer  {at  my  room  up  stairs);  auf  bem  ©c^toffe  {up  at  the 
castle);  and  so  auf  ber  Unioerfitat,  auf  bem  Tlavtie,  auf  ber 
^oft,  auf  bem  Salle  fein.    • 

4.  In  certain  phrases  the  simple  infinitive  is  used  with 
blciben,  to  remain  (fte^en  bleiben,  to  remain  standing  =  to 


150  ^   COURSE  IN  GERMAN.  ' 

stop) ;  with  the  verbs  of  motion  (fpajieren  ge^en  ;  fpa^teren 
reiten  ;  jpajieren  fasten  ;  fd^Iafen  ge^en),  etc. 

5.  See  Twenty-sixth  Lesson,  Note  3. 

6.  See  Twenty-sixth  Lesson,  Kote  5.  The  same  rules? 
as  to  both  mood  and  tense,  apply  also  to  the  (dependent  or) 
indirect  question. 

7.  An  indirect  question  when  not  beginning  with  an 
interrogative  pronoun  or  adverb  (roer?  roa^?  iDann?  roie? 
too  ?  loarum  ?  roofiir  ?  roogu  ?  etc.),  is  introduced  by  the  con- 
junction o(  =  wliether,  if. 

Ex.  direct:  „3ft  §crr  9^.  9^.  gu  §auie?"  — indirect : 
(2Bir  fragten  ben  Sebienten),  ob  §err  9^.  '^.  gu  §aufe  fei 
(or  rodrc). 


TWENTY-NINTH   LESSON. 

1.  The  English  ''hut''  =  obcr,  oflcin  (obsolete);  fonbcrit 
(see  Fourth  Lesson,  Note  10). 

Meaning:  Slber  and  syn.  allein  concede,  fonbern 
contradicts. 

Position :  ©  o  n  b  e  r  n  and  a  11  e  t  n  stand  always  at  the 
head  of  the  clause ;  abtx,  in  the  sense  of  liowever^ 
frequently  after  the  introductory  words. 

2.  The  present  participle  is  used  as  attributive  (as :  ein 
liebenber  Sruber  ;  ber  bliil^enbe  Saurn)  or  as  an  appo- 
sition (as  :  er  fa^  roeinenb  ba),  or  though  more  rarely,  with 
a  sort  of  predicative  force  (as:  un§  freunbltd^  griifeenb, 
petlie^  er  unS,  greeting  us  kindly^  he  left  iis). 


'       GRAMMATICAL  NOTES.  151 

3.  Often  the  transposed  clause  ends  in  the  participle  of 
a  compound  tense,  the  auxiliary  being  omitted,  when  the 
meaning  is  already  clear. 

Ex.:  ©obalb  er  in  baS  Siwimer  getreten  (roar  to  be 
supplied),  fagte  er. 

4.  See  Twenty-sixth  Lesson,  Note  5. 

5.  See  Twenty-sixth  Lesson,  Note  5. 

6.  See  Twenty-eighth  Lesson,  Notes  6-7. 


THIRTIETH   LESSON. 

1.  The  verb  roerben  ([1]  auxil.  for  the  formation  of  the 
fut.  act.  and  the  whole  passive  ;  [2]  independent  verb  =  to 
become)  has  two  forms  for  the  past,  the  old  (strong)  form 
lUtttb^  and  the  modern  (weak)  rourbe.  —  SBarb  is  more 
common  as  independent  verb;  rourbe,  as  auxiliary. 

2.  See  Fourteenth  Lesson,  Note  5. 

3.  See  Twenty-fifth  Lesson,  Note  4.  —  For  the  same 
reason,  expressions  like  /  think ;  said  he,  etc.,  when  pre- 
ceded by  any  of  the  words  referred  to,  will  be  inverted, 
those  phrases  being  logically  the  principal  sentence,  of 
which  the  words  quoted  form  the  object. 

4.  The  pure  conjunctions  cause  neither  inversion  nor 
transposition  of  the  verb.     These  are  : 

unb,  and  —  aber,  but,  however — allcin,  hut,  yet  — 
fonbern,  but  —  obcr,  or  —  benn, /o^. 

5.  See  Twj:?^TT-siXTP  XiessoN;  Note  0» 


152  ^   COURSE  IN  GERMAN, 


THIRTY-FIRST   LESSON. 

1.  See  Eighteenth  Lesson,  Note  1  (c). 

2.  See  Twenty-sixth  Lesson,  Note  5. 

3.  See  Twenty-second  Lesson,  Note  6. 

4.  See  Eleventh  Lesson,  Note  4  (b). 

5.  The  dative  (usually  to,  for)  sometimes  corresponds  to 
the  English  from  (of),  both  with  verbs  and  adjectives. 
This  is  sometimes  called  the  Dative  Privative,  but  is 
really  an  indirect  object,  usually  of  disadvantage  (removal, 
dissimilarity,  etc.). 

6.  The  subjunctive  in  its  past  tenses  is  used  in  both 
terms  of  a  conditional  sentence  (the  premise  and  the  con- 
clursion)  stating  an  unreal  condition.  It  is  then  called  the 
Conditional  Subjunctive. 


THIRTY- SECOND   LESSON. 

1.  See  Fourth  Lesson,  Note  10,  and  Twenty-ninth 
Lesson,  Note  1. 

2.  Contrary  to  the  general  rule  (see  Sixth  Lesson, 
Note  4,  a)  that  "  intransitives  which  express  simple  action, 
7iot  motion,  take  the  auxiliary  f^ahtn,"  the  verb  Bletktt  (to 
remxiin,  to  stay),  forms  its  compound  tenses  with  the  aux. 
fcin;  thus: 

id^  bin  gebliebcn,  I  have  remained,  etc. 


GRAMMATICAL  NOTES.  153 

3.  When  an  indirect  statement  is  represented  as  a  fact, 
confirmed  or  admitted  by  the  writer,  the  indicative  will  be 
used,  and  in  the  usual  tense. 

4.  The  conditional  (=  dependent)  clause  may  follow  the 
hypothetical  (=  principal)  clause ;  in  that  case  the  con- 
junction „^o"  is  omitted  and  the  normal  word-order  takes 
place.     Ex. : 

First  Place.  Second  Place. 

Conditional  (dependent)  clause.  Hypothetical  (principal)  clause. 

wenn  bag  ^Better  fc^on  ware,  (fo)  |  ^.^^^  .^^^^^ 

Hypothetical  (principal)  clause.  Conditional  (dependent)  clause. 

I  tDurbe  augge^en,  ^^^^  ^^^  ^^^^^^  ^„^^ 

^  I  gtnge  aug, 

5.  Frequently  the  conjunction  ,,tticnn"  at  the  head  of 
the  conditional  (dependent)  clause  is  omitted  ;  in  that  case 
the  inverted  order  takes  place.     Ex. : 

First  Place.  Second  Place. 

Conditional  (dependent)  clause.  Hypothetical  (principal)  clause, 

roiirbe  id^  augget)en 


(a)  roenn  bag  SBetter  fc^on  ware,  (jo)  j  ^.^^^  .^  ^^^ 

,,,      ..     V  ^  an  XX    rj."  r    1  voux'oe  trf)  auggefjeti 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


m. 


9lll'd|ett^  Aix-la-Chapelle,  a  town 
in  the  province  of  Rhenish 
Prussia. 

ttb,  off,  away. 

ab^billien  (w.),  to  paint,  to  portray. 

Whtnti,  m.  (-g,  pi.  -e),  evening, 
night ;  beg  Slbenbg  or  abenb^,  in 
the  evening ;  am  2lbenb,  in  the 
evening. 

%'6enb0lorfe, /.  {vl-  -«)/  evening- 
bell,  curfew-bell. 

o'fict,  but,  however. 

5l6'f a^rt,  /. ,  departure. 

9lb'fttnft/.,  descent,  origin. 

9l6'laut  ^-  (-[e]g,  vl-  -e),  change 
of  the  radical  vowel  of  verbs 
{e.g.,  finbe,  fanb). 

ab^legen  (w;.),  to  render  (an  ac- 
count). 

ab'fi^neilien  (fc|nitt,  gefc^nitten), 
(to  cut  off),  to  separate. 

ab'fegein  {w.),  to  set  sail,  to  put 
to  sea. 

?lb'fcnl)cr,  m.  (-g,  pi.  — ),  sender, 
writer  (of  a  letter). 

5l6'fl(^t,  /.  {pi.  -en),  intention, 
design,  aim. 

abfolbie'ren  {w.),  to  graduate 
from. 


^b'teilung,  /.  {Vl  -en),  compart- 
ment. 
ttb'jic^cn  (509,  geaogen),  to  take 

off. 
%tttnt,  m.  (-[e]g,  pi.  -e),  accent, 

stress,  emphasis. 
obbic'rcn  (w^.),  to  add  up,  to  cast 

up,  to  sum  up  (3  +  2,  read  brei 

plug  (or  unb)  2. 
^Ibtron^bd^S,  pZw.,  name  of  the 

principal  mountain-range  of  the 

state  of  New  York,  traversing 

Clinton-,  Essex-,  Franklin-,  and 

Hamilton  counties. 
5H)1cr,  m.  (-g,  pi.  — ),  eagle. 
?H>mitarf^iff,  n.  (-[e]g,  pi.  -e), 

admiral's  ship,  flag-ship. 
Slbrcffof ,  m.  (-en,  pi.  -en),  receiver 

(of  a  letter). 
5(tHJCr'bium,n.  {-^,pl.  Slboerbien), 

adverb. 
^Itmofa'tenftanb, m.  (-eg),  bar;  in 

ben  2lb»ofatenftanb  aufne^men, 

to  admit  to  the  bar. 
5lfoilcmie^ /.  {pi.  -en),  academy; 

^^iUipg  Slfabemie  in  ©jeter,  the 

well-known  preparatory  school 

of  Exeter,  N.  H. 
9Xa^t'm\\^,  academic. 


156 


VOCABULARY. 


Hft,  m.  (-es,  pi  -e),  act. 
^[rbre^t  I^  Duke  of  Austria,  was 

Emperor   of    (Jermany,    1298- 

1308. 
aVit,plu.^  all,  altogether. 
aUfin'  {conjunct.),  but,  yet. 
oricrlei,  all  kinds  of,  of  all  kinds. 
ariermetfl,  most  of  all ;  am  aUex- 

meiften,  chiefly,  particularly. 
ttVltS,  everything. 
%U%t'%tntaaxt,f-,  omnipresence. 
^Vptn,plu.,  Alps. 
a\B  {adv.),  as,  than,  but ;  {conjunct), 

as,  when ;  =  al^  o5  or  al^  roenn, 

as  if;  nic^t^  . . .  alg,  nothing . . . 

but. 
orfo,  therefore. 
ttit,  old,   antique,  ancient;  i^re 

2llten,  the  old  birds. 
om  =  Qn  bem. 
9lma}o'neni}rom,  m.  (-[ejs),  the 

river  Amazon  (Maraiion). 
9(mc'riftt  H),  America. 
?lmerifa'ncr,  m.  (-g,  pZ.—),  Ameri- 
can; -in,/.  (pZ.-nen),  American 

woman. 
amerifa'ttifi^^  American. 
^Cm'^erjl,   name  of  a  village  in 

Hampshire    county,    state    of 

Massachusetts. 
an  {adv.),  on ;  prepos.  {dot.),  at, 

near,  by,  on  (dates);  (occm^.), 

to,  towards,  against ;  am  ^ifc^e, 

at  (by)  the  table. 
9in'bM,  m.  (-[e]^),  aspect,  sight. 
an'bltifen  (to.),  to  survey,  to  look  at. 
9lnlia(u'ften  (-e),  Andalusia,  one 

of  the  southern  provmces  of 

Spain. 


Otl'licr  {pL  -e,  or  bie  -  n),  other, 
another. 

an'tiern  {w.),  to  change. 

9ln'Iierfctt  (©ans  g^rifttan),  a 
Danish  poet  and  story-teller, 
born  1805,  died  at  Copenhagen, 
1875.  In  1857  he  spent  several 
weeks  with  his  friend  Charles 
Dickens,  at  the  latter' s  coimtry- 
seat,  Gadsliill,  near  Rochester, 
county  of  Kent  (England). 

an'Heitten   {w.),  to  indicate,  to 

enjoin. 

an'fa^ren  (fu^r,  gefa^ren),  to  drive 
up ;  f am  angefa^ren,  came  driv- 
ing up. 

ttn'fttng,  m.  (-§,  pi.  ^e),  beginning; 
t)on  Slnfang  an,  from  the  very 
beginning. 

an'gefallren,  see  anfa^ren. 

an'ge^oren  {w.),  to  belong  to. 

Sln'gclcgen^cit,  /.  {pi.  -en),  busi- 
ness, affair. 

Sln'gfl^afen,  m.  (-s,  pi  — ),  fish- 
ing hook,  fishing  tackle. 

an'gettr^m,  pleasing,  agreeable. 

an'gcnommen,  see  anne^men. 

Mngfl,  /.  {pi  ''e),  anxiety,  an- 
guish. 

att'^oren  {iv.),  to  listen  to. 

on'fommen  (fam,  gefommen),  to 
arrive. 

ttn'hinft,/.,  arrival. 

an'Ugen  {w.),  to  found. 

an'tnelbflt  (w?.),  to  announce,  to 
usher  in. 

Ott'mutig,  pleasant,  graceful. 

9(nn  %xhox,  name  of  a  town  in  the 
state  of  Michigan. 


VOCABULARY. 


15T 


an'ne^mcn  (na^m,  genommen),  to 
accept ;  to  suppose ;  fid)  an; 
nef)men,  to  take  care  of  (you  = 
eurer). 

an^tetien  (lo.),  to  speak  to,  to  ac- 
cost. 

onS  =  an  ba^. 

ttn'fc^cn  (fat),  gefe^en),  to  look  at. 

5lnfttlort,  /.  {pi  -en),  answer; 
2lntn)ort  auf,  an  answer  to ;  jur 
2lntn)ort  geben,  to  answer,  to 
reply. 

onfttlortCtt  (w.),  to  answer,  to 
reply. 

5lnf  tDorlf(t)rciicn,  n.  (-g,  pi.  — ), 
letter  in  answer,  reply. 

W\th  m.  (-g,  pi  ^),  apple. 

5Hi1cl6ttum,  m.  (-[e]^,  pi  ^e), 
apple-tree. 

?lil'fclttJCin,m.(-[e]g),  apple-wine, 
cider. 

?l<l0t^e'fcr,  m.  (-g,  pi  — ),  apothe- 
cary, druggist. 

SHirir,  m.  (-g),  April. 

ttr'bciteu  {w.),  to  work. 
5lr'6cit0froft,  /.  (i?^  ^e),  faculty 

of  labor. 
5lrm,  w.  (-e^,  pi  -e),  arm. 
ovm,  poor;   ber  2lrme,  the  poor 

man,  poor  fellow ;  ein  2lrmer, 

a  poor  man ;    bie  2lrmen,  the 

poor  people. 
^Irmec',/.  {pi  -en),  army. 
5(rt^  /.  {pi  -en),  kind,  sort;  etne 

2lrt,  some  kind  of,  some  little. 
flf  tig,  polite,  courteous. 
%Xli,  m.  (-e^,  pi  ^e),  physician. 
Si'f^incg,  a  Greek,  famous  as  a 

public  speaker,  lived  at  Athens, 


in  the  fourth  century  before 
Christ. 

31P,  m.  (-eg,  pi  ^e),  branch.        / 

0^,  see  effen. 

ttttarfic'ren  {w.),  to  attack. 

ttUl^,  also,  too,  likewise ;  auc^  ttid^t, 
not  .  .  .  either,  neither. 

^lulJicnj',  /.  {pi  -en),  audience 
(with=bet).  (Regarding  Goethe's 
audience  with  Emperor  Napo- 
leon, compare  G.  H.  Lewes'  I'he 
Life  of  Goethe,  vol.  II,  pp.311 
sq.) 

auf  {dat),  on,  upon,  at ;  {accus.), 
upon,  to,  towards;  for  (time); 
after,  according  to ;  auf  einmal, 
all  at  once. 

auf  bliifen  {w.),  to  look  up. 

Sluf'cnt^ttlt  ^^^'  (-[e]^)/  stay,  so- 
journ. 

auf'gc^eu  (ging,  gegangen),  to  rise. 

auf'gefiftricbcn,  see  auffc^retben. 

auf  gcttJOt^fen,  see  aufraad^fen. 

fief)  auf  ^altcu  (^telt,  ge^alten),  to 
stay,  to  remain. 

aufmttii)cn  {w.},  to  open. 

aufmcrffttm,  attentive (ly),  close- 

(ly),  careful  (ly),  watchful  (ly), 

thoroughly. 
aufne^men   (na^m,   genommen), 

to  admit ;  in  ben  Slboof  atenftanb 

aufne^men,  to  admit  to  the  bar. 
auftcd)t  upright. 
auffcftrcikn  (fc^rieb,  gefc^rieben), 

to  write  down,  to  record. 
ttufflc^en   (ftanb,   geftanben),  to 

stand  up,  to  rise,  to  arise. 
auf  tutt^fen  (n)ucf)g,  geraarfifen),  to 

grow  up. 


158 


VOCABULARY. 


auf  jubltifett,  see  aufblicfen. 
%U'9C,  n.  (-g,  pi.  -n),  eye. 
^Ittg'Iein,  n.  (-g,  pi.  — ),  (pretty) 

little  eye, 
and  (dat.),  out  of,  from. 
aud'breitftt  («>.),  to  spread. 
QuScinan'JierleBcn  (zo.),  to  explain. 
ouScinttn'Hcrfci^eii    («?•)  =  au^= 

einan'berlegen. 
Wug'jlug,  m.  (-[e]0,  i)Z.  ^e),  excur- 
sion. 
Ottg'ge^cn    (ging,    gegangen),    to 

leave,  to  take  a  walk. 
aud'gejeil^net/  eminent,  excellent. 
ou0'ruf  en  (rief ,  geruf  en),  toexclaim. 
onrfc^en  Hal),  gefe^en),  to  look, 

to  appear. 
%ng'fc^en,   n.    (-5),   appearance, 

air. 
«ttrfl(^t/.  {pl  -en),  view. 
ourfpotten    (m>.),    to   deride,    to 

ridicule. 
%ViB'\pX(i(l^t,f',  pronunciation. 


tttt8'f|irc(^en  (fprad^,  gefprod^en), 
to  finish  speaking. 

ong'flcigen  (ftteg,  geftiegen),  to  step 
out,  to  alight. 

Ittg'fleanng,  /.  {pl  -en),  expo- 
sition, exhibition. 

Kng'dJttnbcrcr,  m.  (-g,  pl.  — ), 
emigrant. 

ttnS'tncnUig  (adv.),  by  heart ;  au^-^ 
roenbig  lernen,  to  memorize,  to 
commit  to  memory. 

^urjfic^nnng,  /.  {pL  -en),  dis- 
tinction, honoi-s. 

Ott'§cr  (dat.),  outside  of,  without, 
except. 

an'^tx^tm,  moreover,  in  addition 
to  (this). 

fiu'^ere^  outward,  exterior,  perso- 
nal. 

ttttler^ttlb  (genu.),  without,  on  the 
outside  of. 

ttn§eror'lientlil^,     extraordinary, 

(-iiy). 


». 


©ttb,  n.  (-e§,  pl.  *er),  bath. 

ba^en  (w.),  to  bathe. 

©O^n,  /.  (pl.  -en),  railroad, 
rail. 

So^n'lof,  m.  (-[e]g,  pl.  'e),  rail- 
road-station. 

bttli>,  soon,  soon  after. 

»oU,  m.  (-eg,  pl.  ^e),  ball ;  ^a\l 
fpielcn,  to  play  ball. 

«o«o1ie,/.  (pZ. -n),  ballad. 

(1)  Sttnb,  m.  (-60,  pl.  '^e),  volume. 

(2)  SantI,  n.  (-es,  pl.  ''ex),  ribbon. 


(3)  Sonb,  n.  (-eg,  pl.  -e),  tie, 
bond. 

(1)  Sttnt/.  {pl.  ^e),  bank,  bench. 

(2)  Sent/,  (p^  -en),  commercial 
bank,  banking  house. 

©on'ner,  n.  (-g,  p/.  — ),  banner. 

bttu'en  (w.),  to  build. 

San'er,  »i.  (-g,  pZ.  -n),  peasant, 

farmer. 
Son'ern^onS,  n.  (-eg,  p/.  ^er), 

farmer's  house,  farm-house. 
Saum,  m-  (-eg,  pl.  ''e),  tree. 


VOCABULARY. 


159 


»0Um'60(^  (5RuboIf),  bom  1840,  a 
popular  poet  and  writer  of  short 
stories. 

fid)  fiou'mcn  {w.),  to  rear. 

JBou'tticrt  m.  (-[e]g,  pi.  -e), 
architectural  structure,  monu- 
ment. 

fiCttllf  ttJOrtcn  (i«.)>  to  answer. 

a3c'c^cr,  m.  (-g,  pi.  — ),  beaker, 
goblet,  bumper. 

ftc^  beben'fen  (bebacJjte,  bebac^t), 
to  deliberate. 

icllCU'tcnl),  eminent. 

SBclieu'tung,  /.,  importance,  sig- 
nificance. 

fict)  bebie'nen  (w.),  to  avail  one's 
self  of. 

JBcbtCtt'tc,  m.  (-n,  pZ.  -n),  atten- 
dant, footman. 

ISBcbic'nung,/.,  service. 

fid^  beeilen  {w.).,  to  hasten,  to 
make  haste. 

ficfa^'rcn  (beful^r,  befa^ren),  to  ply 
on,  to  navigate;  nod^  nie  be; 
fal^ren,  never  before  navigated 
(plied  on). 

Iicf  c^'Icn  (befall,  bef  o^len),to  oi-der, 
to  bid. 

\\^  befin'tien  (befanb,  befunben), 
to  find  one's  self,  to  be. 

M  begc'ficn  (begab,  begeben),  to 
betake  one's  self,  to  go. 

begeg'nen  {w.),  to  meet. 

(egin'nen  (begann,  begonnen),  to 
begin,  to  commence. 

Hcgrii'^Ctt  (wj.)>  to  greet. 

(e^oarf ,  covered  with  hair ;  ftar! 
beliaart,  thickly  covered  with 
hair,  thick-(bushy-)haired. 


bell^au|)^ten  («>.)>  to  maintain,  to 

assert. 

6e|u'ten  {w.),  to  guard ;  ©ott  be= 
l^iite !  May  the  Lord  guard  ! 

bci  {dot.).,  by,  near,  at,  in,  among, 
at  the  house  of,  with,  on  the 
occasion  of;  htx  tnir  felbft,  in 
my  heart ;  bet  ftd^,  within  him- 
self, in  his  heart;  bei  ©cf)ul^= 
tnarf)er^,  with  the  shoemaker's 
family ;  ©c^Iac^t  bei  ©raoelotte, 
battle  of  Gravelotte. 

Bet'k^alten  (bef)ielt,  be^alten),  to 
keep,  to  retain. 

Bci'iJC,  both. 

a3ci'ftttt0ttu§crun0,  /.  {pi.  -en), 
means  (mark)  of  approval. 

bci'fiigen  (iy.)»  to  add,  to  enclose. 

6cim  =  bei  bem  ;  beim  ^itnmel 
nid^t!  for  mercy's  sake  no!  beim 
Stamen,  by  his  (her)  name. 

Sein,  n.  (-eg,  pi.  -e),  leg. 

bcina'^C,  nearly,  well-nigh. 

Sci'nameLn],  m.  (-ng,  pi.  S3ei= 
namen),  surname,  epithet. 

befannf,  well-known ;  befannt 
(mit),  acquainted. 

bcfom'men  (be!am,  befommen), 
trans.,  to  get,  to  receive; 
ivtrans.,  to  agree  with,  to  do 
good. 

I^ergift^,  Belgian,  of  Belgium. 

belte^ben  (w.),  impers.,  to  please. 

Scmon'nung,  /. ,  crew. 

htmtxltn  (w.),  to  notice,  to  remark, 
to  add  (a  remark). 

aScmcr'fung, /.  {pl.  -en),  remark. 

benufsen  (w.),  to  use,  to  make 
use  of. 


160 


VOCABULARY. 


SfO^bai^tuitg,  /.  {pi.  -en),  obser- 
vation. 

bequem^  comfortable. 

93cqucmU(^feitcn,joZ.,  comfort. 

berei^'nfn  (mj.),  to  charge. 

htxt^'ix^X,  just;  gana  berec^tigt, 
perfectly  just. 

©frcb'fomfcit/.,  eloquence. 

©erg,  W2.  (-60,  pi. -e),  mountain,  hill. 

Scrg'flli^C,/.  (pi.  -n),  mountain- 
top. 

berit^mf ,  famous. 

fid)  befl^dftigen  (m>.),  to  busy  one's 
self. 

bef(^leu'ntgen  {w.),  to  precipitate, 
to  hasten, 

htSts^xtVhtn  (befc^rieb,  befd^rieben), 
to  describe. 

Seft$^  m.  (-es),  possession. 

beftf  |en  (bef a^,  befeflen),  to  possess, 
to  hold. 

Ibefonlier  (ad/.),  especial,  particu- 
lar. 

bffottllfrd  (ode),  especially;  gang 
befonber^,  more  especially  ;  be= 
fonbers  gem,  particularly. 

beftian'nen  (lo.),  to  put  horses  to ; 
bejpannt  (per/,  partic.)  tnit, 
drawn  by. 

Jerfet,  better;  nic^tg  bcffereS, 
nothing  better. 

befl,  best ;  bag  Sefte,  best  interests; 
jum  Seften,  for  the  benefit. 

(efle'^en  (beftanb,  beftanben),  to 
consist  of  (aug). 

befienttt  (lo.),  to  order,  to  sum- 
mon ;  jum  ^aifer  befteUen,  to 
summon  to  the  Emperor's  resi- 
dence (palace,  etc.). 


bertend  {adv.)  =  am  beften,  in  the 
best  manner;  beftens  grii^enb, 
with  the  best  compliments. 

be fttmmf  ^  certain,  fixed. 

Sefuj^',  m.  (-[e]g,  pi.  -e),  visit,  at- 
tendance, entrance,  admission. 

befu'l^ett  (lo.),  to  visit,  to  attend 
(school). 

betraiti'tf  n  (to.),  to  look  at,  to  watch. 

bttidrfern  {w.),  to  populate,  to 

colonize, 

betoai^'fen  {perf.  partic.),  over- 
grown, covered. 

httaaf^rt,  trusty,  tried. 

SetOOll'ner,  m.  (-g,  pi.  — ),  inhabi- 
tant. 

bfttiun1)ern  (w.),  to  admire. 

bcja^'Ien  (w.),  to  pay. 

bejeii^'ncn  {w.),  to  point  out. 

Scaic'^ung,  /.  {pi.  -en),  regard, 
respect. 

bie'tcii  (bot,  gcboten),  to  offer. 

btlliett  (to.),  to  form. 

bil'liefl . .  .  ein,  see  einbilben. 

Sittcf ,  n.  (-g,  pi.  -s  or  -te),  ticket. 

biriig,  cheap. 

bin  (ic^),  I  am;  {idiom.),  I  have 
been. 

btn^en  (banb,  gebunben),  to  bind, 
to  tie. 

bid  {adv.),  so  far  as  ;  prepos.,  big 
an  {accus.),  up  to,  till;  big  3U 
{dot.),  up  to,  till ;  {conjunct.)  = 
big  baf;,  until ;  fo  lange  big,  until. 

bt§'4en,  n.,  little,  little  bit. 

bifte!  please!  pray! 

bitten  {bai,  gebeten),  to  request. 

matt,  n.  (-eg,  pi.  ^er),  leaf. 

blon,  blue. 


VOCABULARY. 


161 


MauitC^,  bluish ;  bluish-white. 

©let,  n.  (-eg),  lead. 

Iblet'ficn  (blieb,  geblieben),  to  stay, 
to  remain,  to  tarry,  to  stay  out 
(away) ;  fte^en  hleiben,  to  stop; 
iibrig  bleiben,  to  be  left  over,  to 
be  remaining. 

©leriiift,  m.  (-[e]g,  pi.  -e),  (lead) 
pencil. 

bltnil,  blind. 

blifjcn  (w.),  to  glitter. 

blu'^en  (ty.),  to  bloom. 

Slum'djcn,  n.  (-s,  pL  —),  (pretty) 
little  flower. 

©lu'mc,/.  {pi  -n),  flower,  plant. 

©lu'mcntolJf,  m.  (-[e]g,  pi.  ^e), 
flower-pot. 

S3lut,  n.  (-eg),  blood. 

Slii'te,  /.  ipl'  -n),  flower,  blos- 
som. 

©o'gen,  w.  (-g,  pi.  —),  (cross-) 
bow. 

Soot,  n.  (-eg,  pi.  -e),  boat. 

93orb,  w*.  (-[e]g),  (ship-)board. 

99ourbon%  name  of  a  French  island 
in  the  Indian  Ocean,  East  of 
Madagascar,  once  called  Isle 
Bonaparte,  1809-1814,  and  also 
Reunion. 

SBrttft'IiCtt  (-g),  Brazil. 

©rtt'tcn,  m.  (-g),  roast  (meat). 

brau'(t)en  (w.),  to  use,  to  make  use 
of,  to  need ;  bie  braud^en  fid) 
auc^  nic^t  ju  fc^dtiien,  they  do 
not  need  feel  ashamed. 

braun,  brown. 

bre'i^cn  (brac^,  gebrod^en),  to  break. 

bteit,  broad,  wide,  large. 

Srei'te,/.,  latitude. 


fBttia^'tlt,/-,  Brittany,  the  north- 
western peninsula  of  France. 

©rett,  n.  (-eg,  pi.  -er),  board;  ju 
Srettern,  into  boards. 

©ticf,  m.  (-eg,  pi.  -e),  letter, 
epistle. 

brin'gctt  (brac^te,  gebrac^t),  to 
bring,  to  take,  to  offer. 

ISBri'tc,  m.  (-tt,  pi.  -n),  Briton. 

©rot,  n.  (-eg,  pi.  -e),  (loaf  of) 
bread. 

©ritlTe,/.  (p^. -n),  bridge. 

©ru'bcr,  w.  (-g,  pi.  ^),  brother. 

Srii'lierc^cn,  n.  (-g,  pi.  — ),  dear 

(beloved)  brother. 

©rutt'ncn,  m.  (-g,  pi.  — ),  well, 

spring. 

©riif fcl,  Brussels,  the  capital  of 
Belgium. 

©rufi'fcbcr,/.  (pl-  -n),  breast- 
feather,  pectoral  feather. 

Sttt^,  n.  (-eg,  pi.  ""er),  book. 

©iin'iicl,  n.  (-g,  pi.  — ),  bundle, 
parcel,  bag. 

»un'bcg^au|)tfltti)t,  /.  {pi.  ^e), 
national  capital. 

bunt,  gay-colored. 

©urg,/.  (P^.  -en),  castle. 

©iir'gcr,  m.  (-g,  pi.  — ),  citizen. 

©urg'fitttbCtt,  wi.  (-g,  pi ""),  castle- 
moat. 

©urg'^err,  m.  (-n,  pi.  -en),  lord  of 
the  castle. 

©tttg'^of,  m.  (-[e]g,  pl  ^e),  castle- 
yard. 

©urfiUnb',  Burgundy. 

Sufd),  m.  (-eg,  pl  ^e),  bush, 
thicket. 

©after,/.,  butter. 


162 


VOCABULARY. 


®, 


g^ttHfot'nten  H),  California. 

©tt'rotJfl,  n.  (pZ.  -g)  or  g^araoerie, 
/.  (pf.  -n),  the  Span,  name  of  a 
small  ship  used  by  the  Spaniards 
and  Portuguese  in  the  XV  and 
XVI  centuries  for  long  voyages. 
It  was  in  command  of  three  such 
caravels  that  Columbus  crossed 
the  Atlantic  and  discovered 
America. 

6cntrttrs§0^'f(^ule,  /.,  central 
high-school. 

••c'est  bien"  (French)  =  bag  ift 
rec^t,  that 's  so. 

@^^am|iag'nf  ,/•>  Champagne,  one  of 
the  eastern  provinces  of  France. 


g^tttof  ter,rM.  (-g,  pi  (S^arafte'rc), 
character. 

©^oronerjeii^nung,  /.  {pi.  -en), 
characterizing  description. 

e^i'ntt  (-6),  China. 

6^ri|l,  m.  (-en,  pi.  -en),  Chris- 
tian. 

6^tifl'5ttttm,  m.  (-[e]Q,  pi.  ^e), 
Christmas-tree. 

S^rtfl^ftttb^  n.  (-[e]5),  infant 
Christ. 

e^riftttS  {gen.  (S^riftt),  Christ. 

©itro'ne,/.  {pi  -n),  lemon(-tree). 

6!itltItfatioit%/.,  civilization. 

@^OlM)^,  n.  (-5,  pZ.  -5),  "coup^," 
compartment. 


2), 


ba  (adt).),  there,  then ;  {conjunct.), 

when,  as,  since. 
tiahtV  {emphat.  ba'bei),  thereby, 

thereat,  at  the  same  time,  withal ; 

babei'fein,  to  be  present,  to  take 

part. 
tad^'it,  see  ben!en. 
Jiofttr'  {emphat.  ba'fiir),  instead  of 

it,  in  return. 
bal^er^  {emphat.  ba'^er),  therefore, 

for  that  reason ;  with  a  verb  of 

motion,  along. 
lia^in"  {emphat.  ba'^in),  thither, 

there ;  big  bal^in,  till  then,  up 

to  that  time, 
fit^  Jio^in'fi^longclii  (w.),  to  glide 

along. 


ba'tnalig  {adj.),  of  that  time;  bcr 
bamaltge  ^onig,  the  then  reign- 
ing king. 

ba^mal0  {adv.),  then,  at  that  time. 

bamtf  {emphat.  ba'mit),  with  it, 
with  them,  therewith;  {conjunct), 
in  order  that. 

^omll'fer,  m.  (-g,  pi.  —),  steamer, 
steam-boat. 

^a'nemarf  (-g),  Denmark. 

ba'nifi^,  Danish. 

^anf,  m.  (-eg),  thanks. 

ban'fen  («>.),  to  thank. 

bttnn,  then. 

liarait'  {emphat.  bar'an),  thereon, 
thereat;  baran  5te^en,  to  pull 
it. 


VOCABULARY. 


163 


tiatauf  (emphat.  bar'auf),  there- 
upon, after  that,  to  that. 

tiarauS"  {emphat.  bar'aug),  out  of 
this,  of  it. 

bttrin'  {emphat.  bar'in),  therein, 
in  it  (them),  with  them. 

bttr'ftcttcn  {w.),  to  represent. 

2)ttrfmOttt^  e^oKegC,  Dartmouth 
College,  of  Hanover,  N.  H. 

tiarum'  {emphat.   bar'um),  there- 
fore, for  this  reason. 

bad  {demonstr.),  that,  they. 

))a§  {conjunct),  that,  because. 

^a'ttttn,   n.    (-g,  pi.    2)a'ten), 
date. 

bau^ern  {w.),  to  last,  to  keep,  to 
take  (time), 

baDon'  {emphat.  ba'oon),  thereof, 
from  it,  from  them. 

bcitt,  bei'nc,  bcin,  thy,  your. 
Xtmotxaf.m.  (-en,  pi.  -en) ,  Demo- 
crat. 
bemolra'ttf^.  Democratic. 
be'nen  {relat),    (to)  whom,    (to) 

which. 
ben'fen  (bad^te,  gebad^t),  to  think. 
bcnit    {adv.),   then  =  I  wonder; 

{conjunct),  for,  as,  since. 
ben^noi^,  nevertheless,  yet. 
bcr,  bic,  bttS  {relat),  who,  which, 

(that). 
bcr'cn  {relat),  whose,  of  which, 

of  whom. 
berglei'^en^  the  like,  such  like. 
bcr'ienigc,  bic'ienigc,  bttg'icnioc 

that  (one),  he;  berjenige . . .  ber, 

he  who. 
bcrfcrtic,  biefcrbc,  H^eVhe,  the 


beffcit  {relat),  whose,  of  whom, 
of  which. 

bcutf^,  German. 

2)CUtft^  or  baS  ^Cttf  fc^C,  German 
(the  study  of). 

bCtttfl^  5  frttnjb'ftf  (^,  German- 
French;  ber  beutfc^sfrangofifc^e 
^rieg,  the  Franco-German  War 
of  1870-71. 

2)CUtf^sSot^'rttt0Cn,  German-Lor- 
raine, that  part  of  Lorraine 
which  after  the  Franco-German 
War,  1870-71,  was  annexed  by 
the  German  empire. 

bcutfj^'s  llttttonor,  German-"na- 
tional"  (and  not  merely  "pro- 
vincial" interests,  etc.). 

^cuffrf)c(cr),  m.  (-en,  pi.  -en), 
German ;  3)eutfci^e,  /.  {pi. 
beut[c^e[en]  ^rauen),  German 
woman. 

^eutf^lanb  (-§),  Germany. 

^Cjcm'bcr,  m.  {-§),  December. 

^ittlcfff  rn.  (-eg,  pi.  -e),  dialect; 
ber  fc^rocibifd^e  S)iale!t,  the  Sua- 
bian  or  Upper  German  dialect  is 
characterized  by  the  preference 
of  fuller  and  harder  sounds,  and 
the  predominance  of  the  lower 
organs  of  speech,  as  the  chest 
and  throat. 

bi^'tcn  {w.),  to  write,  to  compose. 

^WttVr  m.  (-g,  pi.  — ),  poet. 

bid,  thick,  big. 

^tcfcng  (S^arleg),  born  1812, 
the  great  English  novehst,  died 
at  Gadshill,  his  country-seat 
near  Rochester,  county  of  Kent, 
on  June  9,  1870. 


164 


VOCABULARY. 


We«/orbtcfe3. 

Jite'fcr,  btc'fe,  btc'feS,  this,  this 
one,  the  latter. 

bicd'feit  or  btrrfeit^  {genii.),  on 
this  side  of. 

bit  {dot.),  (to)  thyself,  (to)  your- 
self ;  bu  bilbeft  bir  ein,  you 
imagine,  you  fancy. 

^iftelflnfc,  m.  (-n,  pi  -n),  thistle- 
finch,  goldfinch. 

^ifiriff ,  m.  (-e^,  pi.  -e),  district. 

btDibte'ren  (u;.),  to  divide. 

llO^,  yet,  after  all. 

2)0'nQU,/.,  Danube  (river). 

t)0|)'|ielt^  double,  twofold. 

^orf,  n.  (-e^,  pi.  ^er),  village. 

2)orff(^uIe,  /.  {pL  -n),  village- 
school. 

^orot^e'a  (-^  or  2)orot^e'eng), 
Dorothy. 

bor'ren  iw.),  to  dry. 

Jort,  there. 

'^nxa^tt' {emphat.  bort'^er) ,  (thence) 
from  yonder. 

bort^itl'     (emphat.     borf^in), 
(thither)  to  that  place. 

borf  19  (ad;.),  of  that  place,  there. 

^a'mtt,n.  (-g,i)i.2)tamen),  drama. 


tnYtt  .  .  .  Ijemm',  see  ^crum= 

bre^en. 
brei,  three. 

bret'betnig,  three-legged. 
brei'^igfte,  thirtieth. 
brci'je^n,    thirteen ;    brei'^e^nte, 

thirteenth. 
brin'gfn  (brang,  gebningen),   to 

enter  into,  to  reach. 
Jirirtf,  third. 

brif  tel^alb,  two  and  a  half. 
bu,  thou,  you. 
burten  (uj.),  to  exhale  sweet  scent 

(or  fragrance). 
^tt'ne,  /.  {pi  -n),  dune,  down, 

sandhill. 
bun'feL  dark,  black. 
biinn,  thin. 
burt^  {accus.),  through,  by  means 

of,  owing  to,  by ;  {adv.),  through ; 

burc^  unb    burd^,  throughout, 

thoroughly. 
^ur^'fu^rnng,    /.,     accomplish- 
ment, execution. 
^urj^'gong,  m.   (-[c]g,  pi  ^e), 

passage. 
buri^g  =  burd^  bag. 
biirr,  dry,  arid,  barren. 


e'benfo,  likewise ;  ebenfo  .  .  .  wie, 
just  as  ...  as. 

f^t,  genuine,  thorough(ly). 

SiTfrmanit  (^o^ann  ^eter),  bom 
in  Hanover  m  1792.  In  1823 
he  was  called  to  Weimar  where 
he  lived  in  Goethe's  house  as 


the  poet's  private  secretary. 
After  Goethe's  death  in  1832 
he  became  the  librarian  of  the 
grand-duchess  Maria  Paulowna. 
He  died  at  Weimar  in  1854.  Of 
world-wide  fame  is  his  work 
ConverscUions  with  Goethe. 


VOCABULARY. 


165 


e'bcl  {attrih.  ebler,  eble,  ebleg), 
generous,  noble-hearted. 

©'ilcUannc,  /.  {pi.  -n),  silver  fir- 
tree. 

6^'re,/.  {pL  -n),  honor. 

Ci!  why!  ay! 

6i'(^c,/.  (p^.  -n),  oak. 

©i'c^cl,/.  (pi.  -n),  acorn. 

tin,  cin'c,  ein  (iwde/.  artic),  a,  an; 
{numeral),  one. 

etnatf'lier,  each  other,  one  another; 
unter  einanber,  among  them- 
selves. 

fid^  ein'HIben  (w.),  to  imagine,  to 
fancy. 

^itt'brttrf,  m.  (-[e]§,  pZ.  ""e),  im- 
pression. 

ein'cr,  cin'e,  cin'(e)5  (pron.),  (the) 

one,  some  one. 

Ctn'fttd),  plain,  simple. 

etn'fattcn  (ftel,  gef alien),  to  inter- 
rupt. 

C^tn'gcfiung,  /.  {pi  -en),  dictate, 
inspiration. 

cin'Bclaticn,  see  einlaben. 

cin'BC^jflttnjt,  see  einpflanjen. 

cin'^ttltctt  (i)ielt,  ge^aIten),tokeep, 
to  follow. 

tin% ;  cinig^c,  some ;  some,  few. 

ein'Iatien  (lub,  gelaben),  to  in- 
vite. 

ftc^  etn'Iaffen  (Ite^,  getaffen),  to 
enter  into,  to  engage  one's  self 
in. 

etnmar  {indefin.),  once,  once  upon 
a  time ;  auf  einmal,  all  at  once, 
suddenly;  nod^  einmal,  once 
more;  ein'ntal  {dqfin.),  once, 
one  time. 


ein^lifianjen  (w.)»  to  implant,  to 

inculcate, 
fic^  ctn'qutttticren  (w.),  to  take  up 

one's  quarters. 
cittg  =  eineg  {neuL). 
ein'f^rei^en  (fc^rieb,  gefd^rieben), 

to  register. 
cinfl,  once. 
etn^fietgen  (ftieg,  geftiegen) ,  to  enter 

(a  railroad-car). 
cin'trcten  (trat,  getreten),  to  enter ; 

bet  tl)m  eintreten,  to  enter  his 

private  room. 
cin'lUanlJCrn    {w.),  to  immigrate, 

to  intrude,  to  invade. 
eitt^tuitligen  {w.),  to  consent  to,  to 

acquiesce  in. 
tin'ttJO^ner,  m.  (-g,  pi  — ),  in- 
habitant. 
citt'jicften  (jog,  gejogen),  to  gather, 

to  collect;  ©rfunbigungen  ein= 

jie^en,  to  make  inquiries. 
tin'm,  only. 

ctn'jujic^ctt,  see  einjie^en. 
(irfcn,  n.  (-g),  iron. 
@i'fCttbo!^n,  /.  {pi.  -en),  railroad. 
©i'fcnbtt^nbcttm'lc  (ber);    ©i'fen= 

bal^nbeam'ter  (ein)  (-n,  pi.  -n), 

railroad-employe. 

(gi'fenbtt^nttJttficn,  m.  (-g,  pi.  — ), 

railroad-car. 

@rftt§,  m.  {gen.  ©Ifafjeg),  Alsace, 
formerly  belonging  to  France, 
since  1871  a  German  province, 
on  the  left  bank  of  the  Upper- 
Rhine. 

Wtetn.pl,  parents. 

tVitxnloB,  (parentless),  orphan, 
orphaned. 


166 


VOCABULARY. 


C^migranf ,  m.  (-en,  j>l.  -en),  emi- 
gi-ant. 

em^fan'gett  (empfing,  empfangen), 
to  receive. 

em|ife^'Un  (empfa^I,  empfo^Ien), 
to  recommend,  to  remember. 

©mpfitt'Dttng, /.  (pZ. -en),  feeling. 

cmpor',  up,  upwards. 

d^n'lie,  n.  (-g,  pi.  -n),  end. 

cn'ben  («?.),  to  end,  to  close. 

enb'lit^,  at  last,  finally. 

Anergic',/.,  energy. 

ener'gifc^,  energetic. 

Cng,  narrow. 

en'geBgut,  as  kind  as  an  angel. 

^ng'Ianb  {gen.  -s),  England. 

^ng'liinber,  m.  {-%,  pi.  —),  Eng- 
lishman ;  -in,  /.  {pi.  -nen), 
English  woman. 

cng'Hft^,  English,  of  England. 

entlteif en  (w),  to  discover. 
©nttetrung,/.  (pi. -en),  discovery, 
fic^  entfer'neii  («>.),  to  withdraw. 
entfcmf,  off;   roeit  entfernt,  far 

from. 
entge'Sett  {dat.^  follows  its  case)^ 

against. 
entge'gettfifiiifen  (u).),  to  send  to 

meet  one  {dot.). 
tni%i^ntn  (w.),  to  reply,  to  rejoin. 
ent^ortcii  (ent^ielt,  ent^alten),  to 

contain. 
entfl^Itt^'fcn  (w.),  to  slip  away ;  fte 

cntfd^Iiipften  mir,  they  slipped 

away  from  me. 
entflJirin'gcn  (entjprang,  entjpmn= 

gen),  to  spring,  to  rise. 
entflc^'ung,/.,  origm. 
tnttntUt .  .  .  o'Uer,  either ...  or. 


er,  he  (it). 

erbctt'tcn  («>.),  to  take  as  booty. 

txhlittttt  (w.),  to  see,  to  behold. 

6r'l>e,  /.,  earth. 

greig'niS,  n.  (-f^e§,  pi.  -ffe),  in- 
cident, event. 

erfwricn  {w.)^  to  fill,  to  replenish. 

^f art,  a  (formerly  fortified)  town 
of  Thuringia,  where  in  the  au- 
tumn of  the  year  1808  Napo- 
leon met  in  conference  Emperor 
Alexander  I,  of  Russia,  and  a 
large  assemblage  of  German 
sovereigns. 

erge'Ben  {perf.  partic.),  devoted, 
attached ;  ^^r  ergebener.  Your 
obedient  servant,  Yours  truly. . . 

crgrei'tcn  (ergriff,  ergriffen),  to 
affect,  to  touch,  to  strike  (heart ; 
feelings). 

erl^ortcn  (er^ielt,  er^alten),  to  get, 
to  obtain;  fid^  er^alten,  to  be 
preserved. 

jic^  er^c'beii  (er^ob,  er^oben),  to 
rise,  to  arise. 

etlllii^'cil  (w.),  to  increase. 

erin'ncrung,/.  {pi.  -en),  memory, 
remembrance. 

erflo'ren  (w.),  to  explam,  "to 
render." 

fid^  crfun'Uigcn  («;.),  to  make  in- 
quiries. 

erfuntiigung,/.  {pi  -en),  inquiry. 

rr(au'ben  {w.),  to  allow,  to  permit; 
fic^  eriauben,  to  beg  leave  to. 

erie'bcn  («>•)»  to  exi)erience. 

@rr!bnig,wi.  {lU.  alder-king),  elfin- 
king,  king  of  the  elves ;  the  title 
of  a  famous  ballad  by  Groethe. 


VOCABULARY. 


167 


ermotlieit  (w.)>  to  murder,  to  kill. 

crnfl,  grave,  stern. 

CttC'fien  (i«-)»  to  stir  up,  to  inspire. 

crret'C^cn  {w.),  to  reach,  to  arrive  at. 

crrij'tcn  (w.),  to  blush. 

@rftt$',  wz.  (-e^),  reparation. 

etf^offen  (erfc^uf,  erfc^affen),  to 
create,  to  cause  to  exist. 

crfc^ct'nctt  (erfd^ien,  erfd^tenen),  to 
appear,  to  make  one's  appear- 
ance, to  arrive. 

C^rfi^ei'nung,/.  {pi  -en),  appear- 
ance. 

erfdircifett  (erfd^ra!,  erfc^rodfen), 
trans.,  to  startle,  to  terrify; 
intrans. ,  to  be  startled,  terrified ; 
erfc^rotfen,  per/,  partic,  terri- 
fied. 

Ctfl  (adv.),  not  before,  not  until ; 
erft .  .  .  alg,  only  when. 

etfiatt'nen  (w.),  to  be  astonished, 
to  be  amazed;  ba§  ®rftaunen, 
surprise,  amazement. 

er^aunltd^/  stupendous,  wonder- 
ful. 


I  erf  tc,  first. 

!  crmii^'len  (w.),  to  choose. 
ertoar'mcn  {w.),  to  warm,  to  heat. 
ertoci'fcn   (erroieg,   erroiefen),   to 

prove,  to  demonstrate,  to  render, 

to  show  (a  favor). 
erttli'iicrtt  (w.),  to  rejoin,  to  reply. 
erjaj^'len  (w.),  to  tell,  to  narrate. 
©rjci^'luttg,/.  {pi  -en),  tale, story. 
Ci8,  it,  there ;  „e^"  finb,  they  are, 

there  are. 
W\tl,  m.  (-g,  pi  — ),  ass. 
erfen  {a%  gegefjen),  to  eat. 
©t^nogroli^',  m.  (-en,  pi  -en), 

ethnographer. 
et^nogra^ll^if^,  ethnographic (al). 
tt toaB,  somewhat,  a  little,  slightly. 
Ctt^  {dat  or  accMS.),  you. 
ctt'er,  ctt'(c)re,  cu'er  {possess.), 

your. 
gtt'rc  {poss.  sing.),  your. 
©uro'^lO  {gen.  -g),  Europe. 
Excersior!    (Lax.),    on   higher! 

the  title  of  a  poem  by  Long- 
fellow. 


3r* 


Sftt'bcl,/.  (p/.  -n),  fable. 

Sfft^'nc,/.  (p^  -n),  flag,  banner. 

fttft'rcn  (fu^r,  gefa^ren),  to  sail, 
to  go. 

fo^rcn  . . .  fort,  see  forffa^ren. 

Sftt^OIttn,  m.  (-[e]g,  pi  -^c),  time- 
table. 

Sfo^rt,/.  {pi  -en),  voyage. 

3folir'5CU0,n.  (-[e]g,pi.  -e),  vessel, 
craft. 


SfttH,  wi.  (-e§,  pZ.  ^e),  case;  auf 

jeben  §aU,  at  any  rate,  by  all 

means. 
fanctt  (fiel,  gefaUen),  to  fall  (on  = 

auf,  accus.);  in^  3iotlid^e  fallen, 

to  incline  to  reddish. 
Sfamnie,/.  {pi  -n),  family. 
fttnb  .  .  .  fltttt,  see  ftatf finben. 
fttn'gen  (fing,  gefangen),  to  catch, 

to  take. 


168 


VOCABULARY. 


^ax'fft,/.  {pl  -n),  color. 

for'bcn  {w.),  to  color,  to  paint,  to 
tinge. 

gttr'benfttflen,  m.  {-^,  pi.  — ,  or 
•*),  color-box,  paint-box. 

fttlll,  rotten,  putrid. 

,,3fOtt|l,"  the  title  of  Goethe's 
dramatic  masterwork. 

3fe'bruor,  m.  (-g),  February. 

fci^'ten  (foc^t,  gefod^ten),  to  fight. 

gfclJer,/.  {pi.  -n),  feather,  pen. 

fei'em  (w.),  to  celebrate. 

gei'ge,/.  (pi. -n),  fig(-tree). 

gfeig'Iing,  m.  (-g,  pi.  -e),  coward. 

fein,  fine,  delicate,  elegant. 

Sfiltb,  m.  (-eg,  pi  -e),  enemy; 
bie  ^einbin,  enemy. 

gcin'fj^merfer,  m.  (-g,  pi.  —), 
nice  feeder,  'gourmet.' 

geHl'ttrteit,  /.  {pi.  -en),  agri- 
cultural labor,  work  in  the 
fields. 

Sfcn'flcr,  n.  (-g,  pi.  —),  window. 

fer'ncr,  furthermore,  moreover. 

fern'Hegenb,  far. 

fer'tiB,  ready,  done,  created. 

gfcfl,  n.  (-eg,  pi.  -e),  festival, 
holiday. 

fen,  firm(-ly). 

flcl . . .  tin,  see  ein'fQlIen. 

linden  (fanb,  gefunben),  to  find; 
fid^  finben,  to  be  found,  to  be ; 
ft(^  in  etroag  finben,  to  conform 
one's  self  (to  reconcile  one's 
self)  to  (in,  accus.). 

%\W\an%,  m.  {-%),  fishing. 

gfla'l^e,  /.  {pi.  -n),  plain,  sur- 
face. 

gflo'fi^c,/.  {pi.  -n),  bottle. 


flaf  tern  (u>.),  to  flutter,  to  stream. 

gflcifj^,  n.  (-eg),  meat. 

nie'gen  (flog,  geflogen),  to  fly;  sum 
j^ltegen  (for  flying),  to  fly. 

f[ie'§en  (fto^,  gefloffen),  to  flow. 

flo'gen,  see  fliegen. 

glii'Bel,  »w.  (-g,  pi.  — ),  wing; 
i^nen  bie  j^Iiigel,  their  wings. 

ffiifl'flC/  fledge,  fledged,  able  to 
fly. 

3fltt§,  m.  (-eg,  pi.  H),  river. 

%\ni,f.  {pi.  -en),  flood,  water. 

^olieralifi^  m.  (-en,  pi.  -en), 
Federalist,  one  of  the  old  po- 
litical party  of  the  "Feder- 
alists." 

forgett  (w.),  to  follow,  to  pursue; 
folgenb,  pres.  partic.^  follow- 
ing. 

gform,/.  {pi.  -en),  form,  shape. 

foremen  {w.),  to  form,  to  shape. 

fort,  away,  along. 

forf  ftt^ren  (fu^r,  gefa^ren),  to  con- 
tinue ;  fasten  Bie  ja  fort !  go  on 
by  all  means ! 

forfgclcn  (ging,  gegangen),  to  go 
away,  to  start. 

forf  fe$cn  {w.),  to  continue. 

forftreiben  (trieb,  getrieben),  to 
drive  (chase)  away. 

Sfrtt'ge,  /.  {pi.  -n),  query,  ques- 
tion, inquiry. 

fra^gen  (w.),  to  ask,  to  question, 
to  inquire;  ber  ©efragte,  one 
asked,  interrogated. 

Sfronfreir^  {gen.  -g),  France. 

grOttJO'fc,  m.  (-n,  pi.  -n),  French- 
man ;  ^ranjo'fin,  /.  {pi.  -nen), 
French  woman. 


VOCABULARY. 


169 


ftonjo'TO,  French. 

gtau,  /.  {pi.  -en),  woman,  lady, 
wife;  Mrs.,  "Frau." 

^t'm'kin,  n.  (-g),  young  lady  of 
noble  birth  (=  damsel),  Miss. 

frci,  free;  bag  ^reie,  the  open 
air. 

^XtV^tpM,  n.  (-[e]6),  amount 
of  baggage  allowed  to  travel- 
lers. 

3frertO0,  w.  (-g),  Friday. 

frcmb,  strange,  foreign. 

grett'be,/.  {pi  -n),  enjoyment. 

jicf)  frCtt'cn  (io.)»  ^o  rejoice  (at  = 
iiber,  accus.),  to  delight  (in  = 
iiber,  accus.). 

gfrcunl),  m.  (-eg,  pZ.  -e),  friend, 
ally;  bie  ^reunbin  {pi.  -nen), 
lady-friend. 

freunb'lid),  friendly,  kind. 

Sreunb'li(^!eit,  /.,  pleasantness, 
pleasing  demeanor. 

Srie'iJCn,  m.  (-g),  peace,  peace- 
fulness. 

Sfricb'rit^  {gen.  -g),  Frederick; 
^riebric^  ber  ©ro^e,  king  of 
Prussia,  1740-1786,  the  hero  of 
the  Seven  Years'  War  (1756- 
1763). 
ftifd),  fresh. 

fro^lic^,  merry,  happy (-ily). 
SruJ^t,/.  (pi.  "e),  fruit. 
gru^f  bttttm,TO.  (-g/  Pl  ""e),  fruit- 
tree. 


friil^,   soon,   early,   at  an   early 

hour. 
Sfrit^'^erbfl,  m.  (-eg),  beginning 

of  autumn. 
gru^'ling,    m.    (-g),    spring    (a 

season). 
Sfru^'Unggttttfttng,  m.  (-g),  com- 
mencement of  spring. 
fru^'flutfcn  {w.),   (to  breakfast), 

to  lunch. 
fii^'lctt  {w.),  to  feel;  ftc^  fii^len, 

to  feel. 
fiil^'tCIl  {w.),  to  guide,  to  lead,  to 

conduct,  to  manage,  to  take, 

to  wage  (war). 
gfii^'rcr,  m.  (-g,  pi  — ),  leader, 

captain. 
funfte,  fifth. 

fiinf  tell  alb,  four  and  a  half. 
fiir  {accus.),  for,  in  exchange  for, 

instead  of;    roag  fiir?  {adv.), 

what  kind  of  ? 
ficJ)  fiir^'tCtt  {w.),  to  be  afraid. 
furs  =  fur  bag. 
Sfiitfl,  m.  (-en,  pi  -en),  prince, 

reigning  prince;  ber  j^iirft  (p. 
104)  refers  to  Goethe's  friend 

Karl  August  of  Saxe- Weimar ; 
bie  ^iirftin,  the  latter' s  wife, 
Louisa. 
furfi'Iic^,  princely. 
gftt^,  m.    (-eg,  pi  ^e),  foot;  ju 

^u^,  afoot. 
fttftcrn  {w.),  to  feed. 


170 


VOCABULARY. 


9. 


gag,  see  gebcn. 

@al)0'l^tU/  name  of  a  mountain  in 

the  county  of  Kent  (England), 

northwest  of  Rochester,  known 

through  a  scene  in  Shakespeare's 

"Henrj'IV." 
galopliie'rett  (w.),  to  gallop. 
Oong,  m.  (-e^),  gait,  step,  course, 

run. 
gattl    {odj.)^   whole,   all,   entire; 

{adv.)^  quite,  very,  exceedingly; 

ein  ©anje^,  a  rounded  whole; 

ein  gan}  flein  roenig,  a  very 

little  bit;   ganj  roie  .  .  .,  just 

as  .  .  . 
gttt,  at  all ;    gar   nic^t,  not   at 

all. 
©orlli'ne,/.  {vl.  -n),  curtain. 
@arf $fn^  n.  (-g,  pi.  —),  pretty 

(little)  garden. 
®tLtUn,  m.  (-g,  pi.  *),  garden. 
@ar'ten6aum,   m.   (-§,  pi.  *e), 

garden  (orchard)-tree. 
@afl,  m.  (-es,  pf.  ^e),  guest. 
gafl'ftettllbUlJ),  hospitable. 
©or^of,  m.  (-[e]^,  pi.  ^e),  hotel, 

inn. 
ge'ben  (gab,  gegeben),  to  give;  e^ 

giebt,  there  is,  there  are. 
©cbicf,  n.  (-g,  pi.  -e),  territory, 

tract  of  the  country. 
@ebir'ge,n.  (-§,  pi.—),  mountains, 

mountain-range. 
geblte'^en,  see  bleiben. 
gebo'gen,  curved,  bent. 
gcbo'ten,  bom. 


gebrai^f ,  see  bringen. 

Oeburf,/.  (pi. -en),  birth. 

©Cburtg'ort,  m.  (-eg,  pi.  -e),  birth- 
place, native  place. 

©fbttrtrtag,  w.  (-[e]g,  pi.  -e), 
birthday. 

®ebuf(^%  n.  (-eg),  bushes,  shrub- 
bery. 

@ebtt(^fni0,  n.  (-ffeg),  memory. 

®eJ)an'fc[n],  m.  (©ebanfeng,  pi. 
©ebanfen),  thought. 

geliei'^en  (gebie^,  gebie^en),  to 
thrive. 

©elJid^f,  n.  (-[e]g,  pi.  -e),  poem. 

gcbil^'tct  «ee  bitten. 

©cfo^r'tc,  m.  (-n,  pi.  -n),  (com- 
panion), pL^  crew. 

gefonen  (gefiel,  gefaUen),  to 
please,  to  be  pleased  with,  to 
like. 

gcfonigH  {adv.),  please,  if  you 
please. 

gefan'gen,  see  fangen. 

gefotbf,  see  fdrben. 

gcflcr,  see  gefaUen. 

geflo'gcn,  see  fliegen. 

gefoi^'ten,  see  fec^ten. 

ge'gen  {accus.),  towards,  against. 

©C'genb,  /.  {pi  -en),  neighbor- 
hood. 

©e'genfloiib,  m.  (-[e]g,  pi.  ^e), 
subject, object;  3um  ©egenftanb, 
for  its  subject. 

@c'gentcil,  n.  (-[e]s,  pi.  -e),  con- 
trary; im  ©egenteil,  on  the  con- 
trary. 


VOCABULARY. 


171 


gegenu'ber  {dot.,  follows  its  case)^ 
opposite,  face  to  face ;  ein= 
anber  gegeniiber,  facing  one 
another. 

gcl^ttbt',  see  f)aben. 

gc'^cn  (gtng,  gegangen),  to  go,  to 
walk;  „eg"  ging,  they  went, 
they  started ;  roie  ge^t  eg  S^nen  ? 
how  are  you  ?  eg  ge^t  mir  gut, 
I  am  well  off ;  b  em  Tlanne  gel^t 
eg  befjer,  that  man  is  better  off ; 
beim  ©el^en,  when  walking,  for 
walking. 

©Cplj',  n.  (-eg),  grove,  wood, 
copse. 

®Cpr%  w.  (-g)/  "audience." 

gc^or'^cn  (w.),  to  obey. 

gep'tcn  (w.),  to  belong. 

@eifl,  m.  (-eg,  pf.  -er),  spirit. 

BCfdm^ff ,  see  fampfen. 

gcfttuft',  see  faufen. . 

gclii^mf ,  see  lawmen. 

gelan^gen  (w.),  to  reach,  to  arrive 
at. 

9ClB,  yellow;  ber©elbe,  the  yellow 
(one);  gelbs  (for  gelbgeftreift), 
with  yellow  stripes. 

©elb,  n.  (-eg,  pi.  -er),  money. 

gctebf ,  see  leben. 

©clc'gcn^eit /.  (pi.  -en),  chance, 
opportunity. 

gclc'gentlic^,  incidentally,  occa- 
sionally. 

©ele^r'te,  w.  (-n,  pi.  -n),  scholar. 

gelcrnt',  see  lernen. 

gelin'gen  (gelang,  gelungen),  im- 
pers.^  with  dat,  to  succeed;  eg 
ift  i^m  gelungen,  he  has  suc- 
ceeded (in,  ju,  ivith  infin.). 


gemai^f ,  see  madden. 

©cmtt^lin,  /.  {pi.  -nen),  wife; 
^f)ve  ^rau  ©ema^Un,  your 
wife. 

Ocmiiriie,  n.  (-g,  pZ.  — ),  picture, 
painting. 

gcmtt'^igt,  subdued. 

gemitt^Iil^^  pleasant,  comfortable. 

9cnic'^cn  (geno^,  genoffen),  to 
receive,  to  enjoy. 

©c'niuS,  m.  {—,  pi.  -f je  or  ©enieg')/ 
genius,  man  of  genius. 

gcoffnct,  see  i)ffnen. 

®tpM',  n.  (-[e]g),  baggage,  lug- 
gage ;  ©epac!=2lnnal)me,  /.,  bag- 
gage-room. 

®c<iarf'fit)cin,  m.  (-[e]g,  pi.  -e), 
baggage-ticket  (certificate). 

©C^Jrii'gC,  n.  (-g),  stamp,  charac- 
ter. 

gc^Jtiiff ,  see  priifen. 

gcta'iic  (adv.),  just. 

Bering',  lightly,  inferior  (in  quali- 
ty). 

gem  (adv.),  gladly, willingly,  read- 
ily; gem  l^aben,  to  like;  nid^t 
gem  ^aben,  to  dislike. 

gern'gefc^cn,  welcome. 

gefanbf,  see  fenben. 

gef^c^'en  (gefc^a^,  gejc^e^en),  to 
happen. 

®ef(^i(i)'te,  /.  {pi  -n),  story,  his- 
tory. 

@cfd)i(^t0'momcnt,  m.  (-g,  pi.  -e), 
historical  moment. 

®cfc^irtid)fcit/.,  ability. 

geft^rte'bcn,  see  fc^reiben. 

©efi^tua'iicr,   n.   (-g,   pi.  —), 
squadron. 


172 


VOCABULARY. 


©efj^toif'tet,  pl-y   brothers   and 

sisters. 
@efett'f(^aft,  /.  {pi  -en),  company. 
gcfef'fen,  see  fi^en. 
gcfel^f ,  see  fe^en. 
@cft(^f,  n.  (-[e]g,  i)Z.  ©cjic^ter, 

faces;   ©efic^te,  visions),  face, 

vision. 
©efin'llttttjj,/.  (pl.-en),  sentiment, 

conviction,  opinion. 
©eflittt^',  n.  (-[e]g,  pi.  -e),  talk, 

conversation. 
gef))ro'(^en,  see  fprec^en. 
©efla'lie,  n.  (-g,  pZ.  — ),  shore, 

(sea-)  coast. 
©efiolf,/.  (p^  -en),  form,  figure. 
gefic^'cn  (geftanb,  geftanben),  to 

confess,  to  acknowledge, 
geftem, yesterday;  geftem 2lbenb, 

last  night. 
gefnnd^  sound,  healthy,  strong. 
@efunb'^eit  /-■,  health,  state  of 

health. 
@e§'Ifr  (Hermann),  in  SchUler's 

play  the  Imperial  Governor  of 

the  counties  of   Schwyz   and 

Uri. 
get^on%  see  t^un. 
gettcnnf ,  see  trennen. 
getroif  net,  see  trorfnen. 
@eft^§6urQ,  name  of  a  town  in 

the  state  of  Pennsylvania,  where 

July  3,  1863,  the   confederate 

army  mider  Gen.  Lee  was  de- 
feated by  Gen.  Meade, 
getoc'fcn,  see  aux.  jein. 
®ttoi^t,  n.  (-[e]^,  pi.  -e),  weight. 
getDtn'nen  (geroann,  geroonnen),  to 

gain. 


OettJiffeil,  n.  {-%),  conscience; 
ntit  gutem  ©eroiffen,  conscienti- 
ously, in  conscience. 

getlli§%  certain(ly),  no  doubt. 

getoo'gen,  see  roiegen. 

gCtDO^n'Hl^,  generally,  usually. 

getob^nf ,  accustomed  (to  =  an, 
accus.). 

getoorlien,  see  roerben. 

gejo'gen,  see  jie^en. 

gittg,  see  ge^en. 

ging  . . .  fort,  see  forf  ge^en. 

gtng  . . .  ^erbor,  see  ^eroor'ge^en. 

@(att3,  m.  (-e^),  splendor. 

glan'jen  (u>.),  to  gleam,  to  glitter. 

@Io5,  n.  (-eg,  pi.  Hx),  glass. 

glau'kn,  to  believe  (in  =  an, 
accus.). 

glcil^  (=fogIetc^),  immediately. 

glet(^'giltig,  unimportant;  ganj 
gleid^giltig,  all  the  same. 

gIei$'mQ§tg,  even,  miiform. 

glcil^'jcitig,  simultaneous(-ly). 

@ltetl,  n.  (-eg,  pi.  -er),  member, 
individual. 

©lore,/.  (pZ. -n),  bell. 

®{vii,  n.  (-e§),  (good)  luck,  suc- 
cess. 

gliilf  Ii(^,  happy. 

@oet]^e  (So^ann  2BoIfgang,  Bon), 
the  greatest  poet  of  Germany, 
bom  at  Frankfurt-on-the-Main, 
Aug.  28,  1749.  In  1775  he 
went  to  Weimar,  where  he  lived 
till  death,  on  March  22,  1832  ; 
his  last  words  being:  "More 
light ! "  His  only  son,  Augustus 
G<)ethe,  bornl789,  died  at  Rome 
in  1830.  —  He  is  the  author  of 


VOCABULARY. 


173 


the  dramas  Faust,  Iphigenia, 
Egmont,  Torquato  Tasso,  Goetz 
von  Berlichingen,  of  the  novels 
The  Sorrows  of  Wertlier,  Elec- 
tive Affinities,  and  Wilhelm 
Meister,  of  the  epic  Hermann 
und  Dorothea,  and  a  great  num- 
ber of  the  finest  ballads  and 
lyric  poems. 

®OC't^cf(^,  of  (by)  Goethe. 

®0lil,  n.  (-eg),  gold. 

goriien,  of  gold,  gilt. 

©olti'lioub,  m.  (-[e]g),  gold-dust. 

®oit,  m,  (-eg,  pi  ^er),  God,  the 
Lord,  god  ;  ber  liebe  ©ott,  Our 
Father  in  Heaven. 

©rail,  m.  (-eg,  pi  -e),  degree. 

@rttf,  m.  (-en,  pi  -en),  count. 

©roffli^ttft, /.  (pi.  -en),  county. 

©rantffittat  ^-  (-[e]g),  "Granite 
State"  (=  state  of  New  Hamp- 
shire). 

grtt'fcn  (w.),  to  graze. 

@ttt8'^U<)fcir,  m.  (-g,  pi.  — ),  grass- 
hopper. 

©rabelof  te,  name  of  a  village  near 
Metz  (German  Lorraine),  the 
scene  of  a  great  battle  between 
the  German  and  the  French 
armies,  Aug.  18,  1870. 

grttjibg^  graceful. 

©rcnttbier',  m.  (-g,  pi  -e),  grena- 
dier;   „bie    ©renabiere,"    the 


title  of  a  popular  ballad  of 
Heine. 

(Bren'je,  /.  {pi  -n),  boundary, 
verge,  line. 

grcn'jcn  (^w.),  to  border  (on  =  an, 
accus.). 

©ric'^cntanl)  {gen.  -g),  Greece. 

©ric'^ifi^  or  bag  (Sinecf)if(^e,  Greek 
(the  study  of) ;  griec^tf c^,  Greek. 

9ro^,  great,  large,  big,  tall. 

©ro&'ftiiilter,  m.  (-g,  pi  — ),  in- 
habitant of  a  large  city. 

griin,  green. 

®runb,  w.  (-g,  pi  ^e),  ground, 
back-ground,  reason. 

(Srunb'IogC,  /.  (pi.  -n),  funda- 
ment. 

©ru^l'^lC,  /.  (pi.-n),  group,  cluster. 

grii'^en  (w.),  to  greet;  Qrii^enb, 
pres.  partic.  =  with  the  best 
compliments. 

©uanal^a'ni,  the  Indian  name  of 
San  Salvador,  one  of  theBahama 
islands. 

®ut,  n.  (-eg,  pi.  ''er),  goods,  per- 
sonal property,  estate. 

0ttt  {adj.),  good,  nice;  {adv.), 
well,  nicely. 

@Qmna'ftum,  n.  (-g,  pi  ©t)mna= 
jten),  "gymnasium,"  in  Ger- 
many a  high-school  intended 
to  give  immediate  preparation 
for  the  university. 


174 


VOCABULARY. 


^. 


§ttor,  n.  (-eg,  pi.  -e),  hair. 

^a'be,  /.,  goods;  §ab  unb  ©ut, 
goods  and  chattels. 

f^a'btn  (^atte,  ge^abt),  to  have  (for 
a  =  5u);  5um  SSonminb  ^aben, 
to  have  for  a  guardian. 

^ttcfe,/.  (pZ.  -n),  pick-axe. 

§a'fett^  »i.  (-6,  pi.  ^),  harbor. 

^ai'ti  or  ©antO:2)omin'go,  in  size 
the  second  of  the  Antilles  or 
Leeward  islands  of  the  West 
Indies ;  auf  §aiti,  in  Haiti. 

Ittlb,  half. 

^alb'infel, /.  (pi-  -n),  peninsula. 

#ttl8,  m.  {^alfeg,  pi.  fealfe),  neck, 
throat,  collar. 

Ijarten  (§ielt,  ge^alten),  tohold; 
Diel  l^alten  auf,  to  set  great  value 
upon,  to  make  much  of. 

^al'tung,/.,  carriage,  bearing. 

§onb,/.  ipl-  "'e),  hand- 

§onblung,./".{pi--eu),action,story. 

^onH'tOCrfgjCUg,  n.  (-[e]5),  im- 
plements, tools. 

^an'gen  (m^.),  trans.,  to  attach,  to 
fasten ;  often  used  for  ^an'gen 
(^ing,  ge^angen),  intrans.,  to 
hang,  to  hang  loose,  to  be  sus- 
pended; pngen  lafjen,  to  let 
hang,  to  droop. 

^orf  natftg,  severe,  i)er8istent. 

Wtt.  ^ttf  ten,  had. 

^Qu'ett  (^ieb,  ge^auen),  to  cut  up, 
to  break  open. 

^att'ff n,  m.  (-g,  pi.  — ),  multitude, 
*' numbers." 


^an|)t,  n.  (-e§,  pi.  'er),  head,  chiet 
^dujining,  m.  (-g,  pi.  -e),  chief. 
^amif fiic^Uc^,  particularly,  main- 
ly- 
§OU|jf  flow,/,  {pi  *e),  capital  (city), 
^ttttg,  n.   (-es,  pi.  ^er),  house, 

home;   nad)  ^aufe,  home;   ju 

^aufe,athome;  t)on§aufe,from 

home. 
^m^'i^tn,  n.  (-5,  pi.  —),  pretty 

(little)  house. 
^ouS't^ur,/-  (i>^  -en),  street^oor. 
§ttUt,/.  ipl.  ^^e),  skin. 
§ouf  forbe,  /.  (pi.  -tt),  color  of  the 

skin. 
^f'ben  {f)ob,  ge^oben),  to  lift,  to 

help. 
§ei1)e,  m-  (-n,  pi.  -n),  heathen, 

pagan. 
^eilicfrottt  n.   (-[e]^,  pi.  ^er), 

heather,  sweet-broom. 
„§ri1»cnro«Icin/'  n.,  'Rose  on 

the  Heath,'  the  title  of  one  of 

Goethe's  popular  ballads. 
^tVhn  (lo.),  to  cure. 
^ei'mat,  /. ,  home,  native  land. 
^et'matlo0,  homeless. 
^eim'c^en,  n.  (^,  pZ.  — ),  cricket; 

,,2)a§  ^eimc^en  am  ^erb,"  the 

title   of    a    novel    by   Charles 

Dickens  (1845). 
Itl cim'f e^ten  (w.),  to  retm-nhome. 
^ein'ri^  {gen.  -e),  Henry. 
\ftV%tn    (^ie^,    ge^ei|en),   to    be 

called,  to  be  named ;  roie  ^ei|t  ? 

what  is  the  name  ? 


VOCABULARY. 


175 


jj^er^en  {w.),  to  heat,  to  make  a  fire. 
^cli,  m.  (-en,  pi.  -en),  hero. 
^tVhin,/'  {pi-  -nen),  heroine. 
lerfen  (^alf,  ge^olfen),  to  help,  to 

mean,  to  amount  to   (much) ; 

fic^  ju  f)elfen  raifjen,  to  know 

how  to  shift  for  one's  self. 
^ell,    briglit(-ly),   clear(-ly),   dis- 

tinct(-ly). 

I^ett'braun,  lightbrown. 
^elm,  m.  (-eg,  pi.  -e),  helmet. 
^clm'bttf^,  m.  (-eg,  pi.  -^e),  plume 

of  the  helmet,  crest. 
f^tX,  (hither,  this  way). 
^cran'fommcn  {tarn,  gefommen), 

to  come  nearer,  to  approach. 
^crttUf ,  up  (hither). 
ierttUS',  out  (hither). 
^crttug'finticn  (fanb,  gefunben),  to 

find  out,  to  discover. 
^crttug'fommcn  (!am,  ge!ommen), 

to  come  out  or  forth,  to  emerge, 

to  appear. 
#crb,  rn.  (-eg,  pi.  -e),  hearth. 
^crcin'fommcn  (fam,  ge!ommen), 

to  come  in,  to  enter. 
^erein'tretcn  (trat,  getreten),  to 

enter. 
,,^tfmann  unb  J)orot^C V  "Her- 
man and  Dorothy,"  the  title  of 

Goethe's  greatest  idyllic  poem. 
§crr,  m.  (-n,  pi.  -en),  gentleman, 

master,  Mr.,  Sir. 
^crr'Ii^,  magnificent. 
^err'fi^ttftcn   iplu.),  ladies  and 

gentlemen. 
Iierum',  about,  around. 
t^txum'tvtf^tn  {w.\  to  turn  around. 
^erum'jiantien,  see  t)erum'fte^en. 


I^crum'jlc^cn  (ftanb,  gcftanben),  to 

stand  about ;   um  .  .  .  ^erum= 

ftel^en,  to  stand  round  about. 
^cttiot'bringcn  (brac^te,  gebrac^t), 

to  produce,  to  reach. 
^crtior'9C^Ctt  (ging,  gegangen),  to 

come  off. 
^ertJOr'tttgcnb,  prominent. 
^crj,  n.  (-eng,  pi.  -en),  heart. 
^crjlid),  hearty(-ily). 
^cr'jOQtn, /.  (pi  -nen),  duchess; 

^erjogttt  2lma'tie,  the  duchess 

dowager,  mother  of  the  then 

reigning  Duke  Karl  August  of 

Saxe-Weimar,    the    friend    of 

Goethe. 
I^eit^te^  to-day,  nowadays. 
Ileu'ttg  (adj.),  modern,  of  this  day. 
^eut'jutttgC,  nowadays. 
^elj'fe  (^aul),  born  1830,  the  most 

artistic  of  the  living  novelists 

of  Germany. 
^icr,  here. 
^tc^,  see  ^eif;cn. 
^ilfrei^,    helpful,    benevolent, 

charitable. 
^ilft,  see  l^elfen. 
^im'mcl,   m.   (-g),  heaven,  sky; 

betm  §immel!    O  heavens!    O 

dear! 
^im'mclgriditttng,  /.    {pi.  -en), 

point  of  the  compass. 
||tn,  (hence,  that  way). 
^mh\  down. 
^inouf%  up  (thither). 
^inaufful^ren  {w.),  to  lead  up  (to 

=  m)' 
^inttufgc^cn  (ging,  gegangen),  to 

walk  up  (the  hill). 


176 


VOCABULARY. 


^inaud^  out  (hence). 

^inein'f(^IiM)fcn  {w.),  to  slip  in. 

^inein'fliringctt  (fprang,  gefprun= 
gen),  to  jump  in. 

^inein'jttfliringcii,  see  ^inein'fprin^ 
gen. 

^itt'fen  (w.)»  to  limp;  ^infenb, pres. 
partic.,  limping. 

Ijin'malen  {w.),  to  depict,  to  por- 
tray. 

^in'ter  {dot.  or  clccus.),  behind. 

Winter  .  .  .  f^tt,  after,  behind. 

linu'ber,  across,  over  there ;  l^in= 
ii'ber  galoppieren,  to  gallop  over 
(the  bridge). 

I^tnun'ter,  down. 

fid^  ^inttJC0'fc^Ctt(w.),  to  disregard 

(something  =  Uber,  accus.). 
fic^  ^in'gic^Ctt  (3og,  gegogen),  to 

protract,  to  extend. 
^injtt'fugcn  (w?.),  to  add. 
^inju'fc^cn  (m>.),  to  add. 
^iflo'rif^,  historic(al). 
I|0(^  {compar.  f)'6f)ev,  superl.  ^od^fle), 

high ;  am  ^bd^ften,  the  highest. 


^Ol^'itttereffanf ,  highly  interest- 
ing. 

§0(^'f(^ttle,    /.    (pi    -n),    high- 
school. 

W\ttt  (m).),  to  hope. 

I^off entity  (ddv.),  as  I  hope,  let 
me  hope. 

§of?'nttttg,/.  {pi  -en),  hope. 

^Wt,f-  ipl-  -n),  height. 

f^Wtt,  see  \)od). 

^O^rtueg,  m.  (-[e]g,  pi.  -e),  hollow 
way,  defile. 

^olj,  n.  (-eg,  pi.  ^er),  wood. 

^Ola'^ouer,  m.  (-g,  pi.  — ),  wood- 
cutter. 

lld'rett  (w.),  to  hear,  to  listen. 

^Otn,  n.  (-eg,  pi.  ^er),  horn. 

^um'boIHt  (2lIejanberoon),  1769- 
1859,  the  greatest  naturalist  of 
the  XIX  century. 

^Uttb,  m.  (-eg,  pi.  -e),  dog. 

ffWUn  {w.),U) hop;  sum  Wiipfen, 
(for  hopping),  to  hop. 

§uftcn,  m.  (-5),  cough, 

^^Ojin't^e,  /.  ipl.  -n),  hyacinth. 


3* 


i^m  (dot.),  (to)  him,  (to)  it. 

U^n  (occtts.),  him. 

i^'nen  {dot.),  them,  to  them;  t^neti 

bie  ejliigel,  their  wings. 
3^'llCll  (dot.),  (to)  you. 
i^r  {pers.  pron.)^  nominat.,  you ; 

dot.,  to  her  (to  it) ;   {possess. 

pron.)^  her  (its),  their. 

3^r,  3rte,  3^t,  your. 


^^'rigen    {pi),    her    folks,    her 

people. 
^IW/  name  of  the  river  on  which 

Weimar  is  situated. 
im  (=in  bent),  in  the. 
im'met,  always. 
in  {dot.  or  accus.),  in,  into. 
inbetn^  {conjunct.),  while,  whilst. 
^nbto'nerfttgf,/.  {pl  -n),  Indian 

legend. 


VOCABULARY. 


177 


Snbttt'nerflttmm,  m.  (-[e]g,  pL'^e), 

Indian  tribe. 
Sn'^ttlt  m-  {-^)f  contents. 
Sn'^ttltSttltgafte,  /.,  statement  of 

contents,  argument. 
in^nerllalb  {genu.),  within,  on  the 

inside. 
in'nig,  intimate(ly). 
^n'fcl,/.  {pi  -n),  island. 
intercffttttf ,  interesting. 
^tttcrcf  fc,  n.  (-e^,  pi.  -tt),  interest, 

character. 


intim',  intimate,  close. 

ir'rcn  or  fic^  itr'rcn  {w.),  to  be  mis- 
taken. 

^faderia,  Isabella  of  Castile, 
whose  marriage  to  Ferdinand 
of  Aragon  (1469)  laid  the 
foundation  of  the  power  of 
Spain. 

tH,  is. 

^ttt'Iicn  {gen.  -g),  Italy. 


% 


jo,  yes,  indeed;  {explet),  why! 
you  know,  by  all  means ;  fa^ren 
©ie  ja  fort !  go  on  by  all  means  ! 

^ittfib,/-  {pl-  -en),  chase,  hunting. 

3a^r,  n.  (-e^,  pl.  -e),  year. 

^tt^'rcSjcit,/.  {pl.  -en),  season. 

^tt^r^un'bert,  n.    (-g,   pl.   -e), 

century. 
j|e,  ever. 
je'iJCr,  jc'ilC,  jc'llcS,  each,  every ; 

ein  jeber,  each  (every)  one. 
iebo^^  however. 
fe'mant),  somebody. 
jc'ner,  jc'nc,  fc'neg,  that,  that  one. 
ien'feit  or  jen'feit^  {genu.),  on 

(that)  the  other  side. 


ie^'ig  {adj.),  present. 

jc^t,  now,  (then),  at  present. 

^0^,  n.  (-eg,  pl.  -e),  chain  (ridge) 

of  mountains. 
^o^an'ncg  {gen.  SoEianni^),  John. 
^tt'bel,  m.   (-g),  loud  rejoicing, 

exultation. 
ju^beln  {w.),  to  rejoice,  to  exult. 
^u'iJttS  (s^en.  ^uba),  St.  Judas. 
^U'bc,  m.  (-n,  pl.  -n),  Jew. 
itt'i)if(^,  Jewish. 
^tt'gcnil,  /. ,  (period  of)  youth. 

jung,  young. 

Sung'frau,/.  {pi.  -en),  maiden. 
^ung'Ung  w.  (-g,  pi.  -e),  youth. 
^U'ni,  m.  (-g),  June. 


fto'flgf  wi-  H^  P^-  -e);  (bird-)cage. 
ftt^l,  bare,  bald. 

ftttHer,  w.  (-g,  pl.  —),  emperor. 
ftai'fcrin,/.  (pi.  -nen),  empress. 
^alifor^nien  {gen.  -g),  California. 


fttlt,   cold;    falter  Sraten,   cold 

roast-meat. 
fttm,  see  Jommen. 
fttm  ...  an,  see  an'fommen. 
f  om . . .  f^tvmS,  see  ^eraug'f  ommen. 


178 


VOCABULARY. 


ftamerab^  m.  (-en,  pi.  -en),  com- 
rade. 
fiompf,  m.  (-es,  pi.  ^e),  fight. 
!om|j'fcn  {w.),  to  fight. 
ftono'ricniiogel,  m.  (-g,  pi.  ^), 

canary-bird. 
!ttna'rif(^,  Canary. 
^ano'nenfugel,/.  (pi.  -n),  cannon- 
ball. 
Canton',  m.  (-5,  pi.  -e),  county. 
^o'lJcr,/.  (pi.  -n),  caper(-bush). 
ftttrl  ((/en.  -e),  Charles. 
^or'te,/.  (pi.  -n),  card,  billet. 
ftofla'nie,  /.  (pi.  -n),  chestnut- 

(-tree). 
fau'fen  (lo.),  to  buy. 
!ein,  fei'nc,  fcin,  no,  not  a ;  {pi.), 

feine,  not .  .  .  any. 
ItVitm  (w).),  to  press. 
len'nen  (fannte,  gefannt),  to  know 

{(juxus.),  to  be  acquainted  (with\ 
Sttni,  the  county  of  Kent  which 

forms  the  southeastern  part  of 

England. 
ftinb,  n.  (-eg,  pi.  -er),  child. 
ftnb'lit^,  childlike. 
^inn,  n.  (-eg),  chin, 
^ir'i^e,/.  (pi. -n),  church;  inbte 

5tirc^e,  to  chui-ch. 
ftlang,  m.  (-eg,  pi.  ^e),  sound,  peal. 
Hor,  clear(ly). 

ftlor'^eit,/.,  brightness,  splendor. 
marie,/,  (pi. -n),  class. 
StUxIS,  n.  (-eg,  pi.  -er),  clothes, 

dress. 
flei'llcn  (to.),  to  clothe,  to  attire; 

fic^  fletben,  to  dress  one's  self. 
ftlei'tlung,/.,  articles  of  clothing, 

clothes. 


flfin,  small,  little ;  ein  flein  roenig, 
a  little  bit ;  ber  ^leine,  the  little 
one,  pigmy. 

^li'ma,  n.  (-g),  climate. 

Hir'rcn  (iw.),  to  clink,  to  clatter; 
ba^er'flirren,  to  move  along 
clattering. 

flug,  intelligent,  shrewd. 

^na'be,  m.  (-n,  pi.  -n),  boy,  lad, 
page,  attendant. 

^nv^'lfit,  m.  (-n,  pi.  -n),  squire. 

^nif ,  w.  (-eg,  pl.-e) ,  bow,  court€sy. 

ftnoflie,/.  {pi.  -n),  bud. 

ftiic^'ill,/.  (pi. -nen),  (female)  cook. 

^d(n,  Cologne,  a  fortified  city  on 
the  left  bank  of  the  Rhine  in 
the  province  of  Rhenish  Prussia, 
famous  on  account  of  the  great 
cathedral. 

fom'mcn(fam,  gefommen),tocome. 

^om|)Iimenf,  n.  (-[e]g,  pi.  -e), 
compliment. 

ftongre^O  m.  (-eg),  (U.  S.)  Con- 
gress. 

ftb'ntg,  m.  (-g,  pi.  -e),  king. 

^b'nigin,/.  {pi.  -nen),  queen. 

fb'niglii^,  royal. 

fbn'nen  (fonnte,  getonnt),  mod. 
aux.,  can,  to  be  able,  to  have 
power. 

fonn'ten,  see  fonnen. 

fonfcqucnf ,  consistent. 

Contribution",  /.  {pi.  -en),  con- 
tribution. 

ftonjerf,  n.  (-[e]g,  pi.  -e),  concert. 

Cojif,  m.  (-eg,  pi.  -^e),  head. 

Corb,  7n.  (-eg,  pL  ^e),  basket. 

Corn'feO),  n.  (-[e]g,  pi.  -er),  corn 
(=  rye-)field. 


VOCABULARY. 


179 


^or'ftfa  (gen.  -g),  (island  of)  Cor- 
sica. 

,,^O0'mO0/'  the  title  of  the  prin- 
cipal work  of  Alex.  v.  Humboldt, 
in  5  vols. ,  the  second  of  which 
contains  a  history  of  geography 
and  cosmography. 

^Oft,  /.,  (table-)board ;  ^oft  unb 
^itttttter,  room  and  board. 

f  of  ten  {w.),to  cost,  to  be  (the  price). 

f  bfili^,  costly,  precious,  excellent. 

firan'it^,  m.  (-g,  pi.  -e),  crane 
(bird). 

franf,  sick,  invalid ;  ^xante,  pl.j 
sick  people,  invalids. 

tvdnfliiii,  sickly,  ailing. 

^rci'lic,/.,  chalk. 

I^rei'liebotien,  m.  (-g),  chalk-soil. 

Ilrieg,  m.  (-e^,  pi.  -e),  war. 

^rtegg'alabemie,  /.  (pi.  -en), 
military  academy. 


^ncgS'rat,  m.  (-[e]g),  council  of 
war. 

^riid'c,/.  {pi  -n),  crutch. 

^rii|l'|)Cl,  m.  (-g,  p;.  — ),  cripple, 
invalid. 

^n^,f-  ipl-  "e),  cow. 

^unfJ'griff,  'w.  (-[e]^,  pi.  -e),  arti- 
fice, stratagem. 

funfl'tioa,  artistic(ally). 

flUJ'ferf ttrtcn,  copper-colored  ;  ber 
^upferfarbene,  copper-colored 
man. 

^urS,  m.  (-eg,  pi.  -e),  course. 

^urS'ttnbcrung,/.  {pi.  -en) ,  change 
of  the  course. 

^ur'fuS,  m.  {—,  pi.  5^urje),  course. 

furg,  short. 

fitrjli^  {adv.),  lately,  a  short  time 
ago. 

ftuffd)e,  /.  {pl.  -n),  coach,  equi- 
page. 


fittborato'rium,  n.  (-g,  pl.  Sabora= 
torien),  laboratory. 

lii'^eln  (mj.),  to  smile ;  bag  :^acl^eln, 
smile. 

Ia'(^en  {w.),  to  laugh;  bag  Sac^en, 
laughing,  laughter. 

Itt0,  see  Uegen. 

Ctt'gcr,  n.  (-g,  i)i.  ^  or  — ),  camp. 

Itt^m,  lame ;  ein  Saunter,  a  lame 
man  (person). 

lal^'men  {w.),  to  paralyse. 

Sanb^  n.  (-eg,  pf.  ^er),  land,  coun- 
try {oppos.  town);  iiber  Sanb, 
into  the  country. 


lan^lien  {w.),  to  land,  to  disembark. 

fitttliJ'gut, n.  (-[e]g, pi.  ^er),  estate. 

Sttltb'^ttUS,  n.  (-eg,  pl.  ^er),  farm- 
house. 

Sttnb'ft^ttft,/.  (pi.  -en),  landscape. 

fianil'fcc,  m.  (-eg, pZ.  -en),  (inland) 
lake. 

fionb'ft^,  m.  (-eg,  pi.  -e),  country- 
h6me. 

Sttnb'firtt&C,  /  {pl  -n),  high- 
way. 

lang  {adv.), long,  during,  far;  mein 
ganjeg  Seben  (ang,  (during,  for) 
my  whole  life  (long). 


180 


VOCABULARY. 


Ittll'ge  {adv.),  a  long  time,  a  long 
while ;  fo  lange  h\^,  imtil. 

langS  {genit.),  along  (alongside  of). 

longfl  {adv.),  long  since. 

"L'Arrabbia'ta"  (Ital.),  the  title 
of  one  of  the  most  popular  of 
Paul  Heyse's  stories. 

Itt0,  see  lefen. 

lag  . .  .  nor,  see  oor'Iefen. 

loffcn  (lie^,  gelaffen),  to  let,  to 
allow,  to  make,  to  have  .  .  . 
done,  to  order ;  fid^  geben  lafjen, 
to  order;  fic^  fiifiren  laffen,  to 
have  one's  self  led ;  fie  lie^en 
fic^  Don  i^ren  Sllten  fiittern,  they 
had  the  old  birds  feed  them ;  ju 
roiinfc^en  iibrig  laflen,  to  leave 
to  be  wished  for. 

Stttcin'ifi^   or  Da0   fiatcin'ifr^e, 

Latin  (the  study  of). 
fiouf,  m.  (-e^),  course. 
lou'fi^cn  (to.)»  to  listen. 
lout  loud. 
8olienlJeI,w.(-g),(spike-)lavender, 

bot.  *'Lavendula  Spica." 
Se'fien,  n.  (-5),  life,  stir,  livmg; 

fcin  ganjeg  Seben,  all  his  life 

long. 
leHcil  (to.),  to  live. 
leer,  empty. 

le'gen  (lo.),  to  lay,  to  put. 
legte  . .  .  dor,  see  oor'Iegen. 
gell'rer,  m.  (-^,  pi.  —),  teacher. 
ge^'reriii,  /•  {pi-  -nen),  (lady) 

teacher. 
geib,  m.  (-es,  pi.  -er),  body. 
\tW,  light  (of  weight),  easy(-ily). 
leiH,  sorrowful ;  e^  t^ut  mir  leib, 

I  am  sorry. 


Seilien,  n.  {-^,  P^-  — )/  suffering, 
sorrow. 

leilJer  {interj.),  alas!  unfortunate- 
ly! (I  am  sorry  10  say). 

ler'nen  (t«.),  to  learn. 

le'fen  (la^,  gelejen),  to  read. 

gefftng  (©ott^olb  ©p^raim),  1729- 
1781,  a  German  poet  and 
critic. 

lerte,  last. 

le^'tere,  latter ;  le^terer,  the  latter. 

(ent^'tett  {w-),  to  shine,  to  glisten, 

^tu'it  {pi.),  people. 

lieb,  dear,  beloved  ;  ber  liebe  ©ott, 
Our  Father  in  Heaven. 

fiie'be,/.,  love. 

lie'ben  {w.),  to  love ;  bie  ©eltebte, 

the  beloved  (one). 
lie'ber,    rather,    better;    lieber 

tcoUen,  to  prefer, 
gie'belbricf,  m.   (-[e]^,  pi.  -e), 

love-letter. 
gie'beSbrief^en,  n.  (-^,  pi.  —), 

love-letter,  "billet-doux." 
gieb'IingSUiiftter,  m.  (-g,  pi.  —), 

favorite  poet. 
gieb'Iinggforae,/.  (pf.^-n),  favorite 

color. 
gieb'IinggfluDium,    n.    {-^,   pi. 

-ftubien),  favorite  study. 
liefifl,  dearest ;  am  liebften  ^aben, 

to  like  best. 
lie'fern  («>.),  to  furnish. 
Ue'geti  (lag,  gclegen),  to  lie,  to  be 

situated. 
Uefe  .  .  .  ein,  see  ein'Iafjen. 
lie'^en,  see  lafjen. 
li'Io,  lilac  (colored). 
gnie,/.  {pl  -V),  lily. 


VOCABULARY. 


181 


Stncoln  (2l6ral^am),  the  sixteenth 

president  of  the  U.   S.,  born 

Febraary  12,  1809. 
fii'nic,  /.  {pi.  -n),  (steamboat-) 

line. 
lint,  left;  linfg,  to  (on)  the  left. 
8iriJC,/.  {pi.  ~n),  lip. 
fiittcrtttur',/.  {pi.  -en),  literature. 
(o^6en  (w>.)»  to  praise. 
Soifton,  m.  (-[e]g,  i>f.  "e),  call. 
fioi'rc,    /.     (pronounce :     Iwar), 

Loire  (river). 
gololitttf,/.  {pl.  -en),  locality. 


fiot'kct,  ^w.  (-^,  i?^.  -en),  laurel, 
bay  (-tree). 

,,8orclei%"  the  title  of  one  of 
Heine's  best-known  ballads. 

Wfen  (w.)»  to  take,  to  procure. 

loS'gcl^cn  (ging,  gegangen),  to  start 
quickly;  auf  einen  lo^gei^en,  to 
advance  towards  one. 

fittft,  /.  {pl.  ""e),  air,  atmosphere. 

Sufi,/,  {pl.  -e),  desire. 

luftig,  merry,  jolly. 

gufl'f^liel,  n.  (-g,  pZ.  -e),  com- 
edy. 


m. 


mtt'r^eit  (m>.),  to  make. 

mii^'ttg^  mighty,  potent,  strong, 
huge,  immense. 

2Wob'(^cn,  n.  (-g,  pl.  — ),  girl. 

mtt0,  see  mogen. 

3Jlo^l,  n.  (-eg,  pZ.  SKal^Ijetlen), 
meal,  banquet. 

a^a^racit,  /.  (p^.  -en),  meal  (re- 
past). 

Wtai,  w-  (-eg)r  May  (month). 

SRain,  w.  (-eg),  Main  (river). 

SRatlt}^  Mainz  (Mentz  or  Mayence), 
a  fortified  town  of  western 
Germany,  at  the  confluence  of 
the  Main  and  Rhine  rivers. 

aWttieflttf,/.  {pl.  -en),  majesty. 

Wlaiof,  m.  (-g),  major. 

ma'len  (w.),  to  paint,  to  color. 

man,  one,  we,  they,  people,  or  by 
passive. 

mott'i^er,  mttn'i^c,  mttn'i^c«,  many 
a. 


Wlm'titi,/.  (pi. -n),  almond  (-tree). 

mttn'gcl^ttft,  deficient,  imperfect. 

Wlann,  m.  (-eg,  pl.  ^er),  man. 

3Ran^ntgfaUigIeit  /•»  variety,  di- 
versity. 

mitnttlit^,  manly. 

SHano'tier,  n.  (-g,  pl.  — ),  ma- 
noeuvre, dexterous  movement. 

^'atititn,  n.  (-g,  pl.  — ),  fairy- 
tale. 

Wafd^tntv^affltv,  m.  (-g,  pl.  —), 
writer  of  fairy-tales. 

ajlori'nef^ulc,  /.  {pl.  -n),  naval 
academy. 

SJlttr!,/. , ' '  mark,"  a  German  silver 
coin,  equivalent  to  an  English 
shilling. 

WtWcU,  m.  (-eg,  pl.  ^e),  market; 
auf  bent  aJiar!te,  in  the  market, 

arittr'fiiioa,  m.  (-g,  pi.  m^xxs^mt), 

marshal. 

marfc^ie'ren  (w>.),  to  march. 


182 


VOCABULARY. 


8Rort^tt8  aBein'gortcn,  Martha's 
Vineyard,  an  island  in  the  At- 
lantic Ocean,  E.  of  the  town  of 
Newport,  R.  I. 

aRtttro'fc,  m.  (-n,  pi.  -n),  sailor. 

aRttu'er,/.  (pi.  -n),  wall. 

9Mccr,  n.  (-eg,  pi.  -e),  sea,  ocean. 

mfiU  n.  (-eg),  flour. 

me^r,  more,  longer,  any  longer. 

mci'ICtttoeit,  for  miles,  extending 
several  miles. 

aWcrienjtt^I,  /.,  number  of  miles, 
mileage. 

mein,  tnerne,  mcin,  my. 

aRci'nung,  /.  (pi.  -en),  thought, 
notion. 

meift,  mostly,  generally,  usually. 

aRei'fierttlcrt  n.  (-g,  pi.  -e),  master- 
work. 

melani^O^Iiff^^  melancholy. 

SKcUf'fO//.,  balm,  balsamint ;  bot. 
"Melissa  officinalis." 

aRen'iiellfo^n  (2JZofeg),  1729-1786, 
a  distinguished  philosopher  and 
wi'iter. 

SKcnft^,  m.  (-en,  pi.  -en),  man 
{oppos.  to  animal),  human  being, 
fellow,  individual. 

SRen'f(^enrofff ,  /.  (pi  -n),  race  of 
mankind. 

aRcnfl^'li^tcit  /•  ^  humanity. 

mcr'fcit  (lo.),  to  notice,  to  perceive. 

merf  tourlltg,  remarkable,  curious. 

2Re^,  a  (formerly  French)  fortress 
in  German  Lorraine. 

mir^  (pers.  and  reflex.) ^  me  (my- 
self). 

mie'teit  (w.),  to  rent 

9RiI^,/.,  milk. 


miO),  mild. 

SRilitiir'!  9lf alicmie',  /-,  military 
academy.  —  Schiller  was  a 
student  in  the  military  academy 
of  Stuttgart,  1773-1780. 

mtlttar'ifl^^  military,  soldierly. 

aWiUion',/.  (pi  -en),  million. 

fic^  min'iicrn  (w.),  to  decrease. 

,Minm  Don  Sorn'^clm/'  the  title 
of  one  of  the  greatest  German 
plays. 

aUinu'te,/.  {pi.  -n),  minute. 

mit  {pers.  and  reflex.),  (to)  me  (to 
myself). 

9Ri^'M0tgttn0, /.,  disapproval. 

mit  {dot.),  with  (of,  from). 

mifbringcn  (brac^te,  gebrac^t),  to 
bring  along  with  one's  self. 

9Rtf  gliel),  n.  (-eg,  pi.  -er),  member. 

aRifleii),  n.  {-§),  pity,  commis- 
eration. 

mtf  nel^men  (na^m,  genommcn),  to 
take  along. 

mitta^mafiU  n.  (-g,  pi.  2Ritta9g= 
ma^Ijeiten),  dinner. 

9Wif  te,  /. ,  center,  central  part. 

miftetlen  (w.),  to  communicate, 
to  impart,  to  make  acquainted 
with. 

3Rit'tcl5«me'riItt  (grew. -g).  Central 
America. 

mif  tclmtt§i0,  ordinary,  mediocre. 

SRiftcImeer,  n.  (-eg),  Mediter- 
ranean Sea. 

aRiftcIflaot,  m.  (-[e]g,  pi.  -en), 
middle  state. 

Ulif  ten  {adv. ,  used  with  a  prepos. 
following),  midway ;  mitten 
burc^,  through  the  middle. 


VOCABULARY. 


183 


mif gunc^mcn,  see  mifne^men. 

mobUc'rcn(iw.),  to  furnish  (a  room). 

mo'gen  (morf)te,  gemoc^t),  mod. 
aux.,  may,  to  be  allowed. 

SKo^ttmmcbo'ncr,  m.  (-6,  pi.  — ), 
Mahometan. 

momcntttn',  momentary,  tempo- 
rary. 

aWo'not,  m.  {-^,  pi.  -e),  month. 

SUonb,  m.  (-e^,  pZ.  -e),  moon. 

3Konol09%  m.  (-^,  pi.  -e),  mono- 
logue. 

mora'Hfii),  moral. 

Wlox'titX,  m.  (-g,  pL  — ),  murderer. 

mor'gcn,  to-morrow. 

9Ror'9Cn,  m.  {-g,  pZ.  — ),  morning. 

91Ro'fc0,  Moses ;  aJJofes  unb  bie  ^ro= 
pE)eten,  Moses  and  the  prophets 
=  the  books  of  Moses  (=  Penta- 
teuch) and  the  books  of  the 
Prophets  =  the  Bible  from  a 
Jewish  standpoint. 


^Otto,  n.    (-g,  pi.  -g),   motto, 

"device." 
mu1)C,  tired. 
muIti^iUjic'rctt  (w.),  to  multiply 

(3X2,  read:  3  ma  I  2). 
3)lunb/  m.  (-g),  mouth. 
mun^beit  (w.),  to  fall,  to  flow  (into 

=  in,  accus.). 
gRiitt'iiung, /.  {pi.  -en),  mouth. 
3Run'ficr,  a  town  in  the  province 

of  Westphalia  (Prussia). 
mUn^n  (mu^te,  Qemu^i), mod.  aux., 

to  be  obliged,  to  have  to. 
mu^'tc,  mu§'ten,  see  miifjen. 
Wlni,m.  (-e^), cheer;  gutenSIluteg, 

of  (with,  in)  good  cheer. 
mnrttX,/.  {pi.  "),  mother. 
9Jlttf  tcrflJrai^C,/.  {pi.  -n), mother- 
tongue. 
aRiifac/.  {pi.  -n),  cap. 
gjl^r'tc,    /.     {pi    -n),     myrtle 

(-tree). 


91.  91,  {ahhrev.  of  Lat.  :  nomen 
nescio),  I  don't  know  the  name; 
§err  ^,  91.,  Mr.  *  *  *,  Mr. . 

na^  {dat),  to,  toward,  after,  be- 
hind, according  to. 

9laiifhat,  m.  (-g,  pi.  -n),  neigh- 
bor; bie^iad^baritt,/.  (pf.-nen), 
(female)  neighbor. 

91ot^'6arfd^ttft,  /.,  neighborhood, 
vicinity. 

nai^tiem^  {conjunct.).,  after,  when. 

nadi'iicnfUd),  thoughful(ly),  pen- 
sive (ly). 


nad)'0C^cn  (ging,  gegangen),  to  go 

after. 
no^liifitg,  negligent,  careless. 
nai^'rufctt  (rief,  gerufen),  to  call 

after. 
nii^^fie^  next,  nearest. 
nactl^'ft^ttltt^     second     heaviest, 

next  in  weight. 
9la(t)t  /.  {pl.  ^e),  night,  "shades 

of  night";  nad^t^,  at  night. 
^la'UcI,/.  {pl.  -v),  needle,  leaf  of 

a  pine. 
9la'^C,/-,  neighborhood,  vicinity. 


184 


VOCABULARY. 


na'^e,  near. 

nal^m,  see  ne^men. 

^lo^'rung,/.,  food,  victuals. 

S'io'mcLn],  m.  {-^,  pi.  —),  name ; 
namen^,  named. 

ttam'lif^,  namely,  to  wit,  that  is 
(to  say). 

nttnn'te,  see  nennen. 

9lontutf  ct  (-5),  Nantucket,  a  North 
American  island  in  the  Atlantic 
Ocean,  off  the  coast  of  Massa- 
chusetts. 

92a)io'(eon  (Suonapar'te),  emperor 
of  France,  1804-1814,  was  born 
at  Ajaccio,  island  of  Corsica, 
Aug.  15,  1769,  and  died  on  the 
island  of  St.  Helena,  May  5, 
1821. 

Sltttjine,/.  {pi.  -n),  narcissus. 

9lo8'(^eil,  n.  (-§,  pi.  —),  (pretty) 
little  nose. 

9ltt'fe,./".  {pi  -n),  nose. 

ndrfcr,  see  nafe. 

ttO§,  wet. 

9lttlion',/.  {pi.  -en),  nation. 

9ltttionttlitof,  /.  {pi  -en),  natio- 
nality. 

9ltttur',  /.,  nature,  character  of 
nature;  t)on  Diatur,  naturally, 

.  originally. 

ntiivLX'%tTm.%,  natural (-ly) ;  nitl^t 
naturgemdf;,  contrary  to  nature. 

natiir'Iid^,  natural  (-ly),  unaffected, 
artless(ly). 

ne'belig,  misty,  foggy,  hazy. 

nt'htXi  {dot.  or  accits.),  close  to, 
near,  by  the  side  of. 

9lfd'0t,  wi.  (-g),  Neckar  (river). 

yitY\t,  m.  (-n,  pi.  -n),  nephew. 


ne^'men   (na^m,    genommen),  to 
take,  to  take  up  (the  word). 

netllif(J^,  envious,  jealous. 

nein^  no. 

nett'ncn(nannte,  genannt),toname, 
to  give  (name). 

9lefl,  n.  (-eg,  pi  -er),  nest. 

neu,  new,  unfamiliar. 

9{eU:=@ng'(antl,  New  England. 

neu'gierig,  curious. 

neun,  nine. 

,,9ltc^oItt5   9lii«c6^/'  title   of   a 
novel  by  Charles  Dickens (1839). 

nil^t,  not ;  gar  nic^t,  not  at  all. 
:  ni(^t5,  nothing ;  nic^tg  alg,  nothing 
1       but  (besides). 

niifeit  {w. ) ,  to  nod ;  m  i  t  bem  ^opf , 
his  head. 

nic,  never ;  nie  me^r,  never  any 
more;  noc^  nie,  never  before. 

nic'Jicr,  down. 

fic^  nielierlafTen  (Iie§,  gelaffen),  to 
settle,  to  establish  one's  self. 

^lielietlttffung, /.  {pi  -en),  settle- 
ment, colony. 

nie'mald,  never. 

nie^attb  {gen.  -[e]g),  nobody,  no 
one. 

yixna  {pronounce  Nilinja),  Span. 
=  "maid." 

nit,  stands  for  nid^t. 

no^,  still,  yet,  besides,  in  addi- 
tion. 

norbamertfa'nifl^.  North  Ameri- 
can. 

fflOT^tn,  m.  (-g),  North. 

norll'Ii^,  northern. 

^lotboYitn,  m.  (-g),  northeast. 

9lortltlief ten,  m.  (-g),  northwest. 


VOCABULARY. 


185 


Jlotb'fec,  /.,  North  Sea,  German 
Ocean. 

IWormonilic',/.,  Normandy,  one  of 
the  northern  provinces  of  France. 

nor'lDCgifd)^  Norwegian. 

9loi,f-  {pi.  ^e),  need,  distress. 

nii'tigcn  (w.),  to  compel. 

not'toentitg,  necessary,  indispen- 
sable. 


nun  (adv.),  now,  then;  (explet), 

well! 
nut,  only;  with  an  imperative :  just 

or  do!  fei  nur,  just  be!  fomme 

nur,  do  come ! 
9lnhf-  ipL  mm,  nut. 
DJttfjcn,  rn.  (-g),  profit. 
nu^ii(^,  useful. 


O, 


oh  (conjunct),  if,  whether;   ob= 

{adv.  =iiber),  over,  above. 
o'berlial^  (genit.),  above,  over. 
O^glcic^^  (conjunct),  although. 
Obfit,  n.  (-es),  fruit. 
Or^'fc,  m.  (-n,  pi.  -n),  ox. 
o'Hcr,  or. 

D'fcn,  m.  (-g,  pL  ^),  stove,  oven. 
orfcnbttt,  apparent(ly). 
bnentli(^,  pubnc(ly). 
off'ncn  (w.),  to  open  (trans.);  jid) 

offnen,  to  open  (intrans.). 
0\t,  often. 

O'^cim,  m.  (-g),  uncle." 
0^'nc  (acci(s.), without;  (conjunct), 

ot)ne. .  .gufagen,  without  saying. 
O^r,  n.  (-e^,  pZ.  -en),  ear;  mir  ju 

Dt)ren  !ommen,  to  reach  my  ears. 
Olr'f  cigc,/.  (pZ.  -n),  box  on  the  ear. 


Oh  n.  (-eg),  oil. 

Olltt,/.  (pi.  -n),  olive(-tree). 

,,01itier  XttJifi/'  title  of  a  novel 

by  Charles  Dickens  (1837). 
Om'nibttg,    m.    (-eg,    pi.    -e), 

omnibus. 
Dr'lcon0  (French,  pronounce  or- 

la-on'),  a  town  in  France. 
Ort,  m.  (-eg,  p/.  -e  or  ^er),  place, 

locality. 
O0ceo'(a^  name  of  a  chief  of  the 

Seminoles,  an  Indian  tribe,  and 

their  leader  in  the  war  of  1835- 

1842. 
Often,  m.  (-g),  East. 
Dfiin'lliett  (gen.  -g).  East  Indies. 
"oui"'  (French)  =  ja,  yes. 
Djcon',  m.  (-g,  pi.  -e),  ocean. 


^* 


^ttar,  n.  (-eg,  pi.  -e),  couple. 
iJOttr,  pair,  couple ;   ein  paar,  a 

couple,  a  few. 
pad'tn  (w.),  to  pack  (up),  to  stow 

away. 


^o'gc  (French  =  pa'hschg),  m. 
(-n,  pi.  -n),  page,  young  atten- 
dant (on  nobles). 

^olafl^  m.  (-eg,  pi.  ""e),  palace. 

^ttlmertoflattt,  m.   (-eg),  "Pal- 


186 


VOCABULARY. 


metto-State "  (=  state  of  So. 
Carolina). 

^tt^iicr',  n.  (-g,  pi.  -e),  paper. 

^oroiJicr,  n.  (-eg),  paradise. 

Moris',  Paris,  the  capital  of  France. 

"Panici'da"  (Lat.),  "Parricide," 
the  by-name  of  Duke  John  of 
Suabia. 

^ttrtci%  /.  {pl  -en),  (political) 
party. 

^Offortllinb,  m.  (-[e]g),  trade- 
wind. 

^Of'tor,  m.  (-^,  pZ.  ^afto'ren), 
clergyman. 

^atenfsftmt  n.(2lmteg,  pi.  tmter), 
patent-ofl&ce. 

$ennft)Itia'nten  {gen.  -g),  Penn- 
sylvania. 

per,  by. 

|irr'(en  («>.)»  to  pearl,  to  sparkle. 

^crfon%/.  (pi.  -en),  person. 

Iierfdn'li^,  personal. 

^fcil,  m.  (-eg,  pi.  -e),  arrow. 

^fcn'nig,  m.  (-g,  pi.  -e),  penny. 

^ferb,  n.  (-eg,  pi.  -e),  horse. 

(1)  ^ftr'fit^,  ?n.  (-g,  pi.  -e),  peach. 

(2)  ^ftr'fij^c,/.  (pi.  -n),  peach. 
^flr'ftc^baum,   m.   (-g,  pi.    ^e), 

peach-tree. 

^funt),  n.  (-eg,  pi.  -e),  pound. 

5p^ilofo|i^',  m.  (-en,  pi.  -en), 
philosopher. 

„^ic'<litt9"  (a  name),  Peeping, 
Peep,  Pip. 

^in'fel,  m.  (-g,  pi.  — ),  brush  (of 
a  painter). 

^lan,  rn.  (-eg,  pi.  "e),  plan,  de- 
sign. 

Illan^lod/  planless,  purposeless. 


|i(aff(^ern  («>.),  to  splash;  ^lat= 
fc^ern,  n.  {gen.  -g),  splashing. 

^Io$,  w.  (-eg,  pi.  -e),  place,  seat, 
public  square. 

$0'(rn  (s^en.  -g),  Poland. 

^Olitif,/.,  pohtics,  policy. 

portion',/,  {pi.  -en),  order,  plate. 

^O^f /•>  post-ofl&ce  ;  auf  ber  'poft, 
at  the  post-oflBce. 

^Ot^'bam,  name  of  a  Prussian 
town,  southwest  of  Berlin. 

Iiroift'tig,  splendid,  gorgeous. 

)irai^f  tloH,  splendid,  magnificent. 

Iiraf  tif^,  practical. 

^roftlicnf ,  rn.  (-en,  pi.  -en),  presi- 
dent. 

^re'biBer,  w.  (-g,  pi.  —),  clergy- 
man. 

$retg^  m.  (-eg,  pi.  -e),  price,  term, 
charge. 

^rctt'fee,  m.  (-n,  pi.  -n),  Prus- 
sian. 

^rcu'^Cn  {gen.  -g),  Prussia. 

^rcu'BenfiJnig,  "j.  (-g,  pl-  -e), 
king  of  Prussia. 

<ircu'0if(^,  Prussian. 

^rinj,  m.  (-en,  pi.  -en),  prince. 

^rinjefTtn. /•  (P^-  -nen),  princess. 

^ritiaffcfrctdr,  wi.  (-g,  pl-  -e), 
private  secretary. 

^ro'bc,/.  (pi.  -n),  proof,  test. 

^ro|l^cf ,  m.(-en,pi.-en),  prophet; 
bent  fonnen  ajiofeg  unb  bie 
^rop^eten  ntc^t  ^elfen,  him 
even  the  teachings  of  Moses 
and  the  Prophets  cannot  con- 
vince. 

fjroncngalc,  m.  (-n,  pi.  -n),  native 
of  Provence. 


VOCABULARY. 


187 


^rotien^ce^  /. ,  Provence,  the  south- 
eastern extremity  of  France. 
iirtt'fcn  {w.),  to  try,  to  test. 


^unft,  m.   (-eg,  pi.   -e),  point, 

topic,  item. 
iJiinff  U(^,  prompt,  punctual. 


O- 


Qu'en  dit  M.  Goet?"  (French) 
=  „3Sag  fagt  ^err  ©oet^e  baju?" 


What  does 
about  that  ? 


Mr.  Goethe  think 


m. 


IRob'ftt^rcn,  n.  (-g),  riding  on  a 
bicycle. 

9ta))'|ie/  fn.  (-n,  pi.  -n) ,  black  horse. 

9lorfc,  /.  {pi.  -v)j  race,  type. 

roffcln  {w.)^  to  rattle,  to  clatter. 

to'lcn  (riet,  geraten),  to  advise. 

tof  fam,  advisable. 

92aU(^,  m.  (-eg),  smoke. 

9ic'^cnf(ftttft,  /.,  account,  "satis- 
faction." 

Sict^'nung,  /.  {pi  -en),  bill,  ac- 
count. 

9iC(^t,  n.  (-eg,  pZ.  -e),  right ;  niit 
gtec^t,  rightfully,  justly;  rec^t 
{)aben,  to  he  right. 

rec^t  {adv.),  right,  very. 

tCC^tS  (adv.),  (on)  to  the  right 
(hand). 

IRcifttrttnttittU,  m.  (-[e]g,  pi.  "e), 
lawyer,  attorney-at-law. 

IRc'ilC,  /.  {pl.  -n),  speech,  talk, 
words. 

rc'lien  (w>.)>  to  speak,  to  deliver  a 
speech. 

rebctc  . . .  Stt,  see  ju'reben. 

»leb'ner,  wi-  {-^,  pi.  —),  orator. 


JRe'gen,  m.  (-g),  rain. 
Slc'QCnbogcn,  m.  (-g,  pi.  — ),  rain- 
bow. 
rcgic'rcn  (w.),  to  rule,  to  govern. 
JRcgic'rungSottficttttng,/.  (pi.  -en) , 

government-position. 
rcg'ncn  {w.),  impers.,  to  rain. 
rci^,   rich   (in  =  an,   dai.);    ber 

9iei'd^e  {gen.  -n,  p^  -n),  rich 

man;  p?.,  rich  people. 
Xti%tXi  {w.),  to  reach,  to  extend. 
tetd)'(td)/  ample,  abundant. 
Oici'^C,/.  {pl.  -n),  file,  row,  line, 

course,  turn ;  id^  fomme  an  bie 

Jtetl^e,  my  turn  comes. 
rein,  clean,  pure. 
JRci'fe,/.  {pl.-n),  journey,  voyage. 
IRcrfcnbc,  m.  (-n,  pl.  ~n),  traveller. 
rei'^cn  (ri^,  geriffen),  to  pull. 
9lc|irttfcntan'tcn^oug,  n.  (-eg),  (U. 

S.)  House  of  Representatives. 
9{e|)ublif,  /.  {pl.  -en),  republic, 

commonwealth. 
rc<lubUftt'nif(^,  Republican. 
UtpnWta'ntx^m.  (-g,pi.— ),  (the) 

Republican. 


188 


VOCABULARY. 


Rcfttttof,  n.  (-g,  pi.  -t),  result, 
inference. 

Wl^txn,  m.  {-e§),  Rhine  (river). 

Sl^cin'ufer,  n.  (~^,  pi.  —),  bank 
of  the  river  Rhine. 

R^O'nc,/.,  Rhone  (river). 

rii^'tcn  (io.)»  to  direct  (to  =  an, 
accus.). 

rit^'tig,  correct(ly). 

9li(^'tung,  /.  {pi.  -en),  direction, 
course. 

rief . . .  nat^,  see  nac^'rufen. 

rings  (adv.),  around,  in  a  circle ; 
ring^  l^erum,  round  about. 

mrUt,  m.  (-g,  pi.  —),  knight. 

9lom  (sre/i.  -^),  Rome. 

fHoman",  m.  (-6,  p/.  -e),  novel, 
romance. 

TOman'ttfl!^,  romantic. 

rd'mif(^,  Roman. 

9lo'fc,/.  {pi.  -n),  rose. 

9ioft'ne,/.  (pi.  -n),  raisin. 

9l0Smaxin%  m.  (-^),  (wild)  rose- 
mary; bot.  "Rosmarinus  offi- 
cinalis." 


I   9lo^,  n.  (-eg,  pZ.  -e),  horse;  ju 
!       3lof; !  to  horse  !  mount ! 
i  rot,  red ;  bas  3iot,  red  color, 
i  rof  biilfig,  red-cheeked. 

rof  gcflreift,  with  stripes  of  red. 
,  9lof!c^l(^cn,    n.    (-5,    pi.    —), 
1       (European)  redbreast,  the  "Ery- 
THACus  rubeccla"  of  the  scien- 
tists. 
I   riit'Iir^,  reddish. 
i   9loftttnne,  /.  {pi.  -n),  red  pine, 
pitch-pine. 
9iuifetl,  m.    (-g,  pZ.  — ),   back; 
Winter   feinem    9iiicfen,    behind 
his  back,  without  his  knowl- 
edge. 
IRttf,  wi.  (-eg),  reputation,  fame. 
ru'feii  (rief,  gerufen),  to  ciy,  to 

shout. 
9tlt'^e,  /.»  quiet,  peace,  calmness. 
ru'len  (lo.)^  to  rest. 
ru'l^ig/  quiet,  calm,  tranquil. 
9itti'nen,  pZ.,  ruins. 
runb,  round,  full. 
9lu§'laiHJ  {gen.  -s),  Russia. 


Saat  »»•  (-e^f  P^-  ©ale),  hall. 
Sa(^'fe,  wi.  (-n,  pf.  -n),  Saxon. 
SttJ^'fen  (sre^i.  -s),  Saxony. 
Sai^'fensSBei'mar,    the    duchy 

(since  1815  "grand-duchy ")  of 

Saxe-Weimar. 
@a(^'ftn,  /.    {pi.  -nen),    Saxon 

woman,  native  of  Saxony. 
fai^'ftfi^/    Saxon;    bag    fac^fijc^e 

Sanb,  Saxony. 


Stt'ge,/.  {pi.  -n),  legend. 

fo'gen  (u).),  to  say. 

fo^,  see  fe^en. 

ftti  . .  .  Oilg,  see  aug'fe^en. 

ftt^  .  .  .  3M,  see  ju'fe^en. 

Sorbet,  /.,   (garden-)sage ;    bot 

*'  Salvia  officinalis." 
famfli^,  all,  altogether. 
SattI),  rn.  (-eg),  sand,  ground. 


VOCABULARY. 


189 


<Sonft  ®0tf  ftaril,  w.  (-g),  Mount 
St.  Gothard. 

@ttnft  fio'renjfirom,  m.  (-e^),  St. 
Lawrence  (river). 

San0^fOUCt  (French  :  "  Sans 
Souci"  =  free  from  cares), 
name  of  a  well-known  palace 
near  the  town  of  Potsdam, 
Prussia,  the  favorite  country- 
seat  of  king  Frederick  II. 

<Sa^tQnac  fiofe,  a  village  charm- 
ingly situated,  in  Franklin 
county,  state  of  New  York. 

ftt^,  see  fi^en. 

fott,  satisfied,  fed,  supplied  to  the 
full. 

Battth  m.  (-^,  pi.  -),  saddle. 

S(^of,  n.  (-eg,  pi.  -t),  sheep. 

fd)offcn  (fc{)uf,  gefc^affen),  to 
create,  to  call  into  existence. 

SdlttfTttCt,  m.  {-^,  pi.  — ),  con- 
ductor (of  a  railroad-train). 

Sf^iir^en,  n.  {-^,  pi.  —),  small 
bowl,  saucer. 

fl^ttlf ^ttft  cunning,  roguish. 

©(garter,  m.  (-g,  pi.  —),  ticket- 
window. 

Sl^alf  jtt^r,  n.  (-[e]g,  pi.  -e),  leap- 
year. 

fic^  fdjii'men  {w-)-,  to  feel  ashamed. 

fdjam'rot  blushing  with  shame. 

^d)ttr,  /.  {pi.  -en),  band,  troop, 
crowd. 

fl^ttt'rctt  {w.),  to  paw. 

St^a^,  ni.  (-eg,  pi.  "■€),  treasure. 

jic^  f(^ttf  jcn  iw.),  to  value,  to  ap- 
praise one's  self. 

fdiau'rig^  dreadful,  awful. 

@(|att'H)ieI,  n.  (-g,  pi.  -e),  drama. 


f^ci'nen  (fd^ten,  gefd^ienen),  to 
shine,  to  seem,  to  appear. 

St^c're,/.  {pl'-xC),  shears,  scissors. 

St^erj,  m.  (-eg,  pi.  -e),  jest, 
joke ;  im  ©d^erj,  for  fun,  jest- 
ingly. 

f^iifcn  {w.),  to  send. 

ec^irfttl,  n.  (-g),  fate. 

e(^iiffol0tro9b'i»ic,  /.  (p^  -n),  a 
tragedy  in  which  fate  plays  a 
part. 

ft^tctt,  see  fc^einen. 

(S(^tff,  n.  (-eg,  pi.  -e),  ship, 
boat. 

(1)  Sl^ilb,  w.  (-eg,  pi.  -e),  shield. 

(2)  @(l)iH>,  n.  (-eg,  p^  -er),  sign- 
board. 

ft^irUcrn  (io.)i  to  describe. 

Sf^iruerung, /.  (pZ.  -en),  descrip- 
tion. 

©^tttC^t/.  (P^  -en),  battle. 

fj^la'fen  (frf)Itef,  gefrf)Iafen),  to  sleep. 

@(^lttfC0U|lC^  n.  (-g,  pi.  -g),  berth 
in  the  sleeping-car. 

SiJilttfttittgen,   m.   (-g,  pi.  — ), 

sleeping-car. 
((^la'gcn    (fc^Iug,   gefrf)Iagen),  to 

strike. 
St^Iamm,  m.  (-eg),  slime,  mud. 
fli^lttm'mig,  slimy,  muddy. 
ft^Ianf,  slender,  thin. 
f(i^lc^t,  bad,  evil ;  fc^lec^t  fprec^en 

t)on,  to  speak  evil  of. 
fdjltefen,  see  fc^Iafen. 
fr^Uc'^en  (fc^to^,  gefc^lofjen),  to 

close,    to   shut   (traMsit.) ;    [id) 

fcfllie^en,  to  close,  to  shut  (m- 

trans.). 
fj^limm,  bad. 


190 


VOCABULARY. 


@I^Utff(^tt^,  m.  (-[e]9,  pL  -t), 
skate ;  ba^  ©c^Uttjc^u^laufen, 
skating. 

@t^lo§,  n.  (-e^,  pi.  ^er),  castle, 
palace. 

©(^lOB'bcrg,  m.  (-g,  pZ.  -e),  castle- 
hill. 

^i^bxdr  in.  (-eg,  p^  -e),  gulp, 
draught. 

Sr^IuffcI,  m.  (-g,  pi.  —),  key. 

fic^  fd)mei'(^e(n  {w.),  to  flatter 
one's  self. 

©i^mcftcrUng,  m.  (-g,  pi.  -e), 
butterfly. 

fr^mcftern  (?«•)>  to  clang,  to  ring. 

Si^no'bcl,  »M.  (-g,  pi. ''),  bill,  beak. 

ft^nau'ben  {w.)^  to  hufi  and  puff. 

@i^nee,  m.  (-es),  snow. 

fi^nei'Hen  (fc^nitt,  gefc^nitten),  to 
cut. 

Sj^nci'ber,  m.  (-g,  pi.  — ),  tailor. 

fl^neU,  swift,  quick,  speedily, 
quickly. 

f(^on,  already. 

ft^Olt,  beautiful. 

8(^orn'(tein,  m.  (-[e]g,  pZ.  -e), 
chimney. 

<S(^otf  lanb  (flren.  -g),  Scotland. 

^(^ronf,  w.  (-eg,  pi.  *e),  cup- 
board, wardrobe,  book-case. 

Sc^reif^ett/  m.  (-5),  dismay,  panic. 

f^rei'bcn  (fc^rieb,  gefc^rieben),  to 
write. 

<2(^rcib'tif(^,  m.  (-eg,  pi. -e),  study- 
table. 

fc^rci'en  (fc^rie,  gefc^rieen),  to  cry, 
to  shout;  „e6"  fc^reit,  "they" 
shout. 

fl^ttf,  see  fc^affen. 


S(^U^,  m.  (-eg,  pi.  -e),  shoe. 

8(^u^'mttc^er,  w.  (-g,  pi.  —),  shoe- 
maker ;  iSc^uJ^mad^erg,  the  shoe- 
maker's family. 

Si^u'Ie,  /.  (pi.  -n),  school ;  eine 
t)of)ere  ©c^ute,  a  higher  institu- 
tion of  learning,  school  for  ad- 
vanced studies. 

Si^u'Icr,  in.  (-g,  pi.  —),  pupil, 
student,  disciple,  follower. 

Sc^iifjen^ou^,  n.  (-eg,  pi.  ^er), 
hall  of  the  City  Rifle  Corps. 

Bi^toa'btn  {gen.  -g),  Suabia. 

fl^toa'bif^,  Suabian,  southern 
German. 

Sj^ttJO'gcrin,  /.  {pi.  -nen),  sister- 
in-law. 

Si^tDonj,  m.  (-eg,  pi.  ^e),  tail. 

fj^toarj,  black. 

Sl^tottrj'tottlil,  m.  (-[e]g),  Black 
Forest,  on  the  right  bank  of  the 
Upper  Rhine. 

^^totin,  n.  (-eg,  pi.  -e),  swme, 
hog. 

^^toei)  (bie),  Switzerland. 

SJ^tDei'acmoIt  n.  (-eg),  Swiss 
(Helvetic)  people,  people  of 
Switzerland. 

f(t)tlier,  heavy  (bundle),  hard 
(labor),  severe,  fatal   (injury). 

Si^toert,  n.  (-eg,  pi.  -er),  sword. 

^J^mertcr,/.  {pi  -n),  sister. 

fi^toim'mcn  (fc^roamm,  gefc^n)om= 
men),  to  swim ;  bag  ©c^roimmen, 
swimmmg. 

fer^rte,  sixth. 

Wm,  sixty. 

(1)  See,  m.  (-eg,  pi.  -en),  lake. 

(2)  <See,/.,  sea,  ocean. 


VOCABULARY. 


191 


fce'fron!,  sea-sick. 
Scc'offtjicr',  m.  (-g,  pi.  -e),  naval 
officer. 

fc'gein  (w.),  to  sail. 

fe^'cn  (ja^,  gefe^en),  to  see,  to  look. 

fc§r,  very,  very  much,  most. 

fe^t ...  an,  see  an'fefien. 

fei!  (imperat.),  be!  fei  nur,  just 

be!  (subjunct.),  may  be. 
fci'ilCIt  (adj.),  silk,  of  silk. 

(1)  fcin,fci'nc,fcm  (posses.),  his,  its. 

(2)  fcin  {injinit.  of  aux.),  to  be. 
Sci'llC,  /.,  Seine  (river). 

fcit  (dat),  since. 

6ci'tc,/.  (p^.  -n),  side,  page  (of  a 
book). 

fclfifl  {indec.  adj.),  (him,  her),  it- 
self; bag  t)erfte[)t  fic^  oon  felbft, 
that  is  self-understood  ;  (adv.), 
even. 

(^elb'flttntligf  eit /. ,  independence. 

Sclftfi'ftiogrtt^^ic',  /.  {pL  -en), 
autobiography. 

fcrtcn,  rare(-ly),  scarce  (-ly),  ex- 
ceptionally. 

^tmino'itttpPl-,  name  of  an  Indian 
tribe,  a  branche  of  the  Choctaw 
Indians,  left  in  1750  their  old 
home  in  Georgia,  and  settled 
down  in  Florida.  Under  their 
chief  Osceola  they  waged  a 
cruel  war  against  the  U.  S., 
1836-1842.  After  their  defeat 
they  were  transported  to  the 
Indian  Territory. 

Scnttf,  m.  (-[e]g,  (U.  S.)  Senate. 

@entt'tor,  m.  (-g,  pi.  ©enato'ren), 
Senator. 

fen'ben  (fanbtc,  gefanbt),  to  send. 


ScntimcntttUtiif ,  /• ,  sentimental- 
ity. 

fcfjcn  (w.),  to  put,  to  place. 

fcuf  JCtt  {w.),  to  sob,  to  sigh. 

flt^  (reflex.),  him-(her-,  it-)self ; 
your-(them-)selves. 

@id)t,/.,  sights  in  ©ic^t  fommen, 
to  come  (heave)  in  sight. 

fie  (pers.),  she  (it),  they;  her  (it), 
them. 

Sic,  you. 

fic'bcn,  seven. 

fic'ficnjtt^rig,  seven-years';  ber 
fiebenja^rige  ^rieg,  1756-1763, 
the  war  waged  by  Austria,  Rus- 
sia, France,  Saxony,  Sweden 
and  Poland  against  Prussia 
under  her  king  Frederick  II, 
the  Great,  who  in  the  end  was 
the  conqueror  of  his  numerous 
enemies. 

ficg'rcil^,  victorious. 

figntttific'rcn  (w.),  to  signal. 

firOcrn,  silver,  of  silver. 

Sil^oucfte,  /.  ipl.  -n),  "sil- 
houette," the  representation  of 
an  object  in  black  color. 

Si'mon  (gen.  -g),  St.  Simon. 

fin'gcn  (fang,  gefungen),  to  sing ; 
gum  ©ingen,  (for  singing),  to 
sing. 

fin'fen  (fanf,  gefunfen),  to  sink, 
"to  fall." 

finn'doU,  clever,  ingenious. 

Sitting  93uU,  name  of  a  chief  of 
the  Sioux  Indians,  who  in  July, 
1876,  massacred  a  cavalry-divi- 
sion under  the  command  of 
Gen.  Geo.  A.  Custer. 


192 


VOCABULARY. 


@i^,  m.  (-eg,  pi.  -e),  seat,  chair. 

flf  jcn  (fa^,  gefefjen),  to  sit,  to  be 
seated. 

Stji'lien  {gen.  -s),  Sicily. 

<Sfla't)r,  m.  (-n,  pi.  -n),  slave. 

fo,  so,  thus,  therefore,  then;  fo 
.  .  .  iDte,  as. 

fobalU^  as  soon  as. 

foDannO  then,  afterwards. 

foc'bcn,  just  now. 

Sola,  n.  (-g,  pi.  -q),  sofa,  couch. 

foforf ,  at  once,  immediately. 

fogttr',  even. 

fo'gcnonnt,  so-called. 

fogleit^^  at  once,  immediately. 

So^n,  m.  (-65,  pi.  -e),  son. 

Bo'txattS,  of  Athens,  470^99  b.c, 
a  sculptor  by  trade,  was  one  of 
the  most  original  thinkers  and 
teachers  of  philosophy.  Of  his 
numerous  disciples  the  greatest 
was  Plato,  who  after  the  master's 
death  further  developed  the 
latter's  peculiar  method  of  dia- 
lectical reasoning.  The  philos- 
opher's wife,  Xantippe,  is  said 
to  have  caused  him  a  great  deal 
of  trouble. 

fol^,  such. 

forc^fr,  fori^e,  forced,  such  (a). 

Soll)af ,  m.  (-en,  pi.  -en),  soldier. 

foU,  is  to  be,  is  to  become. 

foritn  (w.),  mod.  a  MX.,  shall,  ought, 
to  be  destined  to, 

foU'tf,  foU'ten,  should. 

^om'mtX,  rn.  (-g,  pi.  —),  sum- 
mer. 

Sorn'mernoc^tStroum,  m.  (-g,  pi. 
■*),  summemight's  dream. 


fottlient,  but ;  nic^t  nur  —  fonbem 
auc^,  not  only  —  but  also. 

Son'ne,/.,  sun. 

8on^nrnf(^ein,  m.  (-5),  sunshine, 
sunlight. 

fon^,  else,  otherwise. 

Sonn'tag,  m.  {-^,pl.  -e),  Sunday. 

fotoic',  as  well  as. 

Slia'nirn  {gen.  -s),  Spain. 

^^ti'nxtx, m.  (-g, pi.  —),  Spaniard. 

flJQ'nifj^,  Spanish. 

\pat,  \pd'itr,  late,  later,  after- 
wards. 

Bpa'ttn,  m.  (-g,  pi.  —),  spade. 

©liQjier'gong,  m.  {-5rPl.  -e),  walk. 

BpttX,  m.  (-es,  pi.  -e),  spear. 

Bpttiin%,  wi.  (-g,  pi.  -e),  sparrow. 

S|liel,  n.  {-e^,pL  -e),  play,  motion, 
working. 

ftiie'Ien  {w.),  to  play. 

\pii^,  pointed. 

<Bpitit,f.  {pi.  -n),  tip,  point. 

flJliftcm  (10.),  to  splinter. 

S|iorn,  m.  (-[e]  g,  pi.  ©poren),  spur. 

'Bpott,  ni.  (-es),  ridicule,  scorn. 

ftioften  (uj.),  to  scoff,  scorn. 

Bpotitv,  m.  (-§,  pi.  — ),  scoffer, 
derider. 

fpof  tctc  .  .  .  ou8,  see  aus'fpotten. 

f|ira^,  see  fprec^en. 

„S|iro(^'s  unb  ^c'fcbui^/'n.(-[e]g, 
pl.  ^er)," Grammar  and  Reader." 

SlJttt'll^e, /.  {pl.  -n),  language. 

8))rtt(^'lc^rcr,   m.    (-5,  pi.  — ), 

teacher  of  languages. 
@<)ro(^'fiuiiium,  n.  (-g,  pl.  -ftubicn), 

language-study. 
\pxm% . . .  ^incin,  see  ^inein'fprin= 

gen. 


VOCABULARY. 


193 


f|jrc'(^ett   (fprad^,   gefproc^en),  to 

speak,  to  say. 
f<iref,  stands  for  fpred^en. 
ftjrin'gcn  (fprang,  gejprungen),  to 

jump,  to  leap,  to  throw  one's 

self. 
Stttttt,  w.  (-eg,  pi.  -en),  state;  bie 

SSeretnigten  ©taaten,  the  United 

States. 
Stotttrmann,  m.  (-eg,  pi.  ^er), 

statesman,  politican. 
@tttttt0'fcfrctor,  m.  (-g,  pi.  -e), 

(U.  S.)  Secretary  of  State. 
Stttb,  ?n.  (-eg,  pi.  -^e),  staff. 
StttH/.  (pi.  "e),  city. 
Stiitit'dicn,  n.  (-g,  pZ.  — ),  (small) 

town. 
BtaU,  m.  (-eg,  pi.  ^e),  stable. 
Stttmm,  m.  (-eg,  pZ.  "'e),  tribe. 
fittm'mcn  (w.),  to  be  sprung,  to  be 

a  native  (of  =  aug). 
fittm|J'fcn  (w.),  to  stamp,  to  pound. 
fittnil,  see  fte^en. 
fianii .  . .  auf,  see  auf  fte^en. 
flarb,  see  fterben. 
ftarf,  strong,  big,  thick,  powerful. 
Stiir'fc,/.,  strength,  force. 
fitttt  or  anfiatt  (genit),  instead  of. 
fitttfflniJcn    (fanb,   gefunbeu),  to 

take  place. 
^atf  (id)^  stately,  distinguished. 
StttuHoi^cr  (SBerner),  in  Schiller's 

play,  a  citizen  of  the  county  of 

Schwyz. 
ftcrf'en   {w.),  transit,  to  put,  to 

place  ;  intrans.,  to  lie  hidden. 
fic'^en  (ftanb,  geftanben),  to  stand, 

to  be  written  ;  fte^en  bleiben,  to 

stop. 


ficrgcn  (ftieg,  geftiegen),  to  rise. 

Stein,  m.  (-eg,  pi.  -e),  stone. 

flcin'rcit^,  mighty  rich. 

Stetic,  /.  {pl.  -n),  spot,  place, 
passage  (in  a  book). 

flcricn  (w.),  to  put. 

jicttctt  .  .  .  tJOr,  see  cor'ftellen. 

Stclj'fu^,  in.  (-eg,  pl.  ^e),  wooden 
leg. 

ficr'bcn  (ftarb,  geftorben),  to  die. 

Stie'fcl,  m.  (-g,  pl.  —  or-n),  boot. 

flieg  .  .  .  ttui,  see  aug'fteigen. 

Stift,  m.  (-eg,  pl.  -e),  stick. 

Stim'mc,/.  {pl.  -n),  voice. 

Stirn,/.  (pL  -en),  forehead. 

fjolj,  proud. 

fio'tCtt  (w.),  to  disturb. 

Storm  (X^eobor),  1817-1888,  a 
popular  novelist,  whose  best- 
known  story  is  eAtitled  Immen- 
see. 

fio'^en  (ftie^,  ge[tof;en),  to  blow 
(a  horn). 

fira'fcn  {w.),  to  punish. 

Strttl^l,  m.  (-eg,  pl.  -en),  beam, 

ray. 
Stra'^C,  /.  {pl.  -n),  street,  road, 

highway. 
firci'dien    (ftric^,    geftric^en),    to 

stroke,  to  rub,  to  spread. 
Strcit,  m.  (-eg),  dispute. 
fireng,  strict(ly). 

Stu'be,  /.  {pl.  -n),  room,  parlor. 
Stucf,  n.  (-eg,  pl.  -e),  piece,  slice, 

piece  (drama). 
flubic'rcn  {w.),  to  study,  to  read 

thoroughly. 
Sttt'btum,  n.  (-g,  pL  ©tubien), 

study. 


194 


VOCABULARY. 


Stul^I,  rti.  (-e§,  pi.  -e),  chair,  stool. 
StunllC,/.  {pL  -n),  hour. 
ftur'tnifl^/  stormy,  tumuhuous. 
flttfjen  (lo.),  to  hesitate. 
M  ^ttfjcn  («?.)»  to  lean,  to  rest. 


fuHtro^ie'ten  («?•)'  to  subtreu^t  (3—2, 
read  3  minu^  or  roeniger  2). 
Su'Hcn,  m.  (-5),  south. 
Suboften,  in.  (-6),  southeast. 
Sitlittierien,  w.  (-s),  southwest. 


3:. 


Xo'fel,/.  (pZ. -n);  table. 
2o'fcI(^cn,  ?i.  (-5,  pi.  —),  tablet. 
2og,  wi.  (-e^,  pi.  -€),  day;  eineg 

%a%z^  {genit.  of  time,  when),  one 

day. 

"Daily  and  Yearly  Journal," 
the  title  of  Goethe's  diary,  ex- 
tending from  1794  to  1822. 

tag'Iij^,  daily,  every  day. 

3^ttn'nc,/.  {pi.  -v),  pine,  pine-tree. 

^ttng,  m.  (-e^,  pi.  ^e),  dance. 

tan'gett  {w.),  to  dance. 

Ja'f^c,/.  {pi  -n),  pocket. 

2o'f(^cntu(^,  /I.  (-[e]^),  pi.  -er), 
pocket-handkerchief. 

tttUb,  deaf. 

Xou'be,/.  (p^  -n),  dove,  pigeon. 

tau^'flumm^  deaf  and  dumb. 

tau'f(^en  {w.),  to  (ex)change  situ- 
ations (places). 

Se'cumfe^  {gen.  -s),  name  of  a 
chief  of  the  Shawnee  Indians, 
who  was  defeated  by  Gen. 
Harrison  in  the  battle  of  Tippe- 
canoe, in  the  state  of  Indiana, 
Nov.  6,  1811. 

2eil^,  ni.  (-eg,  pi  -e),  pond. 

%t\{,  m.  (-eg,  pi  -e),  part. 

tei'Icn  (w.),  to  divide,  "to  part." 


%tVi  (SBil^elm),  m  Schiller's  play, 
a  huntsman  and  citizen  of  the 
county  of  Uri. 

2crmin%  m.  (-g,  pi  -e),  term. 

^errito'num,  n.  (-g,  pi  2;em= 
torien),  territory. 

ten'cr,  dear,  expensive. 

2eft  ^i-  (-65,  pi.  -e),  text. 

X^ol,  n.  (-eg,  pi.  ^er),  valley. 

%\iti'{tX,m-{-^,pl  —), "thaler"  (a 
German  silver  coin,  equivalent 
to  75  American  cents),  dollar. 

X^at,/.  {pl  -en),  deed. 

t^ot  t^tt'tcn,  see  t^uen. 

^^eo'tcr,  n.  (-g,  p/.  — ),  theatre. 

%\^tm'\t,f.t  Thames  (the  river). 

(1)  2^or,  m.  (-ett,  pi.  -en),  fool. 

(2)  X^or,  n.  (-eg,  pl  -e),  gate. 
S^rii'nc,/.  {pl  -n),  tear. 
t^tt'cn  orti^un  (t^at,  get^an),  to  do, 

to  occupy  one's  self  with. 

2pr,/.  {pl  -en),  door. 

S^tt'ringcn  {gen.  -g),  Thurmgia, 
one  of  the  old  provinces  of 
central  Germany ;  2^pringer 
SBalb,  Thuriugian  Forest. 

i\t\,  deep(ly),  profound(ly). 

%\t'\ViXi,  name  of  a  village  beauti- 
fully situated  on  the  river  Ilm,  2 
miles  NE  of  Weimar  (Germany). 


VOCABULAMY. 


195 


2tcr,  n.   (-e§,   pi.  -e),  animal, 

beast,  brute. 
Zitt'lthtn,  n.  (-g),  animal  life. 
%m'it,f.,  ink. 
2if(^,  wi.  (-e^,  1)^.  -e),  table. 
^i'tct,  m.  (-§,  pi.  — ),  title. 
2olJ,  w.  (-eg),  death;  bei  feinem 

^ob,  at  (the  time  of)  his  death. 
2^on,   m.    (-eg,   jpl.   ^e),   sound, 

melody. 
2o<)f,  m.  (-eg,  pi.  H),  pot. 
Xorfmoor,  m.,  n.  (-[e]g,  pL  -e), 

peat-bog. 
tttt'gcn  (trug,  getragen),  to  bear, 

to  carry,  to  wear. 
tranf,  see  trin!en. 
trot .  .  .  Hot,  see  Dor'treten. 
2rau'cr,/.,  grief,  sorrow. 
2rttU'crf<iicI,n.(-g,i)Z.-e), tragedy. 
Sraum,  w.  (-eg,  pi.  ^e),  dream. 
treffcn  (traf,  getroffen),  to  meet 

with,  to  encounter. 
trcn'nen  {w.),  to  separate. 


ttc'tcn  (trat,  getreten),  to  step  (in), 

to  enter. 
triefi  .  . .  fort,  see  forf  treiben. 
trin'fcn  (tranf,  getrunfen),  to  drink. 
trojf'cn,  dry. 
troif  ncn  (w.),  to  dry. 
^romlie'te, /.  {pi.  -n),  trumpet. 
tro^  (geiiit.),  in  spite  (of). 
Srou'babourd  (pl-),  Troubadours, 

or  Provencal  bards,  early  lyric 

poets  who  first  appeared  in  the 

Provence,  and  flourished  there 

in  the  XII  century. 
tru'6e,  turbid. 
trug,  see  tragen. 
2ut^,  n.  {gen.  -eg,  pi.  "er),  cloth, 

kerchief. 
2Wd)cn,  n.  (-g,  pi.  — ),  little 

(dear,  darling)  tulip. 
XuVpt,f.  {pi  -n),  tulip. 
^iirfci'  (bie),  Turkey. 
Xurm'toart,  m.  (-[e]g,  pi.  -^er), 

warder  of  the  (castle-)  tower. 


n. 


n'htv  {dot.  or  accus.),  over,  above; 

Jig.,  at,  with,  of,  in,  on,  after, 

concerning. 
uberaH'    {adv.),     everywhere, 

throughout. 
iibcrMirf'cn  (w.),  to  survey. 
ii'berfroi^t,/.,  overweight. 
U'bcrgcttitc^t,  n.  (-[e]g),  excess  of 

weight. 
ubcrgic'^Ctt  (iibergo^,  iibcrgofjen), 

to  cover,  to  suffuse. 
ii^er^autif ,  in  general. 


ukrloffctt  (iiberlie^,  iiberlaffen), 
to  let  one  have,  to  yield  up  to 
one. 

Ubcrlc'gcn^cit,/-,  superiority. 

U'bermOfflt,/-,  superiority. 

Ubcrfet'^cn  {w.),  to  translate. 

Ubcrfcfjung,  /.  {pl-  -en),  trans- 
lation. 

ttbcrmttt^'fett(iibern)uc^g,  ixbexxva^- 
fen),  to  overgrow,  to  cover  with. 

it^brig,  left  (over),  remaining,  the 
rest  of ;  ju  roiinfdien  itbrig  lafjen, 


196 


VOCABULARY. 


to  leave  ...  to  be  wished  for ; 
iibrig  bleiben,  to  be  left  over,  to 
be  remaining. 

U'^rigend  (adv.)^  moreover. 

Ul^r,  /.  {pi-  -en),  watch,  clock, 
time;  roie  oiel  U^r?  what 
time? 

um  (accus.),  about,  around;  um 
.  .  .  ju,  imfinit.^  in  order  to. 

Umge'bttllB,/.  {pi.  -en), surround- 
ings. 

Um'gCfiCnil,/.,  environs,  neighbor- 
hood. 

Umlout,  m.  (-[e]5,  vl  -z),  modi- 
fication of  one  of  the  vowels  a, 
0,  u,  au  into  d,  o,  ii,  du,  e.g., 
^onb,  ^iinbe ;  groB^  grower. 

fi(^  um'fe^cn  (fa^,  gefe^en),  to  look 
around. 

fic^  um'ttJcnlicn  (roanbte,  geroanbt), 
to  turn  around. 

ttit'angene^m,  unpleasant. 

nn'beloeglid^^  motionless,  without 
moving. 

Itnb,  and. 

unrntl'lic^^  endless,  vast. 

ttn'cntfi^ieticn,  doubtful. 

Un'fatt,  m.  (-6,  jtl.  -e),  accident. 

ttn'fcrn  or  un'toeit  {genu.),  not  far 
from. 

Utt'flCilttni,/.,  impatience. 

un'gc^CUCr  {adv.),  exceedmgly. 

un'gettlO^nt  unusual,  strange. 

tttt'fleaogtll,  bad,  mischievous, 
naughty. 

Un'gliirf,  n.  (-[e]§),  misfortune, 
calamity. 

ttll'glntfli^^  imhappy,  miserable, 
imfortunate. 


ttn'giinfiig/  unfavorable,  deroga- 
tory. 

tttt'^ifiorif^,  not  historical,  lack- 
ing historical  evidence. 

Union',/.  (pZ. -en),  (Northameri- 
can)  Union,  U.  S. 

Uni!icrfttdf,/.(pi.-en),  university. 

Un'^iiinftlij^f  cit,/. ,  lack  of  punctu- 
ality. 

ung  {dot.),  (to,  for)  us. 

un'f  ^Ql^bar,  inestimable,  priceless. 

un'fj^irflic^,  improper. 

un'fcr,  un'fcrc,  un'fer,  our. 

un'ter(da^.  or  accus.),  under,  below, 
beneath, among;  unteretnanber, 
among  themselves. 

Un'tergang,  m.  (-[e]^,  pi.  ^e), 
setting,  sinking. 

nn'tcrge^cn  (ging,  gegangen),  to 
set. 

un'ter^alb  (genit),  below. 

fic^  unter^arten  (unter^ielt,  unter= 
f)alten),  to  converse. 

Unter^artung,  /.  {pL  -en),  con- 
versation, talk. 

Un'terlHiJic,  /.  {pi.  -n),  under- 
lip. 

Untcmc^'men,  n.  (-^),  enterprise. 

Un'tcrrid^t  "i-  (-[e]^)/  instruction, 
schooling. 

untcrflufaen  («?.)»  to  assist,  to 
second. 

Unterfiiifaung,/.,  assistance. 

un'ubcrtrcff1i(^,  unsurpassable. 

un'jufriclicn,  discontented. 

Ur'flirung,  m.  (-[e]s),  origm. 

Ur'tcil,  n.  (-g,  pi.  -e),  opinion. 

tt.  f.  tn.  {abhrev.  for  unb  fo  wetter), 
and  80  on,  etc. 


VOCABULARY. 


197 


»♦ 


©a'tcr,  m.  (-§,  pi.  ^),  father. 
JBa'tctlttnU,  n.   (-[e]g,   pi.  ^er), 

fatherland,  native  land. 
JBa'terjittlit  /.    (p^   ^e),  native 

(place)  town. 
95cr.     {abhrev.  =  SBerei'nigte) 

Staa'tcn,  P?-,  United  States. 
fic^  nerttb'fr^iciicn  {w.),  to  take 

leave  of,  to  bid  good  bye  to. 
fid^  Herbeu^gen  (w.),  to  bow. 
berbin'ben  (oerbanb,  cerbunben), 

to  connect. 
Herblei'ten  (oerblieb,  cerblieben), 

to  remain,  to  be. 
nertirau't^en  (w.),  to  consume,  to 

use  (up). 
titxhxti'ttn  («>.)»  *o  spread,  to  dis- 
seminate. 
Sctbrci'tung,/.,  diffusion. 
tjcrtirin'gcn  (tjerbrad^te,  t)erbrad^t), 

to  spend  (time). 

tierbie'nen  (w.),  to  deserve. 

tterbtonett/  ill-humored,  peevish. 

ttere^l'tetl  (w.),  to  respect,  to  rever- 
ence. 

bererntgen  (w.),  to  unite ;  bie  3Ser= 
einigten  ©laaten,  the  United 
States. 

©Crfarfct,  m.  (-g,  pi.  — ),  author. 

Ucrforgen  (w.)»  *o  follow,  to  pur- 
sue. 

ttcrgcrfen  (Derga^,  cergefjen),  to 
forget,  to  ignore. 

Hetglei'i^eii  (oerglit^,  oerglic^cn), 
to  compare. 

tiergol'ben  (w.),  to  gild. 


l!Bcr|ttlfttt8,    n.    (-e§,    pi.    -fe), 

situation,  condition,  relation  (s), 

proportion. 
tierl^ei'rtttet,  married. 
ticrfnu<i'fett  (w.),  to  unite. 
tJCtlttn'gCIt    (w.),    to    request,   to 

demand. 
tterlttrfcn  (Derlie^,  ©ertafjen),  to 

leave,  to  abandon. 
S5erle'8Ctt^Ctt/.,  embarrassment, 

unpleasant  situation. 
HCrlcfjCtt  (w.),  to  injure. 
tjcrlic'ren   (werlor,   oerloren),   to 

lose, 
fid^  berlo^ben  (w.),  to  become  en- 


a^crlo'fiung,/-,  betrothal. 
Ucrmu'tctt    (w.),   to  suppose,  to 

suspect. 
ticr^ijlidi'tett  (w.),  to  oblige. 
Uerra'tcn   (oerriet,   oerraten),  to 

betray,  to  show. 
tlcrf(^ie'iJCn,  different. 
bcrf(ittiei'9cn(Derfc^n}teg,t)er|d^n)ie= 

gen),  to  conceal  (from  one  = 

dat). 
Ucrfd^teJinliett    (tjerfd^tDanb,    t)er= 

fd^raunben),  to  disappear, 
fid^  tJcrfc^'cn  (oerfaf),  uerje^en),  to 

provide  one's  self. 
Hcrfcfjcn  {w.),  to  put,  to  place,  to 

transfer,  to  promote ;  to  reply, 

to  rejoin. 
bcrfll  often  {to.),  to  scoff,  to  deride. 
JBcrflttllb',  m.  (-eg),  reason,  com- 
mon sense. 


198 


VOCABULARY. 


Derfie^'en  (ocrftanb,  t)crftanbcn),to 
understand ;  fid^  oerfte^cn,  tx)  be 
understood ;  bas  rerfte^t  ftc^  »on 
felbft,  that  is  self-understood. 

berfu'^cn  (w.),xa  try, 

bcrtcilcn  (lo.),  to  distribute,  to 
dispense. 

tlcrtDttrtCtt  (to.)»  to  manage,  to 
conduct. 

lieTje^'tett  (w-)»  ^  consume,  to 
dispose  of. 

Ucrsci'^ett  (cerjie^,  rerjie^en),  to 
pardon;  e^  ift  bem  ^ic^ter  ju 
Derjei^en,  the  poet  might  (must) 
be  pardoned. 

JBeratnciriung,  /.,  despair,  de- 
spondency. 

did.  Hide,  much,  many. 

DieUeil^f ,  perhaps. 

t)iertierft)rei!^enb,  promising. 

tiier,  four. 

tiier'te,  fourth. 

Dter'te^alb,  three  and  a  half. 

©icriOttliJ'fiottet  Sec,  m.  (-ee), 
♦*Lake  of  the  Four  Forest 
Counties"  in  Switzerland. 

tiier'je^n,  fourteen ;  Dter'se^nte, 
fourteenth;  oierje^n  Xage,  two 
weeks. 

©irgi'nictt  {gen.  -%),  Virginia. 

JBo'gcI,  m.  (-g,  pi.  ^),  bird. 

JBoge'fett  {pi),  Vosges,  a  moun- 
tain-range on  the  left  bank  of 
the  Upper  Rhine. 

Sdg'Iein,  n.  (-g,  pi.  —),  little 
bird,  birdie. 

SJoIt  n.  (-eg;  pi  "'er),  people, 
nation. 

tiott,  full. 


Hollig  ((wir.),  wholly,  completely, 
altogether. 

ttoU'fommen,  perfect(ly). 

DoU'fidnDig,  complete(ly). 

SoUoi'rc,  1694-1778,  a  famous 
French  historian,  philosopher, 
critic,  poet,  dramatist  and 
romancer.  One  of  his  trage- 
dies is  entitled  Mahomet. 

bom  =  oon  bem. 

bon  {dxit.),  of,  from,  by;  Don  .  .  . 
aug,  from. 

bor  {dat),  before,  in  front  of,  ago; 
{accus.)^  before,  to  the  front  of ; 
t)or  bem  2)orfe,  outside  the 
village. 

bottturfe^en  (fal^,  gefe^en),  to  fore- 
see, to  forebode. 

fid^  bor'derciteii  {w.),  to  make 
ready,  to  prepare. 

fic^  bor^rangen  {w.),  to  press  for- 
ward, to  be  obtrusive. 

bor'fu^rett  (io.)»  ^  produce,  to 
present. 

bor^geflem,  the  day  before  yester- 
day. 

bor'l^altett  (^telt,  ge^alten),  tohold 
before  (one  =  dot.). 

bo'ng,  last,  previous. 

bor'Iegen  (w.),  to  put  (place)  be- 
fore, to  produce,  to  exhibit. 

bor'Icfctt  (lag,  gelefen),  to  read 
aloud. 

S5or'Uc6e, /m  predilection. 

JBor'mittog,  m.  (-g,  pi  -e),  fore- 
noon ;  oormittagg,  in  the  fore- 
noon. 

S^or'mttitb,  rn.  (-eg,  pi  'cr), 
guardian,  trustee. 


VOCABULARY. 


199 


S5or'nttme[n],  m.  (SSornamen^,  pi. 
SSornamen),  first  name,  Chris- 
tian name. 

tJOr'nc^m,  of  gentle  people;  of 
people  of  rank. 

Sor'fittbt/.  {pl.  ^e),  suburb. 

tJOr'licUcn  {w.),  to  introduce. 

tJOr'tcil^ttft,  profitable. 

tjor'ltctcn  (trat,  getreten),  to  step 
forth,  to  come  out. 

dotii'Oer,  past,  by;  er  mu^te  vox- 
ii6er(ge^en  to  be  understood), 
he  must  pass  by. 


uoru'ticrjic^en  (509,  gejogcn),  to 
pass  by. 

^ormurf,  m.  (-[e]g,  pl.  ^e),  ob- 
jection. 

Dor^getgen  (w.),  to  show,  to  pro- 
duce. 

IBor'jug,  m.  (-[e]g,  pl.  -^e),  merit. 

tlorjiig'U^,  excellent. 

"Vous  etes  un  homme"  (French) 
=  „6te  jinb  ein  [ganjer]  aJiann/ 
"You  are  a  man  [indeed]." 


tutti^'fen  (roud^g,  geicac^fen),  to 
grow,  to  increase. 

SBtt'gcn,  m.  (-g,  pl.  —),  carriage, 
car,  wagon. 

tua'gen  (w.),  to  dare. 

tuiil^^len  (w.),  to  choose,  to  make 
choice,  to  elect. 

totter,  true. 

ttJO^'rcttb  (genit),  during;  {con- 
junct), while. 

SBa^r'^cit/.,  truth,  fidelity,  re- 
ality. 

tUtt^r'fl^cittlic^,  probably,  likely. 

SBttlb,  m.  (-eg,  pl.  ^er),  wood, 
forest. 

SBttttJ'fittum,  m.  (-[e]g,  pl.  ^e), 
forest-tree. 

ttJarbig,  wooded. 

SBan'ii'rer  (=  SSanberer),  m.  (-g, 
pl.  — ),  wanderer,  pilgrim, 
"youth." 

toanbte  . . .  urn,  see  um'roenben. 


SBttlt'gc,/.  {pl.  -n),  cheek. 

ttJttnn,  when. 

tear,  ttJtt'rCtt,  was,  were. 

ttii're  (subjunct),  was,  had  been. 

ttiarm,  warm,  tender,  sympathetic. 

SBar'tcfaal,  m.  (-[e]§,  pl.  2Barte= 
fcile),  waiting  room. 

ttiotum'  {emphat.  wa'rum),  why, 
wherefore. 

tt)O0,  what,  which;  \va^  fiir,  what 
(kind  of). 

SBii^fd^e/  /.,  linens,  linen  articles. 

aBaffcr,  n.  (-§),  water. 

aSarfcrttliifJe,/.,  watery  waste. 

SBa'terloo^  name  of  a  village  near 
Brussels  (Belgium),  where  June 
18, 1815,  Napoleon  was  defeated 
by  the  united  English  and  Pras- 
sian  armies  under  Wellington 
and  Bliicher. 

teic'iier  .  .  .  not^,  neither .  .  .  nor. 
-  w*.  (-eg, pl.  -e), way,  manner. 


200 


VOCABULARY. 


toeg  (ddv.),  away. 

toe'gen  (genit.),  on  account  of. 

toel'miitig^  pitiful,  doleful. 

SBeib,  n.  (-e^,  pi  -ex),  wife. 

tati^,  soft,  downy. 

SBet^'nai^ten  {or  t)te  2Set^nac^tcn, 
pZ. ),  Christmas ;  ju  2Bei^nac^ten, 
at  Christmas. 

Hieil,  because. 

SBeHe,/.,  while. 

fS^tlmax,  the  capital  of  the  grand- 
duchy  of  Saxe-Weimar  (Ger- 
many), for  some  time  the  home 
of  a  number  of  great  poets  as 
Groethe,  Schiller,  Herder  and 
Wieland. 

ffiein,  m.  (-65,  pi.  -e),  wine,  gi-ape- 
vine. 

tUtVntn  (w.),  to  weep,  to  cry. 

aSetn'Ianb,  n.  (-[e]s,  pi.  ^er), 
wine-district. 

aBci'fe,/.,  manner. 

toei'fc,  wise. 

toci§,  white ;  ber  SBei^e,  the  white 
(one). 

tDett,  far;  roeit  f)ex,  from  afar,  and 
also,  roeit  ^er  fein,  to  be  from 
afar,  to  be  of  great  value,  to 
be  distinguished. 

tOtVttV,  further,  along,  away,  ad- 
ditional. 

tueri^er,  totViit,  toert^ed  {inter, 
and  relat.),  who,  which,  what. 

SBelt/.  (pi. -en),  world. 

SBclfougfleattng,  /.  {pi  -en), 
world's  (universal)  exhibition. 

SBelf  0f  fl^i(^tf ,  /. ,  world's  history. 

SScIfiibcrlDinDcr,  m.  (-5,  pi  —), 
conqueror  of  the  world. 


toe'nig,  toe'nige,  little,  a  few;  ein 
flein  iDenig,  a  little  bit. 

toenn,  if,  when,  whenever. 

locr?  who?  roer  {relat.),  he  who; 
roer  ,  .  .  bem  .  .  .,  him  who .  .  . 

toer'Uen  (rourbe  [roarb],  geraorben), 
intrans.,  to  become,  to  grow,  to 
get ;  as  auxil  it  forms  future, 
conditional,  and  passive. 

Iiier'fcn  (rcarf,  geroorfen),  to  throw. 

SScrt  n.  (-e^,  pi  -e),  work. 

loert,  esteemed,  dear. 

fS&ttt,  m.  (-e^),  worth,  standard. 

,,aScr't^er/'  i.e.,  „3)ie  Seiben  beg 
jungenSBert^er,"  "The Sorrows 
of  young  Werther,"  Goethe's 
first  great  novel  (1774),  which 
was  Napoleon's  companion, 
when  in  Egypt. 

SB('feI/  a  fortified  town  on  the 
Rhine,  in  the  province  of 
Rhenish  Prussia. 

SBe^fttt/  n.  {-^),  character,  con- 
duct. 

toed^alb^  {interr.  and  relat.),  why, 
wherefore. 

SBcftc,  /.  {pl  -n),  waist  coat,  vest. 

agcrtcn,  m.  (-g),  West. 

tncfl'Itl^,  western. 

SBefl  ^oittt,  U.  S.  military  acade- 
my, in  Orange  county,  state  of 
New  York. 

SScfter,  n.  (-§),  weather,  air. 

tutl^'ttg^  important. 

tot'Jifr  {accus.),  against. 

ttlie  {interr.),  how;  {relat.),  how, 
as,  when ;  roie  ift  bte  ©itro'ne  ? 
of  what  color  is  .  .  .  ?  rote  oiel  ? 
roie  oiele?    how  much?   how 


VOCABULARY. 


201 


many  ?  ber  toieoielte  ?  which  (of 
the  number)  ? 

tnie'Dcr  (adv.),  again. 

tuieiicr^olcn  (w.),  to  repeat,  to 
reiterate. 

taic'iicrttitt^Ien  (w?),  to  re-elect. 

toic'gctt  (n)og,  geroogen),  to  weigh. 

toic'^crn  (w.),  to  neigh. 

SBie'fc,/.  (p^.  -n),  meadow. 

aSirbcnftrud)  (6rnft  oon),  a  con- 
temporary German  dramatist, 
born  1845. 

,,aBiI||clm  %tU/'  tlie  title  of 
Schillers  most  popular  drama. 

tDin'fcn  (w.),  to  beckon. 

SBin'tcr,  m.  (-g,  pi.  —),  winter. 

hJtr,  we. 

mirf  tit^,  really,  in  fact. 

SBirHi^feit,/.,  reality. 

SBtr'fung,/.  ipl-  -en),  effect. 

SBirt,  m.  (-e^,  pi.  -e),  landlord, 
owner. 

SSirtr^ttttS,  n.  (-e^,  pZ."  ^er), 
tavern,  inn. 

ttiinctt  (tou^te,  geiDU^t),  to  know. 

too  {interr.  and  relat.),  where. 

SBo'c^c,/.  {pi.  -n),  week. 

too  fur'  {emphat.  TOo'fiir),  where- 
fore, for  what. 

tOO^cr'  {emphat.  roo'l^er),  whence, 
from  what  place. 

tOOl^in'  {emphat.  roo'^in),  (whither?) 
what  way?  to  what  place  ? 

too|lI  {adv.),  well,  certainly,  sure 
enough;  {explet.),  I  guess,  per- 
haps. 

too^rgcorlinct,  well-arranged. 


tOO^rgerUttilct  well-formed, 
(shapely)  and  round. 

tOO^rflingentl,  melodious. 

tOO^rriet^enb,  sweet-scented,  fra- 
grant. 

too^rtl^uen  (t^at,  get^an),  to  bene- 
fit, to  do  good. 

too^'ncn  {w.),  to  live. 

BoVtt,f.  {pi.  -en),  cloud. 

toorten  (raoUte,  gerooUt),  mod. 
aux. ,  to  want,  to  desire,  to  be 
about  to,  to  be  willing, 

UBorjogcn  (^aroli'ne  uon),  1763- 
1847,  n^e  von  Lengefeld,  a 
German  poetess,  sister  of  Char- 
lotte Schiller,  the  wife  of  the 
poet. 

toomif  {emphat.  roo'mit),  where- 
with, with  what,  by  what. 

toorouf  {emphat.  roo'rauf),  where- 
upon, on  which. 

toortn'  {emphat.  rao'rin),  in  what, 
by  what. 

SBort^  n.  (-eg,  pi.  -e  [connected 
words],  and  ^er  [single,  dis- 
connected words]). 

toorii'bcr  {emphat.  roo'ritber), 
about  what. 

tOUn'ilcrf(^bn,  charming. 

SBunfrf),  m.  (-eg,  pi.  ^e),  wish, 
desire. 

toiin'fc^Ctt  {w.),  to  wish,  to  desire; 
3U  n)iinfd)en  iibrig  laffen,  to  leave 
...  to  be  wished  for. 

SBur'He,/.,  dignity. 

tout'tie/  would. 

tour'big,  worthy. 


202 


VOCABULARY. 


n. 


tt'nuJfU^on,  next  to  Plato  the 
greatest  of  the  disciples  of 
Socrates,  lived  at  Athens,  430- 
354  B.C.  He  is  the  author  of  a 
great  number  of  historical  and 
philosophical  works,  of  which 


the  best-known  is  the  Anabasis^ 
a  history  of  the  expedition  of 
the  Younger  Cyrus,  and  of  the 
retreat  of  the  10,000  Greeks 
who  formed  part  of  his  army. 


?)oIes6oUcge,  the  great  university  of  New  Haven  (Conn.). 


3. 


ga^len  (u>.),  to  pay. 

Soljll,  m.  (-e^,  pi.  H),  tooth. 

gttrt,  delicate,  soft. 

Sttttn,  rn.  (-e^,  pi.  ^c),  hedge. 

Sdtttt'foitig,  m.  (-g,  pi.  -t),  wren; 
(lit.^  king  of  the  hedge),  hedge- 
sparrow. 

J.  8.  {dbbrev.  =  jum  Seifpiel),  as 
for  example,  for  instance,  viz. 

itWtt,  tenth. 

gergen  (lo.),  to  show,  to  manifest ; 
fic^  Seigen,  to  appear,  to  turn  out. 

Sfit/-  {pl-  -en),  time. 

3eif  rttum,  m.  (-[e]^,  pi.  ^e),  time, 
period,  term. 

Serfireu'ung, /•  {pi.  -en),  amuse- 
ment. 

Seug'nig,  n.  (-C5,  pi.  -fe),  testi- 
mony, evidence. 

jie'^en  (jog,  gesogen),  {transit), 
to  pull,  to  take;  {intrans.),  to 
move  along,  "to  pass,"  to 
change  residence. 


jirm'Itt^,     pretty    considerable, 
rather. 

iittii^,  neat,  elegant. 

Sigeu'nerbube,  m.  {-n,  pi.  ~n), 
gipsy-boy;  „2)er  3i9eunerbube 
im  3'Jorben,"  the  title  of  a  ballad 
by  Emanuel  Gteibel. 

Sim'mcr,  n.  (-g,  pi.  — ),  room, 
presence  chamber;  ^oft  unb 
3itnnter,  room  and  board. 

iitptn  {w.),  to  chirp. 

m^  JO'Bfn^  ««« Sie^en. 

jogcn  .  .  .  ab,  see  ab'ste^en. 

jb'0ern  (to.),  to  hesitate. 

jor'nig,  angry. 

(1)  jtt  {dot.),  at,  in,  on,  in  addition 
to ;  {with  infinitive),  in  order  to. 

(2)  jtt  {adv.),  {with  verb),  to  ;  {with 
ad;.),  too. 

Su'bcreitung,    /.,     preparation, 

cooking. 
ju'bringen  (brac^te,  gebrac^t),  to 

spend  (time). 


VOCABULARY. 


203 


JttCrfl'  (adv.)^  for  the  first  time, 
first  of  all. 

Jtt'fattig  (adv.),  by  chance,  as 
chance  would  have  it. 

jttfric'iJen,  satisfied. 

gu'fugen  (w.),  to  do,  to  cause. 

SH'  ^-  i~^^>  P^-  ■^^)'  train,  rail- 
road-train, line,  procession. 

2u0xntte,  f.  {pi  -n),  draw- 
bridge. 

gu'gcf^Ioffcn,  see  su'fc^Ue^en. 

3UgIet^%  at  the  same  time,  simul- 
taneously. 

JU'^oren  (^«•)^  to  listen  to  one. 

gU'fel^ren  (w.)»  to  turn  towards. 

jum  =  5U  bem,  to  (for)  the ;  gum 
©egenftanb,  for  its  subject ; 
nium,"  on  sign-boards  of  inns  is 
idiomatic  and  remains  untrans- 
lated; ber©aft^of  „3umgoIbenen 
Soraen,"  "The  Golden  Lion- 
Inn." 

jur  =  3U  ber ;  gur  2lnttt)ort,  as  (an) 
answer ;  gur  2lntroort  geben,  to 
answer. 

gu'rciJCn  (w.)^  to  speak  to,  to  en- 
courage, to  try  to  console. 

Su'ri^/  Zurich,  a  town  in  Switzer- 
land. 

iUvM%  back. 

^nxM'hitihtn  (blieb,  ge&lieben),  to 
be  left  (over). 


juriirf  gebltel&cn,  see  guriicf  bletben. 
jururf'fc^rcn  (w.),  to  return. 
Suritif'fommen  (tarn,  gefommen), 

to  come  back,  to  return. 
gutiitf  (egcn  {w.),  to  make  (number 

of  miles). 
juriid'ttctcn  (trat,    getreten),   to 

step  back. 
jufatn'men^  together,  all  together. 
jufam'men^ttlten  (f)ielt,  ge^alten), 

to  hold  (keep)  together. 
jufttm'mcntreffcn  (traf,  getroffen), 

to  meet. 
3u'f(i)l09,  m.  (-[e]g),  addition,  ad- 
ditional payment. 
jtt'fc^Iic^cn  Wo%  gefrf)lofjen),  to 

lock. 
gu'fc^Ctt    {\af),   gefeE)en),  to  look 

upon,  to  gaze  at,  to  watch. 
JU'tierldfftg/  reliable,  trustworthy. 
au^jufiringen,  see  gu'bringen. 
Jttiar,  indeed,  it  is  true  ;  unb  jwar, 

and  that,  and  more  particularly. 
itoti,  two. 

gtocig,  m.  (-e§,  pi  -e),  twig. 
jtuermat,  twice. 
itotlit,  second. 
jiuin'gcn  (gwang,  gegroungen),  to 

compel,  to  force. 
Jtun^en  {dat.  or  accus.)y  between, 

betwixt,  amongst. 
JtUOlf,  twelve. 


ENGLISH-GERMAN   VOCABULARY. 


a,  an,  etn,  etne,  etn. 

able,  fdl^ig ;  to  be  able,  fonnen 
(fonnte,  gefonnt),  mod.  aux. ;  im 
ftanbe  jein  (voav,  geroefen), 

aboard!  ^einfteigen!"  (infinit.). 

about  (prepos.),  place :  um{accus.) ; 
time:  um  (accus.),  adv.,  unge; 
fd^r. 

above,  iiber  {dat,  accus.). 

academy,  bie  2lf abemie'  {pi.  -en) ; 
bie  franjofifc^e  2l!abemie  ("Aca- 
demie  frangaise"),  founded 
1635,  an  association  for  the  pro- 
motion of  literature,  consists  of 
forty  members  ("  academici- 
ans"). 

accompany  (to),  begleiten  (w.). 

account,  bie  5iec^nung ;  on  account 
of,  roegen  (genit). 

acorn,  bie  (Stfer  {pi.  -n). 

admit  (to),  aufne^men  (uaEim, 
genommen);  to  admit  to  the 
bar,  in  ben  Slboofatenftanb  auf; 
ne^men. 

after  {prepos.),  nad),  dat;  {con- 
junct), nac^bem. 


afternoon,  ber  SfJad^mittag  {pi.  -e); 

in  the  afternoon,  am  3taci^mittag, 

nac^mittagg. 
again,  roieber,  nod^,  nod^  einmal ; 

again   another,    roieber    (noc^) 

etne  anbere. 
age,  bag  2llter,  bie  3eit,  bag  ^eii- 

alter ;  year  of  age,  bag  2ebengs 

\af)t  {pi.  -e). 
air,  bie  Suft  {pi.  ^e). 
Aix-la-Chapelle,  see  3(a(l^en. 
alight  (to),  aug'fteigen  (ftieg,  ge* 

ftiegen). 
all  {sing.),  aU,  gang;  {pi.),  aUe\ 

all  the  money,  bag  ganje  ©elb ; 

all  my  money,  mein  ganjeg  ®elb, 

all  mein  ©elb. 
allow  (to),  erlau6en(io.)»  geftatten 

{w.). 
almond,  bie  SJianbel  {pi.  -n). 
aloud,  laut;  to  read  aloud,  vof- 

lefen  (lag,  gelefen). 
Alps,  bie  Sllpen  {pL). 
already,  fd^on,  bereitg. 
Alsace,  ber  @lfa^  {gen.  -eg), 
also,  audi,  ebenfaltg;    (not  only, 


206 


VOCABULARY. 


nic^t  nur,  nid^t  aUein,  but  also, 

fonbern  aud^). 
although,   obgIei(^,   obroo^I,   ob= 

fc^on. 
always,  tmmer. 
America,  2lmerifa  {gen.  -g). 
American,  ber  SImerifa'ner  (pZ. — ). 
among  {dat.^  accus.),  unter. 
amount  (to),  betragen  (betrug,  be= 

tragen) ;  what  does  .  .  .  amount 

to  ?  rote  oiel  betragt  ? 
Amsterdam,  the  capital  of   the 

kingdom  of  the  Netherlands. 
and,  unb. 

Andersen  (Hans  C),  see  Slnberfen. 
angel,  ber  ©nget  (pi.  — );  as  good 

as  the  angels,  fo  gut  roie  bie 

(Sngel  =  engel^gut. 
animal,  bag  %iev  {pi.  -e)  =  bag 

^:pferb. 
another,  ein  anbrer,  eine  anbre, 

ein  anbreg ;  one  another  =  each 

other,  einanber. 
answer  (to),  transit.,  beantroorten 

{w.);  intrans.,  antroorten  {w.). 
answer  (the),   bie  2lntroort  {pi 

-en). 
antiquity,  bag  Slttertum. 
apple  {Ger.  cogn.,  apfel),  ber2lpfel 

{pi  -). 
apple-tree,    ber   Slpfelbaum    {pi 

-e). 
apple-wine  (Ger.  cogn.,  apfel wein), 

ber  Slpfelroein. 
appointed  (=  certain,  fixed),  be= 

ftimmt,  feftgefe^t. 
approval,  bie  StUigung. 


approve  (to),  biHtgen  (w.). 

April,  (ber)  Slprir  {gen.  -g). 

are,  finb. 

arm,  ber  2lrm  {pi  -e). 

arms,  bie  SBaffen  {pi);  =  armor, 

bie  9iiiftung,  sing. 
army,  bie  2lrmee'  {pi  -en);  bag 

§eer  {pi  -e). 
arrive  (to),  an'fommen  {tarn,  gc= 

fommen),   an'Iangen  {w.),  has 

(had)  arrived,  ift  (roar)  ange= 

fommen. 
arrow,  ber  ^feil  {pi  -e). 
as,  fo,  rote ;  as . . .  as,  fo  . . .  roie ; 

as  yellow  as,  fo  gelb  roie;  as 

proud  as,  fo  ftolj  roie ;  as  soon 

as,  fo  balb  (alg),  conjunct. 
ask  (to),  fragen  {w.) ;  to  ask  for, 

nerlangen  {w.). 
aspect,  ber  Slnblicf. 
ass,  ber  ©fel  {pi  — ). 
at  {place) :  ju,  bet,  in  {dat. ) ;  {time) : 

urn,  often  untranslated,  e.g.,  at 

20  minutes  past  nine,  20  2J2inuten 

nac^  neun. 
Atlantic,     atlan'tifc^ ;     Atlantic 

Ocean,  ber  atlantifc^e  Djean'. 
attend  (to),  befud^en  {w.),  a  school, 
attendant,  ber  Sebtente  {pi,  bie 

Sebienten),  ein  Sebienter  {pi-, 

Sebientc). 
August,  (ber)  2luguff  {gen.  -eg). 
Augustus,  Stu'guft. 
author,  ber  SSerfaffer  {pi  — ). 
autobiography,  bie  ©elbff  biogra= 

p^ie'  {pi  -en),  bie  2lu'tobiogra= 


rOCABULART. 


207 


bad,  ungejogen,  fc^limm ;  bad  boy, 

ber  Xaugenic^tg. 
baggage,   bag   ©epdd;    baggage- 
room,  bie  ©epadt=2lnna^me. 
Balkan-Mountains,   bag   33alfan= 

©ebirge. 
ball,  ber  33all  (pi  ^e);  at  the  ball, 

auf  bem  S3aUe. 
bar  {lit.,  bie  ©diranfen),  ber  2lb= 

Bota'tenftanb  (sre?i.  -eg);  to  ad- 
mit to  the  bar,  in  ben  Slboofaten; 

ftanb  aufne^men. 
bath  {Ger.  cogn.,  bad),  bag  S3ab 

{pi.  ^er). 
battle,  bie  ©c^Iad^t  {pi.  -en);  ber 

^ampf  (pZ.  ^e);  the  battle  o/. . ., 

bie  ©d^lad^t  bei. 
beak,  ber  ©c^nabet  {pi.  ""). 
beam    {Ger.   cogn.,    baum),    ber 

33alfen  {pi.  —). 
bear    (to),    tragen   (trug,    getra^ 

gen). 
beat  (to),  |d)Iagen  (fc^lug,  gejc^la= 

gen),  befiegen  {w.). 
beautiful,  fd)on. 
beauty,  bie  ©d^on^eit  {pi.  -en), 
because,  raeil. 
bed,  bag  Sett  {gen.  -eg,  pi.  -en); 

in  bed,  im  Sett. 
before,  t)or  {dot.,  accus.). 
begin  (to),   beginnen  (begann, 

begonnen),    an'fangen    (fing, 

gefangen). 
beginning,  ber  2lnfang  {pi.  ""e). 
behind,  Winter  {dat.,  accus.). 
belong  (to),  gel^bren  {w. ) ;  to  belong 


to,  gepren  ju  {dat.),  ange^oren 

{dat). 
beneath,  unter  {dat.,  accus.). 
betrothed,  oerlobt. 
better,    beffer,    lieber;    nothing 

better,  nic^tg  beffereg. 
between,  gnjifd^en  {dat.,  accus.). 
biography,   bie  33iograp()ie'  {pi. 

-en),  bie  Sebengbefc^reibung  {pi. 

-en), 
bird,  ber  Sogel  {pi.  ^). 
birdie,  bag  Soglein  {pi.  — ),  bag 

SSogelc^en  {pi.  —). 
birthday,  ber  ©eburtgtag  {pi.  -e). 
bit,  ber  Sifjen  {pi  — );  the  little 

bit,  bag  bi^c^en. 
black,  fc^warj,  bunfel ;  black  horse, 

ber  9iappe  {pi.  -n). 
blade  {Ger.  cogn.,  blatt);  ber  §atm 

{pi.  -e),  of  grass;   bie  ^linge 

{pi.  -n),  of  a  sword,  knife,  etc. 
blow  (to),  blafen  (blieg,  geblafen); 

to  blow  the  horn,  ing  Sjorn  ftofien 

(ftie^,  gefto^en). 
blue  {Ger.  cogn.,  blau),  bla«. 
blushing,  errbtenb ;  blushing  with 

shame,  fd)amrot. 
board    {Ger.   cogn.,    brett),    bag 

Srett  {pi.  -er). 
bond  =  tie,  bag  Sanb  {pi.  -e). 
bone  {Ger.  cogn.,  bein),  ber  ^noc^en 

pi.  -). 
book,  bag  33uc^  {pi.  ^er). 
book-store,  ber  Sucf)laben  {pi.  ^); 

bie  Suc^^anblung  {pi.  -en). 
boot,  ber  ©tiefel  {pi.  — ,  or  -n). 


208 


VOCABULARY. 


born,  geboren;  was  bom,  rourbe 

.  .  .  geboren. 
both  {Ger.  cogn.^  beide),  beibe. 
bottle,  bie  %ia](i)e  {pi.  -n). 
Bourbon  (island  of),  see  Sourbon. 
bow,  ber  Sogen  {pi.  — ). 
box,  ber  ^aften  {pi.  ",  or — );  bie 

©c^ac^tel  {pi.  -n). 
boy,  ber  ^nabe  {pi.  -n). 
brave,  tapfer. 
bread,  bas  Srot. 
Bretagne  {or  Brittany),  btc  S5res 

tag'ne. 
bride,  bie  Sraut  {pi.  ^e),  ^Sie 

^raut  »on  SJieffina,"  one  of 

Schiller's    five    great    dramas 

(1803). 
bridge  {Ger.  cogn.,  briicke),  bie 

Srucfe  {pi.  -n). 
bright,  §eU,  flug. 
bring  (to),   bringen  (brac^te,  ge^ 

brac^t). 


British,  britifd^. 

brother,  ber  Sruber  {pi.  ""). 

brothers    and    sisters,     bie    ®e; 

fc^roifter  {pL). 
build  (to),  bauen  {w.). 
bundle  {Ger.  cogn.,  biindel),  (ber) 

t>a^  33unbel  {pi.  — ). 
busy  (to)  one's  self,  fid^  befc^dfti: 

gen  (lo.),  with,  mit. 
but  {conjunct.),  aber,  allein,  fon= 

bern;  (adu.)=only,  nur;  {prep.) 

=  except,    au^er   {dat.) ;    (not 

only,  nic^t  nur,  nic^t  allein,  but 

also,  fonbern  auc^). 
butter,  bie  Sutter. 
butterfly,  ber  ©d^metterling  {pi. 

-e). 
buy  (to),  faufen  {w.). 
by  {place)    bei   {dat),   nal^e  bei 

{dat),  an  {dat),  neben  {dat);  {with 

a  passive),    t)on   {dat.),    burc^ 

{accus.). 


cage,  berlt'afig  {pi.  -e),  ber  ?}ogeI= 

bauer  {pi.  — ). 
California,  ©alifornien  {gen.  -g). 
call  (to),  nennen  (nannte,  genannt) ; 

to  be  called,  genannt  roerben  or 

^eifeen  (^ie^,  ge^ei^en). 
came  (Ger.  cogn. ,  kam),  lam,  famen. 
can  (=  to  be  able),  fbnnen  (fonnte, 

gefonnt),  mod.  aux. 
canary-bird,    ber    ^anaricnoogel 

{pi.  -). 
canary-fowl  ( Ger.  cogn. ,  kanarien- 

vogel). 


cannon-ball,  bie^anonenfugel  {pi. 

-n). 
cap,  bie  SKii^e  {pi.  -n). 
car,  ber  9Baggon'  {gen.  -§,  pi.  -g), 

ber  2Bagen  {pi.  —). 
carriage,  ber  28agen  {pi  —),  bie 

^utjc^e  {pi.  -n). 
castle,  bie  Surg  {pi.  -en),  bag 

<Bd)io^  {pL  ©c^Iofier),ber^aIaff 

{pL  ^e) ;  at  the  castle,  auf  (in) 

bem  ©c^Ioffe. 
castle-gate,    bag    Surgt^or    {pi 

-e). 


VOCABULARY. 


209 


castle-tower,  ber  Surgturm  {pi. 

^e),  ber  ©c^Io^turm  {pi.  ^e). 
castle-yard,  ber  Surg^of  {pi.  ^e). 
catch  (to),  fangen  (fing,  gefangen). 
celebrate  (to),  feiern  {w.). 
center,  bie  SJiitte,  ber  mittlere  ^eil. 
century,  bag  ^a^r^un'bert  {pi.  -e). 
chair,  ber  ©tu^t  {pi.  "e). 
chalk,  bie  ^reibe. 
Champagne,  bie  6^ampag'ne(9'ew., 

ber  61).) ,  a  province  of  France. 
champagne    {wine),    ber    d^am- 

pag'ner  {gen.  -g). 
change  (to),  anbern  {w.). 
character,    ber    (5t)ararter    {pi. 

SI)arafte're). 
Charles,  ^arl  {gen.  -g). 
charming,  tt)unberfrf)bn,  reijenb. 
Cheviot-Mountains,  bie  ©^e»iot= 

Serge  {pi.). 
child  {Ger.  cogn.,  kind),  bag  ^inb 

{pi.  -er). 
China,  ©l^ina  {gen.  -g). 
choose  (to),  raa^Ien  {w.). 
Christ,  S^riftug  {gen.  (S^rifti,  dat. 

(S^rifto) ;    after    Christ,     nad^ 

e^rifti  ©eburt. 
Christmas,    2Beit)nac§ten   {sing.), 

bie    SBei^nad^ten    {pi.),     bag 

©Eiriftfeft. 
Christmas-tree,    ber    ©^riftbaum 

{pi.  -e),  ber  3BeiE)naci^tgbaum. 
city,  bie  ©tabt  {pi.  ^e). 
class,  bie  J^Iaffe  {pi.  -n),  bie  Slrt 

(pL  -en) ;  second  class,  jroeiter 

^lafje  {gen.). 
clear,  flar. 
climate,  bag  ^li'ma  {gen.  -g,  pi. 

^lima'ten). 


clock,  bie  U^r(i9^. -en);  10  o'clock, 

ge^n  U^r. 
close    (to),     {intrans.),    fd^Iiefien 

(frf)lo^,  gefd^loffen),  or  passive, 

gefc^Iofjen  raerben. 
close  {adj.),  intim',  t)ertraut. 
cloth  {Ger.  cogn.,  kleid),  bag  ^leib 

{2)1.  -ex),  bag  Xud^  {pi.  ^er). 
clothes,  bie  ^leibunggftiide  {pi.), 

ber  Slnjug  {pi.  ""e). 
cloud,  bie  2BoI!e  (pi.  -n). 
coast,  bie  Hiifte  {pi.  -n). 
Cologne,  see  ^oln. 
color,  bie  ^arbe  {pi.  -n). 
color-box,  ber  ^arbenfaften  {pi.  "^ 

or  — ). 
color-saucer,   bag  (Srf)alrf)en  {pi. 

—),  bag  ^arbennapfcf)en  {pi.  —). 
come  (to),  fommen  {tarn,  gefom= 

men),   erfolgen  {w.) ;   to  come 

in,  ^erein'fotttmen,  fjerein'treten 

(trat,  getreten). 
comedy,   bie  ^otnb'bie  {pi.  -n), 

bag  Suftfpiel  {pi.  -e). 
commander,  ber  33efel^tgl^aber  {pi. 

—),  ber  ©ommanbeur'  {pi.  -g  or 

-e) ;    commander-in-chief,    ber 

Dber6efef)Ig^aber,  ber  Dbercom= 

manbeur. 
compartment,  bag  ©oupe  {gen.  -g, 

pi.  -g). 
composer,  ber  ^omponiff  {pi.  -en), 
comrade,  ber  ^amerab'  {pi.  -en), 
conductor,  ber  ©rf)affner  {pi.  — ). 
Congress,  ber  ^ongre^'  {gen.  -eg), 
conquer  (to),  ero'bern  {w.),  dn'- 

ne^men  (na^m,  genontmen). 
Constitution,  bie  SSerfafjung  (j)l. 

-en). 


210 


VOCABULARY. 


consume  (to)  (=  U)  dispose  of), 

oer§e^ten  (w.). 
content,  sufrieben. 
contents  (the),  ber  3"^^!^  (sing.). 
continue  (to),  forf  fe^en  (iw.)- 
conversation,  bas  ©efprdc^  (P^--e). 
cook,  m.,  ber  ^oc^  {pi.  ^e),  /.,  bie 

^oc^in  ipl.  -nen). 
cooking,  bie  ^ubeteiiunQ. 
copper  {Ger.  cogn.,  kupfer),  ba^ 

^upfer. 
copper-colored,  fupferfarben. 
cornfield  =  grain-field,  bag  ^om= 

felb  (pi.  -ex). 


costly,  foftlic^,  ^errlic^. 
countless,  unjci^lig,  30^0^. 
country,  bag  Sanb  {pi.  "er) ;  part 

of  the  country,  ber  Sanbesteil. 
country-seat,  ber  :^anbfi^  {pi.  -e), 

bag  Sanb^aus  {pi.  "er). 
county,  bie  ©raffc^aft  {pi.  -en). 
course,  ber  ^urg,  of  a  ship;  ber 

^urfug  {pi.  ^urfe),  of  studies; 

ber  Sauf ,  ber  ©ang,  of  history. 
cream,  ber  diaifm,  bie  ©a^ne. 
create  (to),   fc^affen  or  erfc^affen 

(fc^uf,  gefc^affen). 
crutch,  bie  Kriicfe  {pi.  -n). 


dance  (to),  tansen  {w.). 

dare  (to),  roagen  {w.). 

dark,    bunfel    {attrib.,    bunller, 

bunfle,  buntleg). 
day,   ber  2;ag  {pi.  -e) ;  the  day 

before  yesterday,  uorgeftern ;  in 

those  days,   bamalg,   in  jener 

Beit, 
dead  {Ger.  cogn.,  tot),  tot. 
dear,  lieb,  teuer,  roert,  cerebri, 
death,  ber  Xob. 
December,  (ber)  2)e3em'ber  {gen. 

declaration,  bie  ©rflarung  {pi. 
-en) ;  the  day  of  the  Declaration 
of  Independence,  ber  ^^ag  ber 
Unab^dngigfeitg'®rfldrung. 

decoration,  bie  ©d^miicfung,  bie 
SSerjc^onerung ;  Decoration-Day, 
bag  Xotenfeft  {gen.  -eg),  ber 
©rdberjc^miirfunggtag. 


deliberate  (to),  fic^  beben!en  (be= 

bac^te,  bebac^t). 
departure,  ber  3lbgang  {gen.  -g), 

bie  atbfa^rt. 
derogatory,  ungiinftig. 
desk  {Ger.  cogn.,  tisch),  bag  ^ult 

{pi.  -e),  ber  ©d^reibtifc^  {pi.  -e). 
did  {Ger.  cogn.,  that),  tl)at,  t^aten, 

as  aux.  remains  ujjtranslated. 
die  (to),  fterben  (ftarb,  geftorben). 
different,  anber,  oerfc^ieben  (won); 

{predicat.),  anberg  (alg). 
dinner,    bag    2)iittaggma^I,    bag  1 

2Kittaggeffen. 
diplomat,  ber  Siplomaf  {pi.  -en), 
direction,  bie  Sltd^tung  {pi.  -en), 
disapprove  (to),  mipilligen  {w.). 
discontented,    unsufrieben,   miir= 

rifc^. 
discover  (to),  cntbeden  (u>.). 
dissatisfied,  unjufrieben. 


VOCABULARY. 


211 


distinguished,    beriil^mt,    ^er»or= 

ragenb,  btftinguiert. 
do  (to),  t^uen  or  t^un,  as  auxil. 

not  transl. 
doctor,  ber  ^oftor  (gen.  -g,  pi. 

2)oIto'ren). 
door,  bte  X^ur[e]  (pi.  Xl}nxen). 
dove    {Ger.    cogn.,    taube),     bie 

%aube  {pi.  -n). 


drama,  bag  5)rama  {pi.  S)ramen), 
bag  ©c^aufptel  {pi.  -e). 

draw-bridge,  bte^ugbriide  {pi.  -n). 

dry  (to)  {Ger.cogn.ydoTTen),  borren, 
troc!nen. 

duchess,  bie  ^erjogin  {pi.  -nen). 

duke,  ber  ^ergog  {pi.  ^e). 

during  (prepos.),  n)af)renb  {genit.). 

dust,  ber  ©taub. 


each,  ieber,  iebe,  jebeg. 
earth  {Ger.  cogn.,  erde),  bie  @rbe. 
East,  ber  Dften  {gen.  -g). 
East-Indies,  Dftinbien,  sing.  {gen. 

-6). 
Easter,  Dftern  {sing.),  bie  Dftern 

(pM- 
eastern,  oftlic^. 
eat  (to)  {Ger.  cogn.,  essen),  efjen 

(ai  gegeffen) ;  {of  beasts),  frefjen 

(fra|,  gefrefjen). 
eatable,  epar,  gemepar. 
Eckermann,  see  ©Hermann, 
egg,  bag  (Si  (-eg,  pi.  -er). 
eighteenth  (the),  ber  arfitje^nte. 
elect  (to),  raa^len  {w.),  errodl^Ien. 
Elizabeth,  ©lifabell^  {gen.  -g). 
emperor,  ber  ^aifer  {pi.  —). 
empress,  bie  ^aiferin  {pi.  -nen). 
enemy,  ber  ^einb  {pi.  -e). 
England,  ®nglanb  {gen.  -g). 
enter  (to),  ein'treten  (trat,  getreten) 

in,  axicus. 


Erfurt,  see  ®rfurt. 
ethnological,  et^nogra'pfjifd^. 
Europe,  ©uro'pa  {gen.  -g). 
European,  europa'ijd^. 
even  {adv.),  fogar,  felbft. 
evening,   ber  3lbenb  {pi.  -e);   in 

the  evening,  am  2lbenb,  abenbg. 
every,  jjeber,  jebe,   jebeg;    every 

one,  jebermann,  ein  jeber. 
everybody,  iebermann,  ein  jeber. 
everything,  alleg,  ein  jebeg. 
everywhere,  iiberaE. 
excellent,    auggejeic^net,    oorjiig: 

lirf). 
excess,  bie  U'berfrad^t,  bag  iX'bers 

geroid^t. 
exchange  (to),  taufc^en  {w.) ;  to 

exchange  situations  (positions, 

fortunes)  with,  taujd)en  mit .  . . 
extraordinary,     au^ergerao^nlic^, 

au^erorbentlid^. 
eye,  bag  2luge  {gen.  -g,  pi.  -n). 


212 


VOCABULARY. 


F. 


faculty,  bte  %^\%lt\i  {pi.  -en); 

faculty  of  labor,  bie  2lrbeit6fraft 

{pi.  -e),  bas  2lrbeit5oermo(jen. 
fairy-tale,  bas  2Kdrd^en  {pi.  — ). 
fall  (to),  fallen  (fiel,  gefallen) ;  to 

fall  on,  fallen  auf,  accus. 
Falstaff  (Sir  John),  the  companion 

of  Prince   Henry  of  Wales,  a 

popular  Shakesperian  character, 
family,  bie  ^antilie  {pi-  -n). 
famous,  berii^mt. 
far,  roeit. 
fashionable,    fein,  eleganf,  nor= 

ne^m. 
Fate,  bag  ©d^icffal  {pi.  -e);  idea 

of  Fate,  bte  ©c^icffalsibee  {pi. 

-en), 
father,  ber  SBater  (pZ.  ^) ;  the  Father 

in  Heaven,  ber  liebe  @ott. 
fatherland,  bas  SBaterlanb. 
favorite,    beDorjugt,    Sieblingss ; 

favorite  study,  ba§  Sieblingg; 

ftubium  {gen.  -^,  pi.  -ftubten). 
feather  {Ger.  cogn..,   feder),   bie 

^eber  {pi.  -n). 
February,  (ber)  {^ebniat'  {gen,  -§). 
feel  (to),  fic^  fiif)Ien  (to.),  fein;  I 

feel  happy,  ic^  fii^Ie  mic^  gliicf= 

lic^,  ic^  bin  gliitflic^. 
fertility,  bie  ^ruc^tbarfeit. 
field  {Ger.  cogn.,  feld),  bag  gelb 

{pi.  -ex). 
fifth,  (ber)  funfte. 
fifty-two,  5n)ei=unb;fiinf3tg. 
fight  (to),   fdmpfen  {w.),  fec^ten 

(fo(^t;  gefoc^ten). 


finch  {Ger.   cogn.,   fink[e]),    ber 

(^infe  {pi.  -n). 
find  (to),  finben  (fanb,  gefunben) ;  to 

be  found,  fic^  finben,  fid)  befinben. 
fine,  gut,  fc^on ;  very  fine,  fe^r  gut, 

auggejeic^net,  nortrefflid^. 
finger,  ber  ?yinger  {pi.  —). 
first  {Ger.  cogn.,  fiii'st ;  erst),  (ber) 

erfte. 
five,  fiinf. 
flat,  flac^,  eben;  flat  surface,  bie 

i^Iac^e  {pi.  -n). 
flood  {Ger.  cogn.,  flut),  bie  j^lut 

{pi.  -en), 
flour,  bag  Tlef)U 
flower,  bie  Slume  {pi.  -n),  bie 

33Iute  {pi.  -n). 
fly  (to)  {Ger.  cogn.,  Giegen),  fitegen 

(flog,  ge^ogen);  "to  fly  home- 
ward," „^eimn)drtg  gie^en^  (jog, 

gejogen). 
fodder  (to)  {Ger.  cogn.,  fiittem), 

fiittern  {w.). 
foot,  ber  guf;  {pi.  ^e). 
for  {Ger.  cogn.,  fiir),  fiir  {accus ), 

nac^  {dot.);  {time),  auf  {accus.); 

train  for .  .  .,  ber  3w9  ^^^  •  ♦  •; 

for  four  years,  auf  nier  ^a^re. 
forenoon,  ber  3Sormittag  {pi.  -e); 

in  the  forenoon,  am  S3ormittag, 

normittagg. 
form  (to),  bilben  {w.). 
forty,  nierjig. 
found  (to),  griinben  («?.);   to  be 

founded  on,  fic^  griinben  auf, 

a^cua. 


VOCABULARY. 


213 


four,  oier. 

fourth,  (ber)  oierte. 

fowl  {Ger.  cogn.^  vogel),  bag  ©e= 

flugel  (collect.). 
France,  ^ranfteid^  {gen.  -g). 
Franco-German,     beutfc^  =  franco; 

jifd^  ;  Franco-German  war,  ber 

beutfc^^franjoftfc^e  5?neg,  1870- 

71. 
" Frau"  =  Mrs.,  lady. 
Frederick,  j^r iebri  c^ ;  Frederick  II . , 

(^riebric^  ber  3«>eite. 
French,  franjofifc^,  oon  ^^ranfreic^; 

French  Academy,  bie  frangofif  d^e 

aifabemie. 
Frenchman,  ber  ^ranjofe  {gen.  -n, 

pi.  -n). 


frequently,  oft,  ^aufig. 

friend,  ber  ^reunb  {pi.  -e),  bie 

^reunbin  {pi.  -nen). 
friendly  {Ger.  cogn.,  freundlich), 

freunbU(^. 
from,  oon  {dat),  au^  {dat),  von 

.  .  .  aug  {dat);  from  (oon)  to 

(Mg). 
front,  bie  33orberfeite ;  in  front  of, 

t)or  {dat,  accus.). 
fruit    {Ger.   cogn.,    frucht),    bie 

gruc^t    {pi    ^e),     bag    Dbft 

{collect.). 
full  (Ger.  cogn..,  voll),  ooU;  full- 
moon,  ber  33oUmonb. 
fully  {Ger.  cogn.,  vollig),  ooUtg. 


garden,  ber  ©arten  {pi.  ^). 

gave  {Ger.  cogn.,  gab),  gab,  gabeu. 

gay-colored,  bunt. 

general,  ber  ©eneral'  {pi.  ^e). 

gentleman,  ber  §err  {gen.  -n,  pi. 
-en);  gentlemen  !  nteine  §erren! 
ladies  and  gentlemen !  meine 
£»errfc^aften ! 

German  {adj.),  beutfd^ ;  the  Ger- 
man, ber  (bie)  ^eutfd^e ;  the  Ger- 
mans, bie  3)eutfci^en;  a  German, 
ein  ^eutfrf)er,  eine  ^eutfct)e ; 
Germans,  2)eutjrf)e. 

Germany, 2)eutfc^Ianb,  n.  (gen.-^). 

get  into  (to),  ge^en  (ging,  ge= 
gangen),  fteigen  (ftieg,  geftiegen) 
in,  accus. 

Gettysburg,  see  ©ettrigburg. 


ghost  {Ger.  cogn.,  geist),  ber  ©eift 
{pi.  -ex). 

gipsy,  ber  3igeu'ner  {pi.  —), 
gipsy-boy,  ber  3igeunerbube. 

give  (to),  geben  (gab,  gegeben). 

glad,  fro§;  I  am  glad,  icf)  freue 
mic^,  „eg''  freut  mic^. 

go  (to),  ge^en  (ging,  gegangen), 
fa^ren  (fu^r,  gefa^ren);  I  am 
going,  irf)  ge^e,  ic^  faf)re ;  to  go 
to,  ge^en  nac^  {dat);  to  go 
away,  raeg'ge^en,  forfge^en. 

Goethe  (Augustus),  the  only  son 
of  the  poet,  born  at  Weimar, 
Dec.  25,  1789,  died  at  Rome 
(Italy),  Oct.  27,  1830. 

Goethe  (Job.  Wolfgang  von),  see 
©oet^e. 


214 


VOCABULARY. 


gold,  bag  ®oIb. 

good,  gut;  to  do  one  good,  (Sinem 
gut  t^un  (t^at,  get^an),  (Einem  gut 
befommen  (befam,  befommen). 

govern  (to),  regie'ren  (u?.). 

goverament-position,  bie  3fle9ic= 
rungsanftellung  {pi.  -en). 

graduate  (to)  from,  abfolcie'ren 
(i«.),  accus. 

grammar,  bao  ©prac^buc^  {pi.  ^er), 
bie  ©ramma'tif  {pi.  -en) ;  ' '  Ger- 
man Grammar  and  Reader," 
ff2)eutjc^eg  Bpvad)-  unb  Sefe= 
buc^." 

grandson,  ber  ®nfel  {pi.  —). 

grape-vine,  ber  2Bein  {pi.  -e),  ber 
aCeinftocf  {pi.  -^e),  bie  SCeinrebe 
{pi.  -n). 


Gravelot'te,  see  ©ranelotte. 

great  {Ger.  cogn.,  gross),  grof;; 
the  Great,  ber  ©ro^e. 

greatly,  fe^r,  ungemein,  in  ^o^em 
@rabe;  to  oblige  greatly,  ju 
gro^em  2)anf  oerpflic^ten. 

Greek,  ber  ©riec^e  (-n,  pi.  -n). 

green  {Ger.  cogn.,  griin),  griin. 

greet  (to),  grii^en  {w.),  begrii^en 
{w.). 

Grillparzer,  1791-1872,  the  great- 
est dramatist  of  Austria. 

grove,  bag  ©e^olj,  ber  &ain. 

grow  (to),  raac^fen  (n)U(^g,  ge= 
roac^fen),  fte^en  (ftaub,  geftan= 
ben). 

grudging,  ncibifc^. 

guest,  ber  ©aft  {pi.  ^e). 


had    {Ger.  cogn.,  hatte),    ^atte, 

fatten, 
hand,  bie  Sanb  {pi.  -e). 
handkerchief,  bag  ^afc^entuc^  {pi. 

^er). 
happy,  gliicflic^. 
Harrison  (Wm.  Henry),  the  ninth 

President  of  the  U.  S.  (1841). 
has  {Ger.  cogn.,  hat),  ^at. 
hasty,  eitig ;  hastily,  fliic^tig,  ober= 

fld(^lic^,  in  ©ile. 
hat,  ber  &ut  {pi.  ^e). 
have  (to)  {Ger.  cogrn., haben),  §aben 

(^atte,  ge^abt) ;  to  have  to  .  .  ., 

miiffen  (mu|te,  gemu|t). 
he,  er. 
headquarters,  ba^  ^auptquartier, 


sing.  {pi.  -e) ;  at  the  head- 
quarters, im  £>auptquartier. 

health,  bie  ©efunb^eit. 

healthy,  gefunb. 

hear  (to),  ^oren  (u>.). 

heard  [I]  {Ger.  cogn.^  ich  horte), 
ic^  prte. 

heart,  bag  ^erj  {gen.  -eng,  dot.  -en, 
pi.  -en). 

hearty(-ily),  ^erjlic^. 

heat  (to),  ^eijen  {w.). 

heath,  bie  ^eibe  {pi.  -n) ;  "The 
Rose  on  the  Heath,"  „£»eiben= 
roglein.^ 

heaven,  ber  ^immel  {pi.  — );  the 
Father  in  Heaven,  ber  liebe 
©Ott. 


VOCABULARY. 


215 


heavy,  fd^roer. 

help    (to)    (Ger.   cogn.,   helfen), 

^elfen  (^alf,  ge^olfen). 
Henry,  §einrtc^  {gen.  -g). 
her,  possess. ;  il^r,  i^re,  i^r  (pi.  if)re) ; 

pers.:  (accus.),  jie;  (dat),  if)x. 
here,  l^ier. 
hide  {Ger.  cogn..,  haut),  bie  §aut 

{pi.  -e). 
high  {Ger.  cogn.,  hoch),  j^od^. 
hill,  ber  33erg  {pi.  -e),  ber  ^itgel 

{pi.  -). 
him  {accus.)j  xf)n;  {dat),  tl^ttt. 
himself  (now.),  [er]  felbft ;  (accits.), 

fic^  (felbft). 
his,  fein,  fetne,  fein  {pi.  feine). 
history,  bie  ©efc^ic^te  {pi.  -n). 
hog,  bag  ©d^roein  {pi.  -e). 
holiday,  ber  ^etertag  {pi.  -e),  ber 

^efttag  (pi.  -e). 
home,  bie  §eimat,  bag  §aug  (pi. 

■^er);  home  (adv.),  nac^  §aufe; 

at  home,  ju^aufe;  at  your  home, 

bet  ^f}nm  ju  ^aufe ;  from  home, 

t)on  §aufe. 
homeward,  l^etmroartg;    "to  fly 

homeward,"  „f|eimn)artg  jiel^en." 
honor,  bie  (Sl^re  {pi.  -n);  highest 

honors,  bie  grofite  Slugjeid^nung; 

"summa  cum  laude." 
hook    {Ger.   cogn.,    haken),    ber 

^a!ett  {pi.  — ). 


hop   (to)    {Ger.   cogn.,    hiipfen), 

^iipfen  {w.). 
hope  (to),  fjoffen  {w.). 
horn,  bag  §orn  {pi.  "er);  to  sound 

the  horn,  in  bag  §orn  fto^en 

(ftie^,  gefto^en). 

horrify  (to),  erf  c^rec!en  (!/>.)>  ^^<^wsii-; 

to  he  horrified,  erfrf)redteu  (er= 

fd^ra!,  erfc^rotfen),  intrans. 
horse,  bag  9to^  {pi.  -e),  bag  ^ferb 

{pi.  -e),  ber  ®aul  {pi.  ^e);  black 

horse,  ber  9iappe  {pi.  -n);  "To 

horse!"   „3u  3lo^!"  or  „2luf= 

gefefjen !" 
hostile,  feinbttd^. 
hotel,  ber  ©aftl^of  {pi.  -e),  bag 

§otel  {pi.  -g). 
hour,  bie  ©tunbe  {pi.  -n). 
house,  bag  §aug  (pi.  ^er);  house 

of  a  peasant,  bag  33auern^aug ; 

House  of  Representatives,  bag 

2lbgeorbneten{)aug,  bag  Unter= 

J)aug. 
how  ?  me  ?  how  many  ?  me  meie  ? 

how  are  you  ?  rote  ge^t  eg  ^l^nen? 

roie  befinben  ©ie  jid)  ? 
however,  jebod^. 
Humboldt  (Alex,  von),  see  ^um= 

bolbt. 
hundred,  ^unbert. 
hurry  (to),  eilen  {w.);  to  hurry-up, 

jtc^  beeiIen(M).)4<^«eU  madden  (m?.)- 


I,ic^. 

i.e.  =  bag  ^ei^t,  bag  ift. 
idea,  bie  ^bec  {pi.  -en);  idea  of 
Fate,  bie  ©c^idEjalgibee. 


if,  roenn. 

ill-humored,  cirgerltd^. 
immediately,  unmittelbar;  imme- 
diately after,  foi^al^  «(§♦ 


216 


VOCABULARY. 


immigrant,  ber  ©inroanberer  (pi. 

-)• 
important,  n)tc^ttg,6ebeutenb,gro^. 
in,  in  (dot.);  in  1830,  im  ^a^re 

1830,  or  simply,  1830. 
independence,  bie  Unab^dngtgfeit; 

"  Declaration  of  Independence," 

bic  Unabt|dngigfeit^;®rtldrung ; 

war  of  independence,  ber  Unab= 

pngigteitsfrieg,  ber  ^rei^eitg= 

frieg. 
Indian,  ber  ^nbia'ner  (pi.  — ). 
Indian{ad;.),  inbifc^ ;  Indian  Ocean, 

ber  ^nbifc^c  D^ean. 
inhabitant,  ber  ©in'roofiner  {pi. 

-). 
ink,  bie  3;inte. 


inn,  ba^  @aft§aug  (pi.  ^er),  bag 

2Birts^au3  {pL  ^er),  ber  ©aft^of 

(pL  -e). 
intention,  bie  2lbfic^t  {pi.  -en). 
interest,  bag  ^ntereffe  {gen.  -4, 

pi.  -n). 
into,  in  {accus.). 
introduce  (to),  nor'ftellen  {lo.),  dot.; 

betannl.mac^en  mit,  dat. 
invalid,  ber  ^riippel  {pi.  —). 
is,  i[t;  how  much  is  (=  costs)? 

roie  niel  f oftet  ? 
island,  bie  3^1  cl  {pl-  -n). 
it,  nominat.,  eg  (er,  jie) ;  accus., 

eg  (i^n,  fie). 
Italy,  Sta'lien  {gen.  -g) ;  to  Italy, 

nac^  Stalien. 


January,  (ber)  Stt^wtti^  {9^-  -^)- 
jealous,  neibifc^. 
Jew,  ber  ^ube  {pl.  -n). 
John,  So^ann. 
July,  (ber)  ^u'ii  {gen.  -g). 
jump  (to),  fpringen  (fprang,  ge= 
fprungcn). 


June,  (ber)  S^'ni  {gen.  -g). 

just  {adv.),  eben,  gerabe ;  just  like, 

ebenfo  roie ;  just  so,  gerabe  jo ; 

just  now,  foeben. 
justly,  mit  3{ed)t 


kind  {adj.),  freunblic^. 

kind  (the),  bie  2lrt  {pl.  -en),  bie 
©orte  {pl.  -n) ;  what  kind  of 
.  .  .,  roag  f iir  .  .  .;  all  kinds 
of,  allerlei ;  many  kinds  of, 
nielerlei. 


king  {Ger.  cogn.,  konig),  ber 
^onig  {pl.  -e). 

knight,  ber  3iitter  {pl.  —). 

know  (to),  fennen(fannte,  gefannt), 
of  persons  and  things ;  roifjen 
(rou^te,  gcrou^t),  of  facts. 


VOCABULARY. 


217 


labor,  bie  2lrbeit  (pi.  -ett). 

lady,  bie  2)anie  {pi.  ~n) ;  ladies ! 
meineSamen!  ladies  and  gentle- 
men !  meine  §errfc^ often ! 

Lafayette  (Marquis  de),  1757- 
1834,  a  French  general,  and 
friend  of  George  Washington. 

laid  {Ger.  cogn.,  legte),  legte,  legten. 

lake,  ber  ©ee  {gen.  -e^,  pi.  -en), 
ber  Sanbjee. 

lame,  ta^m;  a  lame  man,  ein 
Saunter. 

land,  ba^  Sanb  {pi.  ""er). 

language,  bie  ©prad^e  {pi.  -n). 

language  -  study,  bag  ©prad)'= 
ftubium  {gen.  -g,  pi.  -ftubien). 

large,  grof;,  roeit,  geraumig. 

last,  (ber)  Ic^te ;  last  (night)  even- 
ing, geftern  3lt)enb. 

last  {adv.),  jule^t ;  at  last,  enblic^, 
fc^Ue^Iic^. 

last  (to),  bauern  {w.),  fic^  ^alten 
(^ielt,  ge^alten). 

late,  jpat. 

laugh  (to),  lac^en  {w.). 

lead  (to),  fii^ren  {w.). 

leaf,  bag  SBtatt  {pi.  ^er). 

leap-year,  bag  ©d^altial^r  {pi.  -e). 

learn  (to),  lernen  {w.);  to  learn  by 
heart,  augroenbig  lernen,  memo; 
rieren  {w.). 

leave  (to),  a6'faf)ren  (fu^r,  ge? 
fa^ren),  ge^en  (ging,  gegangen), 
fid^  entfernen  {w.). 

left,  adj.,  (ber)  Iin!e. 

leg,  bag  Sein  {pi.  -e),  ber  ^^u^ 


{pi.  -e);  wooden  leg,  ber  ©telj^ 

Leipzig  (Leipsic),  a  city  and  im- 
portant commercial  town  in  the 
kingdom  of  Saxony  ;  the  battle 
of  Leipzig,  Oct.  16-19,  1813, 
the  terrible  battle  of  the  nations^ 
in  which  Napoleon  was  routed. 

lemon,  bie  (Eitro'ne  {pi.  -n). 

less  {adv.),  rcentger. 

Lessing,  see  Jieffing. 

letter,  ber  Srief  {pi.  -e). 

library,  bie  Sibliot^ef  {pi.  -en); 
at  (in)  the  library,  auf  ber 
33it)liol^ef. 

lie  (to),  liegen  (lag,  gelegen);  to 
lie  down,  firf)  t)in'Iegen  {w.),  fic^ 
nie'berlegen  {w.). 

lieutenant,  ber  Sieu'tenant  {pi.  -g). 

lieutenant-general,  ber  ®enerar= 
lieu'tenant  {pi.  -g). 

lift  (to),  ^eben  (f)ob,  ge{)oben). 

light,  of  weight  {Ger.  cogn.,  leicht), 
leict)t;  of  color  {Ger.  cogn.,  licht), 
^eU. 

lighten  (to),  bitten  {w.),  impers. 

like  (to),  gem  ^aben ;  to  like  better, 
lieber  f)aben,  nor'^ielien  (jog,  ge= 
5ogen) ;  to  like  best,  am  liebften 
^aben. 

lily,  bie  Silie  {pi.  -n). 

limp  (to),  l^infen  {w.). 

Lincoln  (Abraham),  see  Sincoln. 

little,  tlein. 

little  bit  {Ger.  cogn.,  bisschen), 
bag  Si^c^en. 


218 


VOCABULARY. 


live  (to),  leben  (to.)  =  to  dwell, 

roo^nen  {w.). 
long    {Ger.   cogn.,   laiig),    lang ; 

{adv.),  lange,  a  long  time. 
look  up  (to),  aufblitfen  (w.). 
lord,  ber  ioerr  {gen.  -n,  pi.  -en); 

lord  of  the  castle,  ber  Surg^err, 

ber  ©c^Io^^err. 


lose  (to),  ocrlieren  (tjcrlor,  vex- 

loren). 
loud,  laut. 
love-letter,  ber  Siebesbrtef  {pi.  -e), 

ba^  Siebesbriefc^en  {pi.  —). 
lower  (to),  ^erab'lafjen  (lie^,  ge= 

laffen);  pass.,  ^erab'finf en (fanf , 

gefunfen),  ^erabgelafjen  roerben. 


make  (to)  {Ger.  cogn.,  machen), 

mac^en  (u?.),  fabrijieren  {w.). 
man  {Ger.  cogn.,  manu),  ber  a)iann 

{pi.  -er). 
many,mele;  how  many?  roieciele? 

many  a,  manc^  ein  (eine,  ein). 
March,  (ber)  aJidrj  {gen.  -es). 
marshal,  ber  SKarfc^aU  {pi.  ^e). 
Mary,  aiiari'e  {gen.  ajiariens). 
may,  moge,  mogen! 
May,  (ber)  9Kai  {gen.  -eg). 
me  {accus.),  mic^  ;  {dot.),  mir. 
meadow,  bic  SBtefe  {pi.  -n),  bic 

9tue  {pi.  -n). 
meat,  ta^  %lei\(i). 
Mediterranean  Sea,   bag  2Rittet= 

Idnbifc^e  2JJeer. 
meet  (to),  treffen  (traf,  getroffen). 
member,  bag  2J?ttgIieb  {pi.  -ex). 
memorize  (to),  augroenbig  lemen 

{w.),  memorie'ren  {w.). 
memory,    bag    ©ebdc^fnig  {gen. 

-feo),  bag  ©rinnerunggoermogen. 
Mendelssohn  (Moses),  seeWlentelQ- 

fo^n. 
Mendelssohn -Bartholdy  (Felix), 

1809-1847,  one  of  the  greatest 


musical  composers  of  the  XIX 

centuiy, 
merry (-ily),  luftig,  Dergniigt. 
Messi'na,  a  town  and  sea-port  in 

Sicily. 
midday,  ber  3J?tttag ;  at  midday, 

um  aWittag,  mittagg ;  ju  2)?ittag, 

at  (for)  dinner, 
midday-meal  {Ger.  cogn.,  mittags- 

mahl),  bag  3Wtttaggeffen. 
middle,  bie  9«itte. 
midnight,    bie   2Wttlernacl^t    {pi. 

■^e);   at  midnight,  um  aJZttter= 

nac^t. 
mighty,    mdc^tig;    mighty  rich, 

fteinreic^. 
mild,  milb. 
milk,  bie  3KiIc^. 
minute,  bie  2Kinu'te  {pi.  -n);  at 

20  minutes  after . . .,  20  aJiinuten 

nac^  .  .  . 
Miss,  (bag)  ^dulein  {pi.  — ). 
Monday,  (ber)  3Kontag. 
money,  bag  @elb  {pi.  -er);  all  my 

money,    aH   mein  ®elb,  mein 

gan^eg  ®elb. 
month,  ber  3Konat  {pi.  -e). 


VOCABULARY. 


219 


moon,  ber  SKonb  {pi,  -e);  full- 
moon,  ber  SSoUmonb. 

more  {Ger.  cogn.^  mehr),  me^r ; 
or  to  be  expressed  by  comparat. 
inflection. 

morning,  berSJiorgen;  in  the  morn- 
ing, am  aRorgen,  be§  9Jiorgen^, 
ntorgen^;  this  morning,  l^eute 
3Jiorgett. 

Moselle,  ber  aJJo'felraetn  (pi.  -e). 

moss-rose,  bie  2Jloogrofe  {pi  -n). 

most,  meift,  am  meiften ;  abs. 
superl.^  pd^ft,  du^erft ;  or  by 
sup.  inflection. 

mount  (to),  befteigen  (beftieg,  be= 
ftiegen),  ftd^  fdiiDtngen  (fd^roang, 
gefd^raungen)  auf,  accus. 

mountain,  ber  33erg  {pi.  -e);  moun- 
tains, bag  ©ebirge  {collect);  air 


of  the  mountains,  bie  ©ebirg§= 

luft,  bie  $8ergluft. 
mountain-range,  ber  Sergjug  {pi. 

-e),  ber  Sergriiden  {pi.  —). 
mouth,  ber  2Jiunb. 
Mr.,  (ber)  §err  {gen.,  dat.,  accus. 

-n,  pi.  -en). 
Mrs.,  (bie)  ^rau  {pi.  -en), 
much  {adv.),  xixei. 
muddy,  f  dimu^ig,  f  d^Iammig,  ttiibe. 
Miillner,   1774-1829,    a  German 

critic  and  dramatic  poet, 
musician,  ber  SKu'fifer  {pi.  — ). 
must  (=  to  have  to),  tniif  jen  (mu^te, 

gemufit),  mod.  aux. 
my,  mein,  meine,  niein  {pi.  meine). 
myself  (nom.),  [id^]  felbft;  (accws.), 

mid)  {reflex.). 


name  (the),  ber  9Zame[n]  {gen. 
3lamen^,  pi.  9iamen). 

name  (to),  nennen  (nannte,  ge= 
nannt). 

national,  nationar;  national  capi- 
tal, bie  33unbeg^auptftabt  {pi. 
-e). 

native,  l^eimifd^ ;  native  town,  bie 
SSaterftabt  {pi.  ^e). 

natural,  naturgema^. 

near,  bei,  nal^e  bei  {dat),  in  ber 
9ia^e  non  {dat). 

nearly,  faft,  beinal^e. 

neck,  ber  §alg  {pi.  ^e). 

negro,  ber  3fieger  {pi.  — ). 

neigh  (to),  n)tet)ern  {w.). 


neither,  raeber ;  neither  .  .  .  nor, 

meber  .  .  .  noc^. 
nest,  bag  3^e[t  {pi.  -er). 
new,  neu ;    New  Year,  ^evi\af)V ; 

New  Year's  Day,  ber  9ieuia^rg= 

tag. 
next,  (ber)  nac^fte. 
night,  bie  ^Jac^t  {pi.  ^e);  at  night, 

bei  9iac^t,  nac^tg;   last  night, 

geftern  2lbenb. 
nine,  neun. 

nineteenth,  (ber)  neunje^nte. 
ninth,  (ber)  neunte. 
no  {adv.),  nein ;  {adj.),  fein,  feine, 

fein(pZ.  feine);  no  one,  niemanb, 

leiner. 


220 


VOCABULARY. 


noble,   ebel   {attrib.,   ebler,   eble, 

eble^). 
nobody,  niemanb,  feiner. 
nominate  (to),  ernennen  (ernannte, 

ernannt). 
noon,  ber  9JHttag  {pi.  -e). 
Normandy,  bie  Diormanbie'. 
North,  ber  5?orben. 
North    America,    92orb  =  Slmerifa 

(gen.  -s). 
North  Sea,  bie  9iorbfee. 
northern,  norblic^. 
Northmen,  bie  3?onitan'nen  {pi.). 
northwestern,  norbroeftlic^. 


not,  nic^t ;  not  as  ...  as,  nic^t  fo 

...  roie ;  not  only,  nic^t  nur, 

nic^t  aUein  (but  also,  fonbent 

auti)). 
nothing,  nid^t^  ;  nothing  at  all, 

gar  nic^te  ;  nothing  better  than, 

ntc^t^  beffere^  al^. 
November,  (ber)  9Jor»ember  {gen. 

-5) ;  Nov.  10,  ben  (am)  se^nten 

Diooember. 
now,  je^t ;  just  now,  joeben. 
nut   {Ger.  cogn.,  nuss),  bie  3lu^ 

{pl-  "e). 


oak  (Ger.  cogn.,  eiche),  bie  @i^c 

(pl.  -n). 
oblige  (to),  nerpflic^ten  {w.);   to 

oblige  greatly,  ju  gro^em  Xant 

oerpflic^ten. 
ocean,  ber  Djcan'  {-^,  pl.  -e),  ba§ 

3Jieer  {pl.  -e). 
October,  (ber)  Dftober  {gen.  -s). 
"  Oedipus,"  the  title  of  a  Sophoc- 

lean  tragedy. 
of,  non  {dot.),  au^  {dat.),orbytfie 

genit.  case ;  battle  of  ... ,  bie 

©(^lac^t  bet  .  .  .;  of  the,  com 

{date). 
often,  oft,  ^dufig. 
oil,  bag  DI. 
old,  alt;   the  old  man,  ber  2llte 

{pl.  -v) ;  the  old  woman,  bie 

2llte  {pl.  -n);  old  people,  2«te, 

pl. 
on(ptocc),auf,dai.,occtt«.;  {time)y 


on  {dot.) ;   on  that  train,  mit 

biefem  ^\x^^. 
once,  ein'maC ;  at  once,  fofort,  jo= 

gieic^,  umgebenb;  all  at  once, 

auf  einmal,  plo^Iid^  ;  once  upon 

a  time,  einmal'. 
one,ein,eine,ein;  einer,  eine,  eine^; 

one  and  the  same,  e  i  n  (eine,  ein) 

unb  ber'(=bie=,  ba5=)felbe; 

not  one,  nid^t  ein  =  fetn,  nic^t 

einer  (eine,  eines)  =  feiner,  etc. ; 

one  another,  einanber. 
only,  nur;  not  only,  nid^t  nur, 

nic^t  allein  (but  also,  fonbern 

auc^). 
open  {adj.),  off  en,  geoffnet. 
open  (to),   transit.:  bffnen  (uj.), 

auf  madden  {w.) ;  intrans. :  fid^ 

offnen. 
opened  [I]   {Ger.  cogn.,  ich  off- 

nete),  ic^  offncte. 


VOCABULARY. 


221 


opera,  bie  Oper  {pi.  -n). 

or,  ober. 

order  (the),  bie  Drbnung,  ber  33e= 

feE)I ;   in  order  to,  urn  .  .  .  gu, 

infinit. 
order  (to),    fiefe^Ien  (befall,   be= 

fo^len),  befteUen  (w.). 
ordinary,  mittelma^tg. 
Osceola,  see  D^ceola. 
other,  (ber)  anbere  (pi.  -n). 
our  {Ger.   cogn.,   unser),    (adj.), 


unfer,  unfere,  unfer  (pi.  unfere); 

(pron.),   ber  (bie,  ba§),  unfere 

or  unfrige,  unjerer. 
oven  {Ger.  cogn.,  ofen),  ber  33atf= 

ofen  {pi.  ^). 
over  {Ger.  cogn.,  liber),  iiber,  dat., 

accus. 
overgrown  {perf.  partic),  iiber= 

roac^'fen,  betoarfifert,  bebecft. 
overlook  (to),  iiberfe'fien  (iiberfa^, 

iiberfe()ett),  iiberblicf en  {w.). 


paint,  bie  ^arbe. 
Palm-Sunday,  (ber)  ^almfonntag 

{gen.  -S). 
paper,  bag  papier'  {pi.  -e). 
Paradise,  bag  ^^arabies'  {gen.  -eg). 
paralyze  (to),  lawmen  {w.). 
parents,  bie  ®Itern,  pi. 
part,  ber  ^eil  {pi.  -e) ;  part  of  the 

country,  ber  Sanbegtetl. 
pass  by  (to),  Doru'bergeljen  (ging, 

gegangen). 
patent, bag  ^^atent'(pZ.  -e) ;  patent- 

ofiBce,    bag    ^atent;2lmt    {gen. 

2lmteg,  pi.  fcter). 
pay  (to),  begat) len  {w.). 
peach,  ber  ^firfic^  {pi.  -e);  bie 

^firficfie  {pi.  -n). 
peach-tree,ber^firftd)baum(pZ.''e). 
peasant,  ber  Sauer  {gen.  -g,  pi.  -n). 
peevish,  ntiirrifc^. 
pen,  bie  ^eber  {pi.  -n). 
pencil    {Ger.   cogn.,   pinsel),    ber 

pnfel  {pi.  —),  ber  Sleiftift  {pi. 

-e). 


peninsula,  bie  ^albinfel  {pi.  -n). 
people,  :^eute  {pi.),  3JJenfc^en  {pi). 
perhaps,  oielleicf)!. 
permit  (to),  eriauben  (ly.),  geftatt^n 

{w.). 
philosopher,  ber  ^^ilofopl^'  {gen. 

-en,  pi.  -en). 
physician,  ber  Slrgt  {pi.  ^e). 
pick-axe,  bie  §atfe  {pi.  -n). 
piece,  bag  ©tiic!  {pi.  -e). 
pigeon,  bie  ^aube  {pi.  -n). 
pine,  bie  ^anne  {pi  -n),  bie  ©bel^ 

tanne  {pi  -n). 
pine-wood,  bag  ^annen^olg. 
play  (to),  fpielen  {w.). 
please!    bitte!    gefdlligft   {adv.); 

please    show !    geigen  <Sie  ge= 

falligft .  .  .  t)or! 
pleasing,  angene^m. 
pocket,  bie  Xa\6)e  {pi  -n). 
poem,  bag  ©ebic^t  {pi  -e). 
poet,  ber  2)irf)ter  {pi  — ). 
point,  ber  ^unft  ( pi  -c). 
police,  bie  ^oligei'. 


222 


VOCABULARY. 


political,  polittfc^. 

politician,  ber  ^oli'tifer  {pi.  — ). 

pond,  ber  Xeic^  {pi.  -e). 

poor,   arm,   fc^Iec^t,  mangel^aft; 

the  poor,  ber  2lrme  {pi.  -n). 
post,  bie  "^oft  {pi.  -en) ;  at  the 

post,  auf  ber  ^^oft. 
post-office,    ^a^    ^oft=2lmt    {pi. 

2(mter) ;  at  the  post-office,  auf 

bem  ^oftamte. 
pot,  ber  2;opf  {pi.  ^e). 
potato,  bie  JUartof fel  {pi.  -n). 
pound,  ta^  ^funb  {pi.  -e) ;  how 

many  pounds  ?  rote  »iel  -pfunb  ? 

rote  otele  ^vfunb  ? 
praise  (to),    loben  (mj.),    pretfen 

(prte^,  gepriefen). 
prepare    (to),    nor'bereiten   {w.) ; 

to    be   prepared,    fic^    nor'be:: 

retten. 
president,  ber  ^rdfibenf  (^en.  -en, 

pi.  -en), 
prince,  ber  ^rinj  {gen.  -en,  pi.  -en), 

ber  {5"i^ft  {9^-  -^»'  P^-  -en) ; 
Prince  Henry,  ^^rinj  »einric^ 
Don  SSale^. 


princess,  bte  ^rinjeffin  {pi.  -nen), 

bte  giirftin  {pi.  -nen). 
prisoner,  ber  ©efangene  {gen.  -n, 

pi.  -n) ;  to  take  prisoners,  @e= 

fangene  mac^en. 
private,  prit)af ;  private  secretary, 

ber  "^rinaf  fefretdr  {pi.  -e). 
professor,  ber  '^rofef  for  {pi.  ^^ro= 

f eff o'reu) ;  ' '  Professor ! "  „<o  e  r  r 

^rofeffor!^ 
promise  (to),  nerfprec^en  (cerfprad^, 

nerfproc^en) ;    promising,    meU 

nerfprec^enb. 
proud,  ftolj. 

Provence  (the),  bte  '^ronen'ce. 
province,  bie  '^rootnj'  {pi.  -en). 
Prussia,  "^reu^en  {gen.  -s). 
publish  (to),  neroffentlic^en  {w.). 
pull  (to),    retten  (ri^,   geriffen), 

5ie^en  (jog,  gejogen). 
pupil,  ber  ©d^iiler  {pi.  — ). 
put  (to),  legen  (m?.),  nef)men  (na^m, 

genomnten),   ftecfen   {w.),  tt)un 

(t^at,  get^an),  into  =  in,  accus.; 

to  put  on,  an'Iegen  {w.). 
Pyrenees,  bie  ^^reno'en  (pi.). 


queen,  bte  ^onigtn  {pi.  -nen).  |  question,  bie  jjrage  {pi.  -n). 


R. 


race,  bte  dla^e  {pi.  -n). 
railroad,  bie  (Sifenba^n  {pi.  -en), 

bie  33al)n  {pi.  -en). 
railroad-car,  ber  @ifenbal^nroagen 

{pi.  — ),  ber  2Saggon'  (French). 


railroad-employe,  ber  @tfenbaf)n= 
beamtc,  etn  (Stfenba^nbeamter 
{gen.  -en,  pi.  -en). 

railroad-station,  ber  Sa^n^of  {pi. 
-e). 


VOCABULARY. 


223 


rain  (to),  regnen  (w.),  impers. 

rain  (the),  ber  9tegen. 

raisin  {Ger.  cogn.,  rosine),  bie 
3ftofi'ne  (pi.  -n). 

rare,  felten. 

reach  (to),  fomtnen  (!atn,  gefonts 
men)  narf),  dat. 

read  (to),  lefen  {la^,  gelefen) ;  to 
read  aloud,  Dor'lefen. 

reader,  ba^  i^efebud^  (pZ.^er) ;  "Ger- 
man Grammar  and  Reader," 
„2)eutfc^eg  ©prarf);  unb  Sefe^ 
bud)," 

ready,  fertig,  bereit. 

receive  (to),  evf)aVUn  (er^ielt,  ex- 
fatten),  empfangen  (empfing, 
empfangen). 

red  {Ger.  cogn.,  rot),  rot. 

redbreast,    ba^    9iot!e^lc^en  {pi. 

-)• 
reddish  {Ger.  cogn.,  rotlich),  rot= 

lidl). 
re-elect  (to),  loie'berraafilen  {w.). 
register  (to),  ein'fd^reiben  (fd^rieb, 

gefd)rieben). 
remain  (to),  bleiben  (biteb,  geblte= 

ben),  rerrceilen  {w.). 
remove   (to)  =  to    change    resi- 
dence,   sie^en    (jog,    gejogen), 

intrans. 
reply  (to),  entgegnen(w>.)?  erroibern 

{w.). 
represent  (to),  bar'fteUen  {w.),  ab'- 

bilben  {w.). 


reproach,  ber  3Sorn)urf  {pi.  ^e); 

just  reproach,  ber   bered^tigte 

$8orn)urf. 
Republic,  bie  Jtepublif  {pi.  -en), 
residence,  ber  2Bo^nort  {pi.  -e). 
restore    (to),    roteber    ^er'fteUen 

{w.). 
return   (to),    guriicE'fel^ren   {w.) ; 

to  return    home,    ^eim'fe^ren 

(10.). 

Rhenish,  rfietnifd^ ;  Rhenish  wine, 

ber  9il^einn)ein  {pi.  -e). 
ribbon,  bag  Sanb  {pi.  ^er). 
rich  {Ger.  cogn.,  reich),  reid^  ;  the 

rich  man,  ber  3ieid^e  {pi.  -n) ; 

a  rich  man,   ein   diei(i)ev  {pi. 

3ietd[)e) ;   the  rich  woman,  bie 

3fletd^e  {pi.  -n) ;  a  rich  woman, 

eine  3fietd^e  {pi.  3fteid^e) ;   rich 

people  {pi),  Sieid^e;  mighty  rich, 

fteinreic^. 
right  {adj.),  rec^t ;  to  be  right,  red^t 

^aben. 
rise  (to),  aufge^en  (ging,  gegan= 

gen),  aufftefien  (ftanb,  geftan= 

ben), 
roast-meat,  ber  Sraten. 
r61e,  bie  3fioIle  {pi.  -n). 
rose,   bie  3ftofe  {pi.   -n) ;  "The 

Rose  on  the  Heath,"  „^eibens 

ro^Iein.'' 
round  {Ger.  cogn.,  rund),  runb. 
row  {Ger.  cogn.,  reihe),  bie  9leiE)e 

{pl-  -n). 


224 


VOCABULARY. 


S. 


said  {Ger.cogn  ,sagte),fagte,  jagten. 
salubrious,  gefunb,  frdfltgenb. 
same  (the),  berfelbe,  biefelbe,  bag= 

felbe  {pi.  biefelben). 
Sanssouci,  see  6an^fouci. 
sat  {Ger.  cogn.,  sass),  fo^,  fa^en. 
satin  {Ger.  cogn.,  seiden),  feiben. 
Saturday,    (ber)   ©amftag,   (ber) 

©onnabenb. 
say  (to),  fagen  {w.) ;   to  say  to, 

fagen  au  {dot.). 
says  {Ger.  cogn.,  sagt),  fagt. 
Scandinavia,  Sfanbinauien  {gen. 

-5). 

scholar,  ber  ©eletjrte  (ein  -cr), 
pl.  -en. 

school,  bie  (5cf>ule  {pl.  -n). 

school-library,  bie  ©c^urbibliot^ef 
{pl.  -en). 

sea,  bie  ©ee. 

seat,  ber  ®i^  {pl.  -e),  ber  ^la^ 
{pl.  -e). 

second,  (ber)  jroeite ;  second-class, 
jroeiter  j^laffe. 

secretary,  ber  Sefretar'  {gen.  -^, 
pl.  -e) ;  Secretary  of  State,  ber 
<£taat3jefretar ;  private  secre- 
tary, ber  ^rioaf  fefretdr. 

see  (to),  fe^en  (fa^,  gefe^en),  er= 
blicfen  {w.). 

select  (to),  rod^Ien  (w.). 

sell  (to),  oerfaufen  {w.). 

Seminoles,  see  ©emino'Ien. 

Senate,  ber  Senaf  {gen.  -[ejs). 

send  (to),  fenben  (janbte,  gefanbt), 
fc^icfen  (u>.). 


separate  (to),  trennen  (mj.),  jc^et= 

ben  (fc^ieb,  gefc^ieben). 
September,  (ber)  September  {gen. 

-5). 

seven  {Ger.  cogn.,  sieben),  fieben. 

seventh,  (ber)  fiebente. 

several,  me^rere,  oerjc^iebene. 

shame,  bie  (Sc^am. 

sharp  {Ger.  cogn.,  scharf),  f(^arf. 

she,  fie. 

ship  {Ger.  cogn.,  schiff),  ba^  ©c^if[ 
{pl-  -e). 

shoe,  ber  Sc^u^  {pl.  -e). 
I  should  {Ger.  cogn.,  sollte),  foKte, 
foUten. 

shout  (to),  rufen  (rief,  gerufen). 

show  (to),  oor'jeigen  {w.). 

Sicily,  ©isi'Iien  {gen.  -§). 

sick,  frant;  the  sick  man,  ber 
^ranfe;  the  sick  woman,  bie 
^ranfe. 

side,  bie  Seite  {pl.  -n);  {of  moun- 
tains), ber  2lbf)ang  {pl.  ""e);  on 
this  side  of  .  .  .,  biesfeit  or  bie^= 
feit^  {genit.);  on  the  other  (that) 
side  of  .  .  .,  jenfeit  or  jenfeit^ 
{genit.). 

sign-board,  ba^  ©c^ilb  {pl.  ^er). 

signal,  "tiCL^  Signal'  {pl.  -e),  ba§ 
3eic^en  {pl  — ). 

silk  (adj.),  feiben. 

silver  {Ger.  cogn.,  silber[n]),  ba§ 
6ilber,  filbern  {adj.). 

sing  (to),  fingen  (fang,  gefungen). 

single  (=  unmarried),  lebig,  un= 
cer^eiratet. 


VOCABULARY. 


226 


sister  {Ger.  cogfji.,  sch wester),  bie 

©c^roefter  {pi.  -n). 
sit  (to),  fi^en  (faf;,  gefeffen);  to  sit 

down  (=to  seat  one's  self),  fief) 

je^en  (w.). 
Sitting  Bull,  see  ©ttting  S3uU. 
skin,  bie  §aut  (pi.  ^e). 
sleep  (to),  fdjlafen  (fc^Iief,  gejc^Ia= 

fen). 
sleeper,  ber  ®d)lafn)agen  {pi.  — ). 
slice,   ber  ©cfinilt  {pi.  -e),  bag 

©tud  {pi.  -e). 
slime  {Ger.  cogn.,  schlamm),  ber 

©c^Iamm. 
slip  (to),  fd^Iiipfen  {w.) ;  to  slip 

away,  entfd^Iiipfen. 
slipped     [I]     {Ger.     cogn.,     ich 

schltipfte),  ic^  frf)liipfte. 
small,  flein. 
smoke  (to),  raud^en  {w.) ;  those  who 

do  not  smoke,  3'Jici^trauci^er,  pi. 
so,  fo. 

soldier,  ber  ©olbaf  {pi.  -en), 
something,  etraag. 
son,  ber  ©o^n  {pi.  ^e). 
soon,  balb ;  as  soon  as,  fobalb  aB. 
Sophocles,  496-406  b.  c. ,  the  great- 
est  tragedian  of   the  Greeks. 

Antigone  and  Oedipus  are  two 

of  his  best-known  dramas. 
sorry,  befiimmert ;  I  am  sorry,  c5 

t^ut  mir  leib. 
sound  (to),  blafen  (blieg,  geblafen); 

to  sound  the  horn,  in  bag  §orn 

ftofien  (ftie^,  gefto^en). 
South,  ber  ©iiben  {gen.  -g). 
South  America,  ©iibs2lmert!a  {gen. 

southern,  fiiblid^. 


southwestern,  fiibraeftlid^. 

spade   {Ger.  cogn.,  spaten),   ber 

Bpaten  {pi.  — ). 
spake  {Ger.  cogn.,  sprach),  fprad^, 

fprad^en. 
Spaniard,  ber  ©pa'nier  {pi.  — ). 
spend  (to),    ju'bringen   (bract)te, 

gebrad^t). 
spirit,  ber  (Seift  {pi.  -er). 
spirited,  feurtg,  muttg. 
spur,  ber  ©porn  {gen.  -[e]g,  pi. 

-en). 
squire,  ber^nappe  {gen.  -n,  pi.  -n). 
St.  Helena,  ©an!t  §e'Iena. 
stable,  ber  ©taU  {pi.  ^e). 
stamp  (to),  ftampfen  {w.). 
stand  (to),  fte^en(ftanb,geftanben). 
start  (to),  ab'get)ett  (ging,  gegan= 

gen),  ab'fa^ren  (fut)r,  gefaJ)ren). 
state,  ber  ©taat  {gen.  -eg,  pi.  -en), 

bag    :^anb   {pi.    ^er) ;    United 

States,  bie  SSereinigten  ©taaten. 
statesman,  ber  ©taatgmann  {pi. 

^er).. 
stay  (to)  =  to   remain,    bleiben 

(blieb,  geblieben). 
steel  {Ger.  cogrn.,  stahl),  ber©ta^t. 
still  {adv.),  nod^. 
stood  {Ger.  cogn.,  stand),  ftanb, 

ftanben. 
stool  {Ger.  cogrn.,  stuhl),  ber  ©effel 

{pi.  — ),  ber  ©d^emel  {pi.  — ). 
story,  bie  (Siefc^ic^te  {pi.  -n),  bie 

(grjd^lung  {pi.  -en), 
stove,  ber  Dfen  {pi.  ■^). 
street,  bie  ©tra^e  {pi.  -n). 
strike  (to),  stroke  (to)  {Ger.  cogn., 

streichen),  ftreic^en  (ftric^,  ge= 

ftric^en). 


226 


VOCABULARY. 


strong,  ftarf,  fraftig. 

study,  tia^  ©tu'bium  {gen.  -§,  pi. 

Stubien). 
suburb,  bie  SBorftabt  {pi.  -e). 
succeed  (to),  geltngen  (gelang,  ge= 

lungen);  I  succeed,  „t^"  gelingt 

mir. 
summer,  ber  ©ommer  {pi.  —). 
sun,  bie  ©onne. 
Sunday,  (ber)  ©onntag. 
sunlight,  ber  ©onnenj^ein. 


sunset,  ber  ©onnenuntergang  {pi. 
""e),  ber  Untergang  ber  Sonne. 

surface,  bie  Dberfldc^e ;  flat  sur- 
face, bie  j^Idc^e  {pi.  -n). 

surprise,  bag  (Srftaunen,  bie  Uber= 
rafc^ung. 

swallow,  bie  ©d^rcalbe  {pi.  -n). 

swart,    swarthy    {Ger.    cogn.^ 
schwarz),  fd^roarj. 

swine  {Ger.  cogji.,  schwein),  ba§ 
©c^roein  {pi.  -e). 


T. 


table  {Ger.  cogn.,  tafel),  berXifd^ 
{pl-  -e). 

tablet,  bag  2:dfel£|en  {pi.  —). 

take  (to),  ne^men  (na^m,  ge= 
nommen),  ein'ne^men,  in  S3eji^ 
ne^men ;  to  take  off,  ab'ne^men ; 
to  take  prisoners,  ©efangene 
mac^en,  gefangen  ne^men. 

tea-rose,  bie  2;^eerofe  {pi.  -n). 

teach  (to),  le^ren  {w.) ;  teaching, 
le^renb. 

teacher,  ber  Se^rer  {pi.  — ),  bie 
Se^rerin  {pi.  -nen);  teacher  of 
languages,  ber  ©prad^Ie^rer. 

Tecumseh,  see  ^ecumfe^. 

tell  (to),  erjd^Ien  {w.). 

ten,  se^n. 

tenacious,  gut,  treu,  ftarf. 

term,  ber  Xermin'  {pi.  -t),  bie 
2lmt5'periobe  {pi.  -n) ;  for  a 
term  of  four  years,  auf  t)ier 
Sa^re. 

text,  ber  ^iejt  {gen.  -eg,  pi.  -e). 

than,  aU. 


thank  (to),  banfen  (u).),  vMh  dot. 
thanked    {Ger.    cogn.^    dankte), 

bantte,  banften. 
thanks,  ber  2)anf  {sing.). 
thanksgiving,  bie  2)anff  agung  {pi. 

-en). 
Thanksgiving  Day,  bag  2)anffeft 

{gen.  -eg). 
that   {pron.),   jener,   jene,  jeneg 

{pi.  iene);  if  followed  by  a  genit. 

or  relai.  clause:  ber,  bie,  bag 

{emphatic.)    or  berjenige,    bie= 

jenige,  bagjenige  {pi.  bie  or  bie= 

jenigen). 
that  {conjuTict.),  ba^  ;  so  that,  fo 

ba^. 
the,  ber,  bie,  bag  {pi.  bie). 
thee  {accus.)^  bid^ ;  {dot.),  bir. 
their,  i^r,  i^re,  i^r  {pi.  i^re). 
them  {a^cus.),  fie;  {dot.),  i^nen; 

of  them,  con  i^nen  (bauon). 
then,  bann,  barauf. 
there,  ba,  bort ;  there  is  (are),  eg 

giebt,  e$  befinbet  (befinben)  fic^. 


VOCABULARY. 


227 


thereby  {Ger.    cogn.^    da[r]bei), 

babct. 
therefore,  ba^er,  barum,  be^roegen. 
these,  biefe. 
they,  fie;  indef.,  man. 
thick  {Ger.  cogn.,  dick),  bitf. 
think  (to),  benfen  (bac^te,  gebac^t). 
third  {Ger.  cogn.,  dritte),  britte. 
thirtieth,  (ber)  brei^igfte. 
this,  biefer,   bieje,   biefe^  (bie^), 

pi.  biefe;   this  morning,  l^eute 

aJiorgen. 
thistle   {Ger.    cogn.,   distel),   bie 

2)iftel  {pi.  -n). 
thistle-finch,  ber  2)iftelfinfe  {pi. 

-en). 
those  {see  that,  pron.),  jene,  bie 

{emphat.),  biejenigen,  fold^e. 
thought    [I]    {Ger.    cogn.,     ich 

dachte),  ic^  bac^te. 
three  {Ger.  cogn.,  drei),  brei. 
three  hundred  and  sixty-seven, 

brei^unbert  unb  fieben=unb5Jec^= 

through  {Ger.  cogn.^  durch),  burc^ 

{accus.). 
thunder  (to),  bonnern  {w.),  impers. 
Thursday,  (ber)  2)onnerftag  {gen. 

thy,  bein,  beine,  bein  {pi.  beine). 
ticket,  bag  SiUef  {gen.  -g,  pi.  -^ 

or  -e) ;  a  second-class  ticket,  ein 

SiUet  jroeiter  ^lafle. 
ticket-window,  ber  ©c^alter  {pi. 

-). 
till,  big. 
time,    bie   3eit    {pi    -en);    at 

what  time  ?  urn  rate  t)iel  Vif)v  ? 

njann? 


to,  ju;    {place),  na6)  {dat),  an, 

auf,  bi^  {accus.);  or  by  dat.  case; 

before  infin.,   gu,  urn  ...  ju; 

from  ...  to,  t)on  .  .  .  big. 
to-day,  l^eute. 
to-morrow,  morgen ;  the  day  after 

to-morrow,  iibermorgen. 
top,  ber  ©ipfel  {pi.  —),  ber  ^od^fte 

^unft  {pi.  -e). 
town,  bag  ©tcibt'dien  {pi.  —). 
(town-) king    {Ger.    cogn.,   zaun- 

konig),  ber  3awnJonig. 
tragedy,  bie  Xrago'bie  {pi.  -n), 

bag  ^rauerfpiel  {pi.  -e). 
train,  ber  ^uq,  ber  SSa^njug  {pi. 

^e) ;  the  train  for  ... ,  ber  ^UQ 

nad^  .  .  . 
translate  (to),  iiberfefjen  {w.). 
tree,  ber  33aum  {pi.  ^e). 
troop,  bie  ©d^ar  {pi.  -en),  ber 

&aufen  {pi.  — ). 
troubadours,  see  Xrou'babourg. 
true,  raa^r. 
truly,  aufric^tig ;  Yours  truly,  auf= 

ric^tig  ber  S^nge  (bie  S^rige), 

3^r  ergebener  (S^re  ergebene). 
trunk,  ber  Coffer  {pi.  — ). 
Tuesday,  (ber)  S)ienftag. 
tulip,  bie  ^ulpe  {pi.  -n). 
Turkish,  bag  ^iirfifc^[e]. 
turn  (to),  transit,  wenben  (roanbte, 

geroanbt) ;  to  turn  around,  fid^ 

um'roenben;    intrans.,    roerben 

(rourbe  [raarb],  geworben). 
twelve,  jTOoIf. 
twice,  jroeimal. 
twig  {Ger.  cogn.,  zweig),  ber3ttJeig 

{pi.  -e). 
two,  jroei. 


228 


VOCABULARY. 


U.  S.,  bte  SSereinigten  ©taaten; 
U.  S.  Senate,  ber  ©enat  ber  3Ser. 
©taaten. 

understand  (to),  oerfte^en  (t)er= 
ftanb,  oerftanben);  to  be  under- 
stood, fid^  0011  jelbft  oerfte^en. 

unfortunate,  ungludlid^ ;  the  un- 
fortunate man,  ber  Unglucflirf)e ; 
the  unfortunate  woman,  bie  Un= 
gliicflic^e ;  unfortunate  people, 
Ungliidlic^e. 

unhappy,  ungludtli^. 


unite  (to),  tjereinigen  (lo.);  united, 

cereinigt;    United   States,   bie 

33ereinigten  ©taaten. 
university,    bie   Unioerfitdf  (pi. 

-en), 
unjust,  unberec^tigt. 
unnatural,  unnatiirlid^. 
upright,  aufred^l. 
us  {accus.),  un^  ;  to  us  {dot.),  uns. 
use  (to),  benu^en  («?.),  gebrauc^en 

{w.). 
useful,  nii^lic^. 


V. 


vacate  (to),  frei'mac^en  (u>.),  auf = 

geben  (gab,  gegeben). 
vacation,  bie  ^erien,  pi. ;  the  long 

vacation,  bie  langen  ^erien,  bie 

©ommerferien. 
valuable,   loert,   roertooU;   much 

more  valuable,  ciel  me^r  wert, 

niel  roertooUer. 
vegetables,  'ha%  ©emiife  {collect.). 
Venice,  SSene'big  (gen.  -s). 


very,  fe^r. 

victorious,  fiegreid^. 

view,  bie  2lusfic^t  {pi.  -en). 

village,  ba^  2)orf  {pi.  -er). 

village-school,  bie  2)ortJcl^ule  {pi. 

-n). 
volume,  ber  33anb  {pi.  -e). 
Vosges,  bie  SSoge'fen,  pi. 
voyage,  bie  ^ieife  {pi.  -n). 


waiting-room,  ber  2BartejaaI  {pi. 

SBartefdle). 
walk  (to),  ge^en  (ging,  gegangen). 
wall,  bie  3JJauer  {pi.  -n). 
want  (to),   TOoUen  {mod.  aux.), 

mogen  {mod.  aux.),  Suft  ^aben. 
war,  ber  ^rieg  {pi.  -e). 
warder,    ber    2Cdc^ter    {pi.  — ) ; 


warder  on  the  tower,  ber  2;urm= 

roart. 
warm,  luarm. 

was (Ger.  cogrTi.,  war),  max,  rourbe. 
watch  (to),   betrac^ten  («;.),   be= 

obac^ten  {w.). 
water  {Ger.  cogn.,  wasser),  bag 

3Baffer. 


VOCABULARY. 


229 


Waterloo,  see  SBaterloo. 

way,  ber  3Beg  (pL  -e);  all  the 

way,  ben  ganjen  3Beg  (§er),  bie 

ganse  ©trecfe  (^er). 
we,  rair. 

Wednesday,  (bie,  ber)  aJlittrooc^. 
week,  bie  SBod^e  (pi.  -n). 
weigh  (to),  raiegen  (tuog,  geroogen). 
Weimar,  see  SBeimar. 
well  (adj.),  voo\)i,  gefunb;   I  am 

well,  ic^  bin  gefunb,  ic^  befinbe 

mid^  roo^l. 
were  (Ger.  cogn.^  waren),  roar  en. 
West,  ber  SBeften  {gen.  -s). 
western,  raeftlid^. 
what?  (adj.),  raelc^er?   ma^  fUr 

ein?  (pron.),  xva^. 
when  {Ger.  cogn.,  wenn,  wann), 

rcenn,  al^,  raann  ? 
whenever,    wenn,   raenn  immer, 

roenn  and)  immer. 
where  {interr.,  relat.),  voo. 
whether,  ob  {conjunct). 
which  {interr.),  n)e(d)er?  meld^e? 

raelc^eg?  {relat.),  roeldier,  rcelc^e, 

melc^eg  or  ber,  bie,  ba^. 
while  {conjunct),  n)al)renb. 
whined  {Ger.  cogrn.,  weinte),  mm- 

merte,  roinfelte. 
white  {Ger.  cogn.,  weiss),  meif;. 
Whitsunday,    ^fingften    {sing.), 

bie  ^fingften  {pL). 
who  {interr.),  roer?  {relat),  meU 

cl)er,  ber. 
whose  {relat),  sing.,  beflen,  beren 

{pi.  beren). 
why  ?  roarum  ?  why !  {interj.),  ei, 

ja;  why!  that's  .  .  .,  bag  ift 

ia.  .  . 


wife,  bie  ^rau  {pi.  -en);  {obsol. 

bag  SBeib,  i)i.  -er). 
will    (=  to  be  willing),   rooUen 

(TOoUte,  gemoitt),  mod.  aux. 
William  II.,  9BiI^elm  ber  Bmeite, 

^aifer  oon  3)eutfrf)lanb,  1888-. 
window,  bag  ^enfter  {pi.  — ) ;  by 

the  window,  am  ^^enfter,  beim 

^enfter. 
Windsor,  a  town  near  London 

(England). 
wine,  ber  9Bein  {pi.  -e). 
wing,  ber  ^liigel  {pi.  —). 
wish,  ber  3Bunfrf)  {gen.  -eg,  pi.  -^e). 
with,  mit  {dat)=m  the  house  of, 

bei  {dat). 
woman,  bie  ^rau  {pi.  -en),  bag 

^rauenjimmer  {pi.  —). 
wonderful,  erftaunlic^,  ben)unbe= 

runggraiirbig. 
wood,  bag  §ol3  {pi.  -er). 
woodcutter,  ber  ^olj^auer  {pi.  — ). 
wooden,  j^bljern ;  wooden  leg,  ber 

©telafuf;. 
word,  bag  9Bort  {pi.  ^er,  single 

words ;  pi.  -e,  connected  words). 
work  {Ger.  cogn.,  werk),  bag  5B3erf 

{pi.  -e),  bie  Slrbeit  {pi.  -en). 
world,  bie  3SeIt  {pi.  -en) ;  in  the 

world,  auf  ber  SBelt. 
worse,  fc^Iimmer. 
would  {Ger.  cogn.,  wollte),  rooUte, 

rooUten;  {condit),  roiirbe,  n)iir= 

ben. 
wren,  ber  3ttUttfbttig  {pi.  -e). 
write  (to),  fc^reiben  (fc^rieb,  ge= 

fd^rieben) ;  were  written,  ftanben, 

ftanben  .  .  .  gefc^rieben. 
wrongly,  mit  Unrec^t. 


230 


VOCABULARY, 


year  (6?er.  cogn.,  jahr),  bag  '^oi^x 
{pi.  -e);  leap-year,  bag  (Sc^alt= 

yellow  {Ger.  cogn.,  gelb),  gelb. 

yes,  \a. 

yesterday,  geftern ;  yesterday  even- 
ing, geftem  Stbenb ;  the  day  be- 
fore yesterday,  oorgcftem. 


yet,  boc^,  bennoc^,  tro|bcm. 
you  {nominai.),  if)v,  ©ie ;  (accus.), 

evLd),  ©ie;  (dot.),  euc^,  S^nen. 
young  {Ger.  cogn.,  jung),  jung. 
your,  3^r,  5^re,  5^r  (pZ.  ^^re), 

euer,  eu[e]re,  euer  (p^  cure). 
youth,  ber  3w"SliH9  {pl-  -e). 


ADVERTISEMENTS 


MODERN    LANGUAGE    BOOKS 

Net  included  in  the 
INTERNATIONAL   MODERN    LANGUAGE   SERIES. 


rXTROD.  PEICK. 

Becker  and  Mora:  Spanish  Idioms $i.8o 

Collar- Eysenbach  :  German  Lessons 1.20 

English  into  German 25 

Collar  and  Curtis  :  Shorter  Eysenbach i.oo 

Cook:  Table  of  German  Prefixes  and  Suffixes 05 

Doriot:  Beginners' Book  in  French 80 

Beginners'  Book  in  French, 

Part  II.    Reading  Lessons.   [Separate] 50 

Beginners'  Book  in  German 80 

Dufour:  French  Grammar 60 

French  Reader,  with  Vocabulary i.oo 

Hempl :  German  Grammar 

German  Orthography  and  Phonology 

Knapp  :  Modern  French  Readings 80 

Modern  Spanish  Readings 1.50 

Modern  Spanish  Grammar 1.50 

Lemly :  New  System  of  Spanish  Written  Accentuation 10 

Smith:  Gramatica  Practica  de  la  Lengua  Castellana 60 

Spiers:  New  French-English  Dictionary 4.50 

Crown  8vo.     Half  morocco.     782  pages. 

English-French  Dictionary 4.50 

Crown  Svo.     Half  morocco.     910  pages. 

Stein  :  German  Exercises 40 

Studies  and  Notes  in  Philology  and  Literature.    Vol.     I  ..  i.oo 

*♦  **  "  «*  Vol.   II....  1.50 

««  ♦«  «♦  ••  Vol.  Ill ....  4.00 

*«  "  "  «*  Vol.  IV....  1.50 

Sumichrast:  Les  Trois  Mousquetaires 70 

Les  Miserables i.oo 

Coppee's  Le  Pater 25 

Van  Daell :  Memoires  du  Due  de  Saint-Simon 64 

Descriptive  Circulars  of  the  above  books  sent,  postpaid,  on  application. 


Forty-five  volumes  are  now  ready  in  the  International  Modem  Language  Series. 

Other  volumes  are  in  preparation.     Our  special  circular  giving  all  the 

titles  in  this  Series  sent,  postpaid,  on  application. 


GINN   &    COMPANY,   PUBLISHERS, 

Boston.    Nev\r  York.   Chicago.   Atlanta.   Dallas. 


INTERNATIONAL   MODERN  LANGUAGE   SERIES. 


GERMAN    DEPARTMENT. 

Auerbach  :  Brigitta.    (Gore)  $o 

Du  Bois-Reymond  :  Wissenschaftliche  Vortrage.    (Gore) 

Elementary  German  Reader.    (Super) 

Freytag  :  Doktor  Luther.    (Goodrich) 

Freytag:  Soil  und  Haben.    (Bultmann) 

German  and  English  Sounds.    (Grandgent) 

Hauff :  Tales.   (Goold) 

Keller  :  Dietegen.    (Gruener) 

Lessing  :  Emilia  Galotti,    (Poll) 

Preparatory  German  Reader.     (C.  L.  van  Daell) 

Riehl :  Burg  Neideck.   (Wilson) 

Rosegger  :  Waldheimat.    (Fossler) 

Schiller  :  Wallenstein.    (Schilling) 

Scientific  German  Reader.    (Dippold) 

Storm  :  Geschichten  aus  der  Tonne.    (Brusie) 

Von  Sybel :  Die  Erhebung  gegen  Napoleon  I.    (Nichols) 

FRENCH    DEPARTMENT. 

Augier:  La  Pierre  de  Touche.     (Harper) 

Bourget :  Extraits.     (van  Daell) 

Chanson  de  Roland  :  Extraits.    (Paris) 

Contemporary  French  Writers.    (Melle) 

Daudet :   Le  Nabab.     (Wells) 

Daudet :   Morceaux  Choisis.    (Freeborn) 

Difficult  Modern  French.    (Leune) 

Erckmann-Chatrian  :    Madame  Therese.    (Rollins) 

Hugo  :  Quatrevingt-Treize.    (Boielle) 

Introduction  to  French  Authors,     (van  Daell) 

Introduction  to  the  French  Language,    (van  Daell) 

La  Fayette  :  Princesse  de  Cleves.    (Sledd  and  Gorrell) 

Legouve  et  Labiche  :  La  Cigale.     (van  Daell) 

Lemaitre,  Jules  :  Morceaux  Choisis.   (Melle) 

Merimee  :  Lettres  a  une  Inconnue.    (van  Steenderen) 

Michelet:  La  Prise  de  la  Bastille.  .(Luquiens) 

Moliere  :  L'Avare 

Moliere  :  Le  Misantrope.     (Bocher) 

Moliere  :  Les  Precieuses  Ridicules.    (Davis) 

Montaigne  :  De  ITnstitution  des  Enfans.    (Bocher) 

Musset  :  Morceaux  Choisis.    (Kuhns) 

Napoleon  :  Extraits.     (Fortier) 

Places  and  Peoples  :  French  Prose.    (Luquiens) 

Popular  Science  :  French  Prose.    (Luquiens) 

Racine  :  Andromaque.    (Bocher) 

Sainte-Beuve  :  Extraits.    (Effinger) 

Scientific  French  Reader.    (Herdler) 

Sevigne,  Madame  de  :  Extraits.   (Harrison) 

SPANISH    DEPARTMENT. 

Galdos  :  Dona  Perfecta.    (Marsh) 


GINN  &  COMPANY,  Publishers,  Boston,  New  York,  Chicago,  Atlanta,  Dallas. 


INTERNATIONAL    MODERN    LANGUAGE    SERIES. 

AN  INTRODUCTION 

TO    THE 

FRENCH    LANGUAGE. 

A  COMPLETE  COURSE  FOR  BEGINNERS. 

By  ALPHONSE   N.   VAN   DAELL, 

Professor  of  Modern  Languages  in  the  Massachusetts  Institute  of  Technology, 

formerly  Director  of  Modern  Languages  in  the  Boston  Public  Schools. 

Price  for  introduction,  $i.oo. 

This  is  a  complete  first  year  book,  compact  and  concise  and 
yet  full  enough  to  be  accurate  and  thorough.  It  is  in  two  Parts  : 
Part  I.  consists  of  exercises  and  refers  constantly  to  Part  II. 
which  is  a  brief  French  grammar.  For  the  elementary  courses  in 
colleges,  seminaries,  academies  and  high  schools  it  is  believed  to 
possess  peculiar  excellences. 

I.    It  is  truly  practical,  that   is,   it  is  based   upon 
Practical       connected   language    and  it  provides   reference   to  a 
connected  statement  of  grammatical  rules.     The  par- 
ticular attention  of  instructors  is  invited  to  this  feature, 
not  to  be  found  in  other  books. 
Conver-  2.    The  method  of  the  book  permits  the  introduction 

sational  of  conversational  exercises  at  any  stage  of  the  course, 
and  whenever  the  teacher  wishes.  The  teacher  is 
Aids  the  guided  in  this  conversational  work,  and  so  with  the  aid 
Teacher  of  this  book  a  comparatively  inexperienced  instructor 
can  employ  oral  teaching  with  safety  and  satisfaction. 
Fresh  and  3-    The  exercises  are  not  of  the  Ollendorffian  pattern 

Interesting  1^^^  ^^'^  interesting  in  themselves.     Besides  this,  they 
are  French  in  substance  as  well  as  in  form :  they  refer 
fhoroughiy  to  France,  to  French  ideas,  French   history,  French 
French  customs,  etc.     In  a  word,  the  pupil  breathes  the  very 

atmosphere    of    the    country   whose    language    he   is 
studying. 
Available  4-    This  introduction  can  be  used  with  any  reader 

or  set  of  reading  books. 

The  long  experience  of  the  author  has  been  ably  supplemented 
by  the  criticisms  of  eminent  scholars  and  successful  teachers. 


GINN    &    COMPANY,    Publishers, 

Boston,  New  York  and  Chicag^o. 


COLLAR'S  EYSENBACHS 

PRACTICAL 
GERMAN 
GRAMMAR 


Shorter  Eysenbach 


Revised  and  largely  rewritten,  with  Notes  to  the  Exercises  and  Vocabularies, 

By   WILLIAM  C.  COLLAR,  Revised  by 

Head-AIaster  of  the  Roxbury  Latin  School,  Boston.  CLARA  S   CURTIS 


12mo.   Cloth.   242  pages.   For  introdnction,  $1.00. 


Eysenbach's  Lessons,  the  original  work,  was  unrivalled 
as-  a  help  to  the  complete  practical  mastery  of  forms  and  the 
acquisition  of  facility  in  conversation. 

Collar's  Eysenbach,  published  in  1887,  has  proved  to  retain 
the  excellencies  of  the  original,  freed  from  some  defects,  and  to 
add  merits  of  its  own,  particularly  on  the  side  of  reading  German. 
It  is  believed  that  no  other  book  is  so  good  for  those  who  desire 
an  introduction  to  German  that  shall  give  them  in  the  briefest 
possible  time  a  real  grasp  of  the  language.  A  call  has  arisen 
very  naturally  for  a  book  embodying  the  same  plan  and  aim,  but 
shorter  and  easier.  Many  schools  have  not  time  for  so  extended 
a  grammatical  course,  but  still  desire  to  do  by  the  best  method 
what  they  can  do. 

Collar's  Shorter  Eysenbach  has  been  carefully  prepared  to 
meet  such  cases.  Vocabularies  and  exercises  have  been  curtailed. 
Some  less  important  topics  have  been  omitted.  This  book  can  be 
easily  handled  in  a  year.  At  the  same  time  many  improvements 
of  details  have  been  effected. 

IN  A  WORD : 

The  Aim  and  Plan  have  been  approved  in  two  previous  editions  •, 

The  Method  has  been  cleared  and  perfected  twice  over ; 

The  Amount  has  been   carefully  adjusted  to  the  needs  of  the 

average  class  ; 
The  Details  have  been  minutely  studied  in  the  light  of  several 

years'  experience  with  the  larger  book. 


QINN  &  COMPANY,  Publishers, 

Boston.    New  York.    Chicago.    AtlanU.    DalUs. 


GERMAN 
Orthography  and  Phonology 

By  GEORGE  HEMPL,  Ph.D., 

Professor  of  English  Philology  and  General  Linguistics  in  the 
University  of  Michigan. 

PART  I.  PART  II. 

For  introduction,  $2.00.  In  preparation. 


'^HIS  work  is  the  first  to  attempt  the  systematic  and  compre- 
^^     hensive  treatment  of  German  orthography  and  phonology. 

Part  I.  consists  of  chapters  on  (i)  Orthography:  giving  the 
history  of  the  various  forms  of  the  German  alphabet,  the  basis  of 
spelling,  and  the  rules  of  the  official  orthography,  the  use  of 
capitals,  punctuation,  etc.  ;  (2)  Phonology :  presenting  a  clear 
outline  of  the  elements  of  phonetics,  a  classification  of  German 
speech-sounds,  and  a  practical  exposition  of  the  values  of  the 
German  letters  ;  (3)  Accent :  being  an  elaborate  treatise  on  pitch 
and  stress,  including  sentence-stress.  The  book  presents  the 
results  of  recent  scholarship  in  an  eminently  practical  form,  and 
makes  many  new  contributions  to  the  subject,  especially  in  the 
domain  of  accent,  a  subject  that  has  hitherto  received  but  scanty 
treatment  in  any  modern  language. 

Part  II.  presents  an  extensive  alphabetical  list  of  the  difficult 
words  of  the  language,  and  gives  their  spelling  (with  all  the 
variants  of  the  different  official  spellers)  and  their  pronunciation 
in  phonetic  transcription.  The  pronunciation  thus  indicated  is 
founded,  not  upon  the  statements  of  older  books,  but  upon  Pro- 
fessor Hempl's  long  and  careful  study  of  present  usage,  aided  by 
the  collaboration  and  criticism  of  German  teachers  and  professors 
representing  all  parts  of  the  German-speaking  territory.  The 
completion  of  this  part  of  the  work  is  being  hastened  as  rapidly 
as  the  peculiar  requirements  of  its  preparation  will  permit. 


OINN  &  COMPANY,  Publishers, 

BOSTON.    NEW  YORK.    CHICAGO.    LONDON. 


GERMAN    LESSONS 

'  Eysenbach's  Practical  German  Grammar,"  revised  and  largely  rewritten,  with 
Notes,  Selections  for  Reading,  and  Vocabularies. 

By  W.  C.  collar, 

Head  Master  of  the  Roxbury  Latin  School,  Boston. 


i2mo.    Cloth.    36c  pages.    For  introduction,  $1.20. 


IT   IS    INDUCTIVE, 

As  one  proceeds  instinctively  and  necessarily  when  he 
learns  a  foreign  language  in  a  foreign  country, — not  rig- 
idly inductive,  but  naturally  and  easily  so  ; 

DIRECT   AND    SIMPLE, 

Presenting  everything  from  its  practical  side,  in  such  a  way 
as  to  help  most  toward  the  readings  writi?ig^  and  speaki?ig  of 
German  with  ease  and  accuracy ; 

WELL   ARRANGED, 

Because  every  topic  is  taken  up  in  the  right  place,  and  the 
lessons  are  so  ordered  that  the  mastery  of  one  is  a  stepping- 
stone  to  the  mastery  of  the  next,  so  that  the  pupil  feels  he 
is  outflanking  the  difficulties  ; 

THOROUGH, 

Particularly  in  the  abundant,  ingenious,  and  varied  Exer- 
cises, in  adhering  to  the  principle  that  reading,  writing,  and 
speaking  should  go  hand  in  hand,  and  in  stating  things  with 
scholarly  accuracy  and  finish  ; 

AND    COMPLETE, 

Comprising  Lessons,  Precise  Grammatical  Principles,  Choice 
Readings,  Pertinent  Notes,  an  Outline  of  Pronunciation,  a 
Table  of  Contents,  an  Index,  and  Vocabularies,  —  all  in 
about  250  pages,  besides  the  Vocabularies. 


GINN  &  COMPANY,  Publishers, 

Boston.  New  York.  Chicago.  Atlanta.  Dallas. 


RHETORIC  AND   PEDAGOGY 


By  ARNOLD   TOMPKINS, 

Professor  of  Pedagogy  in  the  University  of  Illinois. 

The  Science  of  Discourse.    i2mo.     Cloth.     353  pages.    For  intro- 
duction, j^I.OO. 

The  Philosophy  of  Teaching.     i2mo.     Cloth.     280  pages.     For 
introduction,  75  cents. 

The  Philosophy  of  School  flanagement.    i2nio.    Cloth.    222 
pages.     For  introduction,  75  cents. 


The  Science  of  Discourse  is  an  effort  to  organize  the  facts 
of  composition  and  rhetoric  into  a  systematic  whole ;  thus 
to  secure  not  only  a  consistent  theory  of  discourse,  but  a 
more  efficient  basis  for  practice  in  both  composition  and 
literary  interpretation  than  comes  from  superficial  rhetoric 
study. 

Teachers  will  be  strongly  impressed  with  the  personality 
which  pervades  The  Philosophy  of  Teaching.  The  author 
shows  himself  to  be  a  man  of  large  sympathies,  who  is  able 
to  inspire  those  under  his  charge  with  a  sense  of  the  real 
significance  of  that  which  they  are  studying,  and  to  make  it 
a  factor  in  the  development  of  their  characters. 

The  Philosophy  of  School  Management  is  a  companion  and 
complement  of  the  author's  "  Philosophy  of  Teaching," 
being  based  on  the  same  fundamental  principle. 


GINN  &  COMPANY,  Publishers, 

Boston.  New  York.  Chicago.  Atlanta.  Dallas. 


THE    LEADING    FACTS   OF 

FRENCH     HISTORY. 

By  D.  H.  MONTGOMERY, 

Author  ok  the  Leading  Facts  of  English  History,  English  History 
Reader,  Etc. 

Introduction  Price,  $  1. 12. 

The  object  of  this  volume  is  to  present,  within  the  compass  of 
about  two  hundred  and  fifty  pages,  the  most  important  events  of  the 
history  of  France,  selected,  arranged,  and  treated  according  to  the 
soundest  principles  of  historical  study,  and  set  forth  in  a  clear  and 
attractive  narrative. 

The  work  is  based  on  the  highest  French  authorities,  —  Guizot, 
Rambaud,  Martin,  and  Duruy,  —  but  all  points  demanding  special 
consideration  have  been  carefully  compared  with  the  views  of  the 
best  English  writers  on  France. 

The  general  plan  of  treatment  is  practically  the  same  as  that  pur- 
sued in  the  author's  **  Leading  Facts  of  English  Historj'."  The  atten- 
tion of  teachers  5.s  particularly  called  to  the  following  summary :  — 
•|  The  respective  influences  of  the  Celtic  race,  and  of  the  Roman 
and  the  German  conquest  and  occupation  of  Gaul  are  clearly 
shown. 
O      Charlemagne's   work  and   the   subsequent  growth  of  feudal 

institutions  are  next  considered. 
o      The  breaking  up  of  the  feudal  system,  with  the  gradual  con* 

solidation  of  the  provinces  into  one  kingdom,  and  the  develop- 
ment of  the  sentiment  of  nationality,  are  traced  and  illustrated. 
J       The  growth  of  the  absolutism  of  the  crown,  the  interesting 

and  important  relations  of  France  to  America,  and  the  causes 
of  the  French  Revolution  are  fully  presented. 
K      The  career  of  Napoleon  and  its  effects  on  France  and  Europe 

are  carefully  examined. 
^      Finally,  a  sketch  is  given  of  the  stages  of  the  historical  prog;- 

ress  of  France  in  connection  with  the  state  of  the  Republic 
to-day. 

The  work  is  illustrated  with  fourteen  Maps  and  complete  Genealog- 
ical and  Chronological  Tables.  It  is  also  furnished  with  explanatory 
foot-notes  where  they  seem  to  be  required.  Each  section  of  the 
history  is  followed  by  a  brief  summary  of  the  ground  gone  over. 

The  Leading  Facts  of  English  History $1.12 

English  History  Reader 75 

GINN  &  COMPANY.  Publishers, 

Boston,  New  York,  and  Chicago. 


The  Leading  Facts  of  English  History. 

By  D.    H.    MONTGOMERY. 
Second  Edition,  rewritten,  453  pages,  including  Full  Maps  and  Tables. 


The  former  edition  has  been  rewritten,  as  it  had  become  evident 
that  a  work  on  the  same  plan,  but  more  comprehensive,  and  better 
suited  for  prevailing  courses  and  methods  of  class-work,  would  be  still 
more  heartily  welcomed. 

II. 

Important  events  are  treated  with  greater  fulness,  and  the  relation 
of  English  History  to  that  of  Europe  and  the  world  is  carefully  shown. 
References  for  further  study  are  added. 

III. 

The  text  is  in  short  paragraphs,  each  with  a  topical  heading  in  bold 
type  for  the  student's  use.  The  headings  may  be  made  to  serve  the 
purpose  of  questions.  By  simply  passing  them  over,  the  reader  has  a 
clear,  continuous  narrative. 

IV. 

The  treatpient  of  each  reign  is  closed  with  a  brief  summary  of  its 
principal  points.  Likewise  at  the  end  of  each  period  there  is  a 
section  showing  the  condition  of  the  country,  and  its  progress  in  Gov- 
ernment, Religion,  Military  Affairs,  Learning  and  Art,  General  Industry, 
Manners  and  Customs.  These  summaries  will  be  found  of  the  greatest 
value  for  reference,  review,  and  fuller  study  ;  but  when  the  book  is 

used  for  a  brief  course,  or  for  general  reading,  they  may  be  omitted. 

An  appendix  gives  a  Constitutional  Summary. 


No  pains  have  been  spared  to  make  the  execution  of  the  work  equal 
to  its  plan.  Vivid  touches  here  and  there  betray  the  author's  mastery 
of  details.  Thorough  investigation  has  been  made  of  all  points  where 
there  wa^  reason  to  doubt  traditional  statements.  The  proof-sheets 
have  been  carefully  read  by  two  experienced  high-school  teachers,  and 
also  by  two  college  professors  of  history. 

VI. 

The  text  is  illustrated  with  fourteen  maps,  and  supplemented  with 
full  genealogical  and  chronological  tables. 


INTRODUCTION    PRICE,  $1.12. 


GlWi  &  COMPAHY,  Pnbllsliers,  Boston,  Sew  York,  and  Chicago. 


METHOD   IN   HISTORY 

BY 

WILLIAM  H.  MACE, 

Professor  of  History  in  Syracuse  University,  and  author  of 
**A  Working  Manual  of  American  History. ^^ 


I2mo.  Clotb.  311  passes.  For  introdnction,  $1.00. 


The  work  is  designed  for  teachers  and  students  of 
history,  and  aims  to  make  conscious  the  processes  involved 
in  studying  and  teaching  this  subject.  To  this  end  the 
work  first  analyzes  events  and  discovers  some  of  the  laws 
and  principles  of  history,  and  notes  their  pedagogical  signi- 
ficance. A  second  part,  proceeding  in  the  light  of  the  first, 
explains  and  illustrates  the  processes  and  products  involved 
in  the  organization  of  history  into  a  scientific  form.  Here 
the  mind  is  traced  in  the  concrete  process  of  working  its 
way  through  the  subject  under  the  guidance  of  laws  and 
principles.  The  educational  value  of  the  processes  em- 
ployed and  of  the  products  wTought  out  is  also  discussed. 
The  third  portion  is  devoted  to  the  organization  o^  the 
different  periods  and  subperiods  of  American  history. 
This  includes  the  analysis  of  the  facts  of  each  period  till 
the  organizing  principle  is  discovered,  and  the  application 
of  the  principle  to  the  interpretation  and  ranking  of  events. 

The  preceding  discussions  deal  with  the  logical  phase 
of  history  work,  the  phase  adapted  to  the  more  mature 
student.  The  fourth  part  of  the  work,  holding  in  view 
this  logical  ideal  of  the  subject  and  the  unfolding  of  the 
immature  mind,  treats  of  the  elementary  phases  of  history 
teaching.  As  a  whole  the  book  presents,  in  concrete  form, 
a  rational  pedagogy  of  history. 


QINN  &  COMPANY,  Publishers, 

Boston.  New  York.   Chicago.   Atlanta.  Dallas. 


THE    BEST    HISTORIES. 


Myers's  History  of  Greece.  —  Introduction  price,  $1.25. 

Myers's  Eastern  Nations  and  Greece.  — Introduction  price,  $1.00. 

Allen's  Short  History  of  the  Roman  People.  —  Introduction  price,  $1.00. 

Myers  and  Allen's  Ancient  History.  —  Introduction  price,  $1.50.  This 
book  consists  of  Myers's  Eastern  Nations  and  Greece  and  Allen's 
History  of  Rome  bound  together. 

Myers's  History  of  Rome.  —  Introduction  price,  $1.00. 

Myers's  Ancient  History.  —  Introduction  price,  $1.50.  This  book  consists 
of  Myers's  Eastern  Nations  and  Greece  and  Myers's  History  of 
Rome  bound  together. 

Myers's  Medieval  and  Modern  History.  —  Introduction  price,  $1.50.  . 

Myers's  General  History.  —  Introduction  price,  $1.50. 

Emerton's  Introduction  to  the  Study  of  the  Middle  Ages.  —  Intro- 
duction price,  $1.12. 

Emerton's  Medisaval  Europe  (814-1300).  — Introduction  price,  $1.50. 

Fielden's  Short  Constitutional  History  of  England.  —  Introduction 
price,  $1.25.     ■ 

Montgomery's  Leading  Facts  of  English  History.  —  Introduction  price, 
$1.12. 

Montgomery's  Leading  Facts  of  French  History.  —  Introduction  price, 
$1.12. 

Montgomery's  Beginner's  American  History.  —  Introduction  price, 
60  cents. 

Montgomery's  Leading  Facts  of  American  History. —Introduction  price, 
$1.00. 

Cooper.  Estill  and  Lemmon's  History  of  Our  Country.  —  Introduction 
price,  $1.00. 

For  the  most  part,  these  books  are  furnished  with  colored  and 
sketch  maps,  illustrations,  tables,  summaries,  analyses  and  other  helps 
for  teachers  and  students. 


GINN  &  COMPANY,  Publishers. 

BOSTON.  NEW   YORK.  CHICAGO.  ATLANTA. 


NATURAL    SCIENCE    TEXT-BOOKS. 


Principles  of  Physics.    A  Text-book  for  High  Schools  and  Academies. 

By  Alfred  P.  Gage,  Instructor  of  Physics  in  the  English  High 

School,  Boston.    §1.30. 
Elements  of  Physics.     A  Text-book  for  High  Schools  and  Academies. 

By  Alfred  P.  Gage.     81.12. 
Introduction  to  Physical  Science.    By  Alfred  P.  Gage.    81.00. 
Physical  Laboratory  Manual  and  Note-Book.    By  Alfred  P.  Gage. 

35  cents. 
Introduction  to  Chemical  Science.    By  R.  P.  Williams,  Instructor  in 

Chemistry  in  the  English  High  School,  Boston.    80  cents. 
Laboratory  Manual  of  Greneral  Chemistry.  By  R.  P.  Williams.  25  cents. 
Chemical  Experiments.     General  and  Analytical.    By  R.  P.  Williams. 

For  the  use  of  students  in  the  laboratory.     50  cents. 
Elementary  Chemistry.    By  George  R.  White,  Instructor  of  Chemistry, 

Phillips  Exeter  Academy.    81.00. 
General  Astronomy.     A  Text-book  for  Colleges  and  Technical  Schools. 

By  Charles  A.  Youxg,  Professor  of  Astronomy  in  the  College  of 

New  Jersey,  and  author  of  "The  Sun,"  etc.     82.25. 
Elements  of  Astronomy.     A  Text-book  for  High  Schools  and  Academies, 

with  a  Uranography.     By  Professor  Charles  A.  Young.     81.40. 

Uranog^aphy.    30  cents. 
Lessons  in  Astronomy.   Including  Uranography.   By  Professor  Charles 

A.  Young.     Prepared  for  schools  that  desire  a  brief  course  free  from 

mathematics.     81-20. 
An  Introduction  to  Spherical  and  Practical  Astronomy.    By  Dascom 

Greene,  Professor  of  Mathematics  and  Astronomy  in  the  Rensselaer 

Polytechnic  Institute,  Troy,N.Y.    81.50. 
Elements  of  Structural  and  Systematic  Botany.    For  High  Schools  and 

Elementary  College  Courses.    Bj-  Douglas  Houghton  Campbell, 

Professor  of  Botany  in  the  Leland  Stanford  Junior  University.  81.12. 
Elements  of  Botany.    By  J.  Y.  Bergen,  .Jr.,  Instructor  in  Biology  in  the 

English  High  School,  Boston.    81.10. 
Laboratory  Course  in  Physical  Measurements.     By  W.  C.  Sabine, 

Instructor  in  Harvard  University.    81.25. 
Elementary  Meteorology.  By  William  M.  Davis,  Professor  of  Physical 

Geography  in  Harvard  University.   With  maps,  charts,  and  exercises. 

82.50. 
Blaisdell's  Physiologies :  Our  Bodies  and  How  We  Live,  65  cents ;  How  to  Keep 

WeU,  45  cents ;  Child's  Book  of  Health,  30  cents. 
A  Hygienic  Physiology.  For  the  Use  of  Schools.  By  D.  F.  Lincoln,  M.D., 

author  of  "  School  and  Industrial  Hygiene,"  etc.    80  cents. 


Copies  will  be  sent,  postpaid,  to  teachers  for  examina- 
tion on  receipt  of  the  introduction  prices  given  above. 


GINN  &  COMPANY,  Publishers,  Boston,  New  York,  Chicago,  Atlanta. 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DTJE  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 
THIS  »""^gjj^jipED  BELOW 

AN  INITIAL  FINE  OF  25  CENTS 

THIS   BOOK  ON   ^HE  DATt  u  pQURTH 

rv^;r^o^-o  OK  TH%°--"  °- 

OVERDUE. 


922691 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


